SolidCAM 2009 The Leaders in Integrated CAM

Power and Ease of Use - the winning combination

SolidCAM 2009
Milling User Guide

©1995-2009 SolidCAM

WW W. S O L I D C A M . C O M All Rights Reserved.

 SolidCAM 2009
Milling User Guide

©1995-2009 SolidCAM

All Rights Reserved.

 Contents

Contents

1. SolidCAM Basics

1.1 Installing the SolidCAM Software..................................................................................................... 24

1.1.1 System requirements.................................................................................................................. 24

1.1.2 Supported CAD systems.......................................................................................................... 24
1.1.3 SolidCAM Single License installation..................................................................................... 25
1.1.4 SolidCAM Network License Installation............................................................................... 29
1.2 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................... 31

1.3 Starting SolidCAM............................................................................................................................... 31

1.4 SolidCAM Interface............................................................................................................................. 32

1.4.1 SolidCAM Manager................................................................................................................... 32

1.4.2 Coordinate System..................................................................................................................... 35
1.5 Getting Help.......................................................................................................................................... 36

2. CAM-Part

2.1 Starting a new Milling CAM-Part....................................................................................................... 38

2.1.1 New Milling Part dialog box.................................................................................................... 39

2.1.2 The structure of the CAM-Part.............................................................................................. 40
2.1.3 Milling Part Data dialog box.................................................................................................... 40
2.2 Coordinate System................................................................................................................................ 41

2.2.1 Defining the Coordinate System (CoordSys)........................................................................ 41

2.2.2 CoordSys dialog box.................................................................................................................. 42
2.2.3 Defining the Coordinate Systems for 3-axis CNC-machine............................................... 48
2.2.4 Defining the Coordinate Systems for 4-axis CNC-machine............................................... 49
2.2.5 Defining the Coordinate Systems for 5-axis CNC-machine............................................... 50
2.2.6 Coordinate System definition methods.................................................................................. 51
2.2.7 CoordSys Data dialog box........................................................................................................ 52

5
 2.2.8 SolidCAM Coordinate System................................................................................................. 54
2.3 CoordSys Manager............................................................................................................................... 55

2.4 Stock and Target Model....................................................................................................................... 57

2.4.1 Stock model................................................................................................................................ 58

2.4.2 Target model............................................................................................................................... 60
2.4.3 Common controls for Stock model and Target model dialog boxes................................. 60
2.4.4 Associativity of Stock and Target models.............................................................................. 61
2.5 Tool Options......................................................................................................................................... 63

2.6 Mac Options.......................................................................................................................................... 65

2.7 Work Material........................................................................................................................................ 65

2.8 CNC-Controller and Axis Type.......................................................................................................... 66

2.8.1 Axis type...................................................................................................................................... 66

2.9 Default GCode numbers..................................................................................................................... 68

2.10 Part Settings......................................................................................................................................... 70

2.10.1 Units........................................................................................................................................... 70
2.10.2 Interoperational tool movements.......................................................................................... 71
2.10.3 Update Stock calculation........................................................................................................ 72
2.10.4 Synchronization........................................................................................................................ 75
2.10.5 Automatic CAM-Part definition............................................................................................ 76
2.10.6 Machining Process................................................................................................................... 78
2.10.7 Tool path simulation................................................................................................................ 79
2.10.8 GCode generation.................................................................................................................... 80
2.10.9 Template defaults..................................................................................................................... 84
2.10.10 Tool coolant............................................................................................................................ 86
2.10.11 Gouge check........................................................................................................................... 86
2.11 Compressed CAM-Part..................................................................................................................... 87

2.11.1 Compressed CAM-Part file format....................................................................................... 87

2.11.2 Creating a new compressed CAM-Part................................................................................ 87
2.11.3 Converting CAM-Parts to Compressed mode.................................................................... 88
2.11.4 Opening/Closing Compressed CAM-Parts......................................................................... 88

6
 Contents

2.12 Managing CAM-Parts........................................................................................................................ 90

2.13 CAM-Part Documentation............................................................................................................... 97

2.13.1 Documentation Editor............................................................................................................ 97

2.14 Tool sheet documentation................................................................................................................. 99

2.14.1 Capturing the CAM-Part image............................................................................................. 99

2.14.2 Definition of tool sheet parameters................................................................................... 100
2.14.3 The output file........................................................................................................................ 103
2.14.4 Show Last Tool Sheet............................................................................................................ 107
2.15 Milling STL CAM-Part.................................................................................................................... 108

2.15.1 Starting a new Milling-STL CAM-Part............................................................................... 108

2.15.2 Coordinate System definition............................................................................................... 110
2.15.3 Stock model definition.......................................................................................................... 111
2.15.4 Target model definition........................................................................................................ 111
2.16 Support of DriveWorks................................................................................................................... 112

3. Tools

3.1 User-Defined Tool Types.................................................................................................................. 116

3.1.1 End mill..................................................................................................................................... 117

3.1.2 Ball nose mill............................................................................................................................ 118
3.1.3 Bull nose mill............................................................................................................................ 119
3.1.4 Dove tail mill............................................................................................................................ 120
3.1.5 Face mill..................................................................................................................................... 121
3.1.6 Slot mill...................................................................................................................................... 122
3.1.7 Taper mill.................................................................................................................................. 123
3.1.8 Engraving tool.......................................................................................................................... 125
3.1.9 Tap tool..................................................................................................................................... 126
3.1.10 Lollipop mill........................................................................................................................... 127
3.1.11 Thread mill.............................................................................................................................. 129
3.1.12 Thread taper........................................................................................................................... 131
3.1.13 Drill.......................................................................................................................................... 131

7
 3.1.14 Center drill.............................................................................................................................. 132
3.1.15 Spot drill.................................................................................................................................. 134
3.1.16 Chamfer drill........................................................................................................................... 135
3.1.17 Reamer..................................................................................................................................... 136
3.1.18 Bore.......................................................................................................................................... 137
3.1.19 Shaped Tools.......................................................................................................................... 138
3.1.20 Add new tool types................................................................................................................ 138
3.1.21 Tool type options................................................................................................................... 139
3.2 Tool Libraries...................................................................................................................................... 140

3.3 Working with the Part Tool Table.................................................................................................... 141

3.4 Working with the Current Tool Library.......................................................................................... 142

3.5 Managing Tool Libraries.................................................................................................................... 143

3.5.1 Edit Tool Library..................................................................................................................... 143

3.5.2 Create Tool Library.................................................................................................................. 143
3.5.3 Copy Tool Library.................................................................................................................... 144
3.5.4 Delete Tool Library................................................................................................................. 145
3.6 Tool Table dialog box........................................................................................................................ 146

3.6.1 Tools Filter................................................................................................................................ 146

3.6.2 Tool range................................................................................................................................. 147
3.6.3 Show........................................................................................................................................... 148
3.6.4 View........................................................................................................................................... 149
3.6.5 Edit............................................................................................................................................. 149
3.7 Managing tools.................................................................................................................................... 152

3.8 Tool data.............................................................................................................................................. 156

3.8.1 Tool Topology page................................................................................................................. 157

3.8.2 Default Tool Data page........................................................................................................... 161
3.8.3 Tool Message page................................................................................................................... 164
3.8.4 Holder page............................................................................................................................... 165
3.8.5 Tool Coolant page.................................................................................................................... 166
3.8.6 Shape page................................................................................................................................ 167

8
 Contents

3.9 Tool Holding system.......................................................................................................................... 169

3.9.1 Tool Holders dialog box......................................................................................................... 169

3.9.2 Tool Holder Geometry definition......................................................................................... 173
3.9.3 Tool Holder segments............................................................................................................. 173
3.9.4 Using Tool Holders................................................................................................................. 175
3.10 Shaped Tools..................................................................................................................................... 177

3.10.1 Shaped Tools dialog box....................................................................................................... 177

3.10.2 Shaped tool geometry definition......................................................................................... 180
3.10.3 Shaped Tool segments........................................................................................................... 180
3.10.4 Using Shaped tools................................................................................................................ 182
3.11 Feed and Speed defaults.................................................................................................................. 184

4. Geometry

4.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................ 188

4.2 Drilling geometry................................................................................................................................ 189

4.2.1 Defining a Drilling geometry................................................................................................. 189

4.2.2 Editing a Drilling geometry.................................................................................................... 190
4.2.3 Drill Geometry Selection dialog box.................................................................................... 190
4.2.4 Around 4th Axis Drill Geometry Selection dialog box..................................................... 194
4.3 3D Model geometry........................................................................................................................... 197

4.3.1 Defining a 3D Model geometry............................................................................................. 197

4.3.2 Editing a 3D Model geometry............................................................................................... 198
4.4 Wireframe geometry.......................................................................................................................... 199

4.4.1 Defining the Profile/Pocket geometry................................................................................. 199

4.4.2 Defining the Working Area.................................................................................................... 200
4.4.3 Defining the Slot geometry.................................................................................................... 200
4.4.4 Defining the Section geometry.............................................................................................. 201
4.4.5 Defining the Limit geometry.................................................................................................. 202
4.5 Editing chain geometries................................................................................................................... 203

9
 4.5.1 Geometry Name...................................................................................................................... 203
4.5.2 Configurations.......................................................................................................................... 203
4.5.3 Adding a Chain......................................................................................................................... 203
4.5.4 Managing chains....................................................................................................................... 204
4.5.5 Chain direction......................................................................................................................... 205
4.5.6 Selecting single entities............................................................................................................ 205
4.5.7 Automatic selection................................................................................................................. 209
4.5.8 Chain buttons........................................................................................................................... 211
4.5.9 Options...................................................................................................................................... 212
4.5.10 Gap control............................................................................................................................. 212
4.5.11 Add Multi-Chain.................................................................................................................... 213
4.5.12 Mark Open Edges dialog box.............................................................................................. 213
4.6 Chains Selection dialog box.............................................................................................................. 215

4.6.1 Chains Direction dialog box................................................................................................... 217

4.6.2 Chain sorting............................................................................................................................ 218
4.7 Managing geometries......................................................................................................................... 220

4.7.1 Synchronization of the Wireframe geometry...................................................................... 221

4.7.2 Synchronization of the 3D Model geometry...................................................................... 224
4.7.3 Boolean operations.................................................................................................................. 226

5. Operations

5.1 Adding an operation........................................................................................................................... 230

5.2 SolidCAM Operation Interface........................................................................................................ 231

5.2.1 Operation name....................................................................................................................... 233

5.2.2 Template.................................................................................................................................... 235
5.2.3 Info............................................................................................................................................. 245
5.2.4 Operation buttons.................................................................................................................... 245
5.2.5 Calculator.................................................................................................................................. 247
5.2.6 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 250
5.2.7 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 252
5.2.8 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 257

10
 Contents

5.2.9 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 264

5.2.10 Advanced Technology page................................................................................................. 264
5.2.11 Link page................................................................................................................................. 272
5.2.12 Miscellaneous parameters page............................................................................................ 272
5.3 Working with operations................................................................................................................... 275

5.3.1 Add Operation......................................................................................................................... 275

5.3.2 Add Operation from Template.............................................................................................. 276
5.3.3 Add Operations from Process Template............................................................................. 276
5.3.4 Add Machining Process.......................................................................................................... 277
5.3.5 Create Template....................................................................................................................... 277
5.3.6 Edit............................................................................................................................................. 277
5.3.7 Calculate/Calculate All............................................................................................................ 277
5.3.8 GCode/GCode All.................................................................................................................. 277
5.3.9 Calculate & GCode All........................................................................................................... 278
5.3.10 Tool Sheet............................................................................................................................... 278
5.3.11 Simulate................................................................................................................................... 278
5.3.12 File............................................................................................................................................ 278
5.3.13 Operation Group................................................................................................................... 278
5.3.14 Cut/Copy/Paste..................................................................................................................... 279
5.3.15 Rename.................................................................................................................................... 279
5.3.16 Change tool............................................................................................................................. 280
5.3.17 Change tool data.................................................................................................................... 280
5.3.18 Info........................................................................................................................................... 281
5.3.19 Delete/Delete All.................................................................................................................. 281
5.3.20 Suppress/Unsuppress........................................................................................................... 281
5.4 Managing Operations in the SolidCAM Manager tree................................................................. 284

5.4.1 Operation Sequence................................................................................................................ 284

5.4.2 Undo Sequence........................................................................................................................ 284
5.4.3 Split............................................................................................................................................ 284
5.4.4 Expand tree............................................................................................................................... 286
5.4.5 Collapse tree.............................................................................................................................. 286

11
 5.4.6 Show/Hide Tools in tree........................................................................................................ 286
5.4.7 Show/Hide CoordSys in tree................................................................................................. 287
5.4.8 Automatic Sort......................................................................................................................... 288
5.5 Operation Transformations.............................................................................................................. 290

5.5.1 Operation transformations..................................................................................................... 291

5.5.2 Options...................................................................................................................................... 292
5.5.3 Transformations table............................................................................................................. 292
5.5.4 Transformation buttons.......................................................................................................... 293
5.6 Fixture.................................................................................................................................................. 298

5.6.1 Fixture dialog box.................................................................................................................... 299

6. 2.5D Milling

6.1 Profile Operation................................................................................................................................ 302

6.1.1 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 303

6.1.2 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 303
6.1.3 Link page................................................................................................................................... 326
6.2 Face Milling Operation...................................................................................................................... 335

6.2.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 335

6.2.2 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 338
6.2.3 Link page................................................................................................................................... 349
6.3 Contour 3D Operation...................................................................................................................... 351

6.3.1 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 351

6.3.2 Link page................................................................................................................................... 355
6.4 Pocket Operation................................................................................................................................ 357

6.4.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 358

6.4.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 359
6.4.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 360
6.4.4 Link page................................................................................................................................... 381
6.5 Pocket Recognition Operation......................................................................................................... 397

6.5.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 397

12
 Contents

6.5.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 403

6.5.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 404
6.5.4 Link page................................................................................................................................... 408
6.6 Drilling Operation.............................................................................................................................. 409

6.6.1 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 409

6.6.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 411
6.6.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 412
6.7 Drill Recognition Operation............................................................................................................. 437

6.7.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 437

6.7.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 442
6.7.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 446
6.8 Thread Milling Operation................................................................................................................. 447

6.8.1 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 447

6.8.2 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 448
6.8.3 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 449
6.8.4 Link page................................................................................................................................... 452
6.9 Slot Operation..................................................................................................................................... 453

6.9.1 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 454

6.9.2 Pre-drilling geometry generation........................................................................................... 461
6.10 T-Slot Operation............................................................................................................................... 463

6.10.1 Tool page................................................................................................................................. 464

6.10.2 Technology page.................................................................................................................... 465
6.10.3 Link page................................................................................................................................. 470
6.11 Translated Surface Operation......................................................................................................... 471

6.11.1 Technology page.................................................................................................................... 471

6.11.2 Link page................................................................................................................................. 482

7. 3D Milling

7.1 3D Milling Operation......................................................................................................................... 484

7.1.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 484

13
 7.1.2 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 497
7.1.3 Roughing................................................................................................................................... 498
7.1.4 Hatch roughing......................................................................................................................... 513
7.1.5 Contour roughing.................................................................................................................... 513
7.1.6 Plunging pattern....................................................................................................................... 513
7.1.7 Semi-Finish/Finish.................................................................................................................. 514
7.1.8 Semi-Finish/Finish strategies................................................................................................. 520
7.1.9 Linear Finish strategy.............................................................................................................. 520
7.1.10 Offset Cutting Finish strategy............................................................................................. 524
7.1.11 Spiral finish strategy.............................................................................................................. 527
7.1.12 Circular Pocket finish strategy............................................................................................. 531
7.1.13 Constant Z Finish Strategy................................................................................................... 533
7.1.14 Constant Step over strategy................................................................................................. 540
7.1.15 Pencil milling.......................................................................................................................... 545
7.1.16 Tolerance page........................................................................................................................ 549
7.2 3D Engraving Operation.................................................................................................................. 551

7.2.1 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 551

7.2.2 Tolerance page.......................................................................................................................... 554
7.3 3D Drilling Operation....................................................................................................................... 555

7.3.1 Geometry page......................................................................................................................... 555

7.3.2 Tool page................................................................................................................................... 556
7.3.3 Levels page................................................................................................................................ 557
7.3.4 Technology page...................................................................................................................... 557

8. Machining Processes

8.1 Introduction & Basic concepts......................................................................................................... 560

8.1.1 Operation templates................................................................................................................ 560

8.1.2 Parameters & Expressions...................................................................................................... 561
8.1.3 Default sets............................................................................................................................... 562
8.1.4 Machining Process Table........................................................................................................ 562
8.2 Creating Machining Processes.......................................................................................................... 563

14
 Contents

8.3 Defining Machining Process Table.................................................................................................. 564

8.3.1 Adding MAC file(s).................................................................................................................. 564

8.4 Machining Process Table Manager.................................................................................................. 566

8.4.1 Managing Machining Process Tables.................................................................................... 567

8.4.2 Machining Process Group Types........................................................................................... 569
8.5 Managing Machining Processes........................................................................................................ 571

8.6 Machining Process Define Manager................................................................................................ 572

8.6.1 Operation Templates page...................................................................................................... 572

8.6.2 Define Operation Template................................................................................................... 572
8.6.3 Managing Operation Templates............................................................................................ 573
8.6.4 Parametric field menu.............................................................................................................. 575
8.6.5 Default Sets page..................................................................................................................... 576
8.6.6 Parameters & Expressions Tables......................................................................................... 577
8.6.7 Add new parameter................................................................................................................. 579
8.6.8 Variables and expressions....................................................................................................... 579
8.6.9 Parametric tool definition....................................................................................................... 584
8.7 Using the Machining Processes........................................................................................................ 586

8.8 Inserting the Machining Process...................................................................................................... 587

8.8.1 Choosing the tool..................................................................................................................... 589

8.9 Machining Process Insert Manager.................................................................................................. 590

8.9.1 Operation Templates Page..................................................................................................... 590

8.9.2 Default Sets Page..................................................................................................................... 591
8.9.3 Parameters Table...................................................................................................................... 592
8.9.4 Operation Points...................................................................................................................... 592
8.9.5 Parameters definition............................................................................................................... 592

9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining (AFRM)

9.1 Introduction and Basic Concepts..................................................................................................... 596

9.2 Preparation to Holes Recognition.................................................................................................... 598

15
 9.2.1 Definition of Coordinate Systems........................................................................................ 598
9.2.2 Target model............................................................................................................................. 598
9.3 Start Holes Recognition..................................................................................................................... 599

9.4 Holes Recognition User Interface.................................................................................................... 600

9.4.1 Holes Recognition Manager................................................................................................... 600

9.4.2 Holes Recognition Toolbar.................................................................................................... 601
9.5 Hole Feature Model............................................................................................................................ 603

9.5.1 Cylindrical Hole Feature segment.......................................................................................... 604

9.5.2 Cone Hole Feature segment................................................................................................... 604
9.5.3 Chamfer Hole Feature segment............................................................................................. 605
9.5.4 Planar Hole Feature segment................................................................................................. 605
9.5.5 Torus Hole Feature segment.................................................................................................. 605
9.5.6 Sphere Hole Feature segment................................................................................................ 606
9.5.7 Compound Holes processing................................................................................................. 606
9.5.8 Disconnected Holes processing............................................................................................. 607
9.5.9 Reaming recognition................................................................................................................ 607
9.5.10 Hole Feature Shapes and Groups....................................................................................... 607
9.5.11 Hole Features page................................................................................................................ 608
9.6 Preparing Hole Features for machining.......................................................................................... 613

9.6.1 Undercut processing................................................................................................................ 613

9.6.2 Undercut substitution.............................................................................................................. 614
9.6.3 Segments Union....................................................................................................................... 617
9.6.4 Machinable Hole Features...................................................................................................... 619
9.6.5 Machinable Hole Feature conversion................................................................................... 625
9.6.6 Machinable Hole Features page............................................................................................. 633
9.7 Feature Sets.......................................................................................................................................... 642

9.7.1 Creating Feature Sets............................................................................................................... 642

9.7.2 Assigning Hole Features to Feature Sets.............................................................................. 642
9.7.3 Automatic CoordSys Positions definition............................................................................ 643
9.7.4 Feature Sets page...................................................................................................................... 645
9.7.5 Compatible/Incompatible Hole features............................................................................. 645

16
 Contents

9.7.6 Operating Feature Sets............................................................................................................ 646

9.7.7 Defining the CoordSys Position origin location for the Feature Set............................... 647
9.8 Technology.......................................................................................................................................... 649

9.8.1 Choosing a Technological Solution....................................................................................... 649

9.8.2 Choosing the tool..................................................................................................................... 650
9.8.3 Technology Page...................................................................................................................... 657
9.8.4 Managing Technology............................................................................................................. 658
9.9 Generating Operations...................................................................................................................... 661

9.10 Technology Database....................................................................................................................... 662

9.10.1 Global and Local Technology databases............................................................................ 663

9.10.2 Technology Database interface............................................................................................ 664
9.10.3 Configurations page............................................................................................................... 664
9.10.4 Current Configuration........................................................................................................... 665
9.10.5 Solutions page........................................................................................................................ 666
9.10.6 Conditions............................................................................................................................... 667
9.10.7 Variables.................................................................................................................................. 670
9.10.8 Defining a new Technological Solution............................................................................. 673
9.10.9 Holes Recognition Functions.............................................................................................. 674
9.11 Holes Recognition Settings............................................................................................................. 676

9.11.1 System settings....................................................................................................................... 676

9.11.2 Part settings............................................................................................................................. 679

10. Simulation

10.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 682

10.1.1 Simulation control panel....................................................................................................... 682

10.1.2 Simulation modes................................................................................................................... 684
10.1.3 Simulation controls................................................................................................................ 684
10.2 2D simulation mode......................................................................................................................... 685

10.2.1 Simulation toolbar.................................................................................................................. 685

10.2.2 Simulation control panel....................................................................................................... 685

17
10.3 VerifyPlus simulation mode............................................................................................................ 687

10.3.1 Simulation toolbar.................................................................................................................. 687

10.3.2 Buttons available in the Setup mode................................................................................... 688
10.3.3 Buttons available in the Simulation mode.......................................................................... 690
10.4 Host CAD simulation mode........................................................................................................... 691

10.5 3D simulation mode......................................................................................................................... 692

10.5.1 Simulation toolbar.................................................................................................................. 692

10.5.2 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................... 693
10.6 SolidVerify simulation mode........................................................................................................... 695

10.6.1 Simulation control panel........................................................................................................695

10.6.2 Simulation toolbar.................................................................................................................. 696
10.6.3 Selection mode....................................................................................................................... 700
10.6.4 Measurement.......................................................................................................................... 701
10.6.5 Updated Stock model............................................................................................................ 701
10.6.6 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................... 703
10.7 SolidVerify for 3D simulation mode............................................................................................. 710

10.7.1 Simulation control panel........................................................................................................711

10.7.2 Rendering of the simulation model.................................................................................... 711
10.7.3 Simulation toolbar.................................................................................................................. 713
10.7.4 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................... 713
10.8 Rest Material simulation mode....................................................................................................... 714

10.9 RapidVerify simulation mode......................................................................................................... 715

10.9.1 RapidVerify control panel..................................................................................................... 715

10.9.2 Updated Stock Model............................................................................................................ 716
10.9.3 Simulation control panel........................................................................................................716
10.9.4 Simulation toolbar.................................................................................................................. 717
10.9.5 Simulation menu.....................................................................................................................718
10.10 Machine Simulation........................................................................................................................ 719

10.10.1 Simulation menu.................................................................................................................. 720

10.10.2 Simulation windows............................................................................................................ 732

18
 Contents

10.10.3 Simulation toolbars.............................................................................................................. 741

10.10.4 CNC-machine definition parameters................................................................................ 743
10.10.5 CNC-machine model definition........................................................................................ 760

12. SolidCAM Settings

12.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 800

12.2 User Directories settings................................................................................................................. 801

12.2.1 User Directory for SolidCAM Parts................................................................................... 801

12.2.2 User Directory for SolidCAM Tables................................................................................. 801
12.2.3 Excel file for Threading tables............................................................................................. 801
12.3 Default CNC-controller settings.................................................................................................... 802

12.3.1 Post-processor files directory............................................................................................... 802

12.3.2 CNC-controllers..................................................................................................................... 802
12.4 Units settings..................................................................................................................................... 803

12.4.1 Metric/Inch............................................................................................................................ 803

12.4.2 Approximation....................................................................................................................... 803
12.4.3 Chain selection....................................................................................................................... 804
12.4.4 Fillet size for last cut.............................................................................................................. 805
12.4.5 Tool Start and Clearance Levels.......................................................................................... 805
12.5 Synchronization settings.................................................................................................................. 806

12.5.1 Synchronization of CAM geometry with design model.................................................. 806

12.5.2 Synchronization tolerance.................................................................................................... 807
12.5.3 Synchronization of design model with original model.................................................... 807
12.5.4 Synchronization when design model configuration changes.......................................... 807
12.6 Compressed CAM-Part settings..................................................................................................... 808

12.7 Tool Settings...................................................................................................................................... 810

12.7.1 Update Part Tool Table according to Machine Tool Table............................................. 810
12.7.2 Print in documentation – Only used tools......................................................................... 810
12.7.3 Show in SolidCAM Manager................................................................................................ 810
12.7.4 Import tools............................................................................................................................ 811

19
 12.7.5 Set Tool as Permanent when user changes the tool number.......................................... 811
12.8 Color settings.................................................................................................................................... 812

12.9 Default Geometry Names............................................................................................................... 814

12.10 Interoperational tool movements................................................................................................ 815

12.11 AutoSave settings........................................................................................................................... 816

12.12 Automatic CAM-Part definition.................................................................................................. 817

12.12.1 Automatic Stock model definition.................................................................................... 817

12.12.2 Automatic Target model definition................................................................................... 818
12.12.3 Definition of Coordinate System...................................................................................... 818
12.13 Tool path simulation settings........................................................................................................ 819

12.14 Machine simulation settings.......................................................................................................... 820

12.14.1 Directory for Machine simulation definition................................................................... 820

12.14.2 Tool path coordinates......................................................................................................... 820
12.14.3 Background........................................................................................................................... 820
12.14.4 Enable collision control...................................................................................................... 822
12.14.5 Solid verification.................................................................................................................. 822
12.14.6 Environment........................................................................................................................ 823
12.15 DNC settings.................................................................................................................................. 823

12.16 Editors settings............................................................................................................................... 824

12.17 External program settings............................................................................................................. 825

12.18 Machining Process settings........................................................................................................... 826

12.18.1 On MP insertion (for milling only)................................................................................... 826

12.18.2 Operation name in SolidCAM Manager.......................................................................... 826
12.18.3 Update extra parameters on CNC-controller change.................................................... 826
12.19 User interface settings.................................................................................................................... 827

12.20 CoordSys settings........................................................................................................................... 828

12.21 GCode Generation......................................................................................................................... 829

12.22 Tool search...................................................................................................................................... 833

20
 Contents

12.23 Internal Post-processor................................................................................................................. 833

12.24 SolidCAM Manager settings......................................................................................................... 834

12.25 Template defaults........................................................................................................................... 835

12.26 Miscellaneous settings.................................................................................................................... 835

12.27 Tool coolant.................................................................................................................................... 836

12.28 Gouge check................................................................................................................................... 836

11. GCode

11.1 Generate............................................................................................................................................. 839

11.2 List......................................................................................................................................................840

11.3 Copy...................................................................................................................................................840

11.4 Print....................................................................................................................................................840

Appendix.................................................................................................................................................... 841

Index...........................................................................................................................................................845

21
22
SolidCAM
Basics 1
SolidCAM is a powerful CAM product that has been designed
especially for the shop floor. SolidCAM supports the complete
range of major manufacturing applications including 2.5D
Milling, 3D Milling, Turning, Turning with Driven tools and Wire
EDM, in one integrated solution. Machining operations can
be defined on 2D Design Drawings as well as on 3D Solid
and Surface Models. SolidCAM also has a powerful general
post-processor tool that enables the easy customization of
the GCode file output to various types of CNC-controllers.
This chapter discusses some basic concepts and terminology
used throughout SolidCAM.

 Installing SolidCAM
 Starting SolidCAM
 SolidCAM Basic Concepts
 SolidCAM Interface
 Getting Help
1.1 Installing the SolidCAM Software

1.1.1 System requirements

Supported Operating Systems

Microsoft® Windows Vista x32/x64 Business and Ultimate editions with Service
Pack 1, Microsoft® Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 or 3, Microsoft®
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition;

CPU

Intel® Pentium™, Intel® Xeon™, Intel® Core™, Intel® Core™2 Duo, Intel® Core™2
Quad, AMD® Athlon™, AMD Athlon™ X2 Dual-Core - class processor (emphasized
processors are recommended);

RAM

2 GB RAM or more (4 GB or more for x64 operating system is recommended for large
CAM-Parts machining);

Video

A OpenGL workstation graphics card (512 MB RAM recommended) and latest driver;

Other

• Mouse or other pointing device;

• CD drive;
• Internet Explorer version 6 if you are using the SolidCAM Online Help;
• For viewing the What’s New manual, Adobe Acrobat version 9 or higher is
recommended.

1.1.2 Supported CAD systems

The following CAD systems are supported by SolidCAM 2009:

• SolidWorks® 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009;

SolidWorks® 64-bit version is supported.

24
 1. SolidCAM Basics

• Autodesk® Inventor™ 2008, 2009;

• Bentley Microstation/J Modeler;

• Autodesk® Mechanical Desktop 2005;

• Autodesk® AutoCAD® 2005.

1.1.3 SolidCAM Single License installation

1. Insert the SolidCAM Installation CD into the computer CD drive;

the installation starts automatically.

You can also start the installation by running the Setup.exe file.
This file is located in the SolidCAMXXXX/Disk1 folder on the
SolidCAM Installation CD (XXXX stands for the current version of
SolidCAM).

2. The Choose Setup Language dialog box is displayed.

Choose English.

When you have to install a localized version of SolidCAM, choose

the appropriate language from the combo box.

The installation procedure is continued.

3. The following message is displayed.

Close all running applications and confirm the message with the OK button.

25
4. The Installing SolidCAM dialog box is displayed. Click on the Next button.

5. The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box enables you to choose the destination folder for SolidCAM.
You have to either confirm the default destination folder (C:\Program Files\
SolidCAMXXXX) with the Next button or choose other destination folder
with the Browse button and confirm it with the Next button.

6. The Select Components dialog box is displayed.

Choose the necessary SolidCAM components and confirm your choice with
the Next button.

26
 1. SolidCAM Basics

Make a note that Program Files component cannot be cleared.

7. The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed.

Confirm the default Program Folder name SolidCAMXXXX with the Next
button.

SolidCAM installation is continued.

8. When the installation is finished, the Choose Language dialog box is

displayed.

Choose English and click on the OK button.

When you install a localized version of SolidCAM, choose the ap-

propriate language from the combo box.

9. SolidCAM installs drivers for the hardware key. When the drivers are installed,
the following message is displayed.

Click on the OK button.

27
10. The Connection to CAD system dialog box is displayed. This dialog box
displays all CAD systems that can be used by SolidCAM.

Choose the appropriate Host CAD systems for SolidCAM.

When SolidCAM has found only one CAD system available for
connection, this dialog box is not displayed.

Click on the Next button.

SolidCAM is connected to the defined CAD systems. The following message

is displayed.

Click on the OK button.

11. The following dialog box is displayed.

Click on the Finish button.

The installation is finished.

28
 1. SolidCAM Basics

1.1.4 SolidCAM Network License Installation

SolidCAM enables you to install several SolidCAM copies through your network and use network
licensing to manage them. In this case, the SolidCAM Network hardware key has to be connected
to the server. The License Manager has to be installed on the network server computer, which
distributes SolidCAM Licenses to client computers. When the SolidCAM software runs on a client
computer, it obtains the necessary license from the server.
SolidCAM Network
hardware key

SolidCAM
License Server

SolidCAM Licenses

SolidCAM Client Computers

Setting up the SolidCAM License Server

SolidCAM network licensing supports TCP/IP network protocol.

1. SolidCAM Network hardware keys are available in two configurations: for

USB port or for LPT port. Connect your SolidCAM Network hardware key
to the correct port of your server.

2. Install SolidCAM software on the server as explained in topic 1.1.3. During

the installation, the necessary driver for the hardware key is automatically
installed.

3. After the SolidCAM installation, the server must be restarted.

4. Install the License Manager software by running Lmsetup.exe application

located in the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Util folder.

5. Check the IP address of the server in the network by clicking on the Start
button located at the Windows taskbar and then choosing the Command
Prompt item from the All Programs/Accessories submenu. The Command
Prompt window is displayed.

29
 6. Type the ipconfig command and confirm it with the Enter key. The IP address
of the server will be displayed.

Setting SolidCAM licenses on client computers

1. Install SolidCAM on client computer as described in topic 1.1.3.

2. Copy the NethaspTCPIP.ini file located in the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Util folder to

the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Solidcam folder.

3. Rename the copied file from NethaspTCPIP.ini to Nethasp.ini.

4. Open the renamed Nethasp.ini file in the Notepad editor. The

[NH_TCPIP] section in this file contains the following string:
NH_SERVER_ADDR = XX.XX.XX.XX; This parameter should define the IP
address of the License Server. Type the IP address of the server instead of
XX.XX.XX.XX, for example: 72.14.207.99. Save the Nethasp.ini file and close
the Notepad application.

After the License Manager is installed on the SolidCAM Licensing server and SolidCAM Licenses
are configured on each client computer, SolidCAM software can be run.

30
 1. SolidCAM Basics

1.2 Basic Concepts

Every manufacturing project in SolidCAM contains the following data:

• CAM-Part

The CAM-Part defines the general data of the workpiece, including the model name,
the Coordinate System, tool options, CNC-controller, etc.

• Geometry

By selecting Edges, Curves, Surfaces or Solids, define what and where you are going to
machine. This geometry is associated with the native SolidWorks model.

• Operation

An Operation is a single machining step in SolidCAM. Technology, Tool parameters

and Strategies are defined in the Operation. In short, Operation means how you want
to machine.

1.3 Starting SolidCAM

To start SolidCAM, click on the SolidCAM field in the main menu of SolidWorks and choose
Milling from the New submenu.

SolidCAM is started.

31
1.4 SolidCAM Interface

Coordinate System SolidWorks window

CAM Views
toolbar

SolidCAM
Manager

Machining
Solid model

1.4.1 SolidCAM Manager

After the CAM-Part is loaded, the SolidCAM Manager is displayed in the left part of the screen.
CAM-Part header

Tool header

Machining Process
header

Geometries header

Operations header
} Operations

The SolidCAM Manager tree is the main interface feature of SolidCAM. It displays complete
information about the CAM-Part and contains the following headers:
• CAM-Part header

This header displays the name of the current SolidCAM CAM-Part. By right-clicking
on it, you can display the menu to manage your CAM-Parts. The CoordSys Manager,
Stock, Target, and Settings subheaders are located under the CAM-Part header.

Double-clicking on this header displays the Milling Part Data dialog box.
For more information on CAM-Parts, please refer to Chapter 2.

32
 1. SolidCAM Basics

• Tool header

This header displays the name of the current Tool Table. By right-clicking on it, you can
activate the menu to manage the Tool Libraries.
Double-clicking on this header displays the Part Tool Table.

For more information on Tools, please refer to Chapter 3.

• Machining Process header

This header displays the name of the current Machining Process Table. By right-
clicking on it, you can activate the menu to manage the MP Tables.
Double-clicking on this header displays the Current Machining Process Table.

For more information on Machining Processes, please refer to Chapter 8.

• Geometries header

This header displays all SolidCAM geometries not used in the operations. You can view
the list of these geometries by clicking on the “+” icon near the Geometries header.
You can display the geometries managing menu by right-clicking on the Geometries
header. You can also open the relevant menu by right-clicking on each geometry name.
Double-clicking on a geometry name displays the selected geometry.

For more information on Geometries, please refer to Chapter 4.

• Operations header

This header shows you all the SolidCAM operations defined for the current CAM-Part.
The operations managing menu is available by right-clicking on the Operations header.
You can also open the relevant menu by right-clicking on each operation name.
Double-clicking on an operation name enables you to edit the operation parameters in
the operation dialog box.

For more information on operations, please refer to Chapter 5.

Item search in SolidCAM Manager

The SolidCAM Manager search system works similarly

to a regular Windows searching functionality. To activate
it, click anywhere in the SolidCAM Manager area and
press Ctrl+F. The Find dialog box is displayed, and you
can set the parameters for searching.

33
Look in

You may look for the required items in the whole CAM-Part or only in its operations,
coordinate systems or geometries taken separately.
Whole items only

Select this check box if you want to check the availability of whole items as opposed
to partial output.
Match case

This check box enables you to determine the case sensitivity of the search.
Direction

You may also decide whether the search results will be displayed from bottom to top
or from top to bottom of the SolidCAM Manager tree.
Find next

Click this button if you want to view the search results one by one.
Find all

Click this button if you prefer to have all of the search results to be displayed
simultaneously.
General

The whole line where the sought-for word appears is highlighted in the SolidCAM
Managertree. When you close the Find dialog box, these lines remain highlighted.

34
 1. SolidCAM Basics

1.4.2 Coordinate System

The Coordinate System is shown on the model. It defines the Coordinate System
origin for all the machining operations of the CAM-Part.

For more information on Coordinate Systems, see topic 2.2.

35
1.5 Getting Help

SolidCAM Online Help enables you to get online help about various options in SolidCAM. The Help
is installed in the Documentation folder after the standard installation procedure.

The Help is available via the SolidWorks Help menu. Click on the Help item in the main menu of
SolidWorks and choose the SolidCAM Help Topics, Milling items from the submenu.

SolidCAM Help is fully context-sensitive. You can get a Help topic for each SolidCAM dialog box by
pressing the F1 key. To get information about a specific dialog box area like field or button, click on
the question mark in the upper-right corner of the dialog box and then click on the field or button
you need. The Online Help is displayed and then the appropriate topic is explained.

The Machining Portfolio is also available in the Documentation folder. This document provides an
overview of various features of SolidCAM.

36
CAM-Part 2
At the stage of the CAM-Part definition, you have to specify all the
information relevant to the machining project or workpiece you want to
manufacture. The CAM-Part folder includes all machining geometries,
operation definitions and generated GCode files.
The parameters and values defined at the CAM-Part level, such as
Coordinate System, Milling levels and Tools will serve as default values
for separate machining operations. All specified parameters can be
changed in single operations.

 Starting a new Milling CAM-Part

 Managing CAM-Parts
 Defining the Coordinate System
 Defining the Stock model
 Defining the Target model
 CAM-Part Documentation
2.1 Starting a new Milling CAM-Part

After the SolidWorks model is loaded, do the following:

1. Click on the SolidCAM item in the SolidWorks menu. The SolidCAM main
menu is displayed.

2. Choose the New option from the menu to define a new CAM-Part.

3. Choose the Milling type of new CAM-Part from the submenu.

4. The New Milling Part dialog box is displayed.

When you start to program a CAM-Part, you have to decide on:

• What type of CNC-machine you are going to use (3-, 4- or 5-axis);

• Where you are going to clamp this part;

• Where your Coordinate System positions are located (on a 4- or

5-axis CNC-machine, every clamping position is represented by
the Coordinate System to which all additional positionings are
related).

38
 2. CAM-Part

2.1.1 New Milling Part dialog box

When you create a new CAM-Part, you have to enter a name for the CAM-Part and for the model
that contains the CAM-Part’s geometry.
• Directory

In this field, you specify the location

of the CAM-Part. The default
directory is the SolidCAM user
directory (defined in the SolidCAM
Settings). You can enter the path or
use the Browse button to define the
location.

The Use Model file directory option

enables you to automatically create
CAM-Parts in the same folder where
the original CAD model is located.

• Name

In this field, you enter the name for the CAM-Part. You can give any name to identify
your machining project. By default, the name of the design model is used.

• Model name

This field shows the name and the location of the SolidWorks design model that you are
using for the CAM-Part definition. The default name is that of the active SolidWorks
document. With the Browse button, you can choose any other SolidWorks document
to define the CAM-Part. The chosen document is loaded into SolidWorks.

Every time the CAM-Part is opened, SolidCAM automatically checks the

correspondence of the dates of the CAM-Part and the original SolidWorks
design model. When the date of the original SolidWorks model is later than
the date of the CAM-Part creation, this means that the SolidWorks original
model has been updated. You can then replace the SolidWorks design model
on which the CAM-Part is based with the updated SolidWorks design model.

After the Directory, Name and Model name fields are defined, click on the OK button to
confirm the CAM-Part creation. The CAM-Part is defined and its structure is created.
The Milling Part Data dialog box (see topic 2.1.3) is displayed.

39
2.1.2 The structure of the CAM-Part
Cavity.prt
The Cavity CAM-Part includes the following data:
Cavity
• The Cavity.prt file located in the SolidCAM User directory.
Cavity.SLDASM

• The Cavity subdirectory containing all the data generated CAM.SLDPRT

for the CAM-Part. DesignModel.SLDPRT

SolidCAM copies the original SolidWorks model to the Cavity subdirectory and creates
a SolidWorks assembly that has the same name as the CAM-Part (Cavity.sldasm). There are two
components in this assembly:

• DesignModel.sldprt – a copy of the SolidWorks model file.

• CAM.sldprt – a file that contains SolidCAM Coordinate Systems and geometry data.

SolidCAM CAM-Part uses the assembly environment of SolidWorks. This

enables you to create auxiliary geometries (e.g. sketches) without making
changes in the original design model. You can also insert some additional
components into the assembly file such as stock model, CNC-machine
table, clamping and other tooling elements.

2.1.3 Milling Part Data dialog box

In this dialog box, you specify all the information relevant to the machining
project or workpiece you want to manufacture. The parameters and
values defined at the CAM-Part level will later serve as default values for
machining levels, etc. Naturally, all parameters can be changed in single
machining operations.

40
 2. CAM-Part

2.2 Coordinate System

The Coordinate System position defines the

origin for all machining operations of the
CAM-Part. You can create multiple CoordSys Y-direction
positions and specify in each machining step
X-direction
which CoordSys you want to use for the
operation. The CAM-Part definition cannot
be completed if the Coordinate System is not
defined.

The Coordinate System can be defined

directly on the solid model. You can define
its origin location and axes orientation by
selecting the model elements or by choosing
the already defined SolidWorks Coordinate Coordinate System
Origin
Systems.

2.2.1 Defining the Coordinate System (CoordSys)

Click on the Define button in the in the Coordinate System area of the Milling Part
Data dialog box.

If you define the first Coordinate System in the current CAM-Part, the CoordSys
dialog box (see topic 2.2.2) is displayed. This dialog box enables you to define the
Coordinate Systems.

If the CoordSys that you define is not the first, the CoordSys Manager dialog box
(see topic 2.3) is displayed. This dialog box enables you to manage your Coordinate
Systems.

You can also define new Coordinate Systems at the later stages of operation
definition by clicking on the CoordSys button available in the Geometry
page of the operation dialog box (see topic 5.2.6).

41
2.2.2 CoordSys dialog box

This dialog box enables you to define a new 3-, 4-, and 5-axis Coordinate
System directly on the solid model. The newly created Coordinate System
automatically receives the next sequential number.

• Mac CoordSys number – this number corresponds with the

built-in controller functions (for example, G54, G55, etc. in the
Fanuc type controllers). It can be used for different clamping
positions (Machine Coordinate Systems) in different operations
on the CAM-Part.

• Position – this number defines the sequential number of

the CoordSys. For each Machine Coordinate System (Mac
CoordSys), several Positions are defined for different
positionings; each such Position is related to the Machine
CoordSys.

• In multi-sided machining on 4- and 5-axis CNC-

machines, the SolidCAM post-processor uses the
specific controller Macro language to create the
positioning relative to the Machine Coordinate
System.

• For Machine Coordinate System, you have to

define three points: the Origin, the X-direction, and
the Y-direction. For the related position (e.g. for
4-axis CNC-machine), you have to define only the
Origin and a point on the plane to rotate to; the
rotation axis is defined by the type of the 4-axis
(_4th_axes_around = X/Y in the MAC file).

SolidCAM enables you to define the Coordinate System by one of the following methods:

Select face

When you define the Coordinate System by selecting a face, the box surrounding the model is
calculated. For this box, SolidCAM generates a number of sketch points to facilitate the CoordSys
definition. The points are located in the box corners, in the middle of each edge and in the centers
of the planes (in the intersection point of the diagonals).

42
 2. CAM-Part

The face can be one of the following:

• Planar face

The Z-axis of the Coordinate System is normal to the selected face.

• Cylindrical/Conical face

The Z-axis of the Coordinate System is parallel to the axis of revolution of the
specified cylindrical/conical face.

Pick face

Selecting this check box enables you to pick a face on the model for the Coordinate
System definition. The selected model face is highlighted.

Change to opposite/Change to original

This button enables you to reverse the direction of the Z-axis of the Coordinate
System.

43
Place CoordSys origin to:
• Corner of model box

The upper plane of the model box is

parallel to the XY-plane of the defined
CoordSys. The CoordSys is located in
the corner of the model box with the
following coordinates (XMIN, YMIN, ZMAX).

CoordSys
Origin

• Center of revolution face

The origin is located at the intersection of the

rotation axis of the part and the face of the model CoordSys
box with the maximal Z-coordinate (the Z-axis is Origin
directed along the rotation axis).

Z
• Top center of model box

The CoordSys origin is placed in the center

of the upper plane of the model, and the
Z-axis of the CoordSys is normal to the
selected face.

CoordSys
Origin

• Corner box projection on the Z-level of the face

The CoordSys origin is placed in the corner

of the generated model box on the same
Z-level with the selected face, and the Z-axis
of the CoordSys is normal to the selected
face.

CoordSys
Origin

44
 2. CAM-Part

Define

This option enables you to define the CoordSys origin and axes by
selecting points.
• Origin

Select the origin point on the graphic screen.

• X-direction

Select a point relative to the origin that defines the X-axis.

• Y-direction

Select a point that defines the plane (the Y-axis is 90 degrees to the X-axis; the selected
point defines the plane).

After a point has been selected, the next button is automatically activated.
If you miss the selection, you can at any time click the required button and
continue automatically to the next button.

Select Coordinate System

SolidCAM enables you to choose the Coordinate System defined in the

CAD model file as the SolidCAM Coordinate System.

45
Normal to current view

This option enables you to define the Coordinate System with the Z-axis
normal to the model view you are facing on your screen. You may bring
the model to the desired orientation by using the CAM Views toolbar or
just rotate it in an arbitrary fashion; then click on the Capture current
view CoordSys button, and the Coordinate System will be generated
relative to the model view you are using. The CoordSys origin will lie in
the origin of the SolidWorks Coordinate System, and the Z-axis will be
directed normally to the chosen view of the model.

You may change the location of the CoordSys Y-axis of the

using the placing options of the Select face Normal to current view
CoordSys
mode, and then choose the Normal to current
view mode to adjust the directions of the
axes to the current model view.

Editing the Coordinate System

After the face has been selected, you can

edit the Coordinate System location by
picking entities on the model and change the
directions of its axes.
X-axis of the
Normal to current view
Pick CoordSys

• Pick origin

This option enables you to define a new location for the

CoordSys origin. The direction of the axes is not changed.

• Pick XY origin

This option enables you to define a new location for the CoordSys origin in the XY-
plane by picking a point on the model. The Z-level of the CoordSys origin and the
directions of the axes remain the same.

• Pick X-direction

This option enables you to choose a new direction for the X-axis by picking a point
on the model.

46
 2. CAM-Part

• Pick Y-direction

This option enables you to choose a new direction for the Y-axis by picking a point on
the model.

Flip
• Flip X&Y

Click on this button to rotate the Z-axis 180 degrees by

mutual replacing of the X- and Y-axes (X becomes Y, and
Y becomes X).
• Flip around X

This button rotates the CoordSys 90 degrees around the

X-axis.
• Flip around Y

This button rotates the CoordSys 90 degrees around the Y-axis.

• Flip around Z

This button rotates the defined CoordSys 90 degrees around the Z-axis.

Delta

This option enables you to move the CoordSys origin in the

X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates relative to the point in which it was
previously defined.

Rotation around axis

This option enables you to rotate the defined CoordSys a

given number of degrees around the X-, Y- and Z-axes, but
the rotation can only be defined around each axis separately.
You cannot rotate the CoordSys around more than one axis
simultaneously.

47
2.2.3 Defining the Coordinate Systems for 3-axis CNC-machine
During the CoordSys definition for 3-axis CNC-machine, you have to define three points with the
CoordSys dialog box.

• Origin – Select the origin point (1st point) on the graphic screen.
• X-direction – Select a point (2nd point) relative to the origin that defines the X-axis.
• Y-direction – Select a point (3rd point) to finish the definition of the XY-plane.

Use the mouse to define the origin, X- and Y-direction. You do not have to click on the X-direction or
the Y-direction button in the CoordSys dialog box, they are automatically selected after you define
a point.

Y-direction
(third point) X-direction
(second point)

CoordSys origin
(first point)

Coordinate System definition Clamping

For the next Coordinate System, you also have to define three points.

Y-direction X-direction
(third point) (second point)

CoordSys origin
(first point)

Coordinate System definition Clamping

SolidCAM automatically assigns a new Position number to each Coordinate System. You can change
the Mac CoordSys number for a new clamping (Machine Coordinate System).

48
 2. CAM-Part

2.2.4 Defining the Coordinate Systems for 4-axis CNC-machine

When you define the Machine Coordinate System (Mac CoordSys) for the 4-axis CNC-machine,
you have to define three points with the CoordSys dialog box:
• Origin – Select the origin point (1st point) on the graphic screen.
• X-direction – Select a point (2nd point) relative to the origin that defines the X-axis.
• Y-direction – Select a point (3rd point) to finish the definition of the XY-plane.

Use the mouse to define the origin, X- and Y-direction. You do not have to click on the X-direction or
the Y-direction button in the CoordSys dialog box, they are automatically selected after you define
a point.
Y-direction
(third point) X-direction
(second point)

CoordSys origin
(first point)
Coordinate System definition Clamping
To add a new Position, you have to define only two points:
• The point for the CoordSys origin.
• The point on the plane to rotate to. If the rotation axis is X, you have to define the
Y-direction. If the rotation axis is Y, you have to define the X-direction.
X-direction
(determined
Y-direction automatically)
(second point)

CoordSys origin
(first point)
Coordinate System definition Clamping

SolidCAM automatically assigns the new Position number to each CoordSys. You can change the
Mac CoordSys number for a new clamping (Machine Coordinate System).

49
The rotation axis is automatically defined by SolidCAM according to the Axis type (see topic 2.8.1).
The Shift and Rotation around parameters are calculated automatically.

2.2.5 Defining the Coordinate Systems for 5-axis CNC-machine

When you define the Machine Coordinate System (Mac CoordSys) for the 4-axis CNC-machine,
you have to define three points with the CoordSys dialog box:
• Origin – Select the origin point (1st point) on the graphic screen.
• X-direction – Select a point (2nd point) relative to the origin that defines the X-axis.
• Y-direction – Select a point (3rd point) to finish the definition of the XY-plane.

Use the mouse to define the origin, X- and Y-direction. You do not have to click on the X-direction or
the Y-direction button in the CoordSys dialog box, they are automatically selected after you define
a point.
X-direction
Y-direction (second point)
(third point)

CoordSys origin
(first point)

Coordinate System definition Clamping

To add a new CoordSys, you have to define three points.

Y-direction
(third point) X-direction
(second point)

CoordSys origin
(first point)
Coordinate System definition Clamping

50
 2. CAM-Part

SolidCAM automatically assigns the new Position number to each CoordSys. You can change the
Mac CoordSys number for a new clamping (Machine Coordinate System).

The rotation axis is defined automatically by SolidCAM according to the Axis type (see topic 2.8.1).

The Shift and Rotation around parameters are calculated automatically.

2.2.6 Coordinate System definition methods

Coordinate System definition using a sketch

In some cases, you cannot define the CoordSys origin position or the
direction of the axes without adding a geometry.

Then you have to create a sketch that contains two perpendicular lines;
the intersection point of the lines defines the CoordSys origin, and the
lines define the X- and Y-axis directions.

Y-direction

CoordSys
Choose the origin location at the intersection point of the lines origin
and define the axes directions. X-direction

Coordinate System definition using a stock box

SolidCAM enables you to generate the stock box surrounding the model
automatically with a defined offset (see topic 2.4.1). The top stock plane is
parallel to the XY-plane of the Machine Coordinate System.

Define the CoordSys in the stock box corner.

Sometimes the model is located in the assembly in

such a way that you need to rotate it before using
the 3D Box option in order to calculate the optimal
stock.

51
2.2.7 CoordSys Data dialog box
• Position defines the sequential number of
the Coordinate System. For each Machine
Coordinate System, several Positions can
be defined for different positionings; each
such Position is related to the Machine
Coordinate System.

• X shows the X-coordinate of the

CoordSys origin.

• Y shows the Y-coordinate of the

CoordSys origin.

• Z shows the Z-coordinate of the

CoordSys origin.

• Machine CoordSys number defines the number of the Coordinate System in the
CNC-machine. The default value is 1. If you use another number, the GCode file will
contain the G-function that tells the machine to use the specified number stored in the
controller of your machine.

• The Tool start level defines the Z-level at which the tool starts.

• The Clearance level is the Z-level to which the tool rapidly travels when moving from
one operation to another (in case the tool does not change).

• The CAM-Part Upper level defines the height of the upper surface of the part to be
milled.

• The CAM-Part Lower level defines the lower surface level of the part to be milled.

Tool start
level
Rapid movements area
Part Upper
Clearance Feed movements area level
level Part Lower
level

52
 2. CAM-Part

• The Tool Z-level is the height that the tool moves to before the rotation of the 4/5 axes to
avoid collision between the tool and the workpiece. This level is related to the CoordSys
position and you have to check if it is not over the limit switch of the machine. It is
highly recommended to send the tool to the reference point or to a point related to the
reference point.

• The Plane box defines the default work plane for the operations using this CoordSys, as it
is output to the GCode program. In the SolidCAM CAM module, you must always work
on the XY-plane. Some CNC-machines, however, have different axes definitions and
require a GCode output with rotated XY-planes. Choose one of the following options:

• XY – the XY-plane is the work plane; the Z-axis is the depth (G17).

• YZ – the YZ-plane is the work plane; the X-axis is the depth (G18).

• ZX – the ZX-plane is the work plane; the Y-axis is the depth (G19).

This option works correctly only when your post-processor has been
customized to support this function. Please contact customer support for
further details.

• Shift is the distance from the Machine Coordinate System (Mac CoordSys) to the location
of the Position in the coordinate system and the orientation of the Mac CoordSys.

• Rotation is the angle of rotation around the main axes X, Y and Z.

• For the first Position number related to a new Mac CoordSys number, the Shift
and Rotation around parameters are always 0.

• Shift and Rotation for other Position Numbers related to the same Mac CoordSys
number are determined automatically.

• The Edit CoordSys button enables you to change the CoordSys location or orientation of
the axes with the CoordSys dialog box.

53
 • Create planar surface at Part Lower level

This option enables you to generate a transparent

planar surface at the minimal Z-level of the part
so that its lower level plane is visible. This planar
surface provides you the possibility to select points
that do not lie on the model entities. It is suppressed
by default and not visible until you unsuppress it
in the FeatureManager Design tree. To unsuppress
the feature, right-click on its entry under the CAM
component in the FeatureManager Design tree and
click on the Unsuppress button.

This option is available only when the Coordinate System has been defined
by selecting a face.

2.2.8 SolidCAM Coordinate System

SolidCAM changes the model orientation by setting the model to the Machine Isometric view.
This orientation is suitable for machining on a CNC machine (with the Z-axis pointing vertically
upwards).

Y Z
Y

Z X
X
SolidWorks Coordinate System SolidCAM Coordinate System

Use the CAM Views toolbar to see the SolidCAM coordinate system.
These views are related to the orientation of the selected CoordSys
position.

54
 2. CAM-Part

2.3 CoordSys Manager

The CoordSys managing commands are available in the CoordSys Manager dialog box after the first
CoordSys is defined. You can display the CoordSys Manager dialog box by clicking on the Define
button in the Coordinate System area of the Milling Part Data dialog box or on the icon in the
SolidCAM Manager tree.

1. Right-click on an item in the CoordSys Manager

dialog box.

2. Choose a command from the menu.

Add CoordSys

This command enables you to add a new Coordinate System to the

current CAM-Part.

Edit CoordSys

This command enables you to change the data of an existing Coordinate System. It also enables you
to change the CoordSys position.

1. Choose the Coordinate System you want to edit.

2. The CoordSys Data dialog box is displayed showing the default Coordinate
System position values. The fields and values can be changed, if necessary.

If you change the CoordSys position, you must recalculate the

operations in which this CoordSys is used. You are also advised to
review the simulation.

Inquire CoordSys

This command enables you to view the relevant information about a particular Coordinate System
position, but you cannot edit the data.

55
Delete CoordSys

This command deletes an existing Coordinate System. You can only delete Coordinate Systems if
more than one CoordSys has been defined for the current CAM-Part. You cannot delete the first
Machine CoordSys and a CoordSys that is used for the operation (the Delete command in the menu
is disabled in these cases).

1. Choose the Coordinate System you want to delete. The confirmation dialog
box is displayed.

2. Click Yes to confirm.

Rename CoordSys

This command enables you to rename the chosen Coordinate System.

Default name

This command enables you to return the Coordinate System name to the default value.

Create/Delete Planar surface

This option enables you to create the planar surface at the Z-level of the model if you have not
selected the Create planar surface at Part lower level check box at the stage of CoordSys data
definition, or to delete the created planar surface if you have selected this check box.

CoordSys visibility

The Coordsys Manager dialog box enables you

to control the visibility of Coordinate Systems.
This feature simplifies the work when you have
a number of coordinate systems.

In the CoordSys Manager dialog box, clear the

check boxes for the coordinate systems in order
to hide them.

56
 2. CAM-Part

2.4 Stock and Target Model

Stock model is the material placed on the machine before you

start machining the CAM-Part.

The Stock model is used for:

• SolidVerify, SolidVerify for 3D, VerifyPlus and

Machine simulation;

• For rest material calculation in 3D Milling operations.

The stock model is not automatically associated with the solid model. If the
model is changed and the stock is not correct any more, you will see it in
the simulation; you can then replace the defined stock with the updated one.

Note that the SolidVerify, SolidVerify for 3D and VerifyPlus simulations do

not work without the Stock model defined.

Target model is the final shape of the CAM-Part after the

machining.

The Target model is used for:

• 3D simulation;
• Rest material calculation;
• Gouge checking in the SolidVerify simulation.

During all machining operations, the remaining rest material is

removed so that the Target model can be obtained.

Facet tolerance

The Facet tolerance parameter defines the accuracy of triangulation of the stock and target models,
fixture or clamp.

57
2.4.1 Stock model
The Stock model option enables you to define the actual material that has
to be removed.

1. Click on the Stock button in the Milling Part Data

dialog box.

2. In the Stock model dialog box, choose the stock

model definition mode and click on the Define
button.

3. Select the geometry.

4. Confirm the geometry selection.

Stock definition modes

• The 2D Boundary mode enables you to define the 2D stock

geometry with the chain of geometric elements (lines, arcs,
splines, edges, etc.). Before selecting the stock material,
you have to draw the boundaries of the stock material
around the CAM-Part. When you choose this mode and
click on the Define button, the Geometry Edit dialog box is
displayed.

• The 3D Model mode enables you to define the stock model

via 3D model selection and is useful for casting machining.
When you choose this mode and click on the Define
button, the 3D Geometry dialog box is displayed.

• The Box (Auto) mode enables SolidCAM to automatically determine the box surrounding
the model. When you choose this mode and click on the Define button, the 3D Box dialog
box is displayed.

58
 2. CAM-Part

3D Box dialog box

This dialog box is used to select a 3D model to create a 3D box

around the model.

• The Name option enables you to define the name for

the stock model. The default geometry name is assigned
automatically and can be edited if necessary.
• The Type option enables you to choose the type of model
elements that will be selected: Solids (solid models),
Surfaces, or Both.

• The Expand box at option enables you to define how

much access stock material you have in each direction of
the stock material.
• The CAD selection button enables you to pick the model
with the Host CAD tools.
• The Add box to CAD model button enables you to add
the stock box to the CAD model.

• The STL file mode enables you to define the stock model based
on a STL file that exists in your system. When you choose this
mode and click on the Define button, the Choose STL dialog box
is displayed. This dialog box enables you to choose the STL file
for the stock definition.

Choose STL dialog box

• The Name option enables you to define the name of

the STL stock geometry. The default geometry name is
assigned automatically and can be edited if necessary.
• The STL File section shows the path to the STL file
chosen for the stock geometry definition.
• The Browse button enables you to display the browser dialog box from which
you will choose the required STL file.
• The Show button enables you to display the defined stock in the Rest material
window of SolidCAM (see topic 2.4.3).
• The Show on model button enables you to display the defined stock in the
SolidCAM graphic area applied to the solid model (see topic 2.4.3).

59
2.4.2 Target model

The Target model option enables you to define the final part after machining.

1. Click on the Target button in the Milling Part Data

dialog box.

2. In the Target model dialog box, click on the Define

3D Model button to start the geometry selection.

3. Select the geometry with the 3D Geometry dialog

box (see topic 4.3.1).

4. Confirm the Target model definition with the button.

In future operations, you can use the Target model as a geometry.

2.4.3 Common controls for Stock model and Target model dialog boxes

Name

In this field, you can see the stock or target model name and choose the model from the previously
defined 3D geometries.

Show

Click on this button to show the Stock or Target model in the Rest material window of SolidCAM.

Target model Stock model

To control the quality of the Stock and Target models visualization, you
can change the Facet tolerance in the Milling Part Data dialog box. The
recommended value is 0.01 mm. A smaller tolerance will improve the quality
and reduce the visualization speed.

60
 2. CAM-Part

Show on model

Click on this button to see the selected Target model in the Host CAD window.

Target model Stock model

Self-intersections

The Check and fix button in the Self-intersections section enables you to check the model for self-
intersections and fix them if they are found.
When self-intersections are detected, the following message is displayed:

Confirm it with the Yes button to fix the self-intersections.

Note that the process of self-intersection fixing can take a long time to complete, depending on the
complexity of the model.

For more information on self-intersections, see topic 10.6.6.

2.4.4 Associativity of Stock and Target models

SolidCAM enables you to keep the associativity between
Stock/Target model and the SolidWorks model. When the
SolidWorks model is updated, SolidCAM enables you to check
the compliance of the Stock and Target model geometry to the
updated SolidWorks model. If the SolidCAM geometry is not
synchronized with the SolidWorks model, you can synchronize it.
The Check synchronization command enables you to check the
synchronization status of the Stock/Target model geometry relative to
the SolidWorks model.

61
If SolidCAM determines a misfit between the SolidWorks model and the Stock/Target model
geometry, this geometry is marked with the synchronization mark .

If the Stock/Target model geometry is not synchronized with the SolidWorks model, the
Synchronize command enables you to update the Stock/Target model geometry according to the
updated SolidWorks model.

62
 2. CAM-Part

2.5 Tool Options

The Tool options enable you to define additional data about the tools for your CAM-Part. You can
enter the start and end position of your tool as well as the coordinates for tool changes on your
CNC-machine. After you click on the button, you can change the parameters in the Tool Options
dialog box.
The default values you receive in this dialog box are input from the MAC file of the selected post-
processor.
A sample from the MAC file is shown below. The first three values of each line are metric coordinates
and the last three values are in inches.

;Positioning
dflt_start = 0.0000 200.0000 100.0000, 0.0000 7.8740 3.9370
dflt_end = 0.0000 200.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 7.8740 0.0000
set_z_chng = Y
dflt_tool_chng = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

In the Tool Options dialog box, you can edit the values for the current
CAM-Part.

Start point

This field determines the position of the first tool in the

beginning of the milling.

End point

This field determines the position of the last tool in the end
of the milling.

• In most of the cases, the value in this dialog

box will only affect the simulation. To affect
the generated NC-program, the post-processor
must use these values.

• Normally, the new CNC-controllers do not

need the start and end position. In the post-
processor, you use the machine command to
move to the machine reference point.

63
Tool change XY

This field defines the XY-coordinates of the tool change position. There are two
options:
• Default as in MAC file

The XY-coordinates of the tool change position are defined by the end point of
the operation that was executed before the tool change.
• Define

The XY-coordinates of the tool change position are defined by the user.

Tool change Z

This field defines the Z-coordinate of the tool change position. There are two options:
• Default as in MAC file

The Z-level where tool changes are performed is automatically read from the Tool
start plane specified in the CoordSys Data dialog box (default input from MAC file).
• Define

The Z-coordinate of the tool change position is defined by the user.

Feed type

Defines the default type of feed used for the tool of this CAM-Part. There are two
options:

• Mm/Min – Millimeters per Minute;

• Mm/Rev – Millimeters per Revolution.

64
 2. CAM-Part

2.6 Mac Options

If the MAC file of your post-processor has extra

fields (parameters) defined, they can be accessed
through this field. In the Machine Options List
dialog box, you can enter unique information
related to the machine controller you have
selected.

• In case of Numeric or Integer field type, the Numeric/Integer Value dialog

box is displayed and you are prompted to enter a value.

• In case of Logical field type, the Logical Value dialog box is displayed and
you are prompted to choose between Yes and No.

Refer to the GPPTool manual for additional information.

2.7 Work Material

This option enables you to define the work material. Choose the work material from the list.

The Work material field enables you to get Speed/Feed Defaults (see topic 3.11) based on the
work and tool materials that you are using. If you choose the None option, the system will offer
you the internal standard value spin of 1000 rpm and the default feed for X, Y movement of
100 mm/min.

65
2.8 CNC-Controller and Axis Type

Select the CNC-machine controller. Click on the arrow next to the controller
field to display the list of post-processors installed on your system.

2.8.1 Axis type

This field displays the CNC-controller type. This field cannot be edited; it
is defined in the post-processor file.

The axis type can be one of the following:

• 3 axis;

• 4_axis_around_X or 4_axis_around_Y;

• 5 axis.

The axis type defines the Coordinate System definition method:

3 axis

In this type of machine, every side

requires a new clamping (new Machine
CoordSys). For each Mac CoordSys, you
have to define the origin position, the
X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction.

4 axis
• 4_axis_around_X

This type is used for vertical machines with the 4th axis
on the table along the X-axis.

When defining the Machine CoordSys, you have to

define the origin position, the X-axis direction and the
Y-axis direction. For all additional positionings, based on
this clamping, you have to define the origin position and
the Y-axis direction only (the angle); the X-axis direction
is determined automatically by the X-axis direction of
the Machine CoordSys.

66
 2. CAM-Part

• 4_axis_around_Y

This type is used for horizontal machines with the 4th

axis along the Y-axis.

When defining the Machine CoordSys, you have to define

the origin position, the X-axis direction and the Y-axis
direction. For all additional positionings, based on this
clamping, you have to define the origin position and the
X-axis direction only (the angle); the Y-axis direction is
determined automatically by the Y-axis direction of the
Machine CoordSys.

5 axis

This type is used for 5-axis CNC-machines. For the Machine CoordSys,
you have to define the origin position, the X-axis direction and the
Y-axis direction. All additional positioning is related to this Machine
CoordSys.

Take care of the machine limitations (angles

or undercuts). A message on the limit can be
generated only during the GCode generation.

In the definition process, it is not necessary to consider the kinematics

of the CNC-machine. This is done in the last step when you generate the
NC-program.

• A CAM-Part created for a CNC-controller of 3-axis type cannot be

converted to 4- or 5- axis type.

• A CAM-Part created for the CNC-controller of 4-axis type can be

converted to 3-axis type.

• A CAM-Part created for the CNC-controller of 5-axis type can be

converted to 3-axis type.

67
2.9 Default GCode numbers

The fields in this area are displayed according to a parameter defined in the MAC file.

; Program numbers
get_prog_num = N or Y
get_proc_num = N or Y

If N – the field is not displayed.

If Y – the field is displayed.

get_prog_num = Y

get_proc_num = N

Program number

This field enables you to define the number of the main program that will be generated in the
output NC-program.

This field has ranges that are controlled from the MAC file parameters.

prog_num_min = 1
prog_num_max = 9999
prog_num_dflt = 5000

68
 2. CAM-Part

In this case, the default number is 5000. You can change this value and type a number between 1
and 9999. Typing any number beyond this range is followed with the message:

Subroutine number

In this field, you can define the number of the first subroutine in the generated output
NC-program.

This field has ranges that are controlled from the MAC file parameters.

proc_num_min = 1000

proc_num_max = 5000

proc_num_dflt = 1000

In this case, the default number is 1000. You can change this value and type a number between 1000
and 5000. Typing any number beyond this range is followed with the same message as above.

In some machines (for example, Fanuc), the main program number and subroutine number cannot
be the same. SolidCAM does not warn you about this problem. In order to prevent this situation,
you can set the main program range to 1 – 1000 and the subroutines range to 1001 to 9999 in the
MAC file.

69
2.10 Part Settings

SolidCAM enables you to define a number of

parameters specific for the current CAM-Part
using the Part Settings dialog box.

This dialog box is available by clicking on the

Settings button in the Milling Part Data dialog box
or by double-clicking on the Part settings icon
under the CAM-Part header in SolidCAM Manager.

2.10.1 Units

The Units page shows the measurement units used

in the current CAM-Part.

70
 2. CAM-Part

2.10.2 Interoperational tool movements

This page contains options that enable you to

control the interoperational movements (see topic
5.2.8).

For each new CAM-Part, these settings are copied

from the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.10) and
can be adjusted according to your preferences.

SolidCAM enables you to change

the settings even when a CAM-Part
is opened.

Part Clearance level

All interoperational movements are performed

through the Part Clearance level. This is the default
option.

When you switch to the Part Clearance level mode, SolidCAM disables the Start level field in all
operations. All SolidCAM operations (except for Sim. 5 Axis operations) have to be recalculated.
After the recalculation, all interoperational movements are implemented through the Part Clearance
levels of the appropriate Coordinate Systems.

Operation Start level

When two neighboring operations use the same Coordinate System, Tool and Tool offset, the
interoperational movement between them is performed through the Operation Start level of the
second operation.

When you switch to the Operation Start level mode, SolidCAM enables the Start level fields in all
operations and defines the Start levels equal to the Part Clearance level of the related Coordinate
Systems. All interoperational movements will be implemented through the appropriate Start levels.

71
2.10.3 Update Stock calculation
This page contains three tabs with Updated Stock
model settings for the SolidVerify simulation (see
topic 10.6), Rest Material calculation (see topic 10.8)
and SolidVerify for 3D simulation (see topic 10.7).

SolidVerify tab

This tab enables you to define the Updated Stock

parameters and options relevant for the SolidVerify
simulation.

Update stock accuracy

This section enables you to define

the USM accuracy parameters for the
SolidVerify simulation.

• Tool facet tolerance

This option controls the precision of the tool for the SolidVerify simulation.

• Tool facet type

In addition to changing the tolerance used for faceting, the application controls
the manner in which the faceted tool representation approximates the tool
by forcing the representation to be bigger or smaller than the actual tool. For
example, if you want to know whether the tool gouged the target part, it would
probably be preferable to have a tool representation that is guaranteed to lie
outside the bounds of the actual tool.

Internal. The tool representation lies within the actual tool. The vertices
of the tool representation will lie on the surface of the actual tool and the
facets will lie within the actual tool.

External. The actual tool lies within the tool representation. The vertices will
lie at distances up to the faceting tolerance from the surface of the actual
tool.

Mixed. This is a combination of the Internal and External modes. The

vertices lie outside the actual tool but parts of the facets may lie inside
it. This mode is the default and should be used unless there is a specific
reason for using one of the other modes as it generates fewer facets and will
therefore be faster.

72
 2. CAM-Part

5 Axis
The Linear interpolate option enables you to perform the linear interpolation of 5-axis
tool movement. The Max. interpolation angle value defines the angular tolerance for
the interpolation.

Update stock model method

This section enables you to choose the method of Stock model updating.
• Automatic

Save updated stock model for every specified number of operations: SolidCAM
automatically calculates and saves the Updated Stock model. The specified
number enables you to define the quantity of intermediate USM files. For
example:
• if the specified number is 1, SolidCAM automatically saves intermediate
USM files for each operation;
• if the specified number is 2, SolidCAM automatically saves intermediate
USM files for all even operations (2nd, 4th, 6th, etc.);
• if the specified number is 0, SolidCAM does not save intermediate USM
files.
Save updated stock model for operations with a long tool path only: SolidCAM
automatically estimates the time required for simulation of operations and saves
the updated stock for those operations whose tool path is considered too long.
• Manual

SolidCAM enables you to manually save the updated stock model for a specific
operation during the SolidVerify simulation. The simulation of the next
operations can be performed on the updated stock model. Further 3D Milling
operations can also use the saved USM for the cutting in Rest material areas.

Automatically remove noise from input data

During the faceting of Stock and Target models, the coordinates of facets generated
by SolidCAM are often calculated as numbers of the float type with many digits after
the point. These numbers cause problems during the SolidVerify simulation, such as
self-intersections and gaps in model. The Automatically remove noise from input data
check box enables you to use a smart rounding algorithm that removes the noise in
facet coordinates so that the model is displayed properly.

Note that the process of removing the noise may take a long time to
complete.

73
Rest Material calculation tab

This tab enables you to define the Updated Stock

parameters and options used for the Rest material
calculation in 3D Milling operations.

Update stock accuracy

This section enables you to define the

USM accuracy parameters for the Rest
material calculation.

5 Axis

The Linear interpolate option enables

you to perform the linear interpolation
of 5-axis tool movement. The Max.
interpolation angle value defines the
angular tolerance for the interpolation.

Current Stock model method

This section displays the method of Stock model updating used for the Rest Material
calculation. The setting of this section can be changed in the SolidVerify tab.

SolidVerify for 3D tab

This tab enables you to define the Updated Stock

parameters and options relevant for the SolidVerify
for 3D simulation.

The Updated Stock calculation parameters defined

for this type of simulation are similar to those
defined for SolidVerify. Since in this simulation
mode analytical surfaces are used instead of facet
models used for SolidVerify, the Updated Stock
model accuracy section is not relevant.

74
 2. CAM-Part

2.10.4 Synchronization

This page enables you to define the synchronization settings for the current CAM-Part when its
model configuration is changed.

The Synchronization when design model configuration changes section provides you with the
following options:

• Keep the geometry associative with the parent configuration

This option enables you to keep the link between the geometry and the parent
configuration. SolidCAM always keeps the geometry linked to the parent configuration
(the configuration used for the geometry definition). When you switch between the
model configurations, the geometry is not affected; synchronization is required only if
the parent configuration is changed.
Geometry Geometry

Configuration #1 Configuration #2

75
 • Associate the geometry with the current configuration

This option enables you to establish the link between the geometry and the current
configuration and perform the synchronization according to the current configuration.
Geometry
Geometry

Configuration #1 Configuration #2

After such synchronization, the geometry is linked to the current configuration until
you switch to another one.

2.10.5 Automatic CAM-Part definition

SolidCAM provides you with a number of

features aimed to automate the process of the
CAM-Part definition. These features enable you
to avoid a number of routine steps required to be
performed during the CAM-Part definition and
perform them automatically.

This page contains a number of settings related

to the Automatic CAM-Part definition. For each
new CAM-Part, these settings are copied from
the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.12) and can
be adjusted according to your preferences.

Automatic Stock model definition

The Definition of Stock (as 3D box) option enables you to automatically define the 3D box stock
model during the CAM-Part definition. The stock model is based on all solid bodies and/or surfaces
of the DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.

76
 2. CAM-Part

• Define Stock by. This option enables you to choose the type of elements (solid bodies
and/or surfaces) from the DesignModel model to use.

• Expand box at. This option gives you complete control over how much access stock
material you have in each direction of the stock material.

The Add box to CAD model option enables you to add the stock model box to the CAD model.

Automatic Target model definition

The Definition of Target check box enables you to automatically define the target model during
the CAM-Part definition. The target model is based on all the solid bodies and/or surfaces of the
DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.

The Define Target by option enables you to choose the type of elements (solid bodies and/or
surfaces) from the DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.

Definition of Coordinate System

When the Single CoordSys check box is selected, SolidCAM enables you to shorten the process
of CoordSys definition by skipping the CoordSys Manager dialog box after the first CoordSys
definition. This option is useful when defining CAM-Parts with only one Coordinate System.

When the Single CoordSys check box is cleared, SolidCAM displays the CoordSys Manager dialog
box after the first CoordSys definition. The CoordSys Manager enables you to define an additional
Coordinate System. This option is useful when defining CAM-Parts with several Coordinate Systems.

77
2.10.6 Machining Process

On MP insertion (for milling only)

Select the Perform auto calculation check box

in case you want the operations to be calculated
automatically after the Machining Process is
inserted into the CAM-Part.

If you select the Ask before calculation check

box, the message that enables you to confirm
the calculation is displayed. If this check box
is cleared, the calculation starts without prior
notice.

Operation name in SolidCAM Manager

The setting of this field defines how the

operation names appear in SolidCAM Manager
when a Machining Process Table is loaded and
a Machining Process is added to the CAM-Part.

When the Show group name check box is selected, the operation names are preceded with the
names of the operation groups and default sets defined in Machining Process Table Manager.

Prismatic part_20-6_finish_wall
Operation Default set Operation
group name name name

78
 2. CAM-Part

When this check box is not selected, only the operation names appear in the SolidCAM Manager
tree.

2.10.7 Tool path simulation

SolidCAM enables you to define the default simulation mode.

• Use Host CAD simulation as default

When this option is chosen, the Host CAD simulation mode is used as default for each
new simulation session.

• Remember last simulation option

When this option is chosen, simulation starts in the last used mode.

79
2.10.8 GCode generation

This page enables you to define the parameters of the GCode generation.

The Save GCode files box offers three options

to define the parameters related to saving of
GCode files:

In the CAM-Part directory

SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files in the

CAM-Part directory. The path to this directory
is displayed in the read-only field. This option is
used by default.

According to the MAC file

SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files

according to the parameters defined in the MAC
file. The path to the directory that appears in the
MAC file is displayed in the read-only field.

In the GCode directory

SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files in the specified GCode folder location. When the
GCode generation is started, SolidCAM creates a new folder with the CAM-Part name in the
specified GCode directory and saves the GCode files there. If this folder already exists, SolidCAM
uses it for the GCode output.

This group box enables you to define the path for the GCode directory. You can enter the path or
click on the Browse button and choose the destination folder using the Browse For Folder dialog
box.

If you have entered the path to a non-existing folder, the following message
is displayed after the confirmation of the Part Settings dialog box:

80
 2. CAM-Part

The Create button enables you to create the folder that will be used for
GCode directory in the specified location. The Browse button displays the
browser dialog box that enables you to choose another location that will be
used for the GCode directory.

If the new folder cannot be created, the following message is displayed:

If the chosen folder has the read-only attribute, the following message
is displayed after the confirmation of the Browse dialog box or the Part
Settings dialog box:

By default, the GCode directory location is not defined. You have to specify it when you choose the
In the GCode directory option for the first time.

Create subfolders for split GCode files

When split marks are detected in SolidCAM Manager during the GCode generation for
the entire CAM-Part, SolidCAM creates a number of GCode segment files. Each such
GCode segment file is created for one or several operations enclosed by split marks.
These files are named with the CAM-Part name followed by the “-” sign and the order
number of a split segment.

Split marks are ignored in case of GCode generation for several operations.

With the In the GCode directory option, SolidCAM creates separate CAM-Part GCode
folders in the specified folder location.

When the Create subfolders for split GCode files check box is
selected, SolidCAM creates a separate folder for each GCode
segment file and saves the GCode segments files there. The
folder is created in the GCode folder of the CAM-Part in the
specified GCode folder location. The name of the folder is the
same as the GCode segment file name.

81
 When the Create subfolders for split GCode files check box is
not selected, SolidCAM generates all the GCode segment files
directly into the GCode folder of the CAM-Part in the specified
GCode folder location.

By default, the Create subfolders for split GCode files option

is not selected.

Create separate folders for each CAM-Part

When this check box is selected, SolidCAM creates a folder for each CAM-Part and
saves the GCode file there. Otherwise, the GCode files for all CAM-Parts are generated
into the GCode directory.

Additional control of GCode

When the Customize GCode file name check box is selected,

you can alter the GCode file name and location. When
you click one of the GCode generation commands, the
Windows-style Save GCode browser is displayed with the
default CAM-Part name and location that might be edited.

All the GCode files previously

generated for the current CAM-
Part remain in the specified folder.

When this check box is not selected, the GCode is generated and automatically saved in the defined
location.

82
 2. CAM-Part

GCode generation for the entire CAM-Part

The Erase all previous GCode files check box

enables you to choose whether the old GCode
files generated for this CAM-Part remain or are
removed when a new one is generated.

This check box is not available

if the Create a separate folder
for each CAM-Part check box
is not selected and when the
Customize GCode file name
check box is selected.

GCode generation for separate operations

The Erase all previous GCode files check box

enables you to choose whether the old GCode
files generated for separate operations remain
or are removed when a new one is generated.

This check box is not available

if the Create a separate folder
for each CAM-Part check box
is not selected and when the
Customize GCode file name
check box is selected.

83
2.10.9 Template defaults

This page enables you define the default location

of the operation templates and to specify the
default templates used for each new operation of
the loaded CAM-Part.

When a new CAM-Part is being

created and defined, the Part
settings for Templates and
Defaults are copied from the
SolidCAM Settings.

SolidCAM Template Directory

This section enables you to define the default location for SolidCAM
templates. You can define the path by entering it in the box or by
clicking on the Browse button and choosing the location. In case
the chosen folder does not exist, the error message is displayed.
• The Create button enables you to create the folder with
the specified location and set it as the SolidCAM Template
directory.

• The Browse button displays the browser dialog box that enables you to choose another
location for the SolidCAM Templates directory.

The default Templates directory location is ..\Tables\Metric\Templates for Metric units and
..\Tables\Inch\Templates for Inch units.

Operation default templates

This section enables you to assign a default template to each operation type. It contains the following
tabs:

• The 2.5D Milling tab lists the templates of 2.5D Milling operations.
• The 3D Milling tab lists the templates of 3D Milling operations.
• The HSM and HSS tabs list the templates of HSM and HSS operations.
• The Sim. 4 Axis and Sim. 5 Axis tabs list the templates of Sim. 4 Axis and Sim. 5 Axis
operations.

84
 2. CAM-Part

Each tab contains a table that enables you to define

the default templates for each operation type.
When the default template use is activated for a
specific operation (the check box in the operation
type line is selected), the Template column offers
you the list of available templates appropriate for
this type of operation.

When the template use is activated for an operation

type, each new operation of this type will be loaded
with the data of the specified template.

Templates activation/deactivation

When you clear the check box in an operation type

row to deactivate the use of templates, the list in
the Template column is unavailable.

When you select the check box to activate template use for an operation type, the search is performed
in the SolidCAM Template Directory for suitable templates of this type. The names of the found
templates appear in the list, and the first of them is being chosen automatically. If no suitable
templates are found, SolidCAM deactivates the use of templates for this operation.

Changing the SolidCAM Template Directory

When you change the path to the SolidCAM Template Directory, SolidCAM performs a search for
suitable templates for all the operations with the activated default template use. When a template for
some operation type is not found, SolidCAM deactivates the default template use for this operation
type. Found templates are added into the related list. The first found template name is displayed.

The search for templates is not performed for the operation types for which
the use of templates is deactivated.

Creating sets of templates (working style)

Consider a folder containing a set of templates. This set contains only one template for each operation
type, therefore, all operation types have assigned templates. The set of templates is customized
for a specific application (e.g. Mold machining). Consider an additional folder containing a set of
templates for another application.

By switching between these folders for SolidCAM Template Directory, SolidCAM switches templates
for all operation types. This enables you to choose a set of templates for a specific application
quickly and easily.

85
2.10.10 Tool coolant

This page enables you define the tool coolant

options that will be applicable to each new tool
added for use in the current CAM-Part.

When a check box is selected, the related coolant

option is used.

The coolant options available for use on the

current CNC-machine, according to the MAC-file
settings, are marked with asterisks (*).

2.10.11 Gouge check

This page enables you to control the gouge

checking parameters at the CAM-Part level.

The Check gouges on calculation check box

enables you to define the default state of the
corresponding edit box in the operation dialog box
(see topic 5.2.12). This state is inherited by each
new 2.5D Milling operation.

86
 2. CAM-Part

2.11 Compressed CAM-Part

SolidCAM provides you with the Compressed CAM-Part feature.

SolidCAM
This feature enables SolidCAM to save all the CAM-Part data in
one file compressed using the ZIP technology.

SolidCAM saves all the CAM-Part data in ZIP archive file. Extracted
During the SolidCAM session, this file is extracted in the specific CAM-Part
temporary location and SolidCAM works with the extracted
Open Close
CAM-Part data. When the CAM-Part is closed, the content of the
ZIP file has to be replaced with the updated CAM-Part data. When Compressed
the update process is finished, SolidCAM erases the extracted CAM-Part
CAM-Part from the temporary location.

• SolidCAM supports simultaneous work with both file formats: compressed

CAM-Part and non-compressed CAM-Part.

• Each newly created CAM-Part can be created either in the compressed

mode or in the non-compressed mode, depending on SolidCAM Settings
(see topic 12.6).

• Each CAM-Part can be converted from open to compressed mode

depending on the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.6).

2.11.1 Compressed CAM-Part file format

The SolidCAM Compressed CAM-Part format is ZIP SolidCAM Compressed CAM-Part

(compatible with WinZIP application). This file has
the *.prz extension and contains all CAM-Part data. SolidCAM CAM-Part

SolidCAM CAM-Part folder

2.11.2 Creating a new compressed CAM-Part

When you confirm the CAM-Part creation in the New

Milling Part dialog box, SolidCAM creates the empty
compressed CAM-Part file in the location specified
in the Directory field and with the name specified
in the <Name> field. SolidCAM also creates the
<Name>.prt file and the <NAME> folder in the
SolidCAM Temporary folder.

87
The SolidCAM Temporary folder is automatically created by SolidCAM. By default, this folder has
the following path: C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local Setting\SolidCAM Temporary
files. You can choose your own location for the SolidCAM Temporary folder via SolidCAM Settings
(see topic 12.6).

For example, the structure of the Shaft CAM-Part is the following:

C:\Program Files\SolidCAM2009\User

Shaft.prz

C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Local Settings\SolidCAM Temporary files

Shaft.prt
Shaft

If the compressed CAM-Part already exists in the location defined in the

Directorybox; you cannot define a new CAM-Part with the same name.
SolidCAM offers you to choose an alternative name or location.

After the CAM-Part definition, SolidCAM works with the CAM-Part data located in the SolidCAM
Temporary folder. When the CAM-Part is being closed, SolidCAM updates the compressed
CAM-Part with the CAM-Part data. After the update, the non-compressed copy is removed from
the SolidCAM Temporary folder.

2.11.3 Converting CAM-Parts to Compressed mode

SolidCAM enables you to work with both types of CAM-Parts: compressed and non-compressed.
Each non-compressed CAM-Part can be converted to the compressed mode in the opening process
(according to the SolidCAM Settings). During this operation, SolidCAM compresses all CAM-
Part data to the compressed CAM-Part. After these operations, SolidCAM removes the original
CAM-Part.

2.11.4 Opening/Closing Compressed CAM-Parts

When opening a compressed CAM-Part, SolidCAM extracts all its content into the SolidCAM
Temporary folder and loads the non-compressed CAM-Part.

When closing a CAM-Part, SolidCAM updates the corresponding compressed CAM-Part with the
data from the SolidCAM Temporary folder. After the update, the non-compressed data is removed
from the SolidCAM Temporary folder.

The smart algorithm of opening compressed CAM-Parts enables SolidCAM to prevent data loss in
case the CAM-Part session was not completed correctly.

88
 2. CAM-Part

If the CAM-Part session was not completed correctly and the Compressed CAM-Part was not
updated successfully, the non-compressed data is not removed from the SolidCAM Temporary
folder. In this case, SolidCAM finds the corresponding non-compressed data in the next Compressed
CAM-Part and displays the following dialog box.

• Continue with Compressed CAM-Part version

The non-compressed data in the SolidCAM Temporary folder is updated with the
content of the compressed CAM-Part.

• Continue with SolidCAM Temporary folder version

The compressed CAM-Part is updated with the non-compressed data from the
SolidCAM Temporary folder.

The Exit button enables you to cancel the operation and solve the problem
manually.

89
2.12 Managing CAM-Parts

Use the commands of the SolidCAM and CAM-Part menus to edit and manage existing CAM-
Parts.

New

This command creates a new CAM-Part. According to SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.6), the
CAM-Part can be created either in the compressed mode or in the non-compressed mode.

Open

This command loads a CAM-Part (compressed and non-compressed) that has been previously
saved. According to SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.6), the non-compressed CAM-Parts can
be converted to the compressed mode. When you choose this option, the CAM-Parts browser is
displayed.

90
 2. CAM-Part

1. Select the CAM-Part you want to load.

2. Double-click on the CAM-Part or select it and click on the Open button.

The default type for the Files of Type filter is defined in SolidCAM
Settings.

If a CAM-Part was created with the previous SolidCAM version, the backup can be performed
during the CAM-Part opening, if necessary. The backup is created as a copy of the original file in
the Backup of <CAM-Part name> folder.

You can also open CAM-Parts by double-clicking on the *.prt files in the
Windows Explorer environment.

Manage Templates

This command enables you to manage your operation and process templates using the Template
Manager dialog
box.

For more information on operation templates and process templates, see topic 5.2.2.

Close

SolidCAM closes the active CAM-Part. The Compressed CAM-Part file is being updated, if necessary.

91
Copy

This command creates an identical copy of a CAM-

Part in another folder or drive for backup purposes
or for making modifications without changing the
original. The Copy Parts dialog box is displayed.

1. Choose the drive from which

you want to copy the original
CAM-Part.

2. Choose the CAM-Parts you

want to copy from the CAM-
Parts list.

3. Transfer the list of the CAM-Parts you want to copy to the middle field by
clicking on the Left to Right arrow.

4. Choose the drive and the directory you want to copy to.

5. Click on the Copy button.

This feature is unavailable for compressed files; they can be copied

with standard Windows tools.

Delete

This command enables you to delete a CAM-

Part (compressed and non-compressed). The
Part to Delete dialog box is displayed.

The Files of type filter enables you to display

either compressed or non-compressed CAM-
Parts. The default filter value depends on
SolidCAM Settings.

1. Select the CAM-Part you want to delete. Use the Ctrl key to select several
CAM-Parts together.

2. Click on the Delete button.

92
 2. CAM-Part

3. The confirmation dialog box is displayed:

4. Choose Yes to All to delete all selected CAM-Parts.

Calculate CAM-Parts

This command enables you to calculate tool paths of all CAM-Parts (compressed and non-
compressed) in the specified folder. The Calculate parts dialog box is displayed.

1. Click on the Add Directory button.

2. Choose the folder where the CAM-Part is situated via the standard Windows
browser.

3. Click on the Calculate button to start the operation.

You can also use the Delete All button to remove all the CAM-Parts from the specified folder.

The compressed CAM-Part is extracted into the SolidCAM Temporary folder. The resulting non-
compressed CAM-Part is opened by SolidCAM and calculated. The compressed CAM-Part is then
updated and the non-compressed CAM-Part is removed from the SolidCAM Temporary folder.

Change Model Reference

SolidCAM enables you to change the reference to original SolidWorks model. This operation enables
you to substitute the DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly with some SolidWorks
model.

1. Choose the Change Model Reference command

in the menu. The Change Model Reference
dialog box is displayed.

93
 2. Type the model name in the Model name edit box or choose the model with
the Browse button. This button displays the browser dialog box that enables
you to choose the SolidWorks model.

3. Confirm the dialog box. The following message is displayed.

When the message is confirmed, the CAM-Part is closed, the CAM-Part

Reference is updated, and then the updated CAM-Part is loaded again.

CAM-Part Definition

This command enables you to view and edit the values, options and parameters of the current
CAM-Part. The Milling Part Data dialog box is displayed.

CAM-Part Properties

This command displays the Milling part properties dialog box. This dialog
box provides you with information such as name and location of the CAM-
Part and of the model used in the CAM-Part.

94
 2. CAM-Part

Save As

This command enables you to save the active

CAM-Part to the disk with a new name or in a new
location.

When this option is chosen, the Save As dialog

box is displayed.

Save as Type

This option enables you to choose the

type of the CAM-Part: compressed or
non-compressed. The default value of
the Save as Type filter is the same as
the type of the original CAM-Part.

The conversion of the compressed CAM-Part to non-compressed is

unavailable.

Save as copy

• When this option is not available, the saved CAM-Part is loaded instead of the current
CAM-Part.

• When this option is available, SolidCAM stays with the current CAM-Part.

Recent CAM-Parts

This option displays a list of the last

nine CAM-Parts you worked with in
SolidCAM. You can open the file by
clicking on its name.

95
Saving the updated stock in the STL format

SolidCAM parts can be machined in a sequence of stages on different CNC-machines, while the
updated stock model is shared between these stages.

This functionality enables you to define a new CAM-Part based

on some other pre-machined CAM-Part, using the result of
machining of the pre-machined part for the stock definition.
Machining of a part can thus be performed in several stages,
with one CAM-Part for each stage, by passing the machining
results from one stage to the next through an updated stock
model obtained after the last operation of each CAM-Part and
saved in the STL format.

1. Right-click on the CAM-Part header

in SolidCAM Manager and choose the
Save updated stock to STL command
from the menu.

2. The Save updated stock to STL dialog box is displayed.

Define the name and location for

your file. The default name of
the updated stock model STL file
is inherited from the CAM-Part
name. The default location of the
STL file is the SolidCAM Part
folder for regular SolidCAM Parts
(*.prt). For compressed CAM-Parts
(*.prz), the default location is that
of the compressed CAM-Part files.

3. Click on the Save button.

SolidCAM generates the STL file according to the HostCAD coordinate

system.

When the STL file is successfully generated, the notification message is

displayed.

96
 2. CAM-Part

2.13 CAM-Part Documentation

This option enables you to document your tool list,

operations sequence, etc.
• Generate

This option enables you to create the

document.
• Edit

This option enables you to edit the document

after it has been generated.

2.13.1 Documentation Editor

With the documentation editor you can browse the generated CAM-Part documentation. The
toolbar and the application menu on the top of the documentation editor work the same as in any
typical windows application.
The left panel enables you to switch pages and the right page enables you to view and edit each page.
• Cover page

This page shows contents of the Cover page file

defined in SolidCAM Settings.

• Header page

This page contains general information about

the CAM-Part: the CAM-Part name, the program
number, the amount of operations and the type
of operations. To edit, simply click in the right
field and make any changes or additions.

97
• Tool Table page

This page contains all the relevant information

about the tools used in the CAM-Part: the
tool number, the tool diameter, the corner
radius, the tool type, the number of teeth
and any other information that is relevant to
each tool. To edit, simply click in the right
field and make any changes or additions.

• Operations table page

This page contains the list of all operations

in the CAM-Part.

• Operation pages

Under this page, there is a page for each

operation name. This page gives you a
detailed list of all of the fields you have
chosen in the operation and their values.

98
 2. CAM-Part

2.14 Tool sheet documentation

This option enables you to summarize the CAM-Part information by generating a tool sheet
documentation in the RTF format.

For each tool sheet project, SolidCAM creates the

Doc folder in the CAM-Part directory for saving
the tool sheet file. In this folder, two subfolders are
automatically created: the Tools Images subfolder
for image files of the tools used in the part
operations, and the Images subfolder for image
files of the machined part.

The tool sheet generation commands are available

in the right-click menu on the CAM-Part header in
the SolidCAM Manager tree.

2.14.1 Capturing the CAM-Part image

The Capture Image command enables you to create a part image captured from the SolidWorks
graphic area and save it in the PNG format. Later this image file can be attached to your tool sheet.

When you choose this command, SolidCAM captures the image of the part as it is displayed in the
SolidWorks graphic area. This image is saved as a PNG file in the Images folder.

99
2.14.2 Definition of tool sheet parameters

The Tool Sheet command is available for the entire

CAM-Part (in the right-click menu available on the
CAM-Part header) or for separate operations (in the
right-click menu available on each operation entry).
The Tool Sheet Extra Parameters dialog box is
displayed. This dialog box enables you to define and
manage the content of the documentation file.

Images

In this section, you can specify the logo and part image
files in the PNG format that will be attached to your
tool sheet. To attach a logo and/or a part image, click
on the button and choose a file from the standard
Windows-style Browse dialog box.

The attached logo appears in the upper right corner in

the document header. The attached images appear in
the separate Images page.

100
 2. CAM-Part

Parameters

This section contains the table that enables you to define your own variables and values to be
inserted into the tool sheet. In the Label column, you specify the name of the parameter you want
to appear in the tool sheet; in the Value column, you can enter its value. In the Location column,
you can specify where this parameter is supposed to appear in the documentation file, either in the
main page or in the header.

The buttons enable you to manage the table rows:

• The button adds new rows to the table.

• The button removes the selected row from the table.

• The buttons move the selected rows in the table, changing their order.

Part notes

This section enables you to add comments and notes related to your part. The note will appear
under the part image, in the main page of the tool sheet document.

Style

This section enables you to define the style of the output document.

Sections

This group enables you to define which elements of the information sheet
will appear in the output, by selecting the corresponding check boxes.

• The Main page check box defines whether the main page will be
included in the tool sheet.

101
• The Images check box defines whether the Images page will be included in the tool
sheet. The button displays the location of the part captured images in the Windows
Explorer.

• The Tool table check box defines whether the Tool table pages will be included in the tool
sheet. The button displays the dialog box that enables you to specify the required tool
data to appear in the Tool table summary by selecting check boxes.

• The Operations summary check box defines whether the Operation summary page will
be included in the tool sheet.

• The Fixtures check box defines whether the Fixture page will be included in the tool
sheet.

102
 2. CAM-Part

2.14.3 The output file

The output tool sheet file consists of the following sections:

Main page

This section summarizes the general information about the CAM-Part, including its graphic
representation and the comments you have added.
Comment entered
in the Parameters table
(Location - Header) Part name

Company logo
Part definition

Comment entered Part picture

in the Parameters table
(Location - Main page)

Part notes

Part properties

103
Tool table

This section displays the list of the tools used for the operations of the current CAM-Part, with
their parameters and illustrations.

104
 2. CAM-Part

Operations summary

This section summarizes the operations defined for the current CAM-Part.

105
Fixtures

This section shows how the part must be fixed on the CNC-machine table.

106
 2. CAM-Part

2.14.4 Show Last Tool Sheet

This command enables you to display the last generated tool sheet for the current part, instead of
generating it anew. The Tool Sheet Extra Parameters dialog box is displayed so that you can view the
defined parameters of the last tool sheet generation.

In this dialog box, you can edit only the Style and the Sections parameters to alter the document
appearance and define which sections of the last tool sheet you want to display.

The Show button displays the generated tool sheet.

107
2.15 Milling STL CAM-Part

This functionality enables you to define the machining projects based on output of 3D scanning
devices in the STL format. The received STL file contains data on the shape and visual properties
of the scanned real-world object upon which the machining project will be based. Such parts can
be machined using the SolidCAM 3D, HSM and 5-Axis milling capabilities. The peculiarity of such
projects definition is that the STL graphic body cannot be divided into separate elements in the way
a CAD design model can be. Therefore, the definition of such CAM-Part is different from a regular
milling project.

2.15.1 Starting a new Milling-STL CAM-Part

1. Click SolidCAM, New, Milling-STL.

2. The New Milling Part dialog box is displayed and enables you to choose an
STL file similar to the CAD design file chosen for CAM-Part definition.

3. In the Directory section, you need to specify the path to the location where
the CAM-Part will be saved by entering manually or by clicking on the Browse
button.

108
 2. CAM-Part

4. In the Model name section, click on the Browse button and choose the
required STL file.

5. In the Name section, you need to enter the name for your machining project.

When you confirm the New Milling Part dialog box, the Milling Part Data dialog box is displayed
as for a regular milling project definition. The graphic body is displayed in the SolidWorks graphic
area. It can be zoomed and rotated.

109
2.15.2 Coordinate System definition

Similar to a regular milling CAM-Part, the first definition stage is that of Coordinate System. Click
on the Define button in the Coordinate System section. Since you cannot select separate elements
of the STL graphic body, you can define the Coordinate System by entering the coordinates in
the Define mode (X,Y,Z) and/or by rotating the model into the required view and capturing in the
Normal to current view mode (see topic 2.2.2).

110
 2. CAM-Part

2.15.3 Stock model definition

When the Coordinate System is defined, a box is calculated surrounding the model. Using this box,
you can define the Stock model with the 3D Box option (see topic 2.4.1).

2.15.4 Target model definition

The target model is defined by clicking on the Browse button in the Choose STL dialog box and
choosing the original STL file from the browser dialog box.

When the CAM-Part is defined, you can add 3D Milling, HSM, HSS and 5-Axis operations for its
machining.

111
2.16 Support of DriveWorks

The DriveWorks Design Automation software automates repetitive

tasks and allows you to generate your design and manufacturing outputs
automatically. This software is integrated in SolidCAM enabling the
automation of the design-to-manufacture processes.

The main principle of the DriveWorks functionality is creating rule-based

tasks for automatic modification of parameters of the parts. Based on
a SolidWorks model with given parameters, DriveWorks enables you to
create similar models with modified parameters and/or features (for
example, size changed, holes removed, etc.).

When DriveWorks is used to modify a SolidWorks model on which a SolidCAM Part is based,
DriveWorks copies the original model into a separate directory and performs the required
modifications.
DriveWorks SolidCAM

Original CAM-Part

Original model

Change
Reference
Model
Copy of CAM-Part

Modified model Synchronize

&
Calculate

Modified CAM-Part

112
 2. CAM-Part

After this stage, DriveWorks automatically starts SolidCAM, where the original part is copied into
the same location with the updated model. The copied CAM-Part is opened in SolidCAM and the
reference model of the opened CAM-Part is automatically replaced with the modified model, the
synchronization is automatically performed and the operations are recalculated.

In such manner, machining of new parts with different parameters and features can be performed
automatically using the defined modification rules.

For more information about the DriveWorks software, visit www.driveworks.co.uk.

113
114
Tools and
Tool Libraries 3
The tool commands can be used to create and manage tools and tool
libraries in SolidCAM. You can save your programming time if you save
the tools you use most often in customizable tool libraries.
The tool libraries can be based on machine tooling, materials or any
other personal criteria. When you define your machining operations,
you can then load the tool, and all its parameters, feed and spin values
are automatically copied into the operation.

 Working with Part Tool Table

 Working with Current Tool Library
 Managing Tool Libraries
 Defining tools
 Tool types
 Shaped tools
 Tool holding system
3.1 User-Defined Tool Types

For easier identification and classification of tools, you can define your own tool types.
SolidCAM offers you the following default tool types:

• End mill
• Ball nose mill
• Bull nose mill
• Face mill
• Dove tail mill
• Taper mill
• Slot mill
• Lollipop mill
• Engraving tool
• Center drill
• Spot drill
• Drill
• Chamfer drill
• Tap
• Reamer
• Bore
• Thread mill
• Thread taper

User-defined tool types can also be used to define new tools and to search tool libraries.

116
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.1 End mill

This tool type is used for the definition of rough/finish end mills.

The tools of this type are defined with the parameters shown in the image.

Arbor Diameter

Total
Length
Outside
Holder
Shoulder Length
Length Cutting
Length

Diameter

The diameter and the length of the cylindrical arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and (Total
Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or equal
to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length.

When a new tool is created, the default value of the Arbor Diameter is equal to that of the Diameter,
and the default value of the Shoulder Length is equal to that of the Cutting Length.

117
3.1.2 Ball nose mill

A tool of this type is defined with the parameters shown in the image.

Arbor Diameter

Total
Length
Outside
Shoulder Holder
Length Cutting Length
Length

Diameter Corner Radius

The Corner Radius value of a Ball nose mill tool is equal to half the Diameter value and cannot be
changed.

The diameter and the length of the cylindrical arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and (Total
Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or equal
to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length.

When a new tool is created, the default value of the Arbor Diameter is equal to that of the Diameter,
and the default value of the Shoulder Length is equal to that of the Cutting Length.

118
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.3 Bull nose mill

A tool of this type is defined with the parameters shown in the image.

Arbor Diameter

Total
Length
Outside
Shoulder Holder
Length Cutting Length
Length

Diameter Corner Radius

The Corner Radius value of a Bull nose mill tool must be in the range from 0 to half the Diameter
value.

The diameter and the length of the cylindrical arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and (Total
Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or equal
to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length.

When a new tool is created, the default value of the Arbor Diameter is equal to that of the Diameter,
and the default value of the Shoulder Length is equal to that of the Cutting Length.

119
3.1.4 Dove tail mill Outside
Arbor Holder
This tool type is used for dove tail slot machining. Diameter Length
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters Shoulder
shown in the image. Length

Total Angle
Length
Cutting
Length

Corner Radius Diameter

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Angle 0° < Angle < 90°

Corner Radius Corner Radius <= Diameter/2

Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length

Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

120
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.5 Face mill Arbor Diameter

Total Length

This tool type is used for face

milling. A tool of this type is
defined with the parameters shown Shoulder Outside
in the image. Length Holder
Length

Cutting
Length Angle

Tip Diameter

Diameter

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Tip Diameter Tip Diameter < Diameter

Angle 0° < Angle < 90°

Corner Radius <= Cutting Length

Corner Radius
Corner Radius <= Tip Diameter/2

Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length

Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

121
3.1.6 Slot mill Arbor
Diameter
This tool is used in a variety of applications
from simple 2.5D undercut profiles all the way
up to machining cavities in Simultaneous 5 Axis
operations. The parametric definition of a slot Total
mill tool also enables you to define a cylindrical Length Outside
Holder
tool with a tool shank with a relieved diameter.
Length

A tool of this type is defined with the parameters

shown in the image.
Corner Cutting
Radius Length
Diameter

122
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.7 Taper mill Outside

Holder
Length
This tool type is supported in the calculations of Arbor
the Sim. 5 Axis and 3D Milling Rough and Finish Diameter
operations. In 2.5D Milling operations such as Angle
Profile and Pocket, only the bottom diameter is
taken into account in the tool path calculation.
This tool is used for milling internal or external
walls with a constant draft angle. Total
Length Shoulder
Length Cutting
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters Length
shown in the image.
Cone
The diameter and the length of the cylindrical tool Length
arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and (Total Diameter
Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The
Shoulder Length value must be greater than or Tip Corner
equal to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to Diameter Radius
or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length.

• The default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that of the Diameter;

• The Shoulder Length value is equal to that of the following expression:

Cutting Length + (Outside Holder Length – Cutting Length)/2.

To define the taper tool by Tip diameter or by Cone Length, select the appropriate check box near
the Tip Diameter or the Cone Length edit boxes.

When the Tip Diameter check box is selected, the Cone Length check box is unselected and the
relevant edit box is disabled; the Cone Length value is thus automatically calculated.

123
When the Cone Length check box is selected, the Tip Diameter check box is unselected and the
relevant edit box is disabled; the Tip Diameter value is thus automatically calculated.

Note that the Tip Diameter is the diameter of the virtual intersection of the
conical shape with the bottom plane.

Tip Diameter
Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Tip Diameter Tip Diameter < Diameter

Angle 0° < Angle < 180°

Corner Radius <= Tip Diameter/2
Corner Radius
Corner Radius < Cone length
Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length

Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

124
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.8 Engraving tool Arbor Diameter

This tool type is used for engraving. A tool

of this type is defined with the parameters
shown in the image. Total
Length
Diameter Outside
Holder
Shoulder Length
Length

Cutting
Length Angle

Tip Diameter Corner Radius

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Angle 0° < Angle < 90°

Corner Radius Corner Radius <= Diameter/2

Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length

Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

125
3.1.9 Tap tool

This tool is used to machine the internal threads

in Drilling operations. It consists of two parts: Arbor Diameter
cylindrical and conical. A tool of this type is defined
with the parameters shown in the image. Total
Length Outside
Holder
Length
Chamfer Cutting
Length Length

Tip Diameter
Diameter

The diameter and the length of the cylindrical tool arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and (Total
Length - Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or equal
to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length. The
default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that of the Diameter, and the Shoulder Length value is equal
to that of the Cutting Length.

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Tip Diameter Tip Diameter < Diameter

Chamfer Length Chamfer Length < Cutting Length

Pitch 0 < Pitch < min (Diameter, Cutting Length)

Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

This tool can be used only in Drilling/3D Drilling operations.

126
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.10 Lollipop mill

This tool is used in the Simultaneous 5 Axis operations. There are two shapes of the lollipop mill
tool: with conical shoulder and without one. A tool of this type is defined with the parameters
shown in the image.

Arbor Diameter Arbor Diameter

Total Total
Length Length
Outside Outside
Holder Holder Shoulder
Length Length Length
Shoulder Cutting
Cutting
Length Length
Length

Diameter Diameter

Lollipop mill without conical shoulder

When the Conical shoulder check box is not selected, SolidCAM enables you to define the tool with
the cylindrical shoulder.

The diameter and the length of the cylindrical arbor are defined as
Arbor Diameter and (Total Length – Shoulder Length), respectively.
The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or equal to that of
the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside
Holder Length. The default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that
of the Diameter. The Shoulder Length value is equal to that of the
Cutting Length.

127
Lollipop mill with conical shoulder

When the Conical shoulder check box is selected, SolidCAM enables you to define the tool with the
conical shoulder.

The Arbor diameter value defines the upper diameter of the cone. The lower diameter of the cone
is calculated automatically as the diameter of the circle resulting from section of the sphere by the
horizontal plane located at the Cutting length distance from the tool nose. The cone starts from the
Cutting length distance and continues till the Shoulder length distance. Therefore, the cone length is
equal to the difference between the Shoulder length and Cutting length parameters.

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Cutting Length <= (Diameter+sqrt(Diameter^2-Arbor Diameter^2))/2

Cutting Length
Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length

Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder
Outside Holder Length <= Total Length
Length

128
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.11 Thread mill Arbor

Diameter
This tool is intended to machine the internal and
external threads in Thread Milling operations.

The following parameters define the geometry of Total

thread mill tools. Length
Outside
Holder
Length Shoulder
Length

Thread Diameter Thread

Cutting
Length

Pitch

SolidCAM enables you to define the Pitch of the thread as a Metric value (MM) or as a number of
tracks per inch (TPI).

When defining the tool parameters in the Part Tool Table, you can define the Pitch in accordance
with international standards such as ISO, Whitworth, and so forth.

In the Pitch/Standard field, choose the Table option and click on the
arrow to open the list and choose the standard according to which you
want to define the thread pitch.

This list is available only if the

Threading table is defined in the
SolidCAM Settings dialog box (see
topic 12.2.3).

When you choose one of the standards from the list, the
corresponding table is displayed in a separate window.

129
Choose the required value and confirm with the OK button.

You can open this table as an Excel file and edit its content. The path to
the table file can be found on the User directories page of the SolidCAM
Settings dialog box (see topic 12.2.3).

SolidCAM provides you with a link to the Vardex software for thread milling tool selection from
the Vardex tools library – TM Gen (www.vardex.com). This link enables you to define the thread mill
tool parameters and, based on this, it will search the Vardex library for the thread milling tools that
fit these parameters; you can then choose one of the offered tools for the operation.

When the Vardex option is chosen in the Standard combo box, SolidCAM launches the Vardex
tool library wizard (TM Wizard). The wizard guides you through the steps to define the parameters
of the tool you are looking for, selects a number of tools from the library that fit these parameters
and then enables you to choose one of these tools. When the tool is chosen, it is imported into the
SolidCAM tool library.

130
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.12 Thread taper

Arbor
A tool of this type is defined with the parameters shown Diameter
in the image. The Thread taper tool definition is similar
to the Thread Mill tool definition (see topic 3.1.11).
Total
Angle Length
Outside
Holder
Length Shoulder
Length

Thread Diameter Thread

Cutting
Length

3.1.13 Drill
Arbor Diameter
This tool type is used for the definition of drills, bores,
reams, threading tools, etc. A tool of this type is defined
with the parameters shown in the image.

Total
Outside
Length Shoulder
Length Cutting Holder
Length Length

Angle

Diameter

The diameter and the length of the cylindrical tool arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and
(Total Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value should be greater than
or equal to the Cutting Length value, and equal to or smaller than the Outside Holder Length value.
When a new tool is created, the default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that of the Diameter. The
default Shoulder Length value is equal to that of the Cutting Length.

131
3.1.14 Center drill
Arbor
This tool type is used for center drilling in Drilling Diameter
operations. A tool of this type is defined with the
parameters shown in the image.
Shoulder
Angle Total
Outside Length
Holder
Length
Cutting
Length
Angle

Tip Diameter Tip

Length

When this tool is used in combination with the Use chamfer option, SolidCAM calculates the
drilling depth according to the following expression:

Drilling Depth = Tip Length + Arbor Diameter/2 + cotan(Shoulder Angle/2)

Arbor Diameter

Cutting Length
Shoulder Angle
Chamfer Diameter

Drilling Depth

Tip Diameter Tip Length

Chamfer Diameter

132
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Tip Diameter Tip Diameter < Arbor Diameter

Tip Angle 0° < Tip Angle < 180°

Shoulder Angle 0° < Shoulder Angle < 180°

Tip Length Tip Length <= Cutting Length

Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

The length of the conical part defined by Tip Diameter and Tip Angle must be equal to or smaller
than the Tip Length value. The length of conical part can be calculated according to the following
expression: Cone Length = Tip diameter/(2*tan( Tip angle/2)).

133
3.1.15 Spot drill Arbor Diameter

This tool type is used for center drilling and

chamfering. A tool of this type is defined with the Diameter
parameters shown in the image.
Total Outside
Length Holder
Shoulder
Length
Length
Angle

Cutting Length

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Angle 0° < Angle < 180°

Tip Length Tip Length <= Cutting Length

Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

Note that the Cutting Length edit box is unavailable. This value is calculated
automatically according to the Diameter and Angle values.

134
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.16 Chamfer drill Arbor Diameter

This new tool type is used for chamfering. A tool

of this type is defined with the parameters shown
in the image.
Total
Length Outside
Shoulder
Holder
Length
Length Cutting
Length
Angle

Diameter

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Corner Radius Corner Radius <= Cutting Length

Angle 0° < Angle < 180°

Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length

Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

135
3.1.17 Reamer Arbor
Diameter
This tool is used to machine precise holes in Drilling
operations. A tool of this type is defined with the
parameters shown in the image.

Total
Outside
Length
Holder
Length
Cutting
Length

Chamfer
Diameter Length

The diameter and the length of the cylindrical tool arbor are defined as Arbor Diameter and
(Total Length – Shoulder Length), respectively. The Shoulder Length value must be greater than or
equal to that of the Cutting Length, and equal to or smaller than that of the Outside Holder Length.
The default Arbor Diameter value is equal to that of the Diameter.

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Cutting Length Chamfer Length <= Cutting Length <= Outside Holder Length

Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

136
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.1.18 Bore
Arbor
Diameter
This tool type is used for boring in
Drilling operations. A tool of this
type is defined with the parameters
shown in the image.
Total
Outside
Length
Holder Diameter
Length
Shoulder
Length

Corner Radius

Cutting Angle
Length

Parameter limitations

Parameter Range

Corner Radius Corner Radius <= Cutting Length

Angle 0° < Angle < 90°

Cutting Length Cutting Length <= Shoulder Length

Shoulder Length Shoulder Length <= Outside Holder Length

Outside Holder Length Outside Holder Length <= Total Length

137
3.1.19 Shaped Tools

This tool type is used for the definition of shaped end/rough mills and drill tools. The tool shape
is defined by a sketch. The Tool Diameter defined in the Part Tool Table describes the cutting
diameter of the shaped tool that will be coincident to the machining geometry.

For more information on Shaped tools, see topic 3.10.

3.1.20 Add new tool types

Based on one of the default tool types, you can create your own ones.

1. Click SolidCAM in the SolidWorks

main menu and choose Tool Library,
Tool type names.

The Tool Type Names dialog box is

displayed. This dialog box shows
the user-defined tool type names
and their actual SolidCAM default
internal tool types.

2. In the Tool Type Names dialog box,

right-click on an existing tool type name,
e.g. End Mill.

3. Choose Add from the menu.

4. A new entry is created. Enter the name

of the user-defined tool type.

5. By default, the new entry is of the Drill

tool type. Right-click on the Drill field
and select the relevant tool type from
the list.

138
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

6. When you finished making changes in the Tool type list, click on the Save
button to confirm your changes.

Double-click the tool type name to rename existing entries.

3.1.21 Tool type options

You can manage the user-defined tool types in the list.

1. In the Tool Type Names dialog box, right-click an existing tool type name.

2. Choose the Add or Rename option from the menu.

139
3.2 Tool Libraries

The tool libraries can be based on machine tooling, materials or any other personal criteria. When
you define your machining operations, you can then load the tool, and all its parameters, feed and
spin values are automatically copied to the operation.

The Part Tool Table is the tool library that contains all tools available for use in a specific CAM-Part.
The Part Tool Table is stored within the CAM-Part.

When you start a new CAM-Part and you want to copy the contents of a specific tool library into
the Part Tool Table of this CAM-Part automatically, specify its name in the MAC file of the CNC-
machine. This file is called the Machine Tool Table.

The Machine Tool table is defined in the MAC file by the following parameter:
tool_table_name = name; where name (without an extension) is the name
of the Tool Library located in the SolidCAM Tool Libraries folder defined in
the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.2.2).

Generally, the Machine Tool Table contains the tools situated in the Tool Magazine of the specified
CNC-machine.

SolidCAM enables you to define any

number of Tool Libraries. Each tool Operation Operation Operation
from the Tool Libraries can be imported
into the Part Tool Table. You can define Tool Tool Tool
one Tool Library that has a top priority CAM-Part
in the list for import: the Current Tool Part Tool Table
Library.

Tools imported at start Tools imported at user choise

Machine Tool Table Current Tool Library

Tool Library ToolLibrary

Tool Library

Tool Library

Tool Library

140
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.3 Working with the Part Tool Table

The Part Tool Table is the tool library that contains all tools available for use in a specific CAM-Part.
The Part Tool Table is stored within the CAM-Part.

The Part Tool Table dialog box (see topic 3.6) enables you to manage the tools contained in the Part
Tool Table.

1. Choose the Part Tool table option from the right-click menu of the Tool
header in SolidCAM Manager.

2. The Part Tool Table dialog box is displayed.

141
3.4 Working with the Current Tool Library

SolidCAM enables you to manage your Current Tool

Libraries using the right-click
menu of the Tool header in
SolidCAM Manager.

• Set Tool Library

This option enables you to set

the Current Tool Library. You
have to specify the type of the
Current Tool Library (Milling,
Turning or Turn-Mill) and choose
the relevant Tool Library from
the browser dialog box. The
Current Tool Library is selected
and displayed in the Tool Table
dialog box (see topic 3.6).

• Close Tool Library

This option enables you to close

the Current Tool Library.

This option is available only when the Current Tool Library is already defined.

• Show Tool Library

This option enables you to display the content of the Current Tool Library. The Tool
Table dialog box enables you to manage the tools in the Current Tool Library.

This option is available only when the Current Tool Library is already defined.

• Recent Tool Libraries

This option displays the list of recently loaded Current Tool Libraries. You can open
a file by simply clicking on its name in the list. The Tool Table dialog box is displayed.

142
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.5 Managing Tool Libraries

SolidCAM enables you to manage your Tool Libraries using

the Tool Library menu available in the SolidCAM main menu.

3.5.1 Edit Tool Library

This option enables you to display the content of the specific Tool Library.

When you choose this option, the Load dialog box is

displayed.

1. Select the name of the tool

library you want to load.

2. Double-click on its name or

select it and click on the Open
button. The Tool Table dialog
box is displayed. This dialog
box enables you to manage
the tools in the chosen Tool
Library.

3.5.2 Create Tool Library

This option enables you to define a new Tool Library.

1. Choose the Tool Library type (Milling,

Turning or Turn-Mill) from the submenu.

143
 2. Define the Tool Library name.

3. Confirm the Tool Library

creation with the OK button.
The Tool Library is created.
The Tool Table dialog box
is displayed enabling you to
add tools to the new Tool
Library.

4. Confirm the Tool Table

dialog box with the OK
button.

3.5.3 Copy Tool Library

This option enables you to create an identical copy of a tool library in another folder or drive for
backup purposes or for making modifications without changing the original. The Copy Tool Library
dialog box is displayed.

1. In the left window, choose

the drive and directory from
which you want to copy the
original tool library.

2. Select the tool library you

want to copy.

3. Move the selection of tool

libraries you want to copy to
the middle window by clicking
the Left to Right arrow.

4. Choose the drive and the directory into which you want to copy in the right
window.

5. Click on the Copy button.

144
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.5.4 Delete Tool Library

This field enables you to delete tool libraries. The Delete dialog box is displayed.

1. Select the tool libraries you want to delete. Use the Ctrl key to select several
tool libraries together.

2. Click on the Delete button.

3. The confirmation message is displayed:

4. Choose Yes or Yes to All to delete all selected tool libraries.

145
3.6 Tool Table dialog box

The Tool Table dialog box contains

structured information about all tools
included in the specified Tool Library. This
dialog box enables you to add new tools to
the Tool Library, remove tools from the
Tool Library, edit the tool definition, etc.
The dialog box contains two pages:
• View

This page displays the tools

of the Tool Library in a table
format.

• Edit

This page enables adding of new tools or editing of existing tools in the Tool Library.

3.6.1 Tools Filter

SolidCAM enables you to filter tools
displayed in the Tool Table dialog box.

• All

All the tools are displayed.

• Used

Only the tools used in

Operations of the current
CAM-Part are displayed.

• Unused

Only the tools unused in operations of the current CAM-Part are displayed.

The filter is available only for the Part Tool Table.

146
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.6.2 Tool range

If you work with large tool libraries, you can

use this option to reduce the number of tools
displayed. You can also search the tool table for
tools that match your criteria.

In the Range dialog box, enter

the required properties of the
tool. Enter only values that are
different; leave the other fields
unchanged.

The User-defined tool type section enables you to

choose the type of tools you would like to have
listed in the tool library.

The Rough tools only and Do not display rough

tools options enable you to handle Rough tools
(see topic 3.6.5) during the tools sorting.

• The Rough tools only option enables

you to display only rough tools in the
tools list.
• When the Do not display rough tools check box is selected, the tools marked as Rough
are not displayed.

The Tool number section lists results according to the tool numbers.

The Diameter section enables you to choose the range using the diameter of the tools you would
like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools with a diameter
from 1 to 16, enter 1 in the From box and 16 in the To box.

The Number of flutes section enables you to choose the range using the number of flutes of the
tools you would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools
with 1 to 4 flutes, enter 1 in the From box and 4 in the To box.

The Pitch section enables you to choose the range using the pitch of the tap tools you would like to
have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tap tools with the Pitch from
0.5 to 1.5, enter 0.5 in the From box and 1.5 in the To box.

The Arbor diameter section enables you to choose the range using the arbor diameter of the tools
you would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools with
an arbor diameter from 1 to 16, enter 1 in the From box and 16 in the To box.

147
The Taper angle section enables you to choose the range using the taper angle of the tools you
would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that have
a taper angle from 20° to 30°, enter 20 in the From box and 30 in the To box.

The Number of threads section enables you to choose the range using the number of threads of the
tools you would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools
with 2 to 4 threads, enter 2 in the From box and 4 in the To box.

The ID number section enables you to choose the range of the ID numbers of the tools you would
like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools with an ID
number from 10 to 100, enter 10 in the From box and 100 in the To box.

The Corner radius section enables you to choose the range using the corner radius of the tools you
would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that have
a corner radius from 0 to 4, enter 0 in the From box and 4 in the To box.

The Angle section enables you to choose the range using the angle of the tools you would like to
have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that have an angle from
90° to 180°, enter 90 in the From box and 180 in the To box.

The Chamfer length section enables you to choose the range using the chamfer length of the tools
you would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that
have a chamfer length from 2 to 5, enter 2 in the From box and 5 in the To box.

The Tip diameter section enables you to choose the range using the tip diameter of the tools you
would like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that have
a tip diameter from 5 to 10, enter 5 in the From box and 10 in the To box.

The Tip length section enables you to choose the range using the tip length of the tools you would
like to have listed in the tool library. If, for example, you would like to list the tools that have a tip
length from 5 to 10, enter 5 in the From box and 10 in the To box.

Click on the Execute button to start searching the tool library for the tools that meet your
requirements. SolidCAM will return to the tool library and display the result of the range search.

The Reset to defaults button returns you to the original program settings of this dialog box.

3.6.3 Show
This button enables you to display the selected tool.

148
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.6.4 View

Tool data

This page displays the tool data in the table

format. The table contains the following
columns:
• Tool Number

This column displays the number

of a tool in the Tool Library.
• ID Number

This column displays the ID

number of a tool.
• User-defined tool type name

This column displays the tool

type.
• Description

This column displays the description of a tool.

This page also displays the geometric parameters of a tool depending on its type.

3.6.5 Edit

This page enables you to edit the existing

tools in the Tool Library (see topic 3.7).

149
Rough tools

SolidCAM enables you to define rough tools of all the following types:

• End mill

• Bull nose mill

• Ball nose mill

• Face mill

• Taper mill

• Slot mill

• Drill

• Bore

• Dove tail mill

The Rough check box enables you to mark the tool as suitable for
rough milling. The Rough status of the tool can be used for the tools
sorting with the Range option (see topic 3.6.2).

Tool units

You can assign different unit of measurement data for each tool in the
tool library. The tool library can simultaneously store tools with Metric
parameters along with those defined in Inches. This functionality
enables you to use tools defined in units different from those of the
CAM-Part, without converting the tool parameters into the CAM-Part
units. You can choose the units for the tool diameter values and tool
lengths separately.

The Mm and Inch buttons enable you to switch between the Metric and
the Inch system of measurement.

150
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

When a tool library created in a previous SolidCAM version is loaded, the

following message is displayed:

When you confirm this message, the Assign Units dialog box is displayed so
that you can assign units for tools.

Angular dimensions

The button appears in the

parameters with angular values.

By clicking this button, you can switch

the angle value from the degrees/
minutes/seconds format to the decimal
format and vice versa. In the first case,
the edit box that displays the value is
disabled.

When the value is displayed as a decimal,

the edit box is available, and the value
can be edited.

151
3.7 Managing tools

SolidCAM enables you to manage the tools in the tool library with the buttons at the bottom of the
dialog box.

All these commands are also available in the right-click menu.

Permanent Tool

If a particular tool is always used in the same magazine position in the machine, this
tool can be marked as Permanent Tool. If you use the Tool Renumbering function, a
tool marked as Permanent Tool is not renumbered.

Add Tool

This option enables you to add a new tool to the tool library. When you choose this
option, the Tool Type dialog box is displayed so that you can choose the tool type.
When you click on a tool to add it to the library, the Tool Type dialog box is closed
automatically and the Part Tool Table is displayed again.

152
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

Change tool type

This option enables you to add the type of the existing tool. When you choose this
option, the Tool Type dialog box is displayed so that you can choose the required tool
type.

Copy Tool

This option enables you to create a copy of an existing tool.

Delete Tool

This option enables you to delete the selected tool.

Renumber Tools

This option enables you to perform automatic tool renumbering.

When the tool numbers in the list are not sequential
increments of 1, this option enables you to renumber the
tools sequentially by increments of 1. The tools can also
be renumbered starting from a specific number that you
choose.

1. Right-click on a tool in the list and choose the

Renumber Tools command, from the menu, or
click on the Renumber button at the bottom of
the dialog box.
2. You are prompted to enter a new number for the
first tool.

The Sort by option enables you to assign numbers

to tools according to the operation sequence or
the Tool sequence.
When you confirm the Tools Renumbering
dialog box, the tools are renumbered accordingly,
starting from the number of the first tool.

153
 3. Recalculate the CAM-Part. The CAM-Part must be recalculated to ensure
that the GCode contains the correct tool number for each operation.

A tool marked as Permanent tool is not renumbered.

Import Tool

This option enables you to import tools to the Tool Library from the Current Tool
Library or any other Tool Library. The Tool Libraries list is displayed. The Current
Tool Library, which is the first in the list, is automatically chosen.

You can choose the location of the Tool Libraries for the tools import.

The Library name box enables you to choose the Tool table for the tools import.
The File type box enables you to import tools from SolidCAM Tool libraries, Excel
files and from CSV files.
If the Current Tool Library is defined, it is automatically chosen as a source for tool
import.
The Tool list displays all the tools contained in the
specified tool library. The right-click menu is available.
The Copy to Table option imports the selected tools to
the Tool Library. To import all tools from the list, click
Copy all to Table.

154
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

Update to Machine tool table

This option enables you to update the Machine Tool Table with the tools of an active
Tool Library.

This option is available only when:

• The Tool Table dialog box is loaded outside the operation.

• The Machine Tool Table is defined in the MAC file.

The Update to Machine tool table dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box displays the name of the Machine Tool

Table. The Used Tools only option enables you to update
the Machine Tool Table only with the tools used in
operations.

Update of the tools is affected by the Tool search parameters defined in

the SolidCAM Settings. The system compares the tool parameters with
corresponding check boxes selected and performs the update accordingly.

Export all tools

This option enables you to export all the tool data to an Excel-compatible file (*.xls,
*.csv).

Export selected tools

This option enables you to export the data of the selected tools to an Excel-compatible
file.

155
3.8 Tool data

SolidCAM enables you to define the Tool with the following data:

• Geometric parameters;
• Tool material;
• Feed and Spin defaults;
• Tool holder.

Tool definition

Tool material Speed and

Feed Tool Holder Geometry definition

L
H

The Tool Data area displays the parameters of the selected tool.

156
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

The Tool Topology page contains the Topology data of the tool, such as diameter, length, angle,
corner radius, etc.
The Default Tool Data page contains the default Tool Material data, Feed and Spin data and diameter
and length offset numbers.
The Tool Message page contains fields, in which user messages are entered.
The Tool Coolant page enables you to choose the coolant options that will be used by default for
the current tool.
The Holder page enables you to define the tool holder by choosing it from the global or local tool
table and specifying the related parameters.
The Shape page enables you to choose a shaped tool for the operation.

3.8.1 Tool Topology page

Tool number

The Tool number is a numerical identifier of the tool, i.e. the numerical name of the tool, whose
value has to be an integer. It enables you to define tool numbers according to the numbering system
that you are used to. The Tool number is used in the GCode when the tool changes, the tool length
and radius values for tool compensation (G4x) are read from the machine controller.

The Max_Tool_Number parameter in the MAC file defines the total number of tools that can be
defined. In other words, this parameter defines the capacity of the cutter magazine of your CNC-
machine.

157
SolidCAM checks the total number of tools in the Part Tool Table during the following operations:

• Adding, copying or importing tools;

• Loading the CAM-Part;

• Inserting Machining Process;

• Creating new tools by AFRM.

When the total number of tools exceeds the Max_Tool_Number, SolidCAM displays an error
message.

The Tools in list field displays the total number of tools defined in the Tool Library.

ID number

You can use any number, e.g. the catalog number of the tool to facilitate its identification.

When a new tool is defined, SolidCAM sets the Tool number to the first
unused number. This default Tool number can be changed. When you
change the Tool number, make a note that this parameter has to be unique
for each tool.

If a particular tool always has the same number and cannot be changed, this tool can be marked as
Permanent. For example, when the Tool number represents the number of a tool magazine pocket
used for the tool, the Permanent mark means that the tool is always located in this pocket.

If you use the Tool Renumbering function (see topic 3.7), a tool marked as Permanent is not
renumbered.

Diameter

This field defines the cutting diameter of the tool.

Corner Radius/Angle

When the tool type is End mill/Ball nose mill/Bull nose mill, the Corner Radius field is displayed.
When the tool type is Drill, the Angle field is displayed.

158
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

• Corner Radius

This field defines the corner radius of the tool. There are three possibilities:

R R
D D D
In Ball nose mills, the In Bull nose mills, the corner
In End mills, the corner
corner radius is equal to the radius is smaller than the
radius is zero.
radius of the tool. radius of the tool.

• Angle

This field defines the drill point angle of the tool (between 0.01 and
180 degrees). D

Arbor diameter

This field defines the diameter of the tool arbor.

A

Arbor diameter
This parameter is relevant only for Slot, Lollipop
and Taper tools.

Thread diameter

This field defines the diameter of the thread of the Tap tool.

Tip Diameter

This field defines the lower diameter of the conical part of the Tap tool.

159
Chamfer length

This field defines the length of the conical part of the

Tap tool.

Pitch Total
Length

This field defines the pitch of the Tap tool. The Pitch Chamfer
Cutting
Length
is the distance between corresponding vertices of Length
adjacent teeth of a thread.

The Thread diameter, Tip Tip Diameter

diameter, Chamfer length and
Thread Diameter
Pitch parameters are relevant
only for Tap tools.

Length

This field defines the length of the tool. In milling calculations, the system does not use this data;
the length of the tool is only the output to the GCode file.
Total Length

Cutting Length

Outside Holder
Length

• Total

The total tool length.

• Outside Holder

The length of the tool outside the tool holder.

• Cutting

The length of the cutting part of the tool.

160
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

• H Length
Spindle
The distance from the tool end to the
CNC-machine spindle.

Number of flutes

This field defines the number of teeth of the tool.

This field is used when calculating the feed in the Feed
rate type FZ. H length
Tool Holder

For Tap tools, the Number of

flutes value is always 1. The
value cannot be edited.

Description

This field enables you to enter a description of the tool (up to 40 characters).

3.8.2 Default Tool Data page

Tool material

This field describes one or more of the following properties of the tool:
• The Material of the tool (High Speed Steel, Carbide, etc.);
• The Working conditions of the tool;
• The Use of the tool (rough, finish, etc.).

161
The Tool material is used to define the Speed and Feed defaults.

When you choose the Tool material, the feed type is changed to FZ and the spin type to V. The Feed
and Spin values are default system values since the Work material has not been defined yet. Loading
the tool to an operation connects the Tool material to the Work material and the correct Feed and
Spin values are loaded from the Speed/Feed defaults table.

For Tap tools, the FZ value does not depend on the Tool Material. The Spin Rate value can be
customized for different Tool Materials. In this case, changing the Tool Material changes the Spin
Rate. Since the Spin Rate value is part of the formula of the F calculation, the F parameter value
has to be recalculated.

Spin

This field defines the spinning speed of the tool. It defines two spin values:
• Spin Rate – Normal spin rate; used in rough milling.
• Spin Finish – Finish spin rate; used in finish milling.

The Spin finish check box enables you to optionally define different values for Spin rate and Spin
finish. When this check box is selected, the corresponding edit box is available so that you can edit
its value. When this check box is not selected, the specified Spin rate value is used for both rough
and finish machining.

For Drill and Tap tools, the Spin Finish parameter is not relevant.

The spin value can be defined in two types of units: S and V.

S is the default and it signifies Revolutions per Minute. V signifies Material cutting speed in Meters/
Minute in the Metric system or in Feet/Minute in the Inch system; it is calculated according to the
following formula:
V = (S * PI * Tool Diameter) / 1000 (for the Metric system);
V = (S * PI * Tool Diameter) / 12 (for the Inch system).

Feed

This field defines the feed rate of the tool. It defines three feed values:
• Feed XY – Feed rate in the XY plane.
• Feed Z – Feed rate in the Z direction.
• Feed Finish – Feed rate used for finish milling.

162
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

The Feed finish check box enables you to optionally define different values for Feed XY and Feed
finish. When this check box is selected, the corresponding edit box is available so that you can edit
its value. When this check box is not selected, the specified Feed XY value is used for both rough
and finish machining.

For Drill and Tap tools, the Feed XY and Feed Finish parameters are not relevant.

The feed value can be defined in two types of units: F and FZ.

F is the default and it signifies Units per minute. FZ signifies Units per tooth and is calculated
according to the following formula:
FZ = F/(Number of Flutes * S)

For Tap tools, SolidCAM automatically calculates Feed Z (F and FZ) according
to the following formulas:
F=Spin Rate * Pitch

FZ=Pitch

Calculated values are displayed in Feed Z field. These values cannot be changed. The F/FZ buttons
enable you to check the parameter values.

3D Model - entry only

When this check box is selected, the defined Feed Z is used for vertical movements only.

When this check box is not selected, the defined Feed Z is used for all movements when the
Z-coordinate changes.

This option is available only for 3D Milling operations.

Diameter offset number

This parameter defines the number of the Diameter Offset Register of the current tool in the
Offset table of the CNC-machine.

Length offset number

This parameter defines the number of the Length Offset Register of the current tool in the Offset
table of the CNC-machine.

163
Second offset number

This parameter defines the register number of the upper cutting face offset, in the offset table of
the CNC-machine. This option enables SolidCAM to automatically take into account the minor size
differences between the defined tool and the one actually used for cutting the workpiece, if there
are any. You may choose not to use this option by clearing the check box.

This option is available only for T-Slot operations.

3.8.3 Tool Message page

In this page, you can enter text messages for the GCode.

The text strings entered in the Message 1 – Message 5 fields appear in the GCode file to help you
easily find information related to the tool in the GCode file when converting from one machine to
another.

164
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.8.4 Holder page

This page enables you to choose the tool holder parts from the tool holders table (for more
information on the tool holders use, see topic 3.9).
To activate the options, select the Use Holder check box.

The tool adaptor is defined in the MAC file according to your CNC-machine.
If the tool adaptor is not described in the MAC file, the first tool adaptor
from the table is used.

Global holders table

The Tool Holders dialog box is displayed so that you can choose the tool holder components from
the Global holders table. The selected tool is copied to the Local holders table related to the current
CAM-Part, and its parameters are displayed in the Tool adaptor and Tool extension fields after you
confirm the Tool Holders dialog box.

Local holders table

This option enables you to choose the tool holder component previously used in the current CAM-
Part from the Local holders table. The Tool Holders dialog box is displayed. The parameters of the
selected tool are displayed in the Tool adaptor and Tool extension fields after you confirm the Tool
Holders dialog box.

Shape Edit

This option enables you to change dimensions of the selected clamping adaptor. The Tool Holders
dialog box is displayed. Click on the Edit page to modify the parameters of the tool holder.

165
3.8.5 Tool Coolant page

This page enables you to choose the coolant options that will be used by default for the current tool.

When a tool is chosen for use in a specific operation, the default coolant options are automatically
applied to the tool use in this operation. The tool coolant options can be changed for each operation.

All the existing coolant types are listed with corresponding check boxes. When a check box is
selected, the related coolant option is used.

The coolant options available for use on the current CNC-machine, according to
the MAC-file settings, are marked with asterisks (*).

The Minimum Quantity Lubrication edit box is enabled only when the corresponding
check box is selected. The default value of this parameter is 0; the possible values are integers in
the range from 0 to 99999. When the entered value is out of range, the error message is displayed.

When a new tool is defined, it is assigned the default tool coolant options according to the following
rules:
• When a tool is created in the Part Tool Table, it is assigned the options according to the
Part Settings.

• When a new tool is defined not in context of CAM-Part (all the tool tables except for the
Part Tool Table), it is assigned the options according to the SolidCAM Settings.

166
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

When a tool is defined in the Part Tool Table with the coolant options not supported by the current
CNC-machine, a notification message is displayed when you confirm the Part Tool Table dialog box.

The Yes button returns you to the Part Tool Table dialog box to edit the coolant options. The No
button confirms the defined coolant options and continues the process. The GCode will not be
generated for the tool coolant options that are not supported.

3.8.6 Shape page

This page enables you to choose the shaped tool from the local/global shaped tools table (for more
information on the shaped tools use, see topic 3.10).

To activate the options, select the Use Shape check box.

Global shaped tools table

The Shaped tools dialog box is displayed enabling you to choose the shaped tool from the Global
shaped tools table. The selected tool is copied to the Local shaped tools table related to the current
CAM-Part, and its parameters are displayed in the Group name and Shape name fields after you
confirm the Shaped tools dialog box.

167
Local shaped tools table

This option enables you to choose the previously used in the current CAM-Part shape tool from the
Local shaped tools table. The Shaped tools dialog box is displayed. The parameters of the selected
tool are displayed in the Group name and Shape name fields after you confirm the Shaped tools
dialog box.

Shape Edit

This option enables you to change dimensions of the selected shape tool. The Shaped tools dialog
box is displayed. Click on the Edit page to modify the parameters of the tool.

STL

This option enables you to export tools saved in the STL format. The Export Tool dialog box is
displayed.

Choose the required file and click on the Open button.

168
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.9 Tool Holding system

SolidCAM enables you to define a variety of tool holders

}
to help you check and prevent all possible collisions of
the tool holding system with the workpiece. This feature
also enables you to see a more realistic simulation in the
SolidVerify mode.
Tool holding
system
The SolidCAM tool holder is defined by combining two
components. The first component is the tool adaptor
mounted in the spindle unit of the milling machine.
The second component may consist of different types
of extensions and reductions like collet chucks, arbors,
shanks and any other components that you may have.
Tool adaptor

Tool

Extensions and
reductions

3.9.1 Tool Holders dialog box

This dialog box enables you to define and operate your tool
holders.

1. Click on the SolidCAM item in the

SolidWorks main menu.

2. Choose the Tool Holders item from

the Tool Library submenu.

169
 3. The Tool Holders dialog box is displayed.
A CAD model file is also displayed so
that you can define the geometry of the
new holders.

Tool holder component tables

The first list displayed above enables you to define and manage your tool
adaptors.

1. Right-click on the item name in the table.

2. Choose a command from the submenu.

• Add Holder Component

This option enables you to define the geometry of the new tool adaptor that will be
added to the table. The Holder Geometry dialog box is displayed.
• Generate

This option generates the sketch in the model file with the geometry of the selected
tool adaptor.
• Replace

This option enables you to replace the existing tool adaptor geometry with a new one.
The Holder Geometry dialog box is displayed. Select the new geometry.
• Delete

This option enables you to remove the tool adaptor part from the list.
• Rename

This option enables you to assign a new name to the tool adaptor.

170
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

• Copy

This option enables you to create a copy of the existing tool adaptor.

The second list enables you to define and manage groups of reductions and
extensions such as collet chucks, arbors, shanks, etc.

1. Right-click on the group/component name in the table.

2. Choose a command from the submenu.

• Add Group

This option enables you to create a group of components and to define separate
groups for tool holders components of the same type.
• Add Holder Component

This option enables you to define the geometry of the new component that will be
added to the current group of the parts table. The Holder Geometry dialog box is
displayed.
• Generate

This option generates the sketch in the model file with the geometry of the selected
tool holder.
• Replace

This option enables you to replace the existing holder geometry with a new one. The
Holder Geometry dialog box is displayed. Select the new geometry.

• Delete

This option enables you to remove the tool holder component from the list.
• Rename

This option enables you to assign a new name to the tool holder component or group.

171
 • Copy

This option enables you to create a copy of the existing tool holder component.

Description

SolidCAM enables you to type a brief description of the tool holder component (reduction or
extension).

Show page

This page enables you to see a 3D model of the tool holder.

In the graphic area of this page you can rotate, zoom and pan the 3D model
of the tool holder.
Use the following combinations:
• Middle mouse button – Rotation of tool holder
• Shift + Middle mouse button – Zoom of tool holder
• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool holder
Edit page

This page enables you to edit the parameters of the selected tool holder component.

1. Select the tool holder component.

2. Switch to the Edit page to change the dimensions of the tool holder
component.

The interactive picture of the selected tool holder component

is displayed. The parameters pages are located below the
picture.

SolidCAM divides the tool holder component into solid

segments like cylinders, cones or toruses. For each solid
primitive, SolidCAM determines the actual dimensions.

For more information on this subject, see topic 3.9.3.

You can change the dimensions of each segment with its
specific page.

1. Select the segment on the picture or through the tabs below the picture.
2. Type the new value of the parameter in the value field.

172
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.9.2 Tool Holder Geometry definition

This dialog box enables you to define the geometry of the tool holder component.

Define chain

This option enables you to define a new chain of the component geometry.
The Chain Options dialog box is displayed. In the model file displayed, you can
sketch the shape of half the tool holder component and then define the chain.
The direction of the chain does not matter.

Note that the left side of the sketch is the bottom of the
tool holder component and the right side is the top.

Replace chain

This command enables you to replace a chain in the current chain geometry.

Edit chain

This command enables you to update a chain in the current chain geometry.

Reference point

This option enables you to define the reference point through which the rotation axis of the tool
holder component passes.

3.9.3 Tool Holder segments

SolidCAM determines three types of segments of the Holder Geometry.

Cylinder Diameter

• Diameter

• Height
Height

173
Cone Angle

• Top Diameter
Top Diameter
• Bottom Diameter
Height
• Height

• Angle

Bottom Diameter

The following rules apply when parameters are changed:

• Changing of the Angle causes Top Diameter change

• Changing of the Bottom Diameter causes Height change
• Changing of the Top Diameter causes Bottom Diameter change
• Changing of the Height causes Bottom Diameter change

Torus
• Top Diameter
Top Diameter
• Radius
Start
• Start Angle Angle
• Sweep Sweep
• Bottom Diameter

Bottom Diameter Radius

The following rules apply when parameters are changed:

• Changing of the Radius causes Bottom Diameter change

• Changing of the Top Diameter causes Bottom Diameter change
• Changing of the Bottom Diameter causes Top Diameter change
• Changing of the Start Angle causes Bottom Diameter change
• Changing of the Sweep Angle causes Top Diameter change

174
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.9.4 Using Tool Holders

SolidCAM enables you to choose the tool holder component through the Tool Holders dialog box.

Note that the tool adaptor section is inactive and you cannot select the
adaptor type. SolidCAM enables you to define the Tool adaptor in the MAC
file with the following string:
mac_holder = BT45

If the parameter is not defined in the MAC file, SolidCAM will use the first
adaptor from the list; the extenders are the same for all the adaptors.

If all your machines use the same type of adaptor, you do not need to define
the mac_holder parameter. In the table, drag and drop the requested
adaptor to the first place on the list.

In the Show area, SolidCAM displays the 3D model of the selected tool holder.

In the graphic area of this page you can rotate, zoom and pan the 3D model
of the tool holder.

Use the following combinations:

• Middle mouse button – Rotation of tool holder
• Shift + Middle mouse button – Zoom of tool holder
• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool holder

175
Holders Edit dialog box

The Holders Edit dialog box enables you to edit the

dimensions of the selected tool holder component.
This dialog box contains two tabs:

Show

This page displays a 3D model of the

selected tool holder component.

In the graphic area of this page you can rotate, zoom and pan the 3D model
of the tool holder.

Use the following combinations:

• Middle mouse button – Rotation of tool holder
• Shift + Middle mouse button – Zoom of tool holder

• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool holder.

Edit

The interactive picture of the selected tool

holder component is displayed. The tool
holder component is divided into segments
such as cylinders, cones and toruses.

The Parameters table below the picture

enables you to edit the actual dimensions
of the tool holder component.

1. Select the holder’s element

on the picture or through
the parameter pages.

2. Type the new value of the parameter in the value field.

176
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

3.10 Shaped Tools

In addition to three built-in tool types, SolidCAM enables you

to use shaped tools. The geometry of these tools is defined
with a sketch. This way you can create your own database of
tapered mills, T-shaped mills, etc.

3.10.1 Shaped Tools dialog box

This dialog box enables you to define and operate your shaped
tools.

Choose the SolidCAM item from the SolidWorks main menu. Choose the
Shaped tools item from the Tool Library submenu.

The Shaped Tools dialog box is

displayed. A CAD model file is also
displayed so that you can define the
geometry of new shaped tools.

177
Tool list

This field displays the database of shaped tools defined in SolidCAM. With this list you can define
and manage shaped tools.

1. Right-click on any item in the browser field of the

Shaped Tools dialog box. The following menu is
displayed.

2. Choose the specific command from the menu.

• Add Group

This option enables you to create a group of shaped tools.

You can define separate groups for shaped tools of the same
type.
• Add Tool

This option enables you to define the geometry of the newly shaped tool that will
be added to the current group of the shaped tools table. The Shaped Tool Geometry
dialog box is displayed.
• Generate

This option generates a sketch in the model file with the geometry of the selected
shaped tool.
• Replace

This option enables you to replace the existing shaped tool geometry with a new one.
The Shaped Tool Geometry dialog box is displayed. Select the new geometry.
• Delete

This option enables you to remove the shaped tool from the database.
• Rename

This option enables you to assign a new name to the selected shaped tool or group.
• Copy

This option enables you to create a copy of the selected shaped tool.

178
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

Description

You can place a brief description of the shaped tool here.

Show page

This page displays a 3D model of the selected shaped tool.

In the graphic area of this page you can rotate, zoom and pan the 3D model
of the shaped tool.
Use the following combinations:

• Middle mouse button – Rotation of tool

• Shift + Middle mouse button – Zoom of tool

• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool

Edit page

This page enables you to edit the parameters of the selected

shaped tool.

1. Select the Shaped tool.

2. Switch to the Edit page to change the

shaped tool dimensions.

The interactive picture of the selected shaped tool is displayed.

The parameters pages are located below the picture.

SolidCAM divides the tool into solid segments like cylinders, cones or toruses. For each solid
primitive, SolidCAM determines actual dimensions.

You can change the dimensions of each segment in its specific page.

1. Select the tool’s element on the picture or through the parameter pages.

2. Type the new value of the parameter in the Value field.

179
3.10.2 Shaped tool geometry definition

This dialog box enables you to define the geometry of the shaped tool.

Define chain

This option enables you to define a new chain of the shaped tool geometry.
The Chain Options dialog box is displayed. In the model file displayed, you
can sketch half of the shaped tool and then define the chain. The direction
of the chain does not matter.

Note that the left side of the sketch is the bottom of

the tool and the right side is the top.

Replace chain

This command enables you to replace a chain in the current chain geometry.

Edit chain

This command enables you to update a chain in the current chain geometry.

Reference point

This option enables you to define the reference point through which the rotation axis of the shaped
tool passes.

3.10.3 Shaped Tool segments

Diameter
SolidCAM determines three types of segments of the Shaped Tool
Geometry.

Cylinder
Height
• Diameter

• Height

180
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

Cone Angle

• Top Diameter
Top Diameter
• Bottom Diameter Height

• Height

• Angle
Bottom Diameter

The following rules apply when parameters are changed:

• Changing of the Angle causes Top Diameter change.

• Changing of the Bottom Diameter causes Height change.

• Changing of the Top Diameter causes Bottom Diameter change.

• Changing of the Height causes Bottom Diameter change

Torus
• Top Diameter Top Diameter
Start
• Radius
Angle
• Start Angle
Sweep
• Sweep

• Bottom Diameter Bottom Diameter Radius

The following rules apply when parameters are changed:

• Changing of the Radius causes Bottom Diameter change

• Changing of the Top Diameter causes Bottom Diameter change

• Changing of the Bottom Diameter causes Top Diameter change

• Changing of the Start Angle causes Bottom Diameter change

• Changing of the Sweep Angle causes Top Diameter change

181
3.10.4 Using Shaped tools
SolidCAM enables you to choose the specific shaped tool using the Shaped tools dialog box.

In the Show area, SolidCAM displays the 3D model of the selected tool.

In the graphic area of this page you can rotate, zoom and pan the 3D model
of the tool.
Use the following combinations:
• Middle mouse button - Rotation of tool
• Shift + Middle mouse button - Zoom of tool
• Ctrl + Middle mouse button - Pan of tool

Shape edit

The Edit page of the Shaped tools dialog box enables you to edit the dimensions of the selected
tool.

This dialog box contains two pages:

Show

This page displays a 3D model of the

selected tool.

182
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

In the graphic area of this page you can rotate, zoom and pan the 3D model
of the tool.
Use the following combinations:

• Middle mouse button – Rotation of tool

• Shift + Middle mouse button – Zoom of tool
• Ctrl + Middle mouse button – Pan of tool

Edit

The interactive picture of the selected shaped tool will be displayed. The tool is divided
into segments like cylinders, cones and toruses.

With the Parameters table below the

picture, you can edit the actual dimensions
of the shaped tool.

1. Select the tool’s element on

the picture or through the
parameter pages.

2. Type the new value of the

parameter in the value field.

183
3.11 Feed and Speed defaults

The Speed/Feed Default option enables the program Tool Material

to calculate the speed and feed rate according to the Work Material
Work material and Tool material you are using.

Choose the Speed&Feed Defaults item from the

Tool Library submenu.

Speed/Feed Defaults

The Speed/Feed Default dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box enables you to define the Work Material and the Tool Material and to define the
different values of the Speed and Feed for each combination set. The dialog box shows the tree-
control list of the existing Tool and Work Materials. The root items of the tree are the Tool Materials;
for each tool material you can see the list of the Work Materials for which Speed/Feed default is
defined. The right area of the dialog box shows the Speed/Feed parameters for each selected pair
of Tool material and Work material.

184
 3. Tools and Tool Libraries

Add/Delete page

This page enables you to operate the Tool and Work materials and define the Speed and feed values
for the combination of the tool and work materials.

Right-click in the tool/work material list and choose the specific item from the menu.
• Add Tool Material

This option enables you to add the new Tool Material. The combination pairs of the
new Tool material with the existing Work materials are automatically added. Type the
name for the new Tool Material.
• Add Work Material

This option adds a new Work material. The Work material is added to all existing Tool
material combinations.
• Delete

This option removes the selected Tool/Work material from the list.
• Rename

This option enables you to assign a new name to the selected Tool/Work material.

185
Work material parameters

In this area, you have to assign the Speed and Feed values for the selected Tool/Work material
combination.

SolidCAM enables you to define the following values:

• V Signifies the Rough Material cutting speed in Meters/Minute in the

Metric system or in Feet/Minute in the Inch system.
• V fin Signifies the Finish Material cutting speed in Meters/Minute in the
Metric system or in Feet/Minute in the Inch system.
• FZ XY Feed rate in the XY plane, in Units per tooth.
• FZ Z Feed rate in the Z direction, in Units per tooth.
• FZ fin Feed rate used for finish milling, in Units per tooth.

Edit page

This page enables you to edit the values of the Speed and Feed for each combination of the Tool/
Work material.

Click on the parameter you have to change and enter the new value.

186
Geometry 4
Whenever you work in CAD, you use 2D wireframe curves and 3D
models to describe real life parts. With SolidCAM, you can turn these
models into GCode for any CNC-machine.
A major step in the process from modeling to manufacturing is to tell
SolidCAM what and where you want to machine. In SolidCAM, existing
models are used to pass this information to the CAM module.

 Defining a new Geometry

 Drilling Geometry
 3D Model Geometry
 Wireframe Geometries
 Managing Geometries
 Geometry synchronization
4.1 Introduction

SolidCAM enables you to turn 3D models, 2D and 3D sketches built with SolidWorks into GCode
for any CNC-machine. In this process of modelling to manufacturing, geometries have to be defined
to determine where the model will be machined.
Geometry

3D Wireframe Drill

3D Model Profile

Faces Pocket

Working Area

Slot

Limit

Section

In SolidCAM, you can define geometries in the operation dialog box; this enables SolidCAM to
check if the geometry follows the necessary rules needed in this type of operation.

The geometries defined in SolidCAM are associative to the SolidWorks model. Any change made to
the model or sketch will propagate to referenced SolidCAM geometry.

188
 4. Geometry

4.2 Drilling geometry

A Drilling geometry consists of one or more points (drilling

centers) that are defined by the X-, Y- and Z-values. They
can be selected on models using a number of different
methods.

4.2.1 Defining a Drilling geometry

In Drilling operations, you have to define the coordinate points where SolidCAM will execute the
drilling cycles. The powerful selection tool enables you to define and edit drilling positions quickly
and easily.

In the example above, the drilling points have been selected by their radius and Z-level on a 3D solid
model. With automatic selection the distance between two drilling points is optimized to reduce
machining time.

The button in the Geometry page of the Drilling Operation and

Thread Milling Operation dialog boxes enables you to choose the
mode of the geometry definition.
• The Plane mode enables you to define the geometry on
the plane/face parallel to the XY-plane of the current
CoordSys. Click on the Define button to display the Drill
Geometry Selection dialog box (see topic 4.2.3).

• The Around 4th axis mode enables you to select the drilling geometry wrapped on the
solid model around the 4th axis. The Define button displays the Around 4th Axis Drill
Geometry Selection dialog box (see topic 4.2.4).
Revolution axis

This method enables you to select

only the holes whose axis intersects
with the revolution axis of the
CAM-Part.
This method can be chosen when
the appropriate CoordSys that
enables the use of the 4th axis is
selected.

189
4.2.2 Editing a Drilling geometry
You can add or remove drilling positions from previously saved drilling
geometries.

1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on a Drill

geometry and choose the Edit option from the
menu.

2. The Drill Geometry Selection dialog box is

displayed. With the Select/Unselect option, you
can add or remove drilling points.

4.2.3 Drill Geometry Selection dialog box

For Drilling operations, you have to define the coordinate points where
SolidCAM executes the drilling cycles.

The powerful selection tool enables you to define and edit drilling positions
quickly and easily. Whenever you have to define a drilling geometry, the
Drill Geometry Selection dialog box is displayed.

Name

This option enables you to define the name of the geometry. SolidCAM
offers you the Default Geometry name (see topic 12.9) that can be edited.

Configurations

This option enables you to switch between SolidWorks configurations.

Choose the necessary configuration for the geometry definition.

Select/Unselect drilling centers

Use the Select/Unselect mode to add and remove drilling positions from
the geometry. The Undo/Redo button deletes or restores the last selection.

190
 4. Geometry

All the selected points are shown in the list at the bottom of the dialog
box. To remove a point from the list, right-click on the point name in the
list and choose the Delete option from the menu or choose the Delete All
option to remove all of the points.

Sequence of drill positions

You can change the sequence of drill positions in the list by dragging and
dropping.

You can also define and edit the sequence of drill

positions in the Drilling Operation dialog box (see
topic 6.6.3).

Selecting modes (Select centers by)

You can add drilling positions to the current geometry using the following
options:

• Pick position. You can define drilling positions one by one

using the CAD point selection options. You can also type the
coordinates into the X,Y,Z dialog box and confirm each drilling
point by clicking on the Enter button.

1. Pick drilling center position – select the drilling

point.

2. Confirm the selection by clicking on the Enter

button.

• 3 Points on circumference. Usually, all curves and arcs of imported models are converted
into splines by the exporting CAD system. Due to the nature of spline curves or surface
boundaries, you cannot pick a center position like you could on a circle or arc. SolidCAM
calculates the center position of an arc defined by three points positioned on the spline
edges. This facilitates the selection of drilling centers on spline surfaces.

1. Pick the first point – pick a point on the circumference of the circle or arc
using the CAD point selection options or type the coordinates into the X,Y,Z
dialog box and confirm.

2. Pick the second point.

191
 3. Pick the third point.
4. SolidCAM calculates the center of the three points and displays the drilling
position.

• Multi-positions. With this option, you can select model faces. SolidCAM automatically
determines all arcs/circles located on the selected face and defines the center points as
drilling positions. You can also use the mouse to drag a box over the area of the model.
SolidCAM automatically recognizes all arcs inside this area and defines the center points
as drilling positions.

The options you have selected in Filter affect the search when you
apply the Multi-positions command.

1. Check whether the Filter options you have selected are correct.
2. Click on the solid model face.
3. SolidCAM starts searching the selected face for drilling positions and
displays the search result.

• All circle/arc centers. SolidCAM is searching the solid model for arcs and circles and
adds all center points as drilling positions to the geometry.

The options you have selected in Filter affect the search result when
using the All command.

1. Check whether the Filter options you have selected are correct.
2. Click on the All circle/arc centers button to start the search.
3. SolidCAM starts searching the solid model for drilling positions and display
the search result.

192
 4. Geometry

• CAD selection. SolidCAM enables you to select the drilling geometry with the SolidWorks
selection tools.

1. Check whether the Filter options you have selected are correct.
2. Click on the CAD selection button. The CAD selection button changes to
Resume.

3. Select the geometry with SolidWorks tools.

4. Click on the Resume button.

Selection filter (Filter for circle/arc selection)

You can use various filters to search circles/arcs on the model for drilling
positions. SolidCAM selects only the drilling positions with the attributes
set in the Filter options. You can select the following attributes:

• Include arcs. If this check box is selected, SolidCAM also

includes arc centers in the search for drilling positions. This
option can solve the occasional problem caused by imported
2D sketches that have circle entities cut to halves. It also enables
you to place drills in filleted corners.

• All circles. SolidCAM is searching the model for circles. Arcs or broken circles are not
included in the search result.

• By Radius. You can limit the search by defining a radius value. Only arcs and circles with
the given radius are selected and their center position is added to the drilling geometry.

You can define the radius value on the model. Click

on the By Radius button. In the Select radius by
dialog box, you can choose how you want to pick the
radius from your model. Select the corresponding
option and pick the radius from an existing circle/
arc or use the 3 Points on circumference definition.

• Z-Level. You can also limit the search to the Z-level. Only arcs and circles on the given
XY-plane are selected and their center position is added to the drilling geometry.

You can select the Z-level on your model. Click on the On Z-level button
and select a point on your model using the point selection options. The
Z-coordinate of the selected point is passed to the corresponding field.

193
Selected circles/arcs

• The No longer can be selected option enables you to select

drills that were not selected previously.
• The Show the center points option enables you to see the drills
picked in the previous drilling geometry.

4.2.4 Around 4th Axis Drill Geometry Selection dialog box

Geometry Name

This field enables you to define the name of the geometry. SolidCAM offers you the Default
Geometry name (see topic 12.9) that can be edited.

Configurations

This field enables you to switch between SolidWorks configurations. Choose the necessary
configuration for the geometry definition.

Mode

You can switch between the Select/Unselect mode to define or remove drilling positions from the
geometry. All the selected drilling positions are shown in the list at the bottom of the dialog box.

194
 4. Geometry

Type
Pick face

SolidCAM automatically selects all the holes starting from the selected face. The Full
holes only option enables you to select only full diameter holes.

Pick hole

This mode enables you to select the holes around the 4th axis one by one.

195
 Pick 3 points

This mode enables you to define the drilling geometry by selection of three points on
the holes edge.

CAD selection

SolidCAM enables you select the drilling geometry with the SolidWorks selection tools.

Drilling positions list

This list displays all the selected drilling positions, their angle around
the 4th axis and location along the revolution axis. The right-click
menu is available.

The Unselect/Unselect All options enable you to unselect the drilling

positions chosen for the operation.

The Reverse option enables you to reverse the angle value 180°
around the 4th axis.

The Sort by Angle/Coordinate options enable you to sort the drilling positions in the list.

196
 4. Geometry

4.3 3D Model geometry

Any surface, solid or a combination of surfaces and solids can be

selected as a 3D Model geometry. These models can be machined with
the 3D Milling operation in SolidCAM using various milling strategies.

4.3.1 Defining a 3D Model geometry

SolidCAM enables you to define the 3D Model geometry using the

3D Geometry dialog box.

Name

This option enables you to define the name of the geometry. SolidCAM
offers you the Default Geometry name (see topic 12.9) that can be edited.

Configurations

This option enables you to switch between SolidWorks configurations.

Choose the relevant configuration for the geometry definition.

Type

This option enables you to define the type of objects that will be selected:

• Solid – to select solid objects only;

• Surfaces – to select surfaces only;

• Both – to select both surfaces and solids.

The default option is Both.

CAD selection

This option enables you to select the 3D geometry with the SolidWorks tools.

When an object is selected in the CAD selection mode, the CAD selection
button changes to Resume.

197
List of selected objects

You can select an object by clicking on it. When an object is selected, its
icon is displayed in the list in the bottom of the dialog box.

To unselect the object, click on it again or right-click on its icon in the list
and choose Unselect from the menu. To remove selection from all objects
in the list, click Unselect all.

4.3.2 Editing a 3D Model geometry

SolidCAM enables you to add, remove or replace entities in 3D geometries

that have been previously defined. Actual changes in dimensions or
topology of your model must be performed with SolidWorks.

1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on the 3D Model

Geometry icon. Choose the Edit command from the
menu.

2. The 3D Geometry dialog box is displayed.

3. The default Type settings enable you to add solids and surfaces to your model.
A click on a model object selects it; the next click removes the selection.
You can also unselect objects by right-clicking on their icons in the list and
choosing Unselect/Unselect all.

4. Confirm your selection by clicking on the button.

Use the CAD selection mode to select the geometry with Host
CAD tools.

198
 4. Geometry

4.4 Wireframe geometry

Wireframe geometry has several subtypes, each with its own set of rules. All the subtypes use the
same interface to select the geometry.

Chain geometries are defined by picking the following entities: edges of models, 2D curves, 3D
curves, circles, lines and splines. Each chain is composed from one or more entities and defines an
open or closed contour.
Wireframe
Geometry

Profile Working Area Limit

Pocket Slot Section

4.4.1 Defining the Profile/Pocket geometry

Chains for Profile Milling (see topic 6.1) can be either open or closed. You can machine one or more
profiles in a single operation.

Closed chain Open chain

Chains for Pocket Milling (see topic 6.4) must be closed. The first chain defines the contour of the
pocket. All closed chains inside the first chain of each pocket are automatically treated as pocket
islands. Overlapping chains are milled as separate pockets, not as islands. To select multiple pockets
with islands, continue adding chains to the geometry.

Closed chain Closed chain with island

199
 1. Select a chain to define the geometry.

2. Confirm the chain definition with the Apply button.

3. When you have completed the geometry definition,

confirm the Geometry Edit dialog box (see topic 4.5) with
the button.

4.4.2 Defining the Working Area

Working areas are used in 3D Milling (see topic 7.1) to constrain the machining
to certain areas of the 3D model. The working area is defined by a closed chain.
The chain can consist either of selected points or of 2D/3D edges, curves or
splines.
As in pocket geometries, working areas can be
defined with internal chains, so that the islands
are excluded from machining.
In this example, the working area has been
selected to machine the cavity. The external
chain defines the outside boundary of the area.
The internal chain excludes the parting surface
from machining.

1. Select a chain to define the geometry.

2. Confirm the chain definition with the button.

3. When you have completed the geometry definition, confirm the Geometry
Edit dialog box (see topic 4.5) with the button.

4.4.3 Defining the Slot geometry

Chains for Slot Milling (see topic 6.9) can be either open or closed. You can machine one or more
slots in one operation.

1. Click on the edges or lines that make up your slot.

2. Confirm the chain definition with the button.

3. When you have completed the geometry definition,

confirm the Geometry Edit (see topic 4.5) dialog
box with the button.

200
 4. Geometry

4.4.4 Defining the Section geometry

In the Slot (see topic 6.9) and Translated Surface (see topic 6.11) operations, you need to select a
Section geometry. These 2.5D operations can be defined using 2D geometries only. Use section
geometries to define depth profiles for Slot and Translated Surface operations.

Adding a Section geometry

1. In the Section Geometry dialog box, click on the

Add button in order to add chains.

The Chain options dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the edges or lines that make up

your section and confirm by clicking on
the button.

3. Click on the Pick Point button to pick the reference point. This point defines
the level of the section relative to the upper level of the operation.

4. The Pick Z-Reference Point dialog box is displayed. Pick the point on the
model and confirm with the button.

5. Confirm the Section Geometry dialog box with

the button.

201
Editing a Section geometry

You can edit the section or redefine the reference point of the section.

1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on the

Section geometry and choose Edit from the
menu.

2. In the Section Geometry dialog box, click on

the Pick Point button to pick the reference
point again or on the Edit/Replace buttons
to edit or replace the section chain using the
Chain Selection dialog box.

3. Click on the button to confirm your changes

and close the dialog box.

Spline Approximation

This field enables you to define the Spline approximation tolerance for the
chain selection.

4.4.5 Defining the Limit geometry

A Translated Surface Operation (see topic 6.11) can be defined using 2D

geometries only. With Limit geometries you can define boundaries for this
operation.

1. Select a chain to define the geometry.

2. Confirm the chain definition with the button.

3. When you have completed the geometry

definition, confirm the Geometry Edit
dialog box with the button.

Section Limit

202
 4. Geometry

4.5 Editing chain geometries

To edit a chain, right-click on a geometry entry

in SolidCAM Manager and choose Edit from the
submenu.

The Geometry Edit dialog box is displayed.

4.5.1 Geometry Name

This option enables you to define the name of the geometry. SolidCAM
offers you the Default Geometry name (see topic 12.9) that can be edited.

4.5.2 Configurations

This option enables you to switch between SolidWorks configurations.

Choose the relevant configuration for the geometry definition.

4.5.3 Adding a Chain

You can add a chain to the existing set of chains in the current geometry.
The new chain is added under the next sequential number.

1. Select the chain geometry using the Single entities (see topic 4.5.6) and
Automatic selection options (see topic 4.5.7).

2. Confirm the chain definition with the button.

or

Use the Add Multi-chain button to automatically define a number of chains (see topic
4.6).

203
4.5.4 Managing chains

All the selected chains are displayed in this dialog box. To edit these
chains, right-click on the Chain name and choose the appropriate
command from the menu.

Replace

This command enables you to update a chain in the current geometry.

The old chain is deleted and you can define a new chain.

Insert

This command enables you to insert a chain between two existing chains.

Edit

This command enables you to edit an existing chain. You can reverse the chain or undo the selection
steps to change the chain.

Reverse

This command enables you to reverse the direction of the chain.

Rename

This command enables you to rename the geometry chain.

Set CW/Set CCW

These commands enable you to set either clockwise or counterclockwise direction for the selected
chains.

Mark open edges

This option enables you to define the geometry for the Open Pocket machining by defining open
edges on the conventional wireframe geometry. The Mark Open Edges dialog box is displayed (see
topic 4.5.12).

This option is available only for Pocket operations (see topic 6.4).

Delete

This command enables you to delete a chain from the current geometry.

204
 4. Geometry

4.5.5 Chain direction

Some of the operations in SolidCAM use the Direction arrow Start point
direction of the chain geometry to calculate the tool
path. In Profile Milling, for example, you have to
specify the tool side, which is relative to the direction
of the selected contour. The selected edges or sketch
segments are highlighted. The arrow at the start point
of the chain indicates the direction of the chain.

Use the Reverse command to reverse the direction

of the chain during or after the chain selection, if
necessary.

4.5.6 Selecting single entities

You can define the geometry by selecting edges, sketch segments and
points on the contour. The following options are available:
• Curve

This option enables you to create a continuous geometry

chain by picking its successive entities. During the geometry
definition, the gaps between selected entities are detected.
They can be closed taking into account the Gap Minimum and
Gap Maximum tolerances (see topic 4.5.10).

1. Pick start curve – select the first entity (a wireframe element or the solid
model edge).

205
 2. Pick next curve – select the next curve that belongs to the chain. If the
detected gap is smaller than the Gap Minimum tolerance, it is being closed
automatically by extending/shortening chosen entities up to their virtual
intersection point. If the gap is greater than the Gap Minimum tolerance
but smaller than the Gap Maximum tolerance, a message is displayed
asking you if you want to close the gap. If you confirm the message, the
gap is being closed automatically by extending/shortening chosen entities
up to their virtual intersection point. If you cancel, the gap is not being
closed, and the last entity is being unselected. In case the gap is larger than
the Gap Maximum tolerance, the selected entity is not accepted, and the
following message is displayed:

3. To complete the selection, click on the button.

Associativity

SolidCAM keeps the associativity to any edge or sketch entity.

Any change made to the model or sketch automatically updates
the selected geometry.

• Curve + Close corners

This option enables you to close the gaps between successive chain entities irrespective
of the Gap Minimum and Gap Maximum values by virtually extending the entities up
to their intersection.

First selected entity

Next selected entity

Splines and arcs are extended by lines tangential to the

arc/spline at its end point.

1. Pick start curve – select the first entity

(a wireframe element or the solid model
edge).

206
 4. Geometry

2. Pick next curve – select the next curve that belongs to the chain. When a
gap is detected between these entities, the chain is continued by virtually
extending the selected entities, according to the direction of the first
entity, up to the virtual intersection point. If an intersection point cannot
be found by extending either one or both selected entities, the following
message is displayed:

In case several possible intersection points exist, the point

closest to the last vertex of the first selected entity is chosen.

3. To complete the selection, click on the button.

Associativity

When the model used for the geometry definition is modified,

SolidCAM enables you to synchronize the geometry with
the updated model. During the synchronization SolidCAM
determines gaps areas created using the Curve + Close Corners
option and regenerates the extension of the chain elements so
as to close the gaps.

• Point to point

This option enables you to connect the specified points with a straight line.

1. Pick start point – pick a point on the model or enter the coordinates into
the command line.

207
 2. Pick next point – pick the following point (enter the coordinates into the
command line), and the chain element will be created from the previous
point up to this point.

3. To complete the selection, click on the button.

Associativity

SolidCAM does not keep the associativity to any selected point.

SolidCAM saves the X-, Y- and Z-coordinates of the selected
points. Any change made to the model or sketch does not update
the selected geometry.
You cannot select a point that is not located on a SolidWorks
entity (if you need to select such a point, add a planer surface
under the model and select the points on that surface).

The following rules are applicable to virtual line selection with the Point to Point option:
1. When you select a virtual line between two edges, the line behaves as a spring.
Whenever the model is changed and synchronized, the geometry is updated
with the model.
2. When you select a sequence of several virtual lines, only the points connected
to model edges or sketch elements are updated, but all the other points stay
fixed at the defined X-, Y- and Z-positions.

• Arc by points

This option enables you to create a chain segment on an arc up to a specific point on
the arc.

1. Pick start point – choose a Third

point on the arc where you Second
Point
Point
want the chain to start. If
this is not the first point on
the chain, go to step 2.

2. Pick next point – choose a First

point on the arc between the Point
first point on the arc and the
third point on the arc.

3. Pick end point – choose a third point on the arc where you want the chain
to end.

208
 4. Geometry

Associativity

SolidCAM does not keep the associativity to any selected arcs

by points. SolidCAM saves the X,- Y- and Z-coordinates of the
selected points. Any change made to the model or sketch does
not update the selected geometry.

4.5.7 Automatic selection

SolidCAM automatically determines the chain entities and closes the chain contour. The following
options are available:

Auto-to
The chain is selected by specifying the start curve, the direction of the
chain and the element up to which the chain is created. SolidCAM enables
you to choose any model edge, vertex or sketch entity to determine the
chain end.
When the end item is chosen, SolidCAM determines the chain according
to the rules of the chosen selection mode (Auto-general, Auto-Constant Z
or Auto-Delta Z). The chain selection is terminated when the selected end
item is reached.
End entity

Start entity Selected chain

If the chosen end item cannot be reached by the chain flow, the chain definition is terminated when
the start chain segment is reached. The chain is automatically closed.
End entity

Start entity Selected chain

209
The confirmation message is displayed.

The Auto-to option is useful if you do not want to

define a closed chain, but an open chain up to a certain
element.

• Auto-general

SolidCAM highlights all entities connected to the last chain entity. You have to select
the entity along which you want the chain to continue.

• Auto-constant Z

This option identifies only entities on the same XY-plane with the previously selected
chain entity. You are only prompted to identify the next chain element when two
entities on the same Z-level are connected to the chain. The system tolerance for this
option can be set in the SolidCAM Settings.

210
 4. Geometry

• Auto-Delta Z

You are required to enter a positive and negative Z-deviation

into the Delta Z dialog box. Only entities within this range are
identified as the next possible entity of the chain.

1. Pick start curve – select the start entity of the chain.

2. Pick point in chain direction – indicate the chain direction by choosing

a point on the selected start entity of the chain.

3. You are prompted to select one of the possible curves if the system
detects that more than one entity can be the next element of the chain.
Indicate your choice.

4. When the system can close the chain, the confirmation

message is displayed. Choose Yes to accept. If you
answer No, you can continue the chain selection:
for example, undo the last step or cancel the chain
selection.

4.5.8 Chain buttons

• Undo step
This button enables you to undo the last selection of a chain element.
• Reverse
This button enables you to reverse the direction of the chain you are currently
working with. The direction is indicated by an arrow at the chain start point.

• Accept Chain
This button enables you to confirm the chain selection.

• Reject Chain
This button enables you to cancel the single chain selection.

211
4.5.9 Options

Spline approximation

This field enables you to define the Spline approximation tolerance for the chain selection. Arcs on
the XY-plane are saved as arcs in the SolidCAM database; if you select an arc or spline that is not
on the XY-plane of the actual part Coordinate System, SolidCAM will do the following:
1. Project the arc or spline on the XY-plane of the active CoordSys and divide it into
segments according to the specified tolerance.

Tolerance

2. In order to reduce the number of Tolerance

Arc
segments, SolidCAM tries to fit arcs
on the segments generated in step 1
according to the specified tolerance Spline
multiplied by 3.

4.5.10 Gap control

This field enables you to change the gap tolerances for the current geometry during the geometry
definition.

The automatic selection function for chain geometries uses certain tolerances to decide whether
two consequent elements are connected or not. The behavior of this function depends on the gap
between the entities. The Gap minimum and Gap maximum parameters define the range of gap
tolerance values used for the chain geometry definition.

The default values of these parameters are inherited from the SolidCAM Settings (see topic 12.4.3).
In the Geometry Edit dialog box, you can edit the tolerance values during any stage of any chain
definition (for example, at start of chain definition or during the chain definition). During the
geometry chains definition, SolidCAM uses these parameters in order to decide whether to connect
two successive chain entities, if a gap between them is detected.

212
 4. Geometry

• If the gap between the edges is smaller than the specified Gap minimum value, the system
automatically continues the chain and closes the gap with a line.

• If the gap is in the range between the Gap minimum

and Gap maximum values, you are asked whether the
gap should be closed.

If you answer Yes, the gap is automatically closed with

a line.

• If the gap is larger than the Gap maximum value, the

following message is displayed:

When the message is confirmed, the last selected chain entity

is rejected.

4.5.11 Add Multi-Chain

SolidCAM enables you to define a number of chains on the model by
selecting its elements. The program automatically creates chains from the
selected elements.
For more information on Multi-chain selection, see topic 4.6.

4.5.12 Mark Open Edges dialog box

This dialog box enables you to mark the open edges on already selected
pocket chains by picking them.
Closed edges Pocket geometry

Open edge

Open pocket

213
Mark as

This section offers you the following selection modes:

• Open

When this option is chosen, picking a pocket geometry edge marks it as open.
• Wall

When this option is chosen, picking a pocket geometry edge marks it as closed (wall).
• Toggle

When this option is chosen, picking a closed edge marks it as open and the next picking
marks it as closed, and so on.

Select

This section offers you the following selection methods:

• Single entity

When this method is chosen, you can pick single entities in order to mark them as
open/closed.
• From/To entities

When this method is chosen, you can mark a segment of the pocket geometry by
picking the start and the end entities.

CAD Selection

This button enables you to perform the selection using the CAD tools.

The marking of open edges is available only for Pocket operations (see topic
6.4).

214
 4. Geometry

4.6 Chains Selection dialog box

The Chains Selection dialog box enables you to define a number of chains on the model by selecting
its elements. The system automatically creates chains from the selected elements.

Mode

• Select – this mode enables you to select the elements to define

the chains.

• Unselect – this mode enables you to unselect the previously

selected elements.

Type
• Edges

SolidCAM enables you to choose model edges to build a

chain geometry.
• Text

SolidCAM enables you to choose text to build a chain

geometry.
• Faces

When this mode is chosen, SolidCAM enables you to pick a

model face. All the loops of this face are collected and closed
geometry chains are created. The Loops filter is applied to
the collected loops to exclude all those that do not match the
specified criteria.

Selection Filter

When this check box is selected, you can select only elements located on a specific
Z-level. To define the Z-level, either enter the value in the dialog box or click on the On Z-Level
button and pick the level on the model.

215
Loops filter

When this check box is selected, the External loop and Internal loops check boxes are available.

When the External loop check box is selected, all the internal loops are excluded from the picked
face and only the external loops are collected.
External loop

When the Internal loops check box is selected, all the external loops are excluded from the picked
face and only the internal loops are collected.
Internal loops

When both these check boxes are selected, the system collects both internal and external loops from
the picked face.

This section is enabled only when the Faces mode is chosen.

216
 4. Geometry

CAD selection

Click on this button to select the chains with the Host CAD tools.

Get All

This button enables you to select all of the model elements.

Sort Type

When there is more than one chain, this option enables you to determine the chain you would like
to start from. The Sort chains dialog box is displayed (see topic 4.6.2).

Chains direction

This option enables you to determine the cutting direction of each chain. The Chains Direction
dialog box is displayed (see topic 4.6.1).

View Chains

This option enables you to see the chains before they are created.

4.6.1 Chains Direction dialog box

The Chains Direction dialog box enables you to determine the direction
of the chain.

Closed chains direction

This option enables you to determine the direction of closed chains.

• External chains direction

External chains are the outer borders of a pocket. You

can determine if you want the chain to go clockwise or
counterclockwise by choosing CCW or CW.
• Internal chains opposite

Internal chains are located within the boundaries of external

chains. Selecting this check box, you can have the internal
chains go in the direction opposite to that of the external
chains.

217
Open chains direction

This option enables you to determine the direction of open chains.

• To center: the chain start point is the end of the chain furthest from the given center
point.
• From center: the chain start point is the end of the chain closest to the given center
point.

Selecting the Change center position check box enables you to choose the center position by
entering the X- and Y-values or by picking a point on the model.

If you do not change the center position, the CoordSys origin is used as center point.

4.6.2 Chain sorting

The Chain sorting option enables you to define the order in which you
want the chains to be created.

Sort by Distance

The chain closest to the last chain is chosen using two options:
• End to Start

The next chain is the chain with the start point closest to the
end point of the last chain.
• Start to Start

The next chain is the chain with the start point closest to the
start point of the last chain.

Sort by Value

The next chain that is closest to the last chain in a given direction is chosen.
• X start

The next chain is the one in the X-direction.

• Y start

The next chain is the one in the Y-direction.

218
 4. Geometry

• Reverse

The direction of the chains changes (X-start: Left to Right; Y-start: Upward or
Downward).

Polar Sort

Chains are selected around a specific point. If no point is chosen, the default point is the CoordSys
origin of the CAM-Part.
• CW Direction

The order of the chains is in clockwise direction around the point.

• CCW Direction

The order of the chains is in counterclockwise direction around the point.

• Change center position

The center position is chosen either by entering X-/Y-values or by picking a point on

the model.
• Start angle

This field controls the angle between the start point of the chain and the point of
rotation.

219
4.7 Managing geometries

You can edit and manage your geometries using the Geometries header in the SolidCAM Manager
tree. Geometries used in machining operations can be edited through SolidCAM Manager: they
appear under the corresponding operation. SolidCAM also enables you to define and show
geometries inside the operation dialog box, so that you can select the geometry and machining
strategy in one step.

1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on a geometry

entry. The menu is displayed.
2. Choose a command from the menu.

Show

This command displays a 3D Model, Drill or Wireframe geometry

highlighted in the SolidWorks window.

To exit from this mode, click on the button in the displayed Show Geometry dialog box.

Edit

You can change or update the selected geometry. If the tool path of an operation was calculated
before, it is deleted. You have to recalculate the operation after making changes to the geometry.

Generate Sketch

This command enables you to generate a SolidWorks sketch containing chains of the current
wireframe geometry. The sketch is generated in the CAM component of the SolidCAM Part
assembly.

This command is available only for wireframe geometries.

Copy

This command enables you to duplicate the selected geometry. The

Geometry Name dialog box is displayed to define the name of the
geometry.

220
 4. Geometry

Copy as Working area

This command copies the selected geometry as a working area.
SolidCAM generates a SolidWorks sketch containing chains of the
selected geometry. The sketch will be generated in the CAM component
of the SolidCAM Part assembly. A new Working area geometry is
defined using this sketch.
The Geometry Name dialog box enables you to define the name of the
geometry.

Delete/Delete All
You can delete geometries not used in any machining operation. These geometries are displayed
under the Geometries header. Any geometry used in operations appears under the respective
operations only and cannot be deleted unless the operation is deleted as well.

The Delete all command is only available when you right-click on the
Geometries header. It deletes all geometries not currently used in any
machining operation. Whenever you click on a single geometry, the Delete
command is available for the selected geometry only.

Synchronize/Check synchronization
When the SolidWorks model is updated, you can check the compliance of the SolidCAM geometry
to the updated SolidWorks model. If the SolidCAM geometry is not synchronized with the
SolidWorks model, you can synchronize it.

4.7.1 Synchronization of the Wireframe geometry

SolidCAM Wireframe geometry is based on the SolidWorks

model elements such as edges, vertices or sketches.

SolidWorks Model SolidCAM Geometry

based on the
SolidWorks Model

When the SolidWorks model is changed, SolidCAM

uses the synchronization algorithm to synchronize the
geometry with the updated SolidWorks model.

SolidWorks Model has changed, SolidCAM Geometry

SolidCAM Geometry has to is updated
be updated

221
Synchronization check SolidCAM Geometry

SolidCAM marks all SolidWorks entities used for the Tag Tag
geometry definition with tags. The list of these tags is saved.
The tags enable you to establish a connection between the
SolidCAM geometry and the SolidWorks model entities. Tag Tag
The relations between the tagged SolidWorks geometry and
SolidCAM geometry is saved in the geometry file (*.gem).

SolidCAM enables you to check the synchronization status

automatically or manually depending on the Synchronization SolidWorks Model
settings (see topic 12.5).

When you need to check the synchronization status of the geometry manually, do the following:

1. Right-click on an operation or geometry entry in

SolidCAM Manager.

2. Choose the Check Synchronization item from

the menu.
SolidCAM checks all the geometry entities in the following method:
• The SolidWorks model elements are compared geometrically
to the relevant entities in the SolidCAM geometry file.
• If a misfit is determined between the SolidWorks model and
the SolidCAM geometry, this geometry is marked with the
synchronization mark .

• If there is a gap or overlapping entities, the geometry is also marked with the
synchronization mark .
The synchronization mark points to the problematic geometries and enables you to solve
the problems with the geometries that were not synchronized.

222
 4. Geometry

Geometry synchronization

When the geometry has to be synchronized (this geometry is marked with the synchronization
mark), do the following to synchronize it:

1. Right-click on a geometry entry in SolidCAM

Manager.

2. Choose Synchronize from the menu.

or
1. Right-click on an operation entry in
SolidCAM Manager.

2. Choose Synchronize from the menu.

The Synchronize & Calculate

command enables you to
synchronize the operation
geometries and calculate the tool
path.

All of the geometries used in the operation are synchronized.

During the synchronization, SolidCAM tries to update the

SolidCAM geometry according to the updated SolidWorks model.

SolidCAM finds the updated edges according to the saved tags data
and tries to re-create the geometry chain. SolidCAM recognizes
gaps between geometry entities and closes them.

223
SolidCAM closes the gaps by using the smallest number of entities. There are two methods of
closing gaps:

• If the original geometry entities are in the

SolidCAM
same plane with the Coordinate System, Geometry
SolidCAM tries to close the gap with
entities in the same plane only.
• If the original geometry entities are not
on a plane, SolidCAM is using a random
search algorithm that closes the gap in
the geometry. This search algorithm can SolidWorks
Model
find different solutions to close the same
gap; this depends on the sequence of the
entities involved in the loops that connect Gap area
to the geometry entity.

The geometry that cannot be updated is marked with an exclamation

mark .
You have to edit such geometries and manually update the problematic
chains.

SolidCAM does not find new chains that are not

directly connected to old chains. The number
of chains in the geometry remains the same.
For example, SolidCAM does not find a new
island in a pocket geometry.

4.7.2 Synchronization of the 3D Model geometry

The calculation of the tool path for the 3D Model

geometry is based on a facet model produced for
the whole SolidWorks model.

SolidWorks Model SolidCAM Geometry

When SolidCAM determines that the solid has

changed, it does not need to detect what has
changed; it simply recalculates the facet model.

Updated SolidWorks Updated SolidCAM

Model Geometry

224
 4. Geometry

Synchronization check

SolidCAM enables you to check the synchronization status by

comparing the SolidWorks model and the SolidCAM 3D Model
geometry. You can check the synchronization status automatically
or manually, which depends on the Synchronization settings.

When you need to check the synchronization status of the geometry

manually, do the following:

1. Right-click on an operation or geometry

entry in SolidCAM Manager.

2. Choose the Check Synchronization item

from the menu.

If a difference is found, SolidCAM marks the geometry and related

operations with the synchronization mark .

Geometry synchronization

When the geometry has to be synchronized (the one marked with

the synchronization mark), do the following to synchronize it:

1. Right-click on a geometry entry in SolidCAM

Manager.

2. Choose Synchronize from the menu.

or

225
 1. Right-click on an operation entry in
SolidCAM Manager.

2. Choose Synchronize from the menu.

The Synchronize & Calculate

command enables you to
synchronize the operation
geometries and calculate the tool
path.

All the SolidCAM geometries used in the operation are

synchronized.
During the synchronization, SolidCAM recalculates the facet
model.

4.7.3 Boolean operations

SolidCAM enables you to perform a number of boolean operations
between working area geometries and boundaries.
Choose the Boolean operations command from the right-click
menu on the Geometries header.

The Boolean Operations dialog box is displayed.

Coordinate System

This field enables you to choose the Coordinate System where the source
geometries for the boolean operation are located. The resulting combined
geometry is created in the chosen coordinate system.

Configurations
This field enables you to choose the SolidWorks configuration where the
source user-defined geometries for the boolean operation are located.

226
 4. Geometry

Operation type

This field enables you to define the type of the boolean operation. The following boolean operations
are available:
Unite Source
geometries

This option enables you to unite selected geometries into a

single one. All internal segments are removed; the resulting
geometry is outer profile.
Geometry 1 Geometry 2

Resulting
geometry

Merge
Source
geometries
This option enables you to merge a number of geometries,
created by different methods, into a single one.

Geometry 1 Geometry 2

Resulting
geometry

Geometry 3
Subtract
Source
geometries
This option enables you to perform subtraction of two
geometries. The order of the geometry selection is
important; the second selected geometry is subtracted from
the first selected one.
Geometry 1 Geometry 2

Resulting geometry

227
 Intersect Source
geometries

This option enables you to perform intersection of two

geometries.

Geometry 1 Geometry 2

Resulting geometry

The Accept button performs the command chosen in the Geometries section.

Geometries

The Geometries section displays all the available working area

geometries classified by the definition method.

This section enables you to choose the appropriate geometries for the
boolean operation. Select the check box near the geometry name in
order to choose it for the boolean operation.

When you click on the Accept button, the resulting geometry is displayed
in the list under the Combined 2D header. SolidCAM enables you to
edit the name of the created geometry. The newly created geometry is
automatically chosen for the further boolean operation.

The resulting combined geometry is always a

2D geometry even if one or more of the input
geometries is a 3D boundary.

The right-click menu available on the list items enables you to perform the following operations:

• The Accept button enables you to perform the chosen

boolean operation with the selected geometries.
• The Unselect all option unselects all the chosen geometries.
• The Delete option enables you to delete combined geometries
generated in the current session of the Boolean Geometries
dialog box.

228
Operations 5
In SolidCAM, an operation is a single machining step. A workpiece is
usually manufactured using several machining steps and technologies.
For each of these steps you can define a separate operation.
An operation can be very complex, but always uses one tool, one
major geometry and executes one machining type, e.g. 3D Milling,
Profile Milling or Drilling. You can edit any single machining operation,
change the operation sequence and generate the GCode, combine
and split the operation list of your CAM-Part.

 Adding an operation
 Operation dialog box interface
 Working with operations
 Operation Transformations
 Fixture
5.1 Adding an operation

This command enables you to add a new operation to your CAM-Part. In SolidCAM, an operation
is a single machining step. Normally, you manufacture a workpiece using several machining steps
and technologies. For each of these steps you can define a separate operation. An operation can be
very complex, but always uses one tool, one major geometry and executes one machining type, e.g.
3D milling, profile milling or drilling.

You can edit any single machining operation,

change the operation sequence and generate
the GCode, combine and split the operation list
of your CAM-Part.

1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-

click on an operation.

2. Move to the Add Operation

submenu and choose the type
of operation you want to
define.

• When you add an operation by right-clicking on the Operations header,

the new operation is added at the end of the operation list.

• When you add an operation by right-clicking on an existing operation,

the new operation is inserted after the selected operation.

230
 5. Operations

5.2 SolidCAM Operation Interface

SolidCAM operation dialog box interface has the following common areas:
Operation name Template
Technology

Geometry parameters Info

Tool parameters

Machining levels
parameters

Technological parameters

Advanced Technology

Link parameters Parameters page

Miscellaneous parameters

Parameter illustration

Operation buttons

Technology

The Technology box displays the chosen technology according to the operation type.

Operation name

The Operation name box displays the operation name and enables you to choose
another already existing operation as a template.

Template

The Template box enables you to save the current operation as a template and to load
another already existing template.

Info

By clicking on this icon, you can display a window that contains the information
summary of the operation. In this window, the name of the operation, the Tool data
and the Milling levels data are listed.

231
Parameters pages and illustration

The list on the left side of the dialog box enables you to switch between the following
parameters pages:
• Geometry

This page enables you to define the geometry for the operation.

• Tool

This page enables you to define the tool for the operation.

• Levels

This page enables you to define the machining levels for the operation.

• Technology

This page enables you to define the technological parameters such as offsets,
roughing and finishing data, depth type, etc.

The Advanced Technology page contains the infrequently used parameters and
options whose definition is required only in particular machining cases.

• Link

This page enables you to define the way how the tool approaches the material and
retreats away.

• Misc. parameters

This page contains the miscellaneous parameters such as Message, Extra

parameters, and so forth.

In the bottom left corner of the dialog box, the illustration of a currently selected
interface element is displayed to facilitate the definition of the corresponding parameter.

Operation buttons

At the bottom, the operation buttons are located. These buttons enable you to save
and calculate the operation, start its simulation, etc.

232
 5. Operations

5.2.1 Operation name

When you define a geometry and a tool, SolidCAM automatically enters the default name
(e.g. 3DR_Profile_T1) based on the operation type, geometry name and tool number.
3DR_Profile_T1

Operation type Geometry

Tool
abbreviation name

You can edit the operation name, if necessary.

SolidCAM uses the following operation type abbreviations for Milling operations:

2.5D Milling

• FM_ — Face Milling

• F_ — Profile
• F3D_ — Contour 3D
• P_ — Pocket
• D_ — Drilling
• THM_ — Thread Milling
• S_ — Slot
• TSlot_ — T-Slot
• TS_ — Translated Surface
• PR_ — Pocket Recognition
• DR_ — Drill Recognition

233
3D Milling

• 3DR_ — 3D Roughing
• 3DS_Lin — Linear 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_Offs — Offset cutting 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_Sp — Spiral 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_Cir — Circular Pocket 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_CZ — Constant Z 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_Pen — Pencil Milling 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DS_CS — Constant Step Over 3D Semi-Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Lin — Linear 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Offs — Offset cutting 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Sp — Spiral 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Cir — Circular Pocket 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_CZ — Constant Z 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_Pen — Pencil Milling 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DF_CS — Constant Step Over 3D Finishing strategy
• 3DD — 3D Drilling operation
• 3DE — 3D Engraving operation

When you add a new operation, you can use an existing operation as a template for the new
operation. All values of the template operation are copied and you only need to edit some varying
parameters, e.g. select another geometry or redefine the surface offset value.

Use the Operation name list to select the template operation.

234
 5. Operations

5.2.2 Template

SolidCAM enables you to create operation templates: once defined, an operation can be saved as a
template and its data can be loaded into a new operation of the same type. The saved template data
does not include the geometry which must be defined for each operation separately after loading
the template. The saved template can optionally include the tool data.

This section provides you with the following functionality:

Saving Templates

The Save Template button enables you to save all of the current operation data (except for the
geometry) as a template.

The Template Manager dialog box is

displayed. This dialog box enables you to
define a name for the template. The default
location offered by SolidCAM is defined in
the SolidCAM Templates Directory section of
the Part Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.9).
The Operation Templates table displays all
operation templates located in the SolidCAM
Templates Directory, their types and the
technology.

The Include tool data check box enables you

to include the tool data in the saved template.
The saved tool data is used during the further
template loading.

235
Enter the name in the Template edit box to save a new template or choose an existing template from
the table to overwrite it and click on the OK button. If a template with the defined name already
exists in the current location, SolidCAM displays the following warning message:

When you confirm this warning by clicking on the Yes button, the existing template is being
overwritten with the new one. When you click on the No button, the Save template dialog box is
displayed again so that you can choose a different name for the template.
Saving an operation as a template using SolidCAM
Manager

You can also save an existing operation as operation

template by right-clicking on the operation name in
SolidCAM Manager and choosing Create Template
from the menu.

This command displays the Template Manager dialog

box that enables you to save the template data as
described above.

236
 5. Operations

Loading Templates

The Load Template button enables you to load an already existing template into the current
operation. The Template Manager dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box displays only the templates of type/technology suitable for the current operation.

Choose the required template and click on the OK button. When the template is loaded, all the
current operation data is substituted with the data from the template.

When a template is loaded into the operation, its name is displayed in the edit box in the Templates
section.

When you place the mouse cursor over the edit box, the full path to the loaded template is displayed
in a pop-up message.

When any of the operation data is modified after loading the template, the template name in the
edit box is marked with asterisk (*).

237
Tool search

When an operation template is loaded, SolidCAM checks for tool data in the template. If the tool
data was saved in the operation template, the tool search is performed as follows:

• When a tool used in the operation template is defined as Permanent, the tool search
is performed according to the tool number only. First, the tool search is performed in
the Part Tool Table. If the tool with the defined number is not found in the Part Tool
Table, additional search is performed in the Current Tool Table. If a tool with the defined
number is found in the Current Tool Table, it is being copied into the Part Tool Table and
chosen for the operation. If it is not found in the Current Tool Table, the following error
message is displayed:

When you confirm this message, the operation dialog box is displayed again so that you
can define a tool.

• When the tool in the operation template is not defined as Permanent, the tool search
is performed according to the tool parameters defined on the Tool search page of the
SolidCAM Settings dialog box. The tool search is performed in the Part Tool Table. If a
tool with the same definition as that used in the template is not found in the Part Tool
Table, additional search is performed in the Current Tool Table. If a suitable tool is found
in the Current Tool Table, it is being copied into the Part Tool Table and chosen for the
operation. If it is not found in the Current Tool Table, a new tool with the parameters
defined in the template is being added to the Part Tool Table and automatically assigned
the first not used tool number.

When you load a template with tool data into an operation in which the tool is already
defined, the following message is displayed:

When you confirm this message, SolidCAM replaces the tool defined in the operation
with the tool defined in the template.

238
 5. Operations

Creating a new operation from an existing template

SolidCAM enables you create a new operation from

an existing template. Right-click on an operation entry
in SolidCAM Manager and choose Add Operation from
Template from the menu.

The Template Manager dialog box is displayed. This dialog

box enables you to choose an existing template. In this case,
the Template Manager dialog box displays all the templates
existing in the SolidCAM Templates Directory regardless of
their type/technology.

When you confirm the dialog box by clicking on the OK

button, SolidCAM inserts the chosen operation template
into the SolidCAM Manager tree.

The inserted operation is incomplete; it means that the

operation has no defined geometry and tool (if the initial
operation template used for the operation definition had no
tool). The incomplete operations are marked with red color
in SolidCAM Manager.

Since the incomplete operations have no geometry, their tool path

cannot be generated. In order to completely define the operation,
you have to edit it by defining the machining geometry and tool (if
necessary).

During creation of a new operation from an operation template,

SolidCAM assigns the Machine Coordinate System #1 (Position #1)
for the newly created operation. During the operation editing, this
Coordinate System can be changed.

239
Process Template

A Process Template is a template of a series of operations that execute a specific machining task.
This functionality enables you to store a complete chain of technological operations as a template
and apply it for the machining of similar cases.

Defining Process Templates

To create a process template, select in SolidCAM

Manager all the names of operations intended to
be included in the Template, right-click and choose
Create Template.

The Template Manager dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box enables you to save the chosen

operations as a process template.

All the process templates existing in the SolidCAM

Templates Directory are displayed. The process
templates names are listed in the Template Folders
section under the Process Templates header. The
content of the templates is displayed in the Operation
Templates table.

The Include tool data check box enables you to include

the tool data into the saved process template.

240
 5. Operations

To save the selected operations as a new process template, enter a name in the Process name edit
box or choose an existing process template from the Process Templates list and confirm by clicking
on the OK button. If a process template with the defined name already exists in the current location,
the following warning message is displayed:

When you confirm this warning by clicking on the Yes button, the existing process template is being
overwritten with the new one. When you click on the No button, the Template Manager dialog box
is displayed again so that you can choose a different name for the process template.

The Template Manager dialog box provides you with the capability to create
an empty process template and copy a number of operation templates from
different process templates into this empty one.

Using Process Templates

SolidCAM enables you to insert operation templates contained

in a process template into a CAM-Part and convert them into
regular SolidCAM operations. To insert a process template
into the CAM-Part, right-click on the Operations header or on
several selected operations in SolidCAM Manager and choose
Add Operation from Process Template.

This command displays the Template Manager dialog box

that enables you to choose an existing process template to be
inserted.

241
During creation of a new operation from the process template,
SolidCAM displays the CoordSys selection dialog box that enables you
to choose the Coordinate System to be used in the created operations.
The inserted operations are incomplete; it means that the operations
have no defined geometry and tool (if the initial operation template
used for the operation creation had no tool). The incomplete operations
are marked with red color.
Since the incomplete operations have no geometry, their tool path cannot be generated. In order to
completely define the operation, you have to edit it by defining the machining geometry and tool
(if necessary).

Managing operation/process templates

To manage your operation and process templates, click Manage

in the SolidCAM menu.
Templates

The Template Manager dialog box is displayed.

The Template Folders section contains the Templates and Process

Templates headers.

When the Templates header is selected, all the operation templates located in the SolidCAM Template
Directory are displayed in the Operation Templates table.

All the process templates located in the SolidCAM Template Directory are listed under the Process
Templates header. When a process template is selected, all the operation templates included in it are
displayed in the Operation Templates table.

242
 5. Operations

Managing process templates

SolidCAM enables you to manage the process

Templates with the right-click menu available on
the Process Templates header or on each process
template.

This menu provides you with the following

commands:
• New Process Template

This command enables you to create

a new empty process Template.

• Rename

This command enables you to

rename an existing operation
template.

• Delete

This command enables you to delete an existing operation template.

Managing operation templates

SolidCAM enables you to manage operation

Templates with the right-click menu available
on the Operation Templates table entries. This
menu is available for the standalone operation
templates located in the SolidCAM Template
Directory and for operation templates included
into process templates.

• Create Process Template

This command enables you to create

a new process template; the current
operation template is added to this
process.

243
• Copy

This command enables you to copy the current operation template into the clipboard.
• Paste

This command enables you to paste the operation template from the clipboard. The
operation template is inserted into the chosen location (either into the active process
template or as a standalone operation template into the into the SolidCAM Template
Directory).

• Edit

This command enables you to load the chosen operation template for editing. When a
template is loaded, SolidCAM displays the appropriate operation dialog box with the
template data.

SolidCAM enables you to edit all the parameters and options of the template, except
for the geometry and coordinate system.

The Save Template button enables you to save the template data using the Save
template dialog box.

• Delete

This command enables you to delete the active operation template.

244
 5. Operations

5.2.3 Info

The button at the right side of the

operation dialog box displays a window
that contains the information summary
of the operation. In this window, the
name of the operation, the Tool data
and the Milling levels data are listed.

5.2.4 Operation buttons

Save

All settings and parameters of the operation are saved on your disk. The tool path, however, is not
calculated. This button enables you to postpone the calculation or to calculate operations in batches.

Use the corresponding commands of SolidCAM Manager to calculate the operation later on.

In the operation list, all operations that have not been calculated are marked
with asterisk (*).

Save & Calculate

All settings and parameters of the operation are saved on your disk and the tool path
is calculated. After the calculation has been performed, you can exit from the operation dialog box
and return to SolidCAM Manager.

245
There is no need to recalculate an operation if its changed parameters do not affect the tool path.
These operation parameters include:
• Tool Outside Holder Length
• Tool Cutting Length
• Holder
• Operation name
• Message
• Extra parameters
• Feed

There is no need to recalculate all the operations if the CNC-machine is changed, as long as the
following MAC parameters are not changed:
• compensation
• comp_by_zero_tool
• comp_arc_arc
• comp_arc_line
• comp_line_line
• comp_x_start
• min_delt_arc_rad
• zero_value
• gen_procs
• abs_zero_chng
• full_gcode
• init_cpos
• set_dir
• loops
• eps_line
• next_angle

For more information on these parameters, refer to SolidCAM GPPTool User Guide.

Simulate

This button performs simulation of the cutting process.

The operation must be calculated before this option can be used.

246
 5. Operations

GCode

This button generates the temporary GCode file for the operation. The GCode file is generated into
the CAM-Part folder regardless of the defined settings. The generated GCode file is opened in the
text editor determined by SolidCAM Settings. When you close the operation dialog box, the file is
removed. Note that the operation must be calculated before this option can be used.

To save the temporary GCode file, use the text editor functionality.

Save & Copy

This button saves the current operation data and automatically creates a new operation with the
same parameters. The new operation is automatically opened for editing.
Using the Save & Copy functionality, you can quickly create a new similar operation where most
parameters are identical.

Exit

This button enables you to close the operation dialog box and return to SolidCAM Manager. Any
changes you made in the operation dialog box are lost if you exit the operation without prior saving.

5.2.5 Calculator
SolidCAM enables you to use a built-in calculator to calculate
parameter values. The Calculator is available for each numeric
parameter either by choosing the appropriate command from the
right-click menu or by pressing the F2 key.

The Calculator dialog box enables you to enter any expression

(Expression edit box) and calculate its value (Result edit box).

You can use the following symbols in the Expression edit box:
• Addition (+)
• Subtraction (-)
• Multiplication (*)
• Division (/)

Parentheses are acceptable.

247
When multiplication and division occur together in an expression, each operation is calculated as
it occurs from left to right. When addition and subtraction occur together in an expression, each
operation is calculated in order of appearance from left to right. Parentheses can be used to override
the order of precedence and force some parts of an expression to be evaluated before others.
Operations within parentheses are always performed before those outside. Within parentheses,
operator precedence is maintained.

SolidCAM enables you to use a set of standard mathematical

functions like sine, cosine, etc. in your formulas. Functions can be
either written manually in the Expression field or chosen from the
Functions list.

The Functions button enables you to display/hide the Functions

list.
Example:

To calculate the value of the following formula:

152.8 / 2
tan (63/2)

you have to write the expression: (158.8/2)/(tan(63/2))

The result (~129.56) is displayed in the Result field.

To insert the calculated result into the field from where the calculator was started, click the OK
button in the Calculator dialog box.

SolidCAM standard functions

sqrt()

Returns a value specifying the square root of a number.

sin()

Returns a value specifying the sine of an angle.

cos()

Returns a value specifying the cosine of an angle.

tan()

Returns a value specifying the tangent of an angle.

248
 5. Operations

abs()

Returns a value of the same type that is passed to it specifying the absolute value of a
number.

The absolute value of a number is its unsigned magnitude. For example,

and abs(1) both return 1.
abs(-1)

acos()

Returns a value specifying the arccosine of a number.

asin()

Returns a value specifying the arcsine of a number.

atan()

Returns a value specifying the arctangent of a number.

atan2(,)

Returns a value specifying the arctangent of quotient first and second arguments.

dist(,) and ang(,) dist(X,Y)

(X,Y)
Returns polar coordinates: distance and angle (in radians) of the
point defined in Cartesian coordinates.
ang(X,Y)

0
pow(,)

Returns a value of the first argument raised to the power of the second argument. For
example, pow(2,3) returns 8.

log10()

Returns a value specifying the base-10 logarithms of a number.

ln()

Returns a value specifying the natural logarithm of a number.

249
 sum3( , , )

Returns the sum value of three arguments.

int()

Returns the integer portion of a number.

rad()

Converts degrees to radians.

deg()

Converts radians to degrees.

5.2.6 Geometry page

This page enables you to choose the appropriate Coordinate System and to define the Machining
Geometry for the operation.

250
 5. Operations

CoordSys

This button enables you to define a Coordinate System for the operation.

You can choose the Coordinate System for

the operation by picking it in the list or by
clicking on the CoordSys button and selecting
chains on the graphic screen. The CoordSys
Manager dialog box is displayed. Together
with this dialog box, SolidCAM displays the
location and axis orientation of all Coordinate
Systems defined in the CAM-Part.

The Coordinate System can be chosen from

the list or picked directly on the model.

To get more information about the Coordinate System, right-

click on its name in the list and choose the Inquire option from
the menu. The CoordSys Data dialog box is displayed.

After the Coordinate System selection, the model is rotated to

the appropriate orientation.

The selection of the Coordinate

System must be the first step in the
operation definition process.

After the Coordinate System has been chosen, define the main
geometry for the operation.

If you have already defined geometries for this CAM-Part, you

can choose a geometry from the list.

When you choose a Geometry from the list,

the related Coordinate System is being chosen
automatically.

Define

This button enables you to define a new geometry for the operation.

Show

This button displays the model geometry in the SolidWorks window.

251
5.2.7 Tool page

The Tool page of the operation dialog box

enables you to define the tool and the related
parameters for the operation.

When the tool is defined, it displays the

following tool parameters:
• Tool type
• Number
• Diameter
• Corner radius

The 3D View section displays the image of

the chosen tool. This image can be zoomed
and rotated.

Select

This button enables you to edit the tool parameters or define the tool for the operation.

• When the tool is not defined for the operation, this button displays the View page of the
Part Tool Table dialog box that enables you to choose the tool from the table or add a new
one.

Choose the tool from the Part Tool Table and click on the Select button.

252
 5. Operations

• When the tool is defined for the operation, this button displays the Edit page of the Part
Tool Table dialog box that enables you to edit the tool parameters and choose another
tool from the list on the right or add a new one.

The following pages are available:

• The Tool Topology page (see topic 3.8.1) contains the Topology data of the tool, such
as diameter, length, angle, corner radius etc.
• The Default Tool Data page (see topic 3.8.2) contains the default Tool Material data,
Feed and Spin data and diameter and length offset numbers.
• The Tool Message page (see topic 3.8.3) contains the fields in which user messages are
entered.
• The Tool Coolant page (see topic 3.8.5) enables you to define the tool coolant options.
• The Holder page (see topic 3.8.4) enables you to define the tool holder by choosing it
from the global or local tool table and specifying the related parameters.
• The Shape page (see topic 3.8.6) enables you to choose a shaped tool for the operation.

253
Data

This button displays the Operation Tool Data dialog box. This dialog box displays the tool material,
feed and speed parameters and the diameter and length offset numbers used in the current operation.
When the tool is chosen for the operation, SolidCAM fills this dialog box with the default data of
the selected tool. The Operation Tool Data dialog box enables you to edit the tool parameters for
the specific operation only.

Tool Material

This section describes one or more of the following properties of the tool:
• Material (High Speed Steel, Carbide, etc.);
• Working conditions;
• Usage (rough, finish, etc.).

The Tool Material is used to define the Speed and Feed defaults.

When you choose the Tool material, the feed type is changed to FZ and the spin type
to V. The Feed and Spin values are default system values since the Work material has
not been defined yet. Loading the tool to an operation connects the Tool material to
the Work material and the correct Feed and Spin values are loaded from the Speed/
Feed defaults table.

254
 5. Operations

Spin

This field defines the spinning speed of the tool by the

following values:

• Spin rate – normal spin rate; used in rough milling.

• Spin finish – finish spin rate; used in finish milling.

The Spin finish check box enables you to optionally define different values for Spin
rate and Spin finish. When this check box is selected, the corresponding edit box
is available so that you can edit its value. When this check box is not selected, the
specified Spin rate value is used for both rough and finish machining.

The spin value can be defined in two types of units: S and V.

S is the default and it signifies Revolutions per Minute. V signifies the material cutting
speed in Meters per Minute in the Metric system or in Feet per Minute in the Inch
system; it is calculated according to the following formula:
V = (S * PI * Tool Diameter) / 1000 (for the Metric system);
V = (S * PI * Tool Diameter) / 12 (for the Inch system).

Feed

This field defines the feed rate of the tool by the following
values:

• Feed XY – feed rate in the XY-plane.

• Feed Z – feed rate in the Z-direction.
• Feed finish – feed rate used for finish milling.

The Feed finish check box enables you to optionally define different values for Feed
XY and Feed finish. When this check box is selected, the corresponding edit box is
available so that you can edit its value. When this check box is not selected, the specified
Feed XY value is used for both rough and finish machining.

• Feed Link – feed rate used for tool path linking movements when the Hatch
strategy is chosen.
• Feed Lead in/out – the feed rates used for approach and retreat tool movements.

The feed value can be defined in two types of units: F and FZ.

255
 F is the default and it signifies Units per minute. FZ signifies Units per tooth and is
calculated according to the following formula:
FZ = F/(Number of Flutes * S)

3D Model - Entry only

When this check box is selected, the defined Feed Z

is used for vertical movements only. When this check
box is not selected, the defined Feed Z is used for all
movements when the Z-coordinate changes.

This option is available only for the 3D

Milling operation.

Diameter offset number

This parameter defines the number of the Diameter Offset Register of the current tool
in the Offset table of the CNC-machine.

Length offset number

This parameter defines the number of the Length Offset Register of the current tool
in the Offset table of the CNC-machine.

Second offset number

This parameter defines the register number of the upper cutting face offset, in the
offset table of the CNC-machine. This option enables SolidCAM to automatically take
into account the minor size differences between the defined tool and the one actually
used for cutting the workpiece, if there are any. You may choose not to use this option
by clearing the check box.

This option is available only for the T-Slot operation.

256
 5. Operations

5.2.8 Levels page

This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements are executed. The default
input values of these parameters are the CAM-Part values that you have specified in the CoordSys
Data dialog box.

To define the Milling levels, enter the values or use the appropriate buttons to pick the Z-levels on
your 3D model.

Start level

This option defines the Z-level that can be optionally used for interoperational movements.

The Start level button and the related edit box are available only if the
Operation Start level option is chosen in Part Settings (see topic 2.10.2).

The default Start level value is equal to the Part Clearance level value of the Coordinate System
chosen for the operation.

The Start level cannot be lower than the Operation Clearance level. If you are trying to save the
operation in which the defined Start level is lower than the Operation Clearance level, the error
message is displayed:

257
Clearance level

This option defines the Z-level to which the tool retreats when it moves from one cut to another.

Safety distance

This option defines the distance to the Upper level at which the tool starts moving at the Z feed rate
you have entered for the tool. Movements from the Clearance level to this height are performed in
the rapid mode.

Upper level

This option defines the Z-level at which the machining starts.

Lower level (Depth)

This option defines the Z-level below which the tool does not mill in any milling strategy.

Delta depth

Delta depth is the offset for the cutting depth that can be changed with its associativity preserved.
This parameter is always relative to the Depth defined for the operation.

If the Delta depth value is positive, a blue arrow is displayed near

its field indicating a positive offset value (in the positive direction
of the Z-axis).

If the Delta depth value is negative, a red arrow is displayed near

its field indicating a negative offset value (in the negative direction
of the Z-axis).

The value of these parameters is the Z-coordinate. These parameters can be defined either by
entering the value in the edit box or by picking a point on the solid model (except for Safety
distance). In the latter case, the parameters are associative to the solid model. Associativity enables
SolidCAM to be synchronized with the solid model changes. SolidCAM automatically updates the
CAM data when the model is modified.

258
 5. Operations

Depth associativity

The following operation parameters are associative to the SolidWorks model.

• Clearance level
• Upper level
• Lower level

SolidCAM enables you to define these parameters by picking the entities on the solid model.

The Depth parameter used in some operations (Profile, Pocket, etc.) is

indirectly associative. You have two possibilities:

• To define Depth by manual input.

• To define Lower level by picking on the model. In this case, Depth
is calculated automatically. The associativity is established in Lower
level. When either Upper level or Lower level is synchronized, Depth
is updated.

The associativity is saved only for the following picked items:

• Vertex
• Sketch point
• Reference point
• Part origin
• Planar face parallel to the XY-
plane of the current Coordinate
System
• Plane parallel to the XY-plane
of the current Coordinate
System

The Pick Lower level dialog box displays the Z-coordinate of the picked
point. If the value is associative to the model, the edit box is highlighted
in pink.
When the parameter is defined by picking model entities, SolidCAM
displays the Z-coordinate of the picked point in the related edit box. The
background of the edit box changes. The value displayed in this edit box
is associative to the solid model.

When you type in this edit box, the associativity is removed.

259
The associative parameters are displayed in SolidCAM Manager under the
operation name.

When the parameters are not synchronized, the parameters and the parent
operation are marked with the synchronization mark .

The synchronization commands are available for operations in the right-click menu.

• The Synchronize command enables you to synchronize the values of the parameters
with the updated model.
• The Synchronize & Calculate command enables you to synchronize the values of the
parameters with the updated model and calculate the operation after the synchronization.

260
 5. Operations

• The Check Synchronization command enables you to check the model for updates
affecting the specified parameter.

• The Break Z-Levels Associativity/Break associativity

command enables you to break the associativity
between Z-Levels parameters and the solid model. The
confirmation message is displayed.

• The Show command highlights the model entity with which the depth parameter is
associated. The Show Geometry dialog box is displayed. The Exit button enables you to
return to the normal model view.

When the synchronization fails, SolidCAM marks the operation and the
parameters with the exclamation mark.
The parameters definition can be edited in the operation dialog box. You
have to either type the necessary values or redefine the points on the model.
In the first case, the associativity is removed.

Interoperational tool movements

SolidCAM enables you to perform the interoperational tool movements either through the Part
Clearance level (same for all operations of the CAM-Part) or through the Operation Start level (can
be different from the Part Clearance Level and vary for each operation).

Interoperational tool through Part Clearance level

SolidCAM performs the interoperational movements through Part Clearance level

when two neighboring operations use the same Tool (and Tool offset) and Coordinate
System.
Part Clearance Level

Operation
Clearance Level
Operation Clearance Level Machining
levels
Safety distance

Safety distance

Rapid movements
Feed movements

261
Interoperational tool through Operation Start level

You can change the level where the interoperational movements are performed for the
specific operations when the same Coordinate system, Tool and Tool offset are used.

This mode enables to reduce the rapid movements, especially between machining areas
located significantly deeper than the Part Clearance level.

In this mode, the tool performs interoperational movements at the Operation Start
level, which can be different from the Part Clearance level. The Operation Start level
can be specified separately for each operation.

When the operation cuts are finished, the tool moves to the Operation Clearance level
with the Rapid feed.
Part Clearance Level

Operation Start Level

Operation Clearance Level

Operation
Clearance Level
Machining
Safety levels
distance
Safety
distance

Rapid movements
Feed movements

262
 5. Operations

If the Start level of the next operation is higher than the Operation Clearance level, the
tool ascends to the Start level of the next operation, then performs XY-movement and
descends to the Operation Clearance level of the next operation. All these movements
are performed with the Rapid feed. The tool will then perform the rapid movement to
the Safety Distance level of the first cut and start the descent to the first cut with the
working feed.
Next Operation
Start Level
Next Operation
Clearance Level
Previous Operation
Clearance Level
Safety
distance Operation
First cut

Operation
Last cut

Rapid movements
Feed movements

If the Start level of the next operation is lower than the Operation Clearance level, the
tool performs the XY-movements at the Operation Clearance level and than descends
to Clearance level of the next operation without stopping at the Start level. All these
movements are performed with the Rapid feed. The tool then performs the rapid
movement to the Safety Distance level of the first cut and starts the descent to the first
cut with the working feed.
Previous Operation Clearance Level
Next Operation Start Level

Next Operation Clearance Level

Safety distance

Operation Operation
Last cut First cut

Rapid movements
Feed movements

263
 All of these rules are relevant only when there is no Tool change, Tool offset change
and Coordinate System change between the operations. If there are such changes, the
Operation Start level is ignored and SolidCAM performs the tool movement through
the Part Clearance level.

5.2.9 Technology page

This page enables you to define the technological parameters such as offsets, roughing and finishing
data, depth type, etc.

5.2.10 Advanced Technology page

This page contains the infrequently used parameters and options whose definition is required only
in particular machining cases.

264
 5. Operations

Advanced sort

This option enables you to define the machining order in case the operation geometry is composed
from several chains. The button displays the Advanced Sort dialog box (see topic 6.6.3) that enables
you to define the order of sorting of the chains included in the operation geometry.

At the first stage, SolidCAM calculates the box surrounding

each chain. This box is used to determine the reference point
that will be used for the advanced sorting. For Linear sorting
strategies, the reference point is automatically defined in the
box corner corresponding to the start position defined by the
sorting strategy. For example, if the start position of the chosen
sorting strategy is the upper position (with the maximal X- and
Y-coordinates), SolidCAM automatically chooses the upper
left corner of the chain box to be the reference point. For
Circular sorting strategies, the reference point is automatically
chosen in the center of the calculated box.

When the reference points are defined for all chains, SolidCAM
performs their sorting in the manner similar to the sorting of
the drill positions. The resulting order of the reference points
after the sorting defines the order of the chains.

Final cuts

This option enables you to divide the machined depth into two regions,
each with its own Step down, when the Step down of the bottommost
region is smaller.

The Final cuts dialog box enables you to define the parameters of the
final cuts machining.

When the Final cuts used check box is selected, Step down
the option is used.

The Number of steps value defines the number of

final cuts. Step value

The Step down value defines the distance between

two successive final cuts.

Final cuts

265
When the Final cuts option is used, SolidCAM performs the machining with the Operation Step
down from the Upper level till the Depth calculated according to the following formula:

Depth - Number of cuts * Step down

From this depth, the machining is performed in a number of cuts determined in the Final cuts
dialog box. The machining is performed in such manner until the full operation depth is reached.

The Final cuts button is available only for

Profile, Pocket and Contour 3D operations. In
the Contour 3D operation, the Tool side must
be set to Left or Right.
When this option is used, the check box on
the button is selected.

Wall draft angle

This option enables you to perform the machining of inclined walls with a draft angle constant
along the entire geometry.

When you click on the Wall draft angle button, the Wall Draft Angle dialog box is displayed.

When the Wall draft angle check box is selected, the inclined wall machining is performed.

266
 5. Operations

The Wall draft angle button is available only for Profile and Pocket
operations. In the Profile operation, the Depth type must be set to
Constant or Define.

When this option is used, the check box on

the button is selected.

External wall angle

This parameter defines the draft angle of the wall measured from the Z-axis direction
as shown.
For the inclined wall machining, each cutting pass located at a specific Z-level is
generated according to the specified External wall angle value.

Island wall angle

This parameter defines the draft angle of the island walls measured similar to the
External wall angle parameter.

This parameter is available only for the Pocket operation.

For the inclined wall machining, each cutting pass located at a specific Z-level is
generated according to the specified External wall angle/Island wall angle value.

267
External corner type

This option enables you to define how the cutting passes will be connected during
the external corners machining. There are three ways to connect between the cutting
passes:
• Sharp corner

The tool path is calculated to perform the machining of a sharp corner. This
option affects only the machining of geometry sharp corners.
Geometry

• Conical fillet

The tool path is calculated to perform the machining of the corner with a conical
fillet; the radius of the tool path rounding increases from one pass to the next.
This option affects only the machining of sharp geometry corners.
Geometry

268
 5. Operations

• Cylindrical fillet

This option affects the machining of both of sharp and filleted corners of the
geometry. The machining of sharp corners is performed similar to the Conical
fillet option. For the filleted corners, the tool path is calculated to perform the
machining of the corner with a cylindrical fillet; the radius of the tool path
rounding is the same for all cutting passes.
Geometry

Trochoidal milling

This option enables you to replace the straight

lines in a tool path by circular moves with a
constant radius.

The Trochoidal button is available only for Profile, Pocket and 3D Milling
operations. In the Profile operation, the Depth type must be set to Constant.
In the 3D Milling operation, the Hatch or Contour strategy must be chosen.

When this option is used, the check box on the button is selected.

269
Potential benefits include:
• Faster metal removal

Making the constant circular curve the only direction change enables a high feed rate
to be consistently maintained.
• Longer tool life

The cutting edge is in contact with the material through only about 5% of the cutter’s
revolution vs. up to 50% for more conventional cutting. Cooling of the tool is improved.

The Trochoidal dialog box enables you to define the parameters of trochoidal milling.

• Radius

This field defines the radius of the circle that describes

the movement of the tool.
• Step

This field defines the distance between the centers of

two adjacent circles that describe the tool movement.
Radius Tool trajectory

Step

• Engagement angle

This field defines the angle measured between two vectors describing the area of
contact between the tool and the machined material.
During the calculation, SolidCAM checks the
engagement angle at each tool position defined
by the Step parameter. If the engagement angle is
greater than the specified Engagement angle value,
SolidCAM at this position performs a circular tool
movement with the radius defined by the Radius
parameter. If the engagement angle is smaller than Engagement angle
the specified Engagement angle value, SolidCAM
does not generate a circular movement at this
position; the tool moves to the next position.

270
 5. Operations

Plunging

Plunging is a technology of removing material from a given area

using a special tool. Instead of milling the material, the tool moves
up and down as in a drilling motion, travelling along the path type
you choose.

The Plunging button is available only

for Profile and Pocket operations. In the
Profile operation, the Depth type must be
set to Constant.
When the Plunging option is used, the
check box on the button is selected.

The Plunging dialog box is displayed.

Step

This field defines the distance between each two adjacent

vertical plunging movements of the tool.

Drill cycle type

SolidCAM enables you to choose preferable drilling cycles for

the plunging operation.

1. Click on the Drill cycle type button and choose the

cycle type you want in the Drill cycle dialog box.

2. Click on the Data button and specify the parameters

in the Drill options dialog box.

For more information on the Drilling cycles, see topic 6.6.3.

271
5.2.11 Link page

This page enables you to define the parameters of approach and retreat of the tool, linking between
tool paths, etc.

5.2.12 Miscellaneous parameters page

This page contains the miscellaneous parameters of the operation.

Message

You can type a message that will appear in the generated GCode file.
G43G0 X-49.464 Y-38.768 Z12. S1000 M3
(Upper Face Milling)
(--------------------------)
(P-POCK-T2 - POCKET)
(--------------------------)
G0 X-49.464 Y-38.768
Z10.

272
 5. Operations

Extra parameters

This field is available only when special operation options have been
implemented in the post-processor you are using for this CAM-Part.

Click on the Parameters list button. The Operation Options dialog box is displayed with the
additional parameters defined in the post-processor.

Gouge check

This option enables you to perform gouge checking after the calculation
of 2.5D Milling operations. During this checking, SolidCAM detects
all the gouges between the tool and the target model and informs
about the positions where these gouges occur.

The Check gouges during calculation check box enables you to

perform the gouge checking directly after the tool path calculation.
You can also define the gouge checking tolerance in the corresponding
edit box. If gouges are detected during this checking, SolidCAM
informs you about their location on the model by displaying the
coordinates in the Check gouges dialog box and dots showing the
gouge positions on the model in the graphic area.

273
In this dialog box, the check boxes enable you to control the visibility of the gouge positions on the
model. When a check box is selected, SolidCAM displays the corresponding gouge position on the
model with a cyan dot.

When a check box is not selected, the related gouge position is not highlighted on the model. The
Show All button enables you to display all of the detected gouge positions on the model by selecting
all of the check boxes. The Hide All button enables you to hide all of the detected gouge positions
from the model by clearing all of the check boxes.

Approximation of arcs

This option enables you to control the process of arcs approximation

at the operation level.

The Approximate arcs by lines check box that enables you to control
the existence of arcs in the GCode output for the current operation.

When this check box is selected, SolidCAM approximates all tool path arcs by lines. The precision
of the approximation depends on the arc_max_chord and arc_max_angle parameters located
in the MAC file; the resulting GCode does not contain arcs.

When this check box is not selected, the resulting GCode might contain arcs.

274
 5. Operations

5.3 Working with operations

Some of the operation commands affect all existing operations, others can only be applied to one
or more selected operations. SolidCAM produces different menus, depending on whether you right-
click on the Operations header in SolidCAM Manager or on an existing operation in the list.

In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on the Operations header. The

operations menu is displayed.

If you right-click on an existing operation, the operation commands

are displayed.

5.3.1 Add Operation

This command enables you to add a new operation to your CAM-Part. In SolidCAM, an operation
is a single machining step. Normally, you manufacture a workpiece using several machining steps
and technologies. For each of these steps you can define a separate operation. An operation can be
very complex, but always uses one tool, one major geometry and executes one machining type, e.g.
3D milling, profile milling or drilling.

You can edit any single machining operation, change the operation sequence and generate the
GCode, combine and split the operation list of your CAM-Part.

275
 1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-
click on an operation.

2. Move to the Add submenu and

choose the type of operation
you want to define.

• When you add an operation by right-clicking on the Operations

header, the new operation is added at the end of the operations
list.
• When you add an operation by right-clicking on an existing
operation, the new operation is inserted after the selected
operation.

5.3.2 Add Operation from Template

This command enables you create a new operation from an existing template.

For more information on Operation Templates, see topic 5.2.2.

5.3.3 Add Operations from Process Template

This command enables you to insert the operation templates contained in a process template into
a CAM-Part and convert them into regular SolidCAM operations.

For more information on Process Templates, see topic 5.2.2.

276
 5. Operations

5.3.4 Add Machining Process

This command enables you to use a previously created Machining Process in your CAM-Part.

For more information on Machining Processes, refer to chapter 8.

5.3.5 Create Template

This command displays the Template Manager dialog box that enables you to save operation data
as a template.

When this option is applied to several selected operations, a process template is created with all the
selected operations included.

For more information on Operation Templates and Process Templates, see topic 5.2.2.

5.3.6 Edit
This command enables you to view or change the definition and parameters of an existing
operation. If you select this command, the corresponding operation dialog box is displayed and you
can change the operation definition.

5.3.7 Calculate/Calculate All

Before you are able to generate the GCode for your CNC-machine, you have to perform the tool
path calculation. Based on the geometries, machining strategy and technological parameters you
have defined and saved in the operations, SolidCAM calculates the movements of the tool.

If you expect a long tool path calculation time, mainly in 3D Milling

operations, it is advisable to define your operations, save them and postpone
the tool path calculation. This function enables you to calculate large CAM-
Parts with many operations in a batch routine e.g. overnight.

5.3.8 GCode/GCode All

The commands in this submenu enable you to generate, list, copy or print NC-programs.

For more information on generating the GCode, refer to chapter 11.

277
5.3.9 Calculate & GCode All
This command enables you to calculate all the operations in your CAM-Part and produce the
GCode.

5.3.10 Tool Sheet

This option enables you to summarize the operations information by generating a tool sheet
documentation.

For more information on this option, see topic 2.14.

5.3.11 Simulate
You can simulate and verify operations that have been saved and calculated.
For more information on Simulation, refer to chapter 10.

5.3.12 File
This option enables you to append ASCII files with the GCode to
your CAM-Part.

5.3.13 Operation Group

An operation group in SolidCAM is a set of separate
operations with a defined sequential order. The
operation group menu enables you to manage
operation groups.

Define Operation Group

This option converts the selected operations into an operation group.

The Define New Operation Group dialog box is displayed.

1. Enter an operation group name in the Name

field.
2. Choose the type from the list.
3. You can also enter the Description – a text string
that describes the operation group.
The selected operations are converted into an operation group.

278
 5. Operations

Add Operation Group to Machining Process Table

This option enables you to insert the selected operation group into the current Machining Process
Table.

When the operation group is added, the following message is displayed:

Remove Operations from Operation Group

This option removes the selected operation from the operation group.

Explode Operation Group

This option turns the operation group into single operations.

5.3.14 Cut/Copy/Paste
SolidCAM enables you to cut, copy and paste operations.

• The Copy command copies the selected operations into the clipboard.

• The Paste command inserts the operations from the clipboard, after the selected
operation. The pasted operations are marked by an asterisk; they must be calculated to
obtain the tool path.

If the clipboard is empty, the Paste command is unavailable.

• The Cut command cuts the operations and copies them into the clipboard. When the
operations are pasted from the clipboard, the source operations are removed.

5.3.15 Rename

SolidCAM enables you to rename a specific operation. Right-click on

the operation name in SolidCAM Manager and choose the Rename
command from the menu.

The Operation Rename dialog box is displayed. This dialog box enables
you to assign a new name to the operation.

279
5.3.16 Change tool

This option enables you to change the tool used in a particular operation directly from SolidCAM
Manager. The Tool dialog box is displayed so that you can choose another tool.

5.3.17 Change tool data

This option enables you to edit the tool parameters such as tool material, feed and speed values,
offset numbers used in a particular operation directly from SolidCAM Manager. The Operation Tool
Data dialog box is displayed so that you can edit the data.

The All operations as first check box enables you to define the listed tool parameters in all operations
identically to the first operation.

280
 5. Operations

5.3.18 Info

This option enables you to obtain the summary of a specific operation

directly from SolidCAM Manager without opening the operation.
The Info dialog box is displayed with the information of the selected
operation. It contains Tool information (diameter, corner radius, taper
angle and lengths); Operation Tool data (Feed and Spin parameters) and
Levels (Upper level, Depth and Step down).

The icon located in the title bar enables you

to pin/unpin the Info dialog box.

5.3.19 Delete/Delete All

This command enables you to delete operations from the operation list of your CAM-Part.

1. Select an operation you want to delete. To delete several operations at a time,

select them while holding the Shift or Ctrl keys. Right-click on the operations
and choose the Delete command.

2. To delete several operations at a time, click Yes to all in the confirmation

message.

5.3.20 Suppress/Unsuppress

SolidCAM enables you to suppress any operation in the CAM-Part,

thus temporarily excluding it from the CAM-Part. When you suppress
an operation, the operation does not participate in the calculation,
simulation and GCode generation, as if the operation was deleted from
the CAM-Part.
In the SolidCAM Manager tree, the names of suppressed operations
appear in gray. The tool path check box is disabled for the suppressed
operations.
The Suppress/Unsuppress command is available via the right-click
menu, for a single operation or a list of operations.

281
 When the selected operations are not
suppressed, right-click on the list of
selected operations and choose Suppress.
All selected operations are suppressed.
When the selected operations are
suppressed, the Unsuppress command
available in the right-click operation menu
unsuppresses the selected operations.
When the list of selected operations
contains both suppressed and
unsuppressed operations, both Suppress
and Unsuppress commands are available
in the right-click menu. The Suppress
command suppresses all the unsuppressed
operations in the list. The Unsuppress
command unsuppresses all the suppressed
operations in the list.

Editing suppressed operations

SolidCAM enables you to edit a suppressed operation. However,

the Save & Calculate, Simulate and GCode buttons are unavailable.

282
 5. Operations

Tool path

When an operation is suppressed, SolidCAM re-generates the CAM-Part tool path to exclude the
tool path data related to the suppressed operations.

The tool path stays unchanged till the parameters of the operation are updated.

During the unsuppressing of the suppressed operation, the CAM-Part tool path is re-generated in
order to include the data of the unsuppressed operations.

Suppressing linked operations

3D Drilling operation + 3D Milling operation

When the Suppress command is applied to the 3D Drilling operation, the result is the
following:

• The 3D Drilling operation is suppressed;

• The tool path of the related 3D Milling operation is removed and the operation
appears marked with asterisk.

When the Suppress command is applied to the 3D Milling operation, only this
operation is suppressed. Both 3D Milling and related 3D Drilling operations must be
selected in order to be suppressed together.

283
5.4 Managing Operations in the SolidCAM Manager tree

5.4.1 Operation Sequence

You can change and rearrange the sequence of operations in the
SolidCAM Manager. Drag the operation to its new place in the operation
list.

5.4.2 Undo Sequence

This command enables you to undo your last change in the sequence
of the operation list.

5.4.3 Split
This command enables you to separate your list of operations before
the GCode generation. If you place splits after operations and click
GCode All, separate NC-programs are generated for each operation or
group of operations located between the corresponding splits. Each
split has a name and acts like a folder containing operations, fixtures,
etc. In this example, you receive three separate GCode files for the
operations divided by the splits.

Adding splits

1. Right-click on the operation after which you

want to insert a split.

2. Choose the Split command from the menu.

3. Enter the split name in the Split dialog box.

3. The split is inserted.

The (-) icon located near the split icon enables you to collapse/expand all the items (operations and
fixtures) located under the split.

284
 5. Operations

Managing splits
• Add

This command enables you to add an operation to the list of operations that belong
to the current split.

• Add Machining Process

This command enables you to add a Machining Process to

the list of operations that belong to the current split.

• GCode

These commands enable you to generate and list GCode

files for the operations that belong to the chosen split. The
GCode file generated for each split is automatically saved
in the CAM-Part folder.

285
 • User documentation

These commands enable you to generate and edit the

documentation that contains the data about the operations
that belong to the current split.

• Delete

This command enables you to delete a split item. The

confirmation message is displayed. Confirm it by clicking
on the Yes button.

• Rename

This command enables you to edit the split name in the Split dialog box.

• Suppress/Unsuppress

This command enables you to suppress/unsuppress the split with all of its contents.

Just like re-sequencing operations, you can move a split mark to another
location in the operation list. Drag the split mark on the operation after
which you want to insert it.

5.4.4 Expand tree

This command enables you to open the operation list so that all the geometries used in each
operation are displayed in the tree structure of SolidCAM Manager.

5.4.5 Collapse tree

This command enables you to reduce the operation list so that only the operation names are
displayed in the tree structure of SolidCAM Manager.

5.4.6 Show/Hide Tools in tree

This command displays or hides the entries of tools used in the part
operations.

286
 5. Operations

The right-click menu available on the tool entries enables you to

change the tool and manage the tool data for multiple operations
where the same tool is used.

Change tool

This option enables you to change the selected tool directly from SolidCAM Manager. The Tool
dialog box is displayed so that you can choose another tool (see topic 5.3.16).

Change tool data

This option enables you to manage the tool data for multiple operations where the selected tool is
used. The Operation Tool Data dialog box is displayed.

The List operation section displays the list of operations that use this tool.

The Show all operations using the current tool check box enables you to include in this list all of
the CAM-Part operations in which the current tool is used. When this check box is not selected, the
List operation section displays only the operations that belong to the current tool entry chosen in
the SolidCAM Manager tree.

The All checked operations as selected one check box enables you to apply the parameters defined
in the dialog box to all the checked operations.

5.4.7 Show/Hide CoordSys in tree

This command displays or hides the entries of Coordinate Systems

used in the part operations.

287
Indent according to Tools/CoordSys

This command available in the right-click menu on the operations header enables you to indent all
the operations in the CAM-Part according to the Tools/Coordinate Systems.

5.4.8 Automatic Sort

This command enables you to sort all of the operations that you created to
work in a specific order.

1. Choose the Automatic sort item from the menu.

The Automatic Sort Priority dialog box is displayed.
2. Choose the desired options.
3. Click on the OK button to confirm the operation.
4. All the operations are sorted in the specified order.

If you click OK without choosing any of the options in the dialog box,
the operations are sorted starting from tool number 1 and upward.

Automatic Sort options:

• CoordSys: operations are sorted according to the Coordinate System number.

• Upper level: operations started on a higher level appear before operations started on a
lower level.

• Use center drill first: all tools tagged as center drills are moved to the top of the operation
list.

• Sort drill radius: drills can be sorted according to size, either from small diameters to
large diameters or from large diameters to small diameters.

288
 5. Operations

• Move drills to end: this option moves all drills not tagged as center drills to the end of the
operation list.

The following is the order of precedence if more than one option is chosen.
1. CoordSys
2. Upper level
3. Use Center drill first
4. Sort Drill radius
5. Move Drills to end

Undo Sort

This option returns the automatic sort to the original order.

289
5.5 Operation Transformations

When you transform an operation or a group of operations, commands such as move, copy, translate
and rotate insert the corresponding G-function and cycle into the GCode file. You can check the
defined transformation during the tool path simulation.

1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on the entry of the operation you need to

transform.

2. Choose the Transform option from the menu.

290
 5. Operations

The Operation Transformations dialog box is displayed.

The operation transformations are enabled only if your CNC-machine

controller supports the corresponding function.

5.5.1 Operation transformations

This section offers you the choice of whether the original

operation will be transformed or its copy will be added for
transformation and, in the latter case, enables you to define the
placing of the new operation in the SolidCAM Manager tree.

The following options are available:

• Edit operation transformations

This option enables you to perform transformation of the selected operation.

• New operation (add at current position in operations tree)

This option enables you to add a copy of the selected operation and apply the
transformation to the copied operation, without effect on the original operation. The
transformed copy is inserted immediately after the original operation in the SolidCAM
Manager tree. The original operation can be suppressed by selecting the appropriate
check box in the Options section.
• New operation (add at end of operations tree)

This option also enables you to add a copy of the selected operation and apply the
transformation to the copied operation, without effect on the original operation. The
transformed copy is inserted at the end of the operation list in the SolidCAM Manager
tree. The original operation can be suppressed by selecting the appropriate check box
in the Options section.

291
5.5.2 Options

This section contains two check boxes that enable you to manage the
original operation:
• Include original operation

When this check box is selected, the original operation is

included in the transforming action.
• Suppress original operation

When this check box is selected, the original operation is suppressed, and the
transformation is applied only for the operation copy.

This check box is available only when a new operation is added for
transformation.

5.5.3 Transformations table

The transformations table lists the details of the defined transformation.

• Operation name

This column displays the list of operations to be transformed. In case of adding a

new operation, the operation copy receives the Transform_ prefix with the sequential
number of transformation. When an additional transformation action is defined on
the existing transformation, the Transform_ prefix is added with the next sequential
number, and the names of the previously transformed operations move under the new
transformation.

292
 5. Operations

• Transformation

This column displays the type of transformation action to be performed on the selected
operations. The following types of transformation are available: rotation, translation,
mirroring and repeating the tool path using the fourth axis.

• Description

This column displays the details of transformation parameters defined for the current
operations.

5.5.4 Transformation buttons

The buttons on the right represent the list of transforming actions that can be
performed on the chosen operations. Each button displays the related dialog box
that enables you to define the parameters of the transformation.

Init

This button cancels any transformation action that was performed on the operations
that do not have inheritance (operation copy added for transformation). When you
click on this button to cancel the transformation defined for operations that have
inheritance, the following error message is displayed:

If you want to cancel the transformation defined for operations with inheritance, exit the Operation
Transformations dialog box and delete the operation copy in the SolidCAM Manager tree.

293
Rotate

This button enables you to define the tool path rotation around the Z-axis of
the CoordSys origin or around the Z-axis passing through a defined point. The
rotation can be performed using two options:

• Delta

Several rotations are performed from a start angle with a uniform

delta angle. The Rotate Delta dialog box is displayed.

1. Enter the Number of Rotations.

2. Start angle – enter the start angle (+/-) relative to the positive X-axis.

3. Delta angle – enter the delta value (+/-) between two rotation steps.

4. Confirm with the OK button.

• List

This option copies the operation tool path to a list of

angle locations defined by their angle relative to the
positive X-axis. The Rotate list dialog box is displayed.

1. Enter the value of the angle and the

number of rotations.

2. Click on the Add button to add the angle

to the list of angles.

3. Confirm with the OK button.

To edit an angle value in the list, click on the

corresponding entry in the Value column and enter the
new value.

To delete an entry from the list, select it and click on the Delete Selected button.

294
 5. Operations

Translate

This button enables you to copy the operation tool path to a rectangular matrix of locations (the
Matrix option) or to a list of locations defined by their X-, Y- and Z-coordinates (the List option).
• Matrix

This option copies the operation tool path to a rectangular

matrix of locations. When you choose this option, the
Matrix dialog box is displayed.

• Number of rows: enter the number of rows.

• Number of columns: enter the number of columns.
• X Step: enter the delta value between each two
columns.
• Y Step: enter the delta value between each two rows.
• Rows first: the operation tool path is first copied horizontally, and then vertically
in the defined matrix of locations.
• Columns first: the operation tool path is first copied vertically, and then
horizontally in the defined matrix of locations.
• List

This option copies the operation tool path to a list

of locations defined by their X-, Y- and Z-values.
The origin of the operation is moved to the
absolute XYZ-position defined in the Translation
List dialog box.

1. Enter the values of the absolute

XYZ-position where the operation
should be executed (separate the
values by commas or spaces) or pick
a point on the model.

2. Click the Enter button to add the position to the Translation list.

3. Confirm with the OK button.

To edit a position in the translation list, select it, enter the new
values for this position into the Offset value edit box and then
click on the Enter button.
To delete a position from the translation list, select it and press
the Delete key.

295
Mirror

This button enables you to mirror the operation tool path relative
to the X, Y or both axes. The point about which the operations are
mirrored is either the CoordSys position or the Mirror/Rotate point
defined in the operation. The Mirror dialog box is displayed.

1. Click on the corresponding button to define the

axis around which the operations are mirrored:
• X – mirrors around the X-axis.
• Y – mirrors around the Y-axis.
• XY – mirrors around both the X- and the Y-axes.
• Reset enables you to clear the entry field.

2. Confirm with the OK button.

4th Axis

This option enables you to execute 4-axis rotations of an operation

tool path. After the 4th axis is rotated, the operation is executed
again. When you choose this option, the Rotate list dialog box is
displayed.

1. Enter the value of the angle and the number of

rotations.

2. Click on the Add button to add the angle to the

list.

3. Confirm with the OK button.

To edit an angle value in the list, click on the corresponding entry in

the Value column and enter the new value.

To delete an entry from the list, select it and click on the Delete Selected button.

Synchronize

This button enables you to perform synchronization of the operation copies with their original
operations, in case of changes to the original operations. Note that this button is available only for
the defined transformation with inheritance.

296
 5. Operations

When you click on this button, the Synchronization of operations technology dialog box is displayed.

• Synchronize the technology of this operation with its original operation

When the original operation has been edited, this option enables you to synchronize
the operation copy with the performed changes.

• Synchronize the technology of all operations with original operation

When transformation is defined for multiple operations and the original operations
have been edited, this option enables you to synchronize the operation copies with the
changes made in the original operations.

297
5.6 Fixture

SolidCAM enables you to define the Part Fixtures such as clamps, vises, jig plates, etc.

This feature enables you to get a more realistic picture

during the simulation and check possible collisions
between the cutting tools and fixtures.

1. Right-click on an operation entry

in the SolidCAM Manager tree and
choose Define Fixture.

2. The Fixture dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box enables you to
define the fixture geometry.

298
 5. Operations

5.6.1 Fixture dialog box

Define 3D Model

This button enables you to select the 3D model for the fixture. The 3D Geometry dialog box is
displayed.

Show on Model

With this button, you can highlight the selected fixture model in the SolidWorks window.

299
Show

With this button, you can display the Fixture in the

Rest Material window of SolidCAM.

Self-intersections

The Check and fix button in the Self-intersections

section enables you to check the model for self-
intersections (see topic 10.6.6) and fix them if they
are found.

When self-intersections are detected, the following

message is displayed:

Confirm it with the Yes button to fix the self-intersections.

Note that the process of self-intersection fixing can take a long time to complete, depending on the
complexity of the model.

When the fixture is defined, SolidCAM adds the Fixture item to the SolidCAM Manager tree.

SolidCAM enables you to define any number of fixtures that can be used at different stages of the
CAM-Part.

300
2.5D Milling 6
SolidCAM enables you to perform a number of standard 2.5D
operations like profile, pocket, slot machining, etc. These operations
can be performed using 2D sketches as well as solid models.
Full tool path control and powerful algorithms ensure that your
manufacturing will be performed in accordance with your plans.

 Profile Operation
 Pocket Operation
 Drilling Operation
 Slot Operation
 Translated Surface Operation
6.1 Profile Operation

This operation enables you to mill on or along a contour.

The profile geometry can be either open or closed. In profile
milling you can optionally use tool radius compensation to the
right or left side of the geometry. SolidCAM offers two types
of profiling:

• Milling a single profile to the specified constant or

variable depth in one step or in several user-defined
down steps;

• Milling concentric profiles to the specified constant or variable depth. This type of
profiling generates several concentric profiles that start from the defined clear offset
distance from the profile, and finishes on the profile geometry, thus clearing the area
around the profile to a constant depth.

In the Operations right-click menu, click Add Operation, Profile. The Profile Operation dialog box
is displayed.

302
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.1.1 Levels page

This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements are executed.

6.1.2 Technology page

This page enables you to define the technological parameters of the Profile milling.

303
Modify

The Tool side option enables you to

define the tool position relative to
the geometry.

Left Right Center

• Right: the tool cuts to the right of the profile geometry at the distance defined by the
values set in the Modify offset section of the Modify Geometry dialog box.

• Left: the tool cuts to the left of the profile geometry at the distance defined by the values
set in Modify offset section of the Modify Geometry dialog box.

• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry. The compensation cannot
be used with this option.

When the Zigzag option is used, the Tool

side combo-box defines the tool location
for the first cut. For each successive cutting
pass, the tool position is changed relative to
the geometry direction.

Geometry

This button enables you to modify a geometry shared by several

operations separately for each operation.

The geometry modification is supported for Profile, Contour 3D, T-Slot and
Translated Surface operations.

Geometries shared by several operations can be modified separately for each operation. The
geometry modification includes assigning different values to the Extension, Offset and Define Start
parameters of the geometry, and also choosing which geometry chains are active in the operation (in
case of multiple chain geometry). The modification is relevant only for the current operation and
does not affect other operations where the geometry is used.

304
 6. 2.5D Milling

The Modify Geometry dialog box enables you to perform the geometry
modification for the current operation.
• Tool side

This option enables you to define the position of the tool

relative to the geometry.

• Chains

This section displays the list of all geometry chains

participating in the current geometry. The check box
located near each chain name in the list enables you to
include/exclude the chain from the geometry of the
current operation.

The right-click menu available on the elements of the list enables you to perform the
following actions:

• The Check All command enables you to check all the

chains.

• The Uncheck All command enables you to uncheck all

the chains.

• The Invert Check States command enables you to

reverse the state of the check boxes.

• The Reverse command enables you to reverse the direction of the chain.

• The Reverse All command enables you to reverse the direction of all chains.

305
• Start/End Extension

This section enables you to define the extension for the

selected chain. The Start and End parameters define
the start and end extension lengths. The extension is
performed tangentially to the chain entities at the start
and end points of the geometry chain. The start and end
elements are determined according to the chain direction.
When a negative value is defined, SolidCAM shortens the chain by a distance measured
along the chain elements and specified by the Start and End parameters. These
parameters can be defined either by entering the values or by picking on the model
(when the cursor is placed in the edit box).
Start extension
End extension

Geometry chain

The Apply to all button enables you to apply the extension defined for the selected
chain to all chains of the geometry.
• Modify offset

This section enables you

to define the offset for the Machining Geometry
selected chain. Machining is
performed at the specified
offset. Modify offset

306
 6. 2.5D Milling

Geometry chain

Modify offset

Modified chain

SolidCAM enables you to define the Modify offset parameter by entering the value or
by picking on the model (when the cursor is placed in the edit box).

The Apply to all button enables you to apply the Modify offset value defined for the
selected chain for all the chains of the geometry.

The direction of the Modify offset

Negative offset
parameter for open contours is
defined according to the chain Geometry chain
direction. In case of a positive
value, the offset is defined to the
right side of the chain (according Positive offset
to the chosen chain direction). In
case of a negative value, the offset is
defined to the left side of the chain
(according to the chosen chain
direction).

For closed contours, a positive

Positive offset
Modify offset value defines the offset
Geometry chain
to the outside of the geometry; a
negative Modify offset value defines
the offset to the inside of the
geometry Negative offset

The Take 1/2 from selected offset

option enables you to offset the
chain by half of the defined offset
value.

307
 In the part shown below the central pads should be machined with a single straight
cutting pass located in the middle of the pad. After defining the geometry at the edge
of the pad, the geometry is offset using the picked position at the opposite edge and
the Take 1/2 from selected offset option.

Modified
geometry

Picked
offset position

Geometry

• Start position

When the Default option is chosen, the start position is calculated automatically using
the SolidCAM internal algorithm.

When the Shift option is chosen, you to define the shifting

of the start position for closed chains. The shifting of the
start point is defined as a percentage of the chain length.
You can define the start position shifting either by entering
the Shift value or by picking the position on the model.
For open chains, this section is disabled.

The Apply to all button enables you to apply the Shift value defined for the selected
chain to all closed chains of the current geometry.

The Auto next button enables you to define the start points successively for all closed
chains by picking the positions on the model. When this mode is activated, the first
closed chain is highlighted, enabling you to pick the start position for it. When the
position is picked, SolidCAM switches to the next closed chain and so on. The Resume
button enables you to finish the automatic definition of the next start positions.

The Set default button enables you to return the start position of the current chain
to its initial state. When the Apply to all check box is activated, the Set default button
returns the start positions of all chains to their initial state.

308
 6. 2.5D Milling

Compensation

When the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the
CNC-controller are used in the GCode.
• No compensation

When the Compensation check box is not selected, SolidCAM generates a trajectory of
the tool center as an offset by the tool radius from the geometry.
Tool center trajectory

Geometry

This tool center trajectory is performed in the GCode. No compensation is used.

• Radius compensation

When the Compensation check box is selected, SolidCAM generates the trajectory of
the tool center as an offset by the tool radius from the geometry.
Tool center trajectory

Geometry

At the next stage, SolidCAM creates the tool path as the offset by the tool radius from
the tool center trajectory. The offset is created in the geometry direction.
Tool center trajectory

Tool path

The GCode is created for the tool path. The radius compensation is used in the GCode.
The Offset value is equal to the Tool radius.

309
 • Zero Compensation

SolidCAM calculates the trajectory of the tool center as the offset from the geometry.
Tool center trajectory

Geometry

This trajectory is used in the GCode. The radius compensation is used. The Offset
value is equal to 0.
• Settings

SolidCAM enables you to define the type of compensation used by the specific variable
in the MAC file.

Comp_by_zero_tool = N – the Radius compensation is used.

Comp_by_zero_tool = Y – the Zero compensation is used.

When the compensation is used for the tool path linked using the Zigzag
option, SolidCAM takes into account the machining direction and the
changes in the tool position relative to the geometry direction for each
successive cut. The different compensation commands are used in the
GCode output for even and odd cuts.

Depth type

This option enables you to choose the depth type for the profile.

Constant

SolidCAM generates a tool path with a constant depth as defined in the Milling levels
area.

310
 6. 2.5D Milling

Variable (Define)

You can define a different depth at different profile points.

1. Choose the Define option.

2. Click on the Pick button. The Define depth

dialog box is displayed. This dialog box
enables you to control the points where the
depth changes.

The X,Y,Z dialog box enables you to enter the coordinates of

the depth change points.

Switch between the Select and the Unselect mode to define or remove points where
the depth changes. The Undo button cancels or restores the last selection.
You can specify a certain chain in the profile geometry using the combo box with the
profile number and the Next Profile button.
The Points field contains information about selected depth changing points. You can
change the point properties by double-clicking the parameter in this area.
• Profile No. – the Profile geometry chain number.
• Z – the Z-coordinate of the profile depth at the specified point.
• Type – the type of depth change:
Vertical: the depth changes at specified points.
Sloped: the depth changes gradually over the tool path segment.
Depth change points

Vertical type Sloped type

Select the depth change point on the profile. The Depth

dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, specify the
depth and the type of depth change.

311
 Helical

This option enables you to enhance the productivity of profile machining by avoiding
lead in/out movements at each Z-level and unnecessary rapid movements.
With this option, the tool performs the spiral movements
around the geometry with the continuous lowering along
the Z-axis. For each turn around the geometry, the tool
moves downward along the Z-axis according to the step
down value. When the Profile depth is reached by the
spiral movements, SolidCAM performs the last cut with
the constant Z movement at the Profile depth level.

Step down

Rest Material/Chamfer

The Rest material option enables you to define parameters to remove

the rest material left unmachined after previous operations.

Rest Material
The Chamfer option enables you to machine chamfers with a Center drill tool.

Rest material

In Profile Machining, when a large tool is used around the profile, the tool leaves
material in corners it cannot enter.

The Rest material option enables you to remove the material from this area without
defining a new geometry.

312
 6. 2.5D Milling

The Rest Material dialog box is displayed. You have to define

the following parameters:
• Previous tool diameter – the diameter of the rough
end mill used in the previous operation. The button
enables you to display the Part Tool Table and select the
previously used tool so that its diameter appears in the
edit box.
• Previous wall offset – the wall offset of the previous
operation.
• Extension – the overlap distance that you would like to start and end from the
previous larger end mill.

Extension Rest Material

Milling type

• Separate areas

SolidCAM generates a profile tool path to clean areas that the previous tool
could not mill.

• Around profile

SolidCAM machines the whole closed profile to mill the rest material.

313
Chamfer

This feature in Profile, Pocket and Contour 3D operations

enables you to use a drill tool as well as a taper tool to add
a chamfer to the edge of a part.

In the Tool page of the operation dialog box, click on the Select button. The Part Tool
Table dialog box is displayed. Choose a drill tool for the chamfering.

In the Levels page of the operation dialog box, enter the

size of the chamfer edge in the Profile depth field.

In the Technology page of the operation dialog box, choose

Chamfer from the Rest Material/Chamfer list and click the
Data button.

314
 6. 2.5D Milling

In the Chamfer dialog box, enter the following parameters:

• Cutting diameter – the starting cutting diameter of the

tool;

• Feed – the feed rate you would like the tool to travel.

Cutting Profile depth

diameter (Chamfer length)
(Profile depth)
Chamfer height

Cutting diameter

When the Cutting diameter value is greater than the lower diameter of the taper tool
cone, you can move the tool tip outside the chamfer. In such a way, the machining is
performed by the conical part of the tool that can avoid the burr formation on the
chamfer edge.

If you choose to chamfer a part that

∅6
has a sharp corner, it is important
that the cutting diameter is the
same as the last tool used in that
geometry so that the chamfer is ∅6
equal all around.

Fillet size for last cut

This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without the
need to change the geometry.

This option is relevant for Profile, Pocket, Slot (Constant depth type) and
the 3D Milling (Roughing and Constant-Z finishing) operations.

315
 • Internal

This field defines the radius of internal Tool path

corners.
Geometry External
• External fillets

This field defines the radius of external

corners.

• The maximum external fillet size

is defined in SolidCAM Settings
(see topic 12.4.4). Internal
• In the Profile operation, this fillets
option is not available when the
Tool side is set to Center.

Offsets

SolidCAM enables you to specify the machining allowances that can be

removed either by profile finishing in the same operation or in another
operation.
• Wall offset

This option defines the offset that will remain on the wall of the machined part after
roughing.

Step down
Wall offset
Profile depth

316
 6. 2.5D Milling

• Floor offset

This option defines the offset that will remain on the floor of the machined part after
roughing. When the Floor offset value is specified, SolidCAM performs the machining
by the Z-levels defined with the Step down parameter. The machining is performed up
to the Floor offset.
Step down

Profile depth

Floor offset

The Wall offset and Floor offset parameters are available only when the
Rough section is activated.

Clear offset

This option generates several concentric profiles with constant depth

that start at the defined clear offset distance from the profile and finish
at the geometry of the profile, thus clearing the area around the profile.

The Offset option defines the distance from the geometry at which the milling starts. The Offset
value must be equal to or greater than the Wall offset value. The tool starts milling the profile at the
distance defined by Clear offset and finishes at the distance defined by Wall offset.

The Step over option defines the overlap of adjacent tool passes. It determines the offset between
two successive concentric profiles.
Step over

Clear offset
Wall
offset

Modify offset

317
 • The Zigzag option enables you to create the tool path for the Clear offset removal
containing both climb and conventional movements.
Clear offset
tool path

Profile
geometry

• The One way option enables you to create the tool path for the Clear offset removal
containing only climb movements.
Clear offset
tool path

Profile
geometry

Rough

This section enables you to perform the profile rough machining.

Step down
Profile roughing is performed in constant Step down
Z passes. The Step down value defines
the distance between each two successive Upper level
Z-levels.
The cutting passes are calculated using
the Clear offset strategy with the specified Profile depth
Offset and Step over parameters and
taking into account the specified Wall
offset and Floor offset parameters.

318
 6. 2.5D Milling

Finish

This section enables you to perform the profile finishing.

• Number of passes

SolidCAM enables you to generate several finish passes to achieve the best surface
quality. You can define the number of finish passes.
• Extension/Overlap

This option enables you to extend the profile in the positive profile direction.
• Step down

This parameter defines the distance between each two successive Z-levels.

During the profile finishing, the machining

of the floor area is performed first, then the
finishing of the walls is performed. Step down

The floor area is machined in a single cutting

pass at the Profile depth level. This cutting
pass is calculated using the Clear offset
strategy with the specified Offset and Step
over parameters and taking into account the Profile
specified Wall offset. depth Offset
Step over

Wall
offset

Offset
Step over

319
The wall finishing is performed from the Upper level down to
the Profile depth in a number of steps defined with the Step
down parameter.

Equal step down

Step down
Machining of Profiles and Pockets starts from the Upper level
and is performed in a number of successive Z-levels till the
specified Depth. This option enables you to keep an equal
distance between all Z-levels.
When the Equal step down check box is not selected, the Profile
distance between each two successive Z-levels is determined depth
by the Step down parameter. If the machining depth is not
divisible exactly by the Step down value, the depth of the last
cut is smaller than the Step down value.
When the Equal step down check box is selected, Step down
an equal distance is kept between all Z-levels.
Using this option, you have to specify the Max.
Last cut
Step down parameter instead of the Step down depth
parameter. According to the Depth defined in the
operation and modified with the Floor offset and
Delta depth parameters, SolidCAM automatically
calculates the actual step down to keep an equal
distance between all passes, while taking into
account the specified Max. Step down so that it is
not exceeded.

Max.
The Equal step down option Step down
is available only for Profile and
Pocket operations.

Actual
Step down

320
 6. 2.5D Milling

Depth cutting type

This section enables you to define the direction of Z-levels machining and the connection between
passes.

When the One way option is chosen, the cutting passes are oriented
in the same direction and connection between them is performed
through the Operation Clearance level. At the end of each pass the
tool performs a retreat movement to the Operation Clearance level, a
horizontal movement at rapid feed to the start point of the next pass
and then descends to the Z-level of the next pass. The same cutting
direction (climb or conventional) is kept along the whole tool path.

When the Zigzag option is chosen, the tool path is performed in a

zigzag manner, with the tool path direction changing from one pass to
the next. The passes located at two successive Z-levels are connected
directly from the end of one pass to the beginning of the next pass.

The Zigzag option cannot be used together

with the Clear offset technology.

Complete Z-level/Sort by chains

These options enable you to define the order of Z-levels milling in the machining of several profiles
in one operation.

These check boxes are not available when the Zigzag option is chosen for
Depth cutting typeand when the Helical or Define option is chosen for
Depth type.

The Sort by chains check box is available only when the Complete Z-level
check box is selected and the Clear offset option is used with the One way
option.

When the Rough and Finish strategies are used together in the same Profile
operation, the Complete Z-Level check box is not available.

321
Rough machining

When the Complete Z-Level check

box is selected and the Clear offset
strategy is not used, SolidCAM
enables you to generate the following
tool path: machining of all chains
at a specific Z-level is performed;
1
when machining of this level is 2
3
completed, the tool moves down to 5 4
the next level, and so forth. 7 6
8
9
10
11
12

When the Complete Z-Level check

box is not selected and the Clear
offset strategy is not used, the
machining is performed by chains:
the tool completes the machining of
a specific Z-level for a specific chain
1
and then moves to the next Z-level 7
2
of the same chain. When machining 8
3
of all the Z-levels of a specific chain 4 9
is completed, the tool moves to the 10
5
next chain. 11
6
12

When the Complete Z-Level check

box is selected and the Clear offset
strategy is used with the Zigzag
option, SolidCAM enables you to
generate the following tool path:
the first chain at the upper cutting 1
level is machined in a zigzag cutting
2
pass, and then the next chain at the 3

same level is machined in a zigzag

4
movement. When all the chains of 5

the cutting level are machined, the 6

tool moves to the next cutting level,
and so forth.

322
 6. 2.5D Milling

When the Complete Z-Level check box is selected and the Clear offset strategy is used
with the One way option, the Sort by chains check box is available. The tool path order
depends on the state of this check box.

• When the Sort by chains check box is not selected, SolidCAM enables you to
generate the following tool path: the first chain of the first cutting level is machined
in several equidistant profiles generated by the Clear offset strategy. When the
machining of the chain is finished at the current cutting level, the next chain at
the same cutting level is machined. When all the chains of this cutting level are
machined, the tool descends to the next cutting level, and so forth.

3
2
1
6
9 5
8 4
7

15 12
14 11
13 10

18
17
16

• When the Sort by chains check box is selected, SolidCAM enables you to generate
the following tool path: the first chain of the first cutting level is machined in several
equidistant profiles generated by the Clear offset strategy. When the machining of
the chain is finished at the current cutting level, SolidCAM performs the machining
of the same chain at the next cutting level. When the chain is completely machined
at all cutting levels, the next chain is machined in the similar manner.

3
2
1
12
4 11
5 10
6

9 15
8 14
7 13

18
17
16

323
When the Complete Z-Level check box is not selected and the Clear offset strategy is
used with the Zigzag option, SolidCAM enables you to generate the following tool
path: the first chain of the first cutting level is machined in a zigzag cutting pass, then
the tool moves down to the next cutting level. When machining of the current chain is
completed at all cutting levels, the next chain is machined in the similar manner.

4
2

5
3

When the Complete Z-Level check box is not selected and the Clear offset strategy is
used with the One way option, SolidCAM enables you to generate the following tool
path: the first clear offset cut (farthest from the geometry chain) is machined at the
upper cutting level for the first chain. Then the tool descends to the next cutting
level and performs the first clear offset cut, and so forth. When the clear offset cut is
finished at all Z-levels, the machining of the successive clear offset cuts (closer to the
geometry chain) starts from the upper cutting level. When machining of all clear offset
cuts is finished for the current chain, the next chain is machined in the similar manner.

7
4
1
16
8 13
5 10
2
9 17
6 14
3 11
18
15
12

324
 6. 2.5D Milling

Finish machining

When the Finish check box is selected, the Complete Z-level option is available if the Clear offset
strategy is not used.

When the Complete Z-Level check box is selected, the finishing is performed by Z-levels: machining
of all chains at a specific Z-level is performed; when machining of this level is completed, the tool
moves down to the next level, and so forth.

1
2
3
5 4

7 6
8
9
10
11
12

When the Complete Z-Level check box is not selected, the finishing is performed by chains: the tool
completes machining of a specific Z-level for a specific chain and then moves to the next Z-level
of the same chain. When machining of all the Z-levels of a specific chain is completed, the tool
moves to the next chain.

1
7
2
3 8

4 9
10
5
11
6
12

325
6.1.3 Link page

This page enables you to define the parameters of tool approach and retreat relative to the machined
profile.

Ramping

This section determines how the tool approaches the start point of the contour. Choose one of the
following descent types from the list:
• Rapid generates a rapid descent (G0) from the Clearance level to the approach plane. Use
this option when you know that there is no material in the descent path.

• Feed causes the tool to move rapidly to the Upper level minus the Safety distance. Then
the tool descends to the approach plane with the given Z Feed rate. Use this option when
you know that there is material in the descent path.

• Diagonal can be activated only if the Step down is equal to the Profile depth. It causes the
tool to move rapidly from the Clearance level to the Upper level plus the Safety distance.
Then the tool diagonally descends to the start of the profile geometry at the normal
feed rate. The angle of the diagonal is automatically generated depending on the type of
approach you choose.

Pre-drilling geometry generation

When the operation is defined and saved, SolidCAM automatically generates the pre-drilling
geometry. This geometry contains the points into which the ramping is performed.

326
 6. 2.5D Milling

The pre-drilling geometry can be generated only in the following cases:

• The Normal/Arc/Tangent/Point strategy is used for the Lead in (when the None option is
used, the pre-drilling geometry is not generated);
• The Clear offset option is not used;
• The One way option is used for Depth cutting type;
• The Helical mode is not used for Depth type;
• The Wall draft angle option is not used;
• The Rest Material/Chamfer options are not used;
• The Plunging option is not used.

During the generation of the pre-drilling geometry, SolidCAM automatically collects the ramping
points of the roughing tool path for all of the chains. For each chain, SolidCAM collects all the
ramping points where the vertical penetration into the material is performed. These points are
located in the start point of the Lead in movement. Generally, for an open chain, SolidCAM has to
generate only one ramping point.

Ramping
position

Lead in

327
In some cases, during the tool path generation for closed chains, the chain is machined in a number
of closed cutting passes. In such cases, SolidCAM generates more than one ramping position for one
chain, and the number of positions depends on a number of cutting passes. For each cutting pass,
one point is generated at the location where the vertical penetration into the material is performed.

Lead in

Ramping
Lead in position

The ramping positions are collected only for the rough cutting passes; the finish cutting passes are
ignored.

The name of the generated geometry is composed of the name

of the initial Profile operation with the Drill_For_ prefix: Drill_For_
ProfileName, where the ProfileName is the name of the initial Profile
operation. For example, for the Profile operation F_contour_T1, the
pre-drilling geometry Drill_For_F_contour_T1 will be generated.

The pre-drilling geometry appears under the Geometry header in

SolidCAM Manager. This geometry is available for Drilling operations
only. The pre-drilling geometry cannot be chosen in 3D Drilling
operations.

328
 6. 2.5D Milling

Adjacent passes connection

This option enables you to define the connection method for adjacent
cutting passes generated using the Clear offset method with the Zigzag
option.

The following options are available to define the passes connection:

• Linear

With this option, the tool movement from one cutting pass to the next is performed
as a straight line connecting the end point of the first pass with the start point of the
next pass.

• Rounded

With this option, the tool movement from one cutting pass to the next is performed as
an arc tangential to the adjacent cuttings passes. The arc connects the end point of the
first pass to the start point of the next pass.

329
Lead in/Lead out

These options enable you to control the way the tool approaches the
profile and retreats away.

• None

The tool approaches the milling level and retreats away

exactly adjacent to the start point of the profile.

• Normal

The tool approaches the profile and retreats away from/

to a point normal to the profile. The length of the normal
can be set in the Value field.

Lead in
value
• Arc

The tool approaches the profile and retreats away with

a tangential arc. The arc radius can be set in the Value
field.

The Data button is displayed and enables you to define

additional parameters in the Arc Lead in Data/Arc Lead
out Data dialog box.
Lead in
value

Arc angle

This parameter defines the angle of the

Lead in arc segment. The default angle
value is 90°; in this case, SolidCAM Angle Angle
Distance
generates a Lead in path of quarter arc.
Lead in from Lead in from
Center Distance

330
 6. 2.5D Milling

Lead in from

With the Arc Lead in option, the tool moves normal to the lead in arc at the arc start
point. The following options are available:
• Distance

The tool starts milling at the specified distance from the arc start point.
• Center

The tool starts milling at the lead in arc center.

Center of circle

When this check box is not selected, the tool rapidly moves from the Clearance level
to the Safety distance, enters the material in the center of the defined approach arc
and performs the arc movement to the geometry start point at the first cutting level.
When this check box is selected, the tool rapidly moves from the Clearance level to the
Safety distance, enters the material in the center of the profile geometry and performs
a linear movement to the geometry start point at the first cutting level.
Approach movement

Tool path

Center of circle check box Center of circle check box

is not selected is selected

The retreat is performed in the same manner.

• Tangent
The tool approaches the profile and retreats away on a
line tangent to the profile. The length of the tangent line
can be set in the Value field.

Normal
Lead in
value

331
 • Point
The tool approaches the profile and retreats away from/to a user-defined position.
From this position the tool performs a linear movement to the start point of the
profile. When you choose this option, the Pick button is activated and you can select a
position on the CAD model.

Same as Lead in

When this check box is selected, the strategy and parameters defined for Lead in are used for Lead
out.

When the Zigzag option is used, the lead in/out movements for all the cuts are
calculated according to the direction of the first cutting pass, irrespective of the
direction of the other cutting passes. During the tool path linking, SolidCAM
connects the cuts that contain lead in and lead out movements in a zigzag manner
and changes the direction of all even cuts to the opposite. Therefore only for odd
cuts, the Lead in strategy is used for approaching and the Lead out strategy is used
for retreating. For even cuts, the Lead in strategy is used for retreating and the Lead
out strategy is used for approaching.

Movements defined by Lead in strategy

Movements defined by Lead out strategy

332
 6. 2.5D Milling

Keep tool down

This option enables you to reduce the unnecessary tool movements through the Clearance level.

When the Keep tool down check box is not selected, after the machining of the specific Z-level, the
tool retracts up to the Operation Clearance level. At this level the tool horizontally moves to the
start position of the next cut and then descends to the next Z-level.
Clearance level

When the Keep tool down check box is selected, after the machining of the specific Z-level, the
tool retracts up to the height equal to the Safety distance from the machined cut, then horizontally
moves to the start position of the next cut at this level and descends to the next Z-level.
Safety
distance

333
334
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.2 Face Milling Operation

This operation enables you to machine large flat surfaces with face mill tools.

6.2.1 Geometry page

This page enables you to define the machining geometry for the operation.

The geometry for Face Milling operations is defined using the Face Milling Geometry dialog box.

335
Name

This edit box enables you to define the geometry name.

Base Geometry

This section enables you to choose the method of the Face Milling
geometry definition.
• Model

This option generates a rectangle located at the XY-plane

and surrounding the Target model and selects it for the Face
Milling geometry. The rectangle chain is displayed in the
Chain List section.
Face Milling geometry

• Faces

This option enables you to Face Milling geometry

define the Face Milling geometry
by face selection. The Define
button and related combo-box
enable you either to define a new
faces geometry with the Select
Faces dialog box or to choose
an already defined geometry
from the list. When the model
faces are selected, SolidCAM
generates a number of chains
surrounding the selected faces.
These chains are displayed in the Selected faces
Chain List section.

336
 6. 2.5D Milling

• Profile

This option enables you to define the Face Milling geometry by selecting a chain. The
Define button and related combo-box enable you either to define a new profile geometry
with the Geometry Edit dialog box or to choose an already defined geometry from the
list. The defined chains are displayed in the Chain List section.
Face Milling geometry

Chain List

This section displays all the chains chosen for the Face Milling geometry.

Each chain entry in the list contains a check box. By clearing this
check box, you can exclude the corresponding chain from the
defined geometry.

The right-click menu is available on the chain entries in the list.

• The Check All command selects all of the chain check
boxes; all the geometry chains will participate in the
current geometry.

• The Uncheck All command removes the selection from all of the chain check boxes; all
the geometry chains will be excluded from the current geometry.

When the selection is removed from all of the chains in the list, the button
that confirms the Face Milling Geometry dialog box is disabled.

• The Invert Check Status command enables you to invert the selection status for all
the chain entries; all the selected check boxes will be unselected and vice versa, all the
unselected check boxes will be selected.

337
The Merge button enables you to merge all the Face Milling geometry chains into a single chain. The
Separate button enables you to divide a merged chain into its initial separate chains.

Separate chains Merged chain

Modify

This section enables you to offset the chain currently selected in the Chain List section. The Apply
to all button enables you to apply the specified offset value to all the chains.

Offset

6.2.2 Technology page

This page enables you to define the

technological parameters of Face Milling.

338
 6. 2.5D Milling

The following technologies are available:

Hatch technology

The machining is performed in a linear pattern.

The Overlap/Min. Overlap section enables you define the tool

overlapping between two successive passes. This section is
available only for Hatch and Contour strategies.
Equal step over

This option enables you to generate the hatch tool path spaced evenly with the
automatically calculated Overlap value, which is nearest to the specified Min. Overlap
value but not smaller than this value.

When this check box is not selected, the distance between the last pass and the one
before it can be smaller than that between all of the other passes.

Overlap Overlap

When this check box is selected, the evenly spaced hatch tool path is generated. The
overlap between two successive passes is not smaller than the specified Min. Overlap
value.

This option is available only for the Hatch

strategy.

Overlap Overlap

339
The Data button displays the Hatch Data dialog box that enables you to define the parameters of
hatching.

Hatch angle

The following options to define the angle of hatching are available:

• Automatic optional angle

SolidCAM automatically calculates the optimal angle of hatching to expedite the

machining. The tool path always follows the length of the face no matter what
angle the machined surface is facing.

340
 6. 2.5D Milling

You can change the angle by entering a different value in the Delta from optimal
box.

Delta angle

Optimal direction

• User-defined angle

This option enables you to determine the angle of the tool path.

Angle

X
Keep cutting direction

This option enables you to control the cutting direction when moving around model
contours.
• Yes: the length of the tool path is not optimized.
• No: a shorter, optimized tool path is generated by reversing some tool movements.
The milling direction may change between climb and conventional milling.

341
Cutting direction
• One way

This option enables you to create the tool path with only
one-directional movements.
One way
• Zigzag

This option enables you to create the tool path with bi-
directional movements.

Extension Zigzag

During face milling, the tool path is extended over the edges of the machined face.
The Extension section enables you to define the extension both along the tool path
(the Along section) and across the tool path (the Across section). The extension can
be defined either by percentage of the tool diameter (the % of tool diameter option) or
by value (the Value option).

Extension across
the tool path

Extension along
the tool path

Corner
• None

The tool path is formed with sharp corners between one

direction and the next.

• Fillet

This option connects each direction with a given radius allowing

for a smoother transition between path directions.

342
 6. 2.5D Milling

Contour technology

The machining is performed in a number of equidistant contours.

The Data button displays the Contour Parameters dialog box.

Start from
• Inside

This option enables you to work in a pocket area starting

from the middle of the pocket and cutting towards the
outside border of the pocket.
• Outside

This option enables you to work in a pocket area starting

from the outside border of the pocket and cutting towards
the middle of the pocket.

Corner
• None

The tool path is formed with sharp corners between one

direction and the next.

343
 • Fillet

This option connects each direction with a given radius

allowing for a smoother transition between path directions.

The Min. corner radius parameter enables you to define the

minimal value of the corner radius.

If the given radius is too large for a specific corner, it produces the
largest possible radius at that point.
There are times were the fillet option might leave some material. This
is particularly true if the given radius is large.

• Loop

This option ensures that the connecting points on the

path are cleaned using a smooth transition. The tool path
forms a loop in the corner, preventing an abrupt change of
direction.

• Sharp

This option ensures that using a short and simple movement

cleans the connecting points on the path. Although this
produces a sharp movement by the tool, the path itself is
slightly shorter than that in the smooth corner option. This
can help cut down on machining time.

This option is not recommended for high-

speed cutting.

Direction

This option enables you to choose

climb or conventional milling for
the roughing operation.

Climb Milling Conventional Milling

344
 6. 2.5D Milling

Arc approximation

This command enables you to create G2/G3 GCode output from Contour roughing
operations. SolidCAM checks whether successive points of the calculated tool path can
be connected using an arc or a circle. If arc or circle connection within the specified
arc approximation tolerance can be made, you receive arc and circle interpolation
commands G2 and G3 in the generated GCode.

This feature can drastically reduce the number of lines in GCode files. Most CNC-
controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than on single tool
path points or splines. Arc approximation increases actual feed rates on older CNC-
machines and the machines work smoother.

The Tolerance value defines the tolerance SolidCAM uses to position tool path points
on arcs or circles.

Adjacent tool paths connection

This option enables you to choose the method with which the tool moves from one
tool path to the next.

• Linear

The tool moves in a normal approach from one tool path to

the next.

• Rounded

The tool moves in an arc path from one tool path to the next.
The size of the arc is half the distance between tool paths.

Extension

The Contour tool path can also be

extended over the machined face edges.
The Extension section enables you to
define the uniform extension of the
tool path. The extension can be defined Extension
either by percentage of the tool diameter
(the % of tool diameter option) or by value
(the Value option).

345
One pass technology

SolidCAM performs the face milling in one pass. The direction and
the location of the pass are calculated automatically according to the
face geometry, in order to generate an optimal tool movement with
the tool covering the whole geometry.

The Data button displays the One pass data dialog box that enables
you to define the machining parameters.

The Extension section enables you to define

the tool path extension over the face edges. The
extension can be defined either by percentage of
the tool diameter (the % of tool diameter option) Extension
or by value (the Value option).

Offsets

This section enables you to define the offset that remains on the face floor after the roughing
operation (Floor offset).

The Finish check box enables you to remove the remaining offset with the last cut (if the check box
is selected) or leave the offset unmachined for further operations (if the check box is not selected).

Depth cutting type

This option enables you to connect cutting passes by vertical zigzag movements. When a cutting
pass is machined, the tool moves down to the next cutting level and machines it in the opposite
direction. When the machining of all cutting levels is finished for a specific pass, the tool moves to
the next cutting pass and machines it in the same manner.

This option is available only for the Hatch and One Pass strategies.

346
 6. 2.5D Milling

The behavior of these options depends on the state of the Cutting direction option defined in the
Hatch Data dialog box.

When the Zigzag option is chosen for Cutting

direction and the One way option is chosen for Depth
cutting type, the tool performs the machining of a
cutting pass at a specific Z-level and then moves to
the beginning of the next cutting pass located at the
successive Z-level and continues the machining in the
same direction. The movement to the next cutting
pass is performed via the Clearance level.

When the Zigzag option is chosen for Cutting

direction and the Zigzag option is chosen for Depth
cutting type, the tool performs the machining of a
cutting pass at a specific Z-level, then moves directly
to the next Z-level and then continues to machine the
next cutting pass in the reversed direction.

5
When the One way option is chosen for Cutting
4
direction and the One way option is chosen for Depth 10
3
9
cutting type, the tool machines a cutting pass located
2 8
at a specific Z-level and then rapidly moves via the 1
7
Clearance level to the beginning of the next cutting
6
pass at the same Z-level. When the Z-level is machined
in such manner, the tool starts the machining of the
next Z-level. In this case, SolidCAM preserves the
cutting direction (either climb or conventional) for all
of the cutting passes.
5
When the One way option is chosen for Cutting
4
direction and the Zigzag option is chosen for Depth 3
cutting type, the tool performs the machining of 2
all cutting passes at a specific Z-level in the same 1
direction, and then directly moves down to machine
the passes at the next Z-level in the opposite direction. 6
7
8
9
10

347
Reverse tool path

The Reverse check box enables you to reverse direction of the tool path. When this check box is
selected, the hatch tool path is performed in the opposite direction.

Initial tool path Reversed tool path

This option is available only for the Hatch and One Pass strategies.

Sort cut order

The Complete Z-level option enables you to define the order of the machining Z-levels, in case
more than one face is machined.

For more information, see topic 6.4.3.

348
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.2.3 Link page

This page enables you to define the parameters of tool approach and retreat relative to the machined
geometry.

Ramping

This field controls the way the tool plunges into the material inside the pocket.

For more information, see topic 6.4.4.

Lead in

This field controls the movement of the tool when it enters the pocket on the finishing cut.

For more information, see topic 6.4.4.

Lead out

This field controls the movement of the tool when it leaves the pocket on the finishing cut.

For more information, see topic 6.4.4.

Keep tool down

This option enables you to reduce the unnecessary tool movements through the Clearance level.

Foe more information, see topic 6.1.3.

349
350
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.3 Contour 3D Operation

The Contour 3D operation enables you to utilize the power of the 3D Engraving technology (see
topic 7.2) for the 3D contour machining. In this operation, SolidCAM enables you to prevent the
gouging between the tool and the 3D contour.

6.3.1 Technology page

This page enables you to define the

technological parameters of the
machining.

Modify

The Tool side option enables you to

Left Right Center
define the tool position relative to
the geometry.
• Right: the tool cuts to the right of the profile geometry at the distance defined by the
values set in the Modify offset section of the Modify Geometry dialog box.
• Left: the tool cuts to the left of the profile geometry at the distance defined by the values
set in Modify offset section of the Modify Geometry dialog box.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry. The compensation cannot
be used with this option.

When the Tool side is set to Right or Left, all chains defined for the Contour
3D operation geometry must start at the same height.

351
The Geometry button enables you to modify a geometry shared by several operations separately for
each operation.

When the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the
CNC-controller are used in the GCode.

For more information, see topic 6.1.2.

Tool reference

This option enables you to define the point on the tool which is in contact with the machined 3D
contour.

• Tip

With this option, the tool tip is in contact with the 3D

contour; SolidCAM prevents the gouging between the
tool and the 3D contour. Note that the tool axis always
crosses the geometry.

• Center

With this option, the tool center is in contact with the

3D contour. In this case, SolidCAM does not check the
gouging between the tool and the contour.

352
 6. 2.5D Milling

Technology

When the Tip option is chosen for the Tool reference definition, this section enables you to define
the technological parameters of the operation.

Type

This option enables you to perform the semi-finish and/or finish machining of the
3D contour.
• Semi-finish

The machining of the 3D contour is performed in several steps along the Z-axis.
The vertical distance between two steps is defined by the Step down parameter.
• Finish

The 3D contour is machined to its final dimensions in one step down.

• Both

This option is used to machine the 3D contour first with a semi-finish cut and
then with a finish cut.

Step down

This value defines the vertical distance between two successive steps during the Semi-
finish machining of the 3D contour.
• From Upper level

SolidCAM performs a number of horizontal semi-finish passes at each down

step, from the Upper level up to the defined Contour depth.
Upper level

3D Contour geometry

Contour depth

353
 • From surface

SolidCAM performs a number of 3D semi-finish passes at each step down, from

the chosen 3D contour to the defined Contour depth.
3D Contour geometry

Contour depth

The Technology section is not available when the Center option is chosen for the Tool reference
definition.

Offsets

SolidCAM enables you to specify the machining allowances that can be removed either by profile
finishing in the same operation or in another operation.

For more information, see topic 6.1.2.

Rough

This section enables you to perform the profile rough machining.

For more information, see topic 6.1.2.

Finish

This section enables you to perform the profile finishing.

For more information, see topic 6.1.2.

Clear offset

This section enables you to define the parameters of the Clear offset machining for the roughing
and finishing passes.

For more information, see topic 6.1.2.

354
 6. 2.5D Milling

Chamfer

This option enables you to machine chamfers with a Center drill tool.

This button is available only when the Right or Left option is chosen for the Tool side definition.

For more information, see topic 6.1.2.

6.3.2 Link page

This page enables you to define the parameters
of tool approach and retreat relative to the
machined contour.
Lead in/Lead out

These options enable you to control the way

the tool approaches and retreats from the
contour.

When the Right or Left option is chosen for

the Tool side definition, the following Lead in/
out options are available:

• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent
• Point

When the Center option is chosen for the Tool side definition, the following Lead in/out options
are available:
• None
• Arc
• Tangent

For more information about Lead in/out options, see topic 6.1.3.

355
356
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.4 Pocket Operation

In pocket milling, you have to remove material from the interior of a closed geometry. SolidCAM
offers two types of pocketing:

1. When a profile geometry consists of one or more

profiles and none of them are enclosed or intersect
with one another, each is milled as a separate pocket
without islands.

2. When a profile geometry consists of several profiles,

any profile that is enclosed or intersecting with
another profile is treated as an island. You can define
an unlimited number of islands within a single
pocket.

When you click Add Operation, Pocket, the Pocket Operation dialog box is displayed.

357
6.4.1 Geometry page

This page enables you to define the machining geometry for the operation.

The geometry definition is performed using the Geometry Edit dialog box.

Only closed contours are acceptable for the definition of geometry. When
you confirm an open chain definition in the Geometry Edit dialog box with
the button, the Close Chain dialog box is displayed.

When you confirm this dialog box with the OK button, the chain is closed
with a line that connects the start and the end points of the chain. The Mark
line as open edge check box enables you to mark the connecting line as open
edge to perform open pocket machining.

When you click on the Cancel button, SolidCAM returns to the geometry
definition and enables you to close the chain manually by the model element
selection.

358
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.4.2 Levels page

This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements and the operation are
executed.

Step down
Step down
SolidCAM uses the constant-Z passes for the
Pocket generation. The Step down parameter Upper level
enables you to define the distance between each
two successive Z-levels. Enter the tool’s cutting
depth. Pocket depth

Equal step down

Selecting this check box enables you to keep an equal distance between all Z-levels.

When this check box is selected, the Max. Step down parameter appears instead of the Step down
parameter.

For more information, see topic 6.1.2.

359
6.4.3 Technology page

This page enables you to define the technological parameters of the Pocket machining.

Pocket machining technology

Pocket machining
Hatch
technologies
Contour

Hatch+Finish

Plunging pattern

Choose the pocket machining technology from the list.

• Hatch mills the pocket in a linear pattern.

• Contour machines the pocket in a round pattern.

• Hatch+Finish mills the pocket in a linear pattern and cleans

up the profile on each cutting depth.

• Plunging pattern: the tool moves up and down in a drilling

motion, travelling inside the pocket.

Click on the Data button to define additional parameters.

360
 6. 2.5D Milling

Hatch technology

This technology enables you to machine the pocket in a linear pattern.

This option is used in Pocket, Pocket Recognition and 3D Milling operations

for Roughing (see topic 7.1.3) and Constant Z finishing (see topic 7.1.13).

This technology creates a linear raster tool path up to the pocket contour.

Click on the Data button. The Hatch Data dialog box is displayed.

361
Hatch angle

The following options to define the angle of hatching are available:

• Automatic optional angle

SolidCAM automatically calculates the optimal angle

of hatching to expedite the machining. The tool path
always follows the length of the pocket no matter what
angle the pocket is facing.

You can change the angle by entering a different value

in the Delta from optimal box.

• User-defined angle

This option enables you to determine the angle of the

tool path.

Keep cutting direction

This option enables you to control the cutting direction when moving around model
contours.
• Yes

The length of the tool path is not optimized.

• No

SolidCAM generates a shorter, optimized tool path by reversing some tool

movements. The milling direction may change between climb and conventional
milling.

362
 6. 2.5D Milling

Cutting direction
• One way

This option enables you to create the tool path with only one-
One way
directional movements.
• Zigzag

This option enables you to create the tool path with bi-
directional movements.
Zigzag
Corner
• None

The tool path is formed with sharp corners between one

direction and the next.

• Fillet

This option connects each direction with a given radius

allowing for a smoother transition between path directions.

Exit Material

This option controls the tool movements between the

working areas.

• When this check box is not selected, the tool moves

from one working area to the next through the full
material around the island to get to the next working
area as shown above.

• When this check box is selected, the tool exits from the
material and travels rapidly above the material to the
next working area as shown above. The Lead in path is
the Lead in you defined.

This option is used in the Hatch and Contour

strategies in Pocket, Pocket Recognition and
3D Milling operations.

363
Contour technology

In this technology, the tool moves on offsets parallel to the pocket

contour.

Click on the Data button. The Contour Parameters dialog box is

displayed.

This option is used in the Pocket, Face Milling, Pocket Recognition and 3D
Milling operationsfor Roughing and Constant Z finishing.

Constant Z
Pocket Milling Face Milling 3D Roughing
Finishing

Exit material

This option controls the tool movements between the working areas.

Connect islands

This option enables you to keep the same cutting direction

(conventional or climb milling) throughout the entire tool
path where possible. This is particularly important in high-
speed cutting.

364
 6. 2.5D Milling

Start from
• Inside

This option enables you to work in a pocket area starting from the middle of the
pocket and cutting towards the outside border of the pocket.
• Outside

This option enables you to work in a pocket area starting from the outside border of
the pocket and cutting towards the middle of the pocket.

Corner
• None

The tool path is formed with sharp corners between one

direction and the next.

• Fillet

This option connects each direction with a given radius allowing

for a smoother transition between path directions.
The Min. corner radius parameter enables you to define the
minimal value of the corner radius.

If the given radius is too large for a specific corner,

it produces the largest possible radius at that point.
Some material can be left if the given radius is large.

• Loop

This option ensures that the connecting points on the path are
cleaned using a smooth transition. The tool path forms a loop
in the corner, preventing an abrupt change of direction.

365
• Sharp

This option ensures that using a short and simple movement

cleans the connecting points on the path. Although this
produces a sharp movement by the tool, the path itself is slightly
shorter than that in the Loop option. This can help reduce the
machining time.

This option is not recommended for high-speed

cutting.

Direction

This option enables you to choose climb or conventional milling for the roughing
operation.

Climb Milling Conventional Milling

Arc approximation

This command enables you to create G2/G3 GCode output from Contour roughing
operations. SolidCAM checks whether successive points of the calculated tool path can
be connected using an arc or a circle. If arc or circle connection within the specified
arc approximation tolerance can be made, you receive arc and circle interpolation
commands G2 and G3 in the generated GCode.

This feature can drastically reduce the number of lines in GCode files. Most CNC-
controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than on single tool
path points or splines. Arc approximation increases actual feed rates on older CNC-
machines and the machines work smoother.

The Tolerance value defines the tolerance SolidCAM uses to position tool path points
on arcs or circles.

366
 6. 2.5D Milling

Adjacent passes connection

This option enables you to choose the method with which the tool moves within the
pocket from one pass to the next.
• Linear

The tool moves in a normal approach from one pass to

the next.

• Rounded

The tool moves in an arc path from one pass to the next.
The size of the arc is half the distance between passes.

Hatch+Finish technology

SolidCAM first machines the pocket on the actual step

down with the Hatch technology and then makes a final
path around the pocket contour.

Click on the Data button. The Hatch Data dialog box is

displayed.

Hatching

Final profiling

367
Plunging pattern technology

Plunging is a technology of removing material from a given pocket

using a special tool. Instead of milling the material, the tool moves
up and down as in a drilling motion, travelling along the path type
you choose.

Click on the Data button. The Plunging dialog box is displayed.

Drill cycle type

SolidCAM enables you to choose preferable drilling

cycles for the plunging operation.

1. Click on the Drill cycle type button and choose the cycle type you want in
the Drill cycle dialog box.

2. Click on the Data button and specify the parameters in the Drill options
dialog box.

For more information on the Drilling cycles, see topic 6.6.3.

Clean condition

This value determines the maximum percentage of material

that will be removed based on the diameter of the tool.

Minimal clean condition

This value determines the minimum percentage of material that

will be removed based on the diameter of the tool.

368
 6. 2.5D Milling

Feeds

The plunging feeds can be determined by the percentage of the tool and the diameter
of the tool being used.
• Full/Center

If the full diameter of the tool is cutting, the

feed and spin defined in the appropriate field
are used.

In the second field, you can determine a specific

working diameter of the tool. If the working
diameter from the center of the tool is greater
than this value but smaller than the full diameter,
the feed and spin rate that was entered in the
appropriate field are used.
• Overlap (%)

If none of the above conditions have been met, the feed and spin are determined
by the overlap of the tool.

Open pocket machining

This section is enabled only when the pocket geometry contains open edges.

Extension

During the open pocket machining, Open edge

the tool path is extended beyond the
open edges.

The Extension section enables you

to define the overlapping between
the tool and the open edges; the
overlapping can be defined as a
percentage of the tool diameter (the
% of tool diameter option) or as a
value (the Value option). Extension

369
Use profile strategy

The Use profile strategy option enables you to

perform the open pocket machining in a Profile
manner. The tool path at a specific Z-level consists
of several equidistant profiles starting from outside
the model at the distance defined by the Extension
parameter. The tool moves on offsets parallel to the
pocket geometry.

The following options enable you to define the tool path direction and linking.

When the One way option is chosen, the tool finishes

one profile pass, then rapidly moves (G0) to the safety
distance and then to the start of the next cutting pass.
The cutting direction (either climb or conventional) is
preserved for each cutting pass.

When the Zigzag option is chosen, the tool finishes

one profile pass and then moves directly to the next
pass. The machining is performed without leaving
the material, thus constantly switching between climb
and conventional milling.

Approach from outside

This option enables the tool to approach from

outside of the material in the open pocket
areas, if possible. Such approach enables you
to decrease the tool loading when plunging
into the material. This option enables you to
perform the approach movement from the
automatically calculated point outside of the
material. The tool moves to the required depth
outside of the material and then plunges into
the material.

370
 6. 2.5D Milling

Descend to cutting level with Rapid

This option enables you to avoid vertical non-machining movements outside of the
material performed with the working feed by direct rapid movement down to the
cutting level.

When this check box is selected, the tool descends from the Clearance level outside of
the material directly to the cutting level (defined with the Step down parameter) using
the Rapid feed. Then the horizontal movement into the material is started with the
working feed.

Upper level

Rapid movement

Cutting level

When this check box is not selected, the tool descends from the Clearance level down
to the Safety distance with the Rapid feed. From the Safety distance, the tool descends
down to the cutting level (defined with the Step down parameter) with the defined feed
and starts the horizontal cutting movements into the material with the working feed.

Upper level

Rapid movement

Safety distance

Feed movement

Cutting level

The Descend to cutting level with Rapid check box is available only when
the Approach from outside check box is selected.

371
 Complete Z-level

This option enables you to define the order of Z-levels machining when several pockets
are machined in a single Pocket operation.
1 5
When the Complete Z-level check box is 2 6
not selected, SolidCAM machines all the 3 7
Z-levels of the first pocket and then starts 4 8
the machining of the next pocket.

When the Complete Z-level check box is 1 2

selected, the machining is performed by 3 4
the Z-levels; SolidCAM removes material 5 6
at a specific Z-level in all pockets and then 7 8
moves to the next Z-level.

Overlap

Enter the Overlap of adjacent tool paths in the milling of the pocket.

For example, with the tool diameter of 10 mm, the side step is 3.5 mm for the next tool movement.

0.5D 0.2D
Overlap 0.5D Overlap 0.2D

Equal step over

This option enables you to generate the hatch tool path

spaced evenly with the automatically calculated Overlap
value, which is nearest to the specified Min. Overlap value
but not smaller than this value.

When this check box is not selected, the distance between

the last pass and the one before it can be smaller than that
between all of the other passes.

Overlap Overlap

372
 6. 2.5D Milling

When this check box is selected, the evenly spaced hatch tool path is generated. The overlap between
two successive passes is not smaller than the specified Min. Overlap value.

Overlap Overlap

Fillet size for last cut

This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without

changing the geometry.

For more information on this option, see topic 6.1.2.

Offsets

To perform the rough machining of the pocket, you have to specify the
offsets on the pocket geometry that will be removed with the finishing
cut.

• Wall offset

Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket wall after
the roughing cut.

• Island offset

Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket islands after the roughing cut.

• Floor offset

Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket floor after the roughing cut.

373
Finish

This section enables you to perform the finish machining of the

pocket.

The Wall check box enables you to perform finishing of the pocket
walls. Only walls and islands are finished on the contour. The pocket
depth is reduced by the specified floor offset.

The Floor check box enables you to perform finishing of the pocket
floor. The finish cut is executed to remove the floor offset. The
specified wall and island offset remain on the pocket contour.

Wall finish

This section field contains two options to control the material removal on the last
finishing cut.

• On offset

The finish path is executed at an offset equal to

the sum of the tool radius and the finish offset
from the tool path of the last roughing cut. The
result is a uniform cutting depth (side step) on Offset
the last cut, since in the pocket corners the tool Offset
is not drawn into the material.

Offset

• On geometry

The last cutting pass is executed exactly on the

pocket geometry. R

R
Offset

Offset

374
 6. 2.5D Milling

Depth

This section enables you to choose how the wall finishing will be performed: at the
whole depth or in a number of steps at each step down.
Finish passes
• Total depth

When this option is chosen, the

wall finishing is performed in a
single cut at the whole depth.

• Each step down Finish pass

When this option is chosen, the

wall finishing is performed in
a number of successive cuts at
each step down.

The options of the Depth section are available only when the wall
finishing is performed in the operation.

When the Wall draft angle option is used in the operation, the Depth
options are disabled and the wall finishing is performed in a number of
successive cuts at each step down.

Compensation

When the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options
G4x of the CNC-controller are used in the GCode.

For more information on this option, see topic 6.1.2.

375
Rest Material/Chamfer

• The Rest material option enables you to define parameters to

remove the rest material left unmachined after the previous
operations.

• The Chamfer option enables you to machine chamfers with

the Center drill tool.

Rest material

When a large tool is used around the Rest Material areas

profile in Pocket machining, the tool
Pocket
leaves material in the areas that it cannot geometry
enter.

The rest material option enables you

to remove the material from this area
Island
without defining a new geometry. geometry

The Rest Material dialog box is displayed.

In this dialog box, you have to define the following parameters:

• Previous tool diameter – the diameter of the
tool used in the previous operation.
• Previous wall offset – the wall offset used in
the previous operation.

• Extension – the overlap distance that you

would like to start and end from the previous Extension Rest Material
larger end mill.

376
 6. 2.5D Milling

Milling type

When the Separate areas strategy is chosen, SolidCAM generates a profile or

pocket tool path to clean areas that the previous tool could not mill. The Around
profile strategy generates a closed profile to mill the rest material.

• Separate areas – SolidCAM machines only areas not machined with the previous
tool.

• Around Profile – SolidCAM machines the whole profile.

In Pocket operations with the

Separate areas machining strategy,
SolidCAM can generate two types of
tool paths, depending on the volume
of the rest material and on the
previous and present tool diameters:

Pocket-style tool paths Profile-style tool paths

SolidCAM generates a pocket or a profile tool path in each area of the rest material.

377
Pocket-style tool path areas can be open or closed depending on the approach
possibilities.
Closed pocket-style Open pocket-style
tool path area tool path area

Profile-style
tool path area

Open pocket-style tool path area

The approach to the open pockets can be performed from the machined space in
contrast to the closed pockets where the approach from the outside is unavailable.

The strategy for the tool approach to closed pocket areas is defined in the Ramping
section (see topic 6.4.4) in the Pocket Operation dialog box.

SolidCAM automatically determines the optimal point for the approach to the open
pocket areas.
Approach point

Open pocket-style
tool path area

When the Rest Material option is chosen in the Pocket

Operation dialog box, the Lead in option provides you with
the following strategies used for the approach to Profile-
style tool path areas:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent

For more information on the Lead in strategies, see topic 6.4.4.

378
 6. 2.5D Milling

The check boxes selected in the Pocket and Profile boxes

determine which of these tool paths are cut:
• Island – only tool paths that touch the pocket islands are
cut.
• Island + Wall – tool paths that touch both the pocket wall
and islands are cut.
• Wall – only tool paths that touch the pocket wall are cut.
• Each tool down – machining is performed in a number of
successive cuts at each step down.

Chamfer

This option enables you to use a drill tool to add a

chamfer to the edge of a part.

In the Tool page of the Pocket Operation dialog box,

click on the Select button. The Part Tool Table dialog
box is displayed. Choose a drill tool for the chamfering.

In the Levels page of the Pocket Operation dialog box,

enter the size of the chamfer edge in the Pocket depth
field.

379
In the Technology page of the Pocket
Operation dialog box, choose Chamfer from
the Rest Material\Chamfer list and click on
the Data button.

In the Chamfer dialog box, enter the

following parameters:

• Feed – the feed rate you would like the

tool to travel.
• Cutting diameter – the starting cutting diameter of the tool.

Cutting Profile depth

diameter (Chamfer length)

If you choose to chamfer a part that has a sharp corner, it is important

that the cutting diameter is equal to that of the last tool used in that
geometry so that the chamfer is equal all around.

∅6

∅6

380
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.4.4 Link page

This page enables you to define the

parameters of tool approach and retreat
relative to the machined pocket.

Ramping

This field controls the way the tool

plunges into the material inside the
pocket. Choose the Ramping mode and
set the corresponding parameters.

• None

The tool enters the material

vertically at the start point
chosen automatically by the
SolidCAM pocket algorithm.

• Vertical

The tool enters the material vertically at a user-defined

position. From this position, the tool moves to the pocket
start point, calculated by the pocket algorithm. The Data
button displays the Vertical ramping dialog box that enables
you to define the position for the vertical ramping.

Chains

This section displays the list of all geometry chains defined

for the operation. All the chain entries are displayed under
the Chains header. You can select chain entries in the list.

381
When the Chains header is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool paths and default
ramping positions for all of the chains.
Default
ramping position

When a specific chain is selected, SolidCAM displays the

tool path and the default ramping position automatically
calculated for this chain. You can change this position
by picking a point on the model or by entering the new
position coordinates into the X, Y, Z dialog box.
To facilitate the definition, SolidCAM displays only the first Z-level of the tool path in
the XY-plane of current Coordinate System. The automatically defined start position
of the tool path is marked with a cyan dot in a circle of the tool diameter size. This
circle is connected by two parallel lines with a second circle of the same diameter; the
center of the second circle is linked to the cursor position. When the cursor moves
over the model, the circle also moves causing the updating of the connecting lines. This
schematic image simplifies the choice of the vertical ramping position by displaying the
lines parallel to the cutting pass between the ramping position and the tool path start
position. In this mode, you can pick the ramping position on the model.
Automatically calculated
Tool diameter circle
tool path start position

Cursor
position

382
 6. 2.5D Milling

When the position is picked, it is marked on the model with a cyan dot. The coordinates
of the picked point are displayed in the X, Y, Z dialog box. The start position of the tool
path is marked on the model with a yellow dot.

When the ramping position is defined, the tool vertically descends into the material
at the specified ramping position until it reaches the first cutting level; then it moves
horizontally to the start position of the tool path and performs machining of the
pocket.
Tool path start position Ramping position

When the ramping position for a chain is defined manually by model picking, the color
of the chain entry in the list is changed to blue.

Ramping position

When a single chain is selected in the list, the Set default

button enables you to replace the currently defined ramping
position for the selected chain by the default ramping
position located at the tool path start position. When the
Chains header is selected, the Set default button enables
you to remove the ramping positions for all the chains and
re-assign for them the default ramping positions.

The Auto next button provides you with the selection

mode that enables you to define the ramping positions for
all of the chains one by one. When a chain is selected and
the Auto next button is clicked, SolidCAM enables you to
define the ramping position for the current chain. When
the ramping position is defined by picking on the model,
SolidCAM automatically switches to the next chain in the
list, and so on.

383
• Angle

The tool moves to the pocket start point at a specified

ramp angle.

The Data button displays the Angle ramping dialog box

that enables you to define the ramping position and the
related parameters.

Angle ramping parameters

The Angle edit box enables you to define the ramping angle.

Chains

This section displays the list of all geometry chains defined for the operation. All the
chain entries are displayed under the Chains header. You can select chain entries in the
list.

When the Chains header is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool paths and default
ramping positions automatically calculated for all of the chains.

When a chain entry is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool path and the default
ramping position automatically calculated for this chain; this position can be changed.

The ramping position is selected in the same manner as for Vertical ramping.

384
 6. 2.5D Milling

When the ramping position is defined, the tool moves to the pocket start point at
a specified ramp angle. The inclined movement starts at the Safety distance level
and continues to the start position of the tool path. If the inclination angle of the
movement is equal to or smaller than the specified Angle value, the ramping movement
is performed in one pass. If the inclination angle is greater than the specified Angle
value, the ramping is performed in several zigzag passes. When the tool reaches the
first cutting level at the tool path start position, the pocket machining is performed.
Distance

Safety distance

Previous cutting level

Tool path start position Step down

Angle

Cutting level

Ramping position

The Set default button enables you to replace the currently defined ramping position
for the selected chain by the default ramping position located at the tool path start
position.

The Auto next button provides you with the selection mode that enables you to define
the ramping positions for all of the chains one by one.

SolidCAM does not check the ramping movement against the pocket
contour. Check the tool path simulation to make sure that the tool does not
gouge the pocket walls or islands.

• Helical

The tool enters the material in a spiral movement according

to the defined step down, angle and radius.

385
The Data button displays the Helical ramping dialog box that
enables you to define the ramping position and the related
parameters.

Helical ramping parameters

The Tool step down parameter defines the distance between

each two adjacent turns of the tool helical movement.

The Angle parameter defines the ramping angle.

The Radius parameter defines the radius of the descending

helix.

Center cutting

If your tool has center cutting capabilities, select the Center

cutting check box. In the Angle field, enter the descent angle
that you would like the tool to follow. In the Radius field,
enter the radius of the tool path helix.
The working order is as follows:
• The tool descends from the safety distance above the
Upper level to the material in a circular motion until the
step down is reached using the user-defined radius.
• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material at the step
down depth.
• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance
level.
• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Z safety distance above the previous
step down depth and repeats the Helical Lead in to the next working depth.
• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.

If the tool does not have center cutting capabilities, do not select the Center cutting
check box. In the Tool step down field, enter the depth of the step down of the tool.
The result of this action is the same as with a center cutting tool except for the
following differences:
• The tool descends from the safety distance above the Upper level to the material in
a circular motion up to the Tool Step down.
• At this point, the tool clears a circular path. Then it descends to the next Tool step
down.

386
 6. 2.5D Milling

• This is repeated until the tool reaches the CAM-Part step down depth.
• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material on that step
down depth.
• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance level.
• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Z safety distance above the previous step
down depth and repeat the Helical Lead in to the next working depth.
• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.

Chains

This section displays the list of all geometry chains defined for the operation. All the chain
entries are displayed under the Chains header. You can select chain entries in the list.

When the Chains header is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool path and default ramping
positions for all of the chains. The circles represent the default helical ramping movement
defined for each chain.

When a chain entry is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool path and the default ramping
position for this chain. This position is automatically defined at the start position of the
tool path segment relevant for the current chain. You can change this position by picking
a point on the model or by entering the new position coordinates into the X, Y, Z dialog
box. The schematic circle facilitates the definition of the position.

When the position is picked, it is marked on the model with a cyan dot. The coordinates of
the picked point are displayed in the X, Y, Z dialog box. The start position of the tool path
is marked on the model with a yellow dot. The circle of the tool path color represents the
helical movement of the tool plunging.
Tool path start position Ramping position

387
 When the ramping position is defined, the tool descends into the material at the specified
ramping position with helical movements according to the defined parameters. When it
reaches the level of the first cutting pass, it moves to the start position of the tool path
and performs machining of the pocket.

Ramping position

The Set default button enables you to replace the currently defined ramping position
for the selected chain by the default ramping position located at the tool path start
position.

The Auto next button provides you with the selection mode that enables you to define
the ramping positions for all of the chains one by one.

• Linear

The Linear ramping follows the same rules as the Helical

ramping. The difference is that the descent is performed in a
linear zigzag manner rather than in a circular one.

The Data button displays the Linear ramping dialog box that
enables you to define the ramping position and the related
parameters.

Linear ramping parameters

The Tool step down parameter defines the distance between

each two adjacent turns of the tool helical movement.

The Angle parameter defines the ramping angle.

The Length parameter defines the length of the linear

descending motion.

388
 6. 2.5D Milling

Center cutting

If your tool has center cutting capabilities, select the Center cutting check box. In the
Linear dialog box, enter the length of the linear tool path that you would like the tool to
travel.
The working order is as follows:
• The tool descends from the safety distance above the Upper Level to the material
in a zigzag motion based on the user defined angle and length until the step down is
reached.
• When the tool reaches the down depth step, it machines all the material on that step
down depth.
• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance level.
• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Z safety distance above the previous step
down depth and repeat the Linear Lead in to the next working depth.
• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.
If the tool does not have center cutting capabilities, do not select the Center cutting check
box. In the Tool step down field, enter the required depth of the step down.
The result of this action is the same as that of the center cutting tool except for the
following differences:
• The tool descends from the safety distance above the Upper Level to the material in a
zigzag motion up to the Tool Step down.
• At this point the tool clears a straight linear path. Then it descends to the next Tool
Step down.
• This is repeated until the tool reaches the CAM-Part step down depth.
• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material on that step
down depth.
• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance level.
• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Z safety distance above the previous step
down depth and repeat the Linear ramping to the next working depth.
• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.

389
Chains

This section displays the list of all geometry chains defined for the operation. All the
chain entries are displayed under the Chains header. You can select chain entries in the
list.

When the Chains header is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool paths and default
ramping positions for all of the chains.

When a chain entry is selected, SolidCAM displays the tool path and the default ramping
position for this chain. This position is automatically defined at the start position of
the tool path segment relevant for the current chain. You can change this position
by picking a point on the model or by entering the new position coordinates into the
X, Y, Z dialog box. The schematic circle facilitates the definition of the position.

When the position is picked, it is marked on the model with a cyan dot. The coordinates
of the picked point are displayed in the X, Y, Z dialog box. The start position of the
tool path is marked on the model with a yellow dot. The line drawn through the picked
ramping position represents the linear movement of the tool plunging. Another line
drawn from the ramping position to the start position represent the tool horizontal
movement at the first cutting level.
Tool path start position Ramping position

When the ramping position is defined, the tool descends into the material at the
specified ramping position. The ramping movement is performed in a linear manner.
When the tool reaches the first cutting level, it horizontally moves to the start position
of the tool path and starts the pocket machining.

390
 6. 2.5D Milling

Ramping position

The Set default button enables you to replace the currently defined ramping position
for the selected chain by the default ramping position located at the tool path start
position.

The Auto next button provides you with the selection mode that enables you to define
the ramping positions for all of the chains one by one.

Lead in

In pocket machining, the Lead in option is used for horizontal approach of the tool to the geometry
in the machining of the part walls.

This option is available when the Wall check box is selected in the Finish
section of the Technology page.

• None

The tool leads in to the milling level exactly adjacent to the start point of the geometry.

• Normal

The tool leads in to the geometry from a point normal to

the geometry. The length of the normal can be set in the
Value field.

Lead in
value

• Arc

The tool leads in to the profile with a tangential arc. The arc
radius can be set in the Value field.
Lead in
value

391
 The Data button enables you to define additional parameters
in the Arc Lead In Data dialog box.
Arc angle

This parameter defines the angle of the retreat arc

segment. The default angle value is 90°; in this case
SolidCAM generates an approach path of quarter arc.

Lead in from

With the Arc Lead in option, the tool moves normal to the retreat arc at the arc
start point.
The following options are available:
• Distance

The tool starts at the specified distance from the arc start point.
• Center

The tool starts at the approach arc center.

Angle Angle
Distance

Lead in from Center Lead in from Distance

• Tangent

The tool leads in on a line tangent to the profile. The length

of the tangent can be set in the Value field.

Normal
Lead in
value

392
 6. 2.5D Milling

Lead out

This field controls the movement of the tool when it exits from the pocket contour on the finishing
cut.

• None

On the last point of the contour, the tool exits vertically in rapid move.

This option causes the tool to exit while in contact with the pocket wall,
which might cause gouging and result in visible marks on the workpiece.

• Normal

With a movement normal to the pocket contour, the tool

retreats from the last point of the profile. The length of the
normal must be specified using the Distance value. Then the
tool rapidly travels vertically to the Clearance level.

Lead out
value

• Arc

With a circular motion tangent to the last entity of the pocket

contour, the tool retreats from the profile. The radius of the
arc must be specified using the Distance value. Then the tool
rapidly travels vertically to the Clearance level.
Lead out
value

393
 The Data button is displayed. Click on the button to display
the Arc Lead Out Data dialog box.
Arc angle

This parameter defines the angle of the lead out arc

segment. The default angle value is 90°; in this case,
SolidCAM generates a lead out path of quarter arc.

Lead out from

With the Arc Lead out option, the tool moves normal to the lead out arc at the arc
start point. The following options are available:
• Distance

The tool starts from the specified distance from the arc start point.

• Center

The tool starts from the lead out arc center.

Angle Angle
Distance

Lead out from Center Lead out from Distance

• Tangent

The tool retreats from the pocket wall in a movement

tangent to the last profile entity. The length of the tangent
must be entered in the Distance field.

Normal
Lead out
value

SolidCAM does not check the Lead out movements against the pocket
contour. Check the tool path simulation to make sure that the tool does not
gouge the pocket walls or islands.

394
 6. 2.5D Milling

Same as Lead in

When this check box is selected, the strategy and parameters defined for Lead in are used for Lead
out.

Keep tool down

This option enables you to reduce the unnecessary tool movements through the Clearance level.

Foe more information, see topic 6.1.3.

395
396
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.5 Pocket Recognition Operation

This operation enables you to recognize the pocket

features on the solid model and perform the machining
of these features.

6.5.1 Geometry page

This page enables you to define the machining geometry for the operation.

Defining the geometry

The automatically recognized geometry consists of planar faces and loops

of through pocket features. The definition of the geometry is performed
in the Select Faces dialog box.

The major steps of the Pocket Recognition geometry selection are:

• Choose the model configuration used for the recognition;
• Set the selection filter options for Through Pocket and Circular
Pocket;

• Set the selection mode;

• Perform the pocket recognition and generate the faces tree;
• Choose the faces you want to include in the operation
geometry.

397
Select Faces dialog box

This dialog box enables you to define the parameters of the pocket feature recognition
geometry.

• Name

This option enables you to define the name of the geometry. SolidCAM offers
you the Default Geometry name (see topic 12.9) that can be edited.
• Configurations

This section enables you to select the SolidWorks model configuration to be used
for the geometry definition.
• Selection mode

This section enables you to set the mode of the geometry selection. The following
selection modes are available:
Solid Body

This mode enables you to perform automatic recognition of the pocket

features on the picked solid body. All planar faces are recognized with the
surface normal vector oriented parallel to the Z-axis of the current CoordSys.
The planar faces that cannot be machined with the current CoordSys position
(undercuts) cannot be selected (the selection is rejected). All the through
pocket areas are recognized according to the Through pocket option.

Selected faces

Undercut face
(selection rejected)

398
 6. 2.5D Milling

Face

This mode enables you to pick single planar faces. When a face is picked,
SolidCAM checks the parallel relation between the surface normal vector
of the picked face and the positive direction of the Z-axis of the current
CoordSys. If they are not parallel, the face is not selected. The undercut faces
that cannot be machined with the current CoordSys position are also not
selected. The selection is working in the toggling mode: the first click on a
face selects it, the next click on the selected face removes the selection.
Through Pocket Chain

This mode enables you to select the through pockets by picking one of the
edges of the lower loop of the pocket area. When the edge is picked, the
complete geometry of the through pocket is automatically selected. The
lower loop is highlighted on the model. The selection is working in the
toggling mode: the first click on an edge selects the loop, the next click on an
edge of the already selected loop removes the selection.

• Through Pocket

When this check box is selected with the Selection mode set to Solid body, the
recognition of through pocket features is also performed.
Through pockets

Upper loop
Only the through pocket features where the
upper loop is similar to the lower loop are
recognized. The through pocket features
that cannot be machined with the current
CoordSys position cannot be selected.

Lower loop

399
• Circular Pocket diameter filter

When this check box is selected with the Selection mode set to Solid body, circular
pocket features can be selected according to their diameter. All circular pocket
features with the diameter greater than the specified Min. Diameter value will be
selected. Using this option, you can avoid the machining of the drill features that
are supposed to be machined in other operations (Drilling, Drill recognition, etc.).
The Min. Diameter parameter defines the minimum diameter of the pocket
features. You may enter the value in the edit box or pick a cylindrical surface or
a circular edge in the solid model when the cursor is placed in the Min. Diameter
edit box.
When the Apply filter check box is not selected, all recognized circular pocket
areas suitable for the current Coordinate System will be selected.

• Model Appearance

The Transparency option enables you to display the selected solid bodies in the
transparent mode.

• List of recognized elements

This section displays the list of all recognized model

elements included in the geometry for the operation.
Each model element is accompanied by its Z-level
value enclosed in parentheses. When an element is
selected in the list, it is highlighted on the solid model.

The right-click menu is available on the list items. The

Unselect command enables you to remove the current
item from the selected geometry. The Unselect All
command enables you to remove the selection from all
items in the list.

400
 6. 2.5D Milling

When the Select Faces dialog box is confirmed, SolidCAM automatically generates a
number of pocket contours to perform the optimal machining of the selected faces
and through pockets.

In the part shown below, the contours are generated from

the selected planar faces.

The machining is performed in the following sequence:

first, the upper face is machined; then the pocket is
machined up to the height of the central pad. From this
height, the pocket with island is machined up to the final
pocket depth.

Modifying the geometry

After the geometry is defined, it can be shared between a number of Pocket Recognition operations.
In each operation, SolidCAM enables you to perform a specific geometry modification. The
modification is relevant only for the current operation and does not affect other operations based
on this geometry.

The Modify button displays the Geometry Modify dialog box that enables you to define the
parameters of the geometry modification.

Geometry Modify dialog box

• Through pocket

This section enables you to modify the depth of the

through pockets with the specified Delta value. When
a positive value is applied, the through pockets will
be deeper by the specified value.

• Machine floor fillets

This option enables you to control the machining of

fillets between the floor and the walls of the pocket
features.

401
 When this option is activated, SolidCAM
generates a multi-level pocket geometry
evenly distributed along the Z-axis. The
machining of this geometry performs
the rough machining of the fillets.

The Number of Steps button displays the Fillet

Step Number dialog box. This dialog box enables
you to control the parameters of the multi-level
geometry generation and provides you with the
information about the Maximum Fillet Radius
found in the geometry.
This dialog box enables you to specify the range
of the fillet radii and assign a number of steps
to each such range. SolidCAM generates a
defined number of evenly distributed Z-levels.
At each level, the closed contour is automatically
generated.

• Transparency

This section enables you to apply the transparency for the solid bodies used for
the geometry definition.

• Preview

This button enables you to display the modified geometry on the solid model.
The Resume button enables you to return from the preview state to the dialog
box.

• List of geometry elements

This list displays the geometry elements included in the current geometry. Each
element in the list is accompanied by the following information in parentheses:
Z-level at which the element is located, radius of the adjacent fillet and diameter
of circular pockets. The check box near each geometry element enables you to
exclude the current element from the geometry of the operation. When the check
box is selected, the element is machined in the current operation.

402
 6. 2.5D Milling

A right-click menu is available on the elements

of the list. This menu enables you to perform
the following actions:
Check all

This command enables you to check all

the elements of the list.
Uncheck all

This command enables you to uncheck all the elements of the list.
Invert check states

With this command the state of the check boxes of all the elements will
be reversed.

6.5.2 Levels page

This page enables you to define the machining levels of the operation: Start level, Clearance level,
Safety distance, Upper level, and Step down (see topic 5.2.8).

The Pocket depth is automatically recognized on the solid model, for each
pocket feature separately.

403
6.5.3 Technology page

Pocket machining technology

Choose the pocket machining technology from the list.

Pocket machining
Hatch
technologies
Contour

Hatch+Finish

Plunging pattern

• Contour machines the pocket in a round pattern.

• Hatch mills the pocket in a linear pattern.

• Hatch+Finish mills the pocket in a linear pattern and cleans up the profile on each cutting
depth.

• Plunging pattern: the tool moves up and down in a drilling motion, travelling inside the
pocket.

For more information about rough machining strategies, see topic 6.4.3.

Click on the Data button to define additional parameters.

404
 6. 2.5D Milling

Open pockets machining

This section is enabled only when the pocket geometry contains open edges.
Extension

During the open pocket machining, the Open edge

tool path is extended beyond the open
edges.

The Extension section enables you to

define the overlapping between the tool
and the open edges; the overlapping can
be defined as a percentage of the tool
diameter (the % of tool diameter option)
or as a value (the Value option). Extension

Use profile strategy

The Use profile strategy option enables you to

perform the Open pocket machining in a Profile
manner. The tool path at a specific Z-level
consists of several equidistant profiles starting
from outside the model at the distance defined
by the Extension parameter. The tool moves on
offsets parallel to the pocket geometry.

For more information on this option, see topic

6.4.3.

Approach from outside

This option enables the tool to approach from

outside of the material in the open pocket
areas, if possible. Such approach enables you
to decrease the tool loading when plunging
into the material. This option enables you to
perform the approach movement from the
automatically calculated point outside of the
material. The tool moves to the required depth
outside of the material and then plunges into
the material.

405
 Descend to cutting level with Rapid

This option enables you to avoid vertical non-machining movements outside of the
material performed with the working feed by direct rapid movement down to the
cutting level.

For more information on this option, see topic 6.4.3.

Final cut

When this check box is selected, only the finish path for the floor area of the pockets
is generated, rough machining is not performed. Since the Floor offset parameter is
disabled, machining is performed only at the specified pocket depth.

Complete Z-level

This option enables you to define the order of the machining Z-levels.

For more information on this option, see topic 6.4.3.

Overlap

Enter the Overlap of adjacent tool paths in the milling of the pocket.

0.5D 0.2D
Overlap 0.5D Overlap 0.2D

For more information, see topic 6.4.3.

Rest Material/Chamfer

• The Rest material option enables you to define parameters to remove the rest material
left unmachined after the previous operations.
• The Chamfer option enables you to machine chamfers with the Center drill tool.

For more information on these options, see topic 6.4.3.

406
 6. 2.5D Milling

Offsets

To perform the rough machining of the pocket, you have to specify the offsets on the pocket
geometry that will be removed with the finishing cut.

• Wall offset

Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket wall after the roughing cut.

• Island offset

Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket islands after the roughing cut.

• Floor offset

Enter the offset that will remain on the pocket floor after the roughing cut.

Finish

This section enables you to perform the finish machining of the

pocket.
The Wall check box enables you to perform finishing of the pocket
walls. Only wall and islands are finished on the contour. The pocket
depth is reduced by the specified floor offset.
The Floor check box enables you to perform finishing of the pocket
floor. The finish cut is executed to remove the floor offset. The
specified wall and island offset remain on the pocket contour.

For more information on this option, see topic 6.4.3.

Compensation

If the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the CNC-
controller are used in the GCode.

For more information on this option, see topic 6.1.2.

Fillet size for last cut

This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without changing the geometry.

For more information on this option, see topic 6.1.2.

407
6.5.4 Link page

Ramping

This field controls the way the tool plunges into the material inside the pocket.
For more information about Ramping modes and the corresponding parameters, see topic 6.4.4.

Lead in

In pocket machining, the Lead in option is used for horizontal approach of the tool to the geometry
in the machining of the part walls.

This option is available when the Wall check box is selected in the Finish
section of the Technology page.
For more information, see topic 6.4.4.

Lead out

This field controls the movement of the tool when it exits from the pocket contour on the finishing
cut.
For more information, see topic 6.4.4.

408
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.6 Drilling Operation

This operation enables you to perform drills and other canned drill cycles.
SolidCAM supports the canned drill cycles provided by your particular
CNC-machine such as threading, peck, ream, boring, etc. If your CNC-
machine has no canned drill cycles of its own, they can be defined using
the General Pre- and Post-processor program (GPPTool).
When you click Add Operation, Drilling, the Drilling Operation dialog box
is displayed.

6.6.1 Tool page

409
Center drill

In addition to the standard tool parameters presented on the Tool page, SolidCAM enables you to
label a tool as a center drill. This option is used for automatic sorting. In automatic sorting, tools
labeled as center drills can be automatically moved to the top of the operation list.
When a Tap tool is chosen for the operation, the Tapping drill cycle type is automatically chosen.
The Drill cycle type button is unavailable. You cannot change the cycle type until the Tap tool is
changed to a tool of a different type.
If the Tapping cycle is not supported by the current MAC file, the Tap tool cannot be chosen for
the operation. The following error message is displayed when you click on the Select button in the
Part Tool Table dialog box.

When you change the MAC file for the CAM-Part that contains tapping operations with a MAC
file that does not support tapping, SolidCAM marks all the tapping operations with the asterisk
sign (the PCode is removed). When you try to calculate such operations, the following messages are
displayed.

410
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.6.2 Levels page

This page enables you to specify the Z-levels at which the tool movements and the operation are
executed.

Drill depth

This parameter defines the final depth of the drilled hole.

Drill
depth

411
Depth type

This option enables you to deepen the drilled hole in order to obtain a given diameter at the specified
drill depth.

Drill Drill
Drill
depth depth
depth

Diameter
value

Cutter tip Full diameter Diameter value

• Cutter tip

The drill tip reaches the defined Drill depth.

• Full diameter

The drill reaches the defined Drill depth with the full diameter.
• Diameter value

The drill reaches the defined Drill depth with the drill cone diameter specified by the
Diameter value parameter.

The Diameter value can vary from 0 all the way up to the drill tool diameter.
A value greater than the drill tool diameter is automatically decreased to the
drill tool diameter.

6.6.3 Technology page

This page enables you to define the

technological parameters of drilling.

412
 6. 2.5D Milling

Sequence of drill positions

This section enables you to define the sequence of the drill positions, manage its direction, etc.

You can change the order of positions in the sequence by dragging and dropping them in the list
section of the Drill Geometry Selection dialog box (see topic 4.2.3).

Default

The drills are performed according to the order in which the drill points were picked
during the geometry definition.

Line

This option enables you to define the direction of the sequenced drill positions
machining.

You have to define the direction by selecting two points on your model. The drill
positions are arranged along the Direction line.

1. Click on the Pick line button.

2. The Pick first point dialog box is displayed. Enter the coordinate values
and confirm with the Enter button or pick a position using the SolidWorks
selection options.

3. The Pick second point dialog box is displayed. Define the end point of
the direction line in the same manner.

4. Click on the Show sorted button to preview the sorted positions.

413
Advanced sorting

This option enables you to sort the drill positions for machining of linear and circular
drill patterns.

The button displays the Advanced Sort dialog box.

• Linear sorting

The Linear tab contains the sorting methods

appropriate for machining of linear drill
patterns.

Linear pattern

According to the linear sorting methods

described above, the machining is performed
either by rows of drill positions with the same
Y-coordinate or by columns of drill positions
with the same X-coordinate. The Tolerance
parameter enables you to define the tolerance
that is used to determine if a drill position
belongs to the current row/column or to a
different row/column.

If the machining is performed by rows, SolidCAM determines the first drill

position for each row (the start position of the first row is the start position
of the whole pattern). For each next drill position, SolidCAM determines the
Y-coordinate and compares it with the Y-coordinate of the first drill position
of the current row. If the linear deviation is within the specified tolerance limit,
SolidCAM considers this position to belong to the current row. If the deviation
exceeds the tolerance value, the drill position is rejected from the current row;
later this position will be checked again for belonging to next rows.

In the similar manner, when the machining is performed by columns, the specified
Tolerance value is used to determine whether a specific drill position belongs to
the current column. In this case, the deviation of X-coordinates between the first
drill position in the column and the current drill position is compared with the
tolerance value.

414
 6. 2.5D Milling

Linear sorting methods

The following methods are available for advanced linear sorting:

SolidCAM determines the position with the

minimal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same Y-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
increasing X-coordinates.

When the last position of the current Y-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next Y-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next row from the position with the minimal X-coordinate to the position with the
maximal X-coordinate (increasing order) and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the rows is performed in the same direction of increasing X-coordinates.

The ordering of rows is performed in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

SolidCAM determines the position with the

minimal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same Y-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
increasing X-coordinates.

When the last position of the current Y-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next Y-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next row from the position with the maximal X-coordinate to the position with the
minimal X-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
two successive rows is performed in the opposite order: each odd row is machined in
the direction of increasing X-coordinates, each even row is machined in the direction
of decreasing X-coordinates.

The rows are machined in the direction of the increasing Y-coordinates.

415
SolidCAM determines the position with the
minimal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same X-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
increasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next X-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next column from the position with the minimal Y-coordinate to the position with the
maximal Y-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the columns is performed in the same direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

The ordering of columns is performed in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.

SolidCAM determines the position with the

minimal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same X-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
increasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next X-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next column from the position with the maximal Y-coordinate to the position with the
minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining
of two successive columns is performed in the opposite order: each odd column is
machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates, each even column is machined
in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

The columns are ordered in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.

416
 6. 2.5D Milling

SolidCAM determines the position with the

minimal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same X-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
increasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next X-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next column from the position with the maximal Y-coordinate to the position with the
minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining
of two successive columns is performed in the opposite order: each odd column is
machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates, each even column is machined
in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

The columns are ordered in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.

SolidCAM determines the position with

the minimal X-coordinate and the maximal
Y-coordinate and accepts it as the start position of
the drill sequence. From this position, SolidCAM
continues the machining of the drills with the
same Y-coordinate; the machining is performed
in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.

When the last position of the current Y-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the previous Y-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining of
the next row from the position with the maximal X-coordinate to the position with the
minimal X-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
two successive rows is performed in the opposite order: each odd row is machined in
the direction of increasing X-coordinates, each even row is machined in the direction
of decreasing X-coordinates.

The rows are machined in the direction of the decreasing Y-coordinates.

417
SolidCAM determines the position with
the minimal X-coordinate and the maximal
Y-coordinate and accepts it as the start position of
the drill sequence. From this position, SolidCAM
continues the machining of the drills with the
same X-coordinate; the machining is performed
in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next X-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next column from the position with the maximal Y-coordinate to the position with the
minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the columns is performed in the same direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

The ordering of columns is performed in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.

SolidCAM determines the position with

the minimal X-coordinate and the maximal
Y-coordinate and accepts it as the start position of
the drill sequence. From this position, SolidCAM
continues the machining of the drills with the
same X-coordinate; the machining is performed
in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next X-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next column from the position with the minimal Y-coordinate to the position with the
maximal Y-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining
of two successive columns is performed in the opposite order: each odd column is
machined in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates, each even column is machined
in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

The columns are ordered in the direction of increasing X-coordinates.

418
 6. 2.5D Milling

SolidCAM determines the position with

the maximal X-coordinate and the minimal
Y-coordinate and accepts it as the start position of
the drill sequence. From this position, SolidCAM
continues the machining of the drills with the
same Y-coordinate; the machining is performed
in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

When the last position of the current Y-coordinate

is machined, SolidCAM passes to the next Y-coordinate (in the increasing order) and
continues the machining of the next row from the position with maximal X-coordinate
to the position with the minimal X-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such
manner, the machining of the rows is performed in the same direction of decreasing
X-coordinates.

The ordering of rows is performed in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

SolidCAM determines the position with

the maximal X-coordinate and the minimal
Y-coordinate and accepts it as the start position of
the drill sequence. From this position, SolidCAM
continues the machining of the drills with the
same Y-coordinate; the machining is performed
in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

When the last position of the current Y-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the next Y-coordinate (in the increasing order) and continues the machining of the
next row from the position with the minimal X-coordinate to the position with the
maximal X-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
two successive rows is performed in the opposite order: each odd row is machined in
the direction of decreasing X-coordinates, each even row is machined in the direction
of increasing X-coordinates.

The rows are machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

419
SolidCAM determines the position with
the maximal X-coordinate and the minimal
Y-coordinate and accepts it as the start position of
the drill sequence. From this position, SolidCAM
continues the machining of the drills with the
same X-coordinate; the machining is performed
in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the previous X-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining of
the next column from the position with the minimal Y-coordinate to the position with
the maximal Y-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining
of the columns is performed in the same direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

The ordering of columns is performed in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

SolidCAM determines the position with

the maximal X-coordinate and the minimal
Y-coordinate and accepts it as the start position of
the drill sequence. From this position, SolidCAM
continues the machining of the drills with the
same X-coordinate; the machining is performed
in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes
to the previous X-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining
of the next column from the position with the maximal Y-coordinate to the position
with the minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the
machining of two successive columns is performed in the opposite order: each odd
column is machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates, each even column is
machined in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

The columns are ordered in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

420
 6. 2.5D Milling

SolidCAM determines the position with the

maximal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same Y-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
decreasing X-coordinates.

When the last position of the current Y-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the previous Y-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining of
the next row from the position with the maximal X-coordinate to the position with the
minimal X-coordinate (decreasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
the rows is performed in the same direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

The ordering of rows is performed in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

SolidCAM determines the position with the

maximal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same Y-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
decreasing X-coordinates.

When the last position of the current Y-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the previous Y-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining of
the next row from the position with the minimal X-coordinate to the position with the
maximal X-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the machining of
two successive rows is performed in the opposite order: each odd row is machined in
the direction of decreasing X-coordinates, each even row is machined in the direction
of increasing X-coordinates.

The rows are machined in the direction of the decreasing Y-coordinates.

421
SolidCAM determines the position with the
maximal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same X-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
decreasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes to
the previous X-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining of
the next column from the position with the maximal Y-coordinate to the position with
the minimal Y-coordinate (decreasing order) and so on. In such manner, the machining
of the columns is performed in the same direction of decreasing Y-coordinates.

The ordering of columns is performed in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

SolidCAM determines the position with the

maximal X- and Y-coordinates and accepts it as
the start position of the drill sequence. From
this position, SolidCAM continues the machining
of the drills with the same X-coordinate; the
machining is performed in the direction of
decreasing Y-coordinates.

When the last position of the current X-coordinate is machined, SolidCAM passes
to the previous X-coordinate (in the decreasing order) and continues the machining
of the next column from the position with the minimal Y-coordinate to the position
with the maximal Y-coordinate (increasing order), and so on. In such manner, the
machining of two successive columns is performed in the opposite order; each odd
column is machined in the direction of decreasing Y-coordinates, each even column is
machined in the direction of increasing Y-coordinates.

The columns are ordered in the direction of decreasing X-coordinates.

422
 6. 2.5D Milling

Circular sorting

The Circular tab contains the sorting methods

appropriate for machining of circular drill
patterns.

For the ordering of drill positions by all of

the circular sorting methods, SolidCAM uses
the center point around which the circular
pattern is defined. For each drill position of
the chosen geometry, SolidCAM determines
the radial vector of the drill position from the
center point. For each such vector, SolidCAM
determines its length (radius) and the angle
between the vector and the X-axis at the
center point; these parameters are used for
further sorting.

Circular pattern

This section contains the following parameters:

• Start angle

This parameter enables you to define the angle at which the start position will
be chosen. This angle is defined according to the positive direction of the
X-axis at the pattern center. The default value of the parameter is 0°.
Radius

Angle

The Pick button enables you to define the

Start angle by picking a point on the model.
The Pick angle point dialog box enables you to
pick the position on the model and displays the
coordinates of the picked position.

423
 When the position is picked and the dialog box is confirmed, SolidCAM
determines the direction vector from the pattern center towards the picked
position. SolidCAM automatically calculates the angle between the direction
vector and the X-axis at the pattern center and displays the angle value in the
Start angle edit box.

• Tolerance

During the circular sorting, SolidCAM groups the drill positions into groups
of those located at the same radius or into groups of those located at the
same angle.

The Tolerance value determines if a drill position belongs to the same radius
group or not. For each group of drill positions located at the same radius,
SolidCAM determines the start position; each additional drill position to
be included into this group must be located at the radius that is within the
tolerance from the radius of the start position.

For each group of drill positions located at the same angle, SolidCAM
determines the start position; each additional drill position to be included into
this group must be located at the angle that is within the angular tolerance
(calculated automatically according to the specified tolerance) from the angle
of the start position.

Change sort center

By default, the pattern center is automatically

defined at the origin of the Coordinate System
used in the current operation. The Change sort
center button enables you to change the pattern
center location by picking on the model. The
Pick center point dialog box enables you to pick
the center position and displays the coordinates
of the picked point.

424
 6. 2.5D Milling

Circular sorting methods

The following methods are available for advanced circular sorting:

For each drill position of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
maximal radius located at the angle maximally
close to the specified Start angle value. This
position is accepted as the start position. From
this position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of all the drill positions located at the same radius;
the machining is performed in the clockwise
direction.

When all the drill positions located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM
moves to the closest drill position located at the next smaller radius. At this radius, the
machining is performed in the same clockwise direction.

For each drill position of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
minimal radius located at the angle maximally
close to the specified Start angle value. This
position is accepted as the start position. From
this position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of all the drill positions located at the same radius;
the machining is performed in the clockwise
direction.

When all the drill positions located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM
moves to the closest drill position located at the next greater radius. At this radius, the
machining is performed in the same clockwise direction.

425
For each drill position of the chosen geometry,
SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
maximal radius located at the angle maximally
close to the specified Start angle value. This
position is accepted as the start position. From
this position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of all the drill positions located at the same radius;
the machining is performed in the clockwise
direction.

When all the drill positions located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM
moves to the closest drill position located at the next smaller radius. At this radius, the
machining is performed in the counterclockwise direction. The next, smaller radius
circle (a number of drills located at the same radius) is machined again in the clockwise
direction. In such manner, the machining of odd circles is performed in the clockwise
direction, the machining of even circles is performed in the counterclockwise direction.

For each drill position of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
minimal radius located at the angle maximally
close to the specified Start angle value. This
position is accepted as the start position. From
this position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of all the drill positions located at the same radius;
the machining is performed in the clockwise
direction.

When all the drill positions located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM
moves to the closest drill position located at the next greater radius. At this radius, the
machining is performed in the counterclockwise direction. The next, greater radius
circle is machined again in the clockwise direction. In such manner, the machining of
odd circles is performed in the clockwise direction, the machining of even circles is
performed in the counterclockwise direction.

426
 6. 2.5D Milling

For each drill position of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
maximal radius located at the angle maximally close
to the specified Start angle value. This position is
accepted as the start position. From this position,
SolidCAM performs the machining of all the drill
positions located at the same radius; the machining
is performed in the counterclockwise direction.

When all the drill positions located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM
moves to the closest drill position located at the next smaller radius. At this radius, the
machining is performed in the same counterclockwise direction.

For each drill position of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
minimal radius located at the angle maximally close
to the specified Start angle value. This position is
accepted as the start position. From this position,
SolidCAM performs the machining of all the drill
positions located at the same radius; the machining
is performed in the counterclockwise direction.

When all the drill positions located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM
moves to the closest drill position located at the next greater radius. At this radius, the
machining is performed in the same counterclockwise direction.

427
For each drill position of the chosen geometry,
SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
maximal radius located at the angle maximally close
to the specified Start angle value. This position is
accepted as the start position. From this position,
SolidCAM performs the machining of all the drill
positions located at the same radius; the machining
is performed in the counterclockwise direction.

When all the drills located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM moves to the
closest drill position located at the next smaller radius. At this radius, the machining is
performed in the clockwise direction. The next smaller radius is machined again in the
counterclockwise direction. In such manner, the machining of odd circles is performed
in the counterclockwise direction; the machining of even circles is performed in the
clockwise direction.

For each drill position of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
minimal radius located at the angle maximally close
to the specified Start angle value. This position is
accepted as the start position. From this position,
SolidCAM performs the machining of all the drill
positions located at the same radius; the machining
is performed in the counterclockwise direction.

When all the drills located at the current radius are machined, SolidCAM moves to the
closest drill position located at the next greater radius. At this radius, the machining is
performed in the clockwise direction. The next greater radius is machined again in the
counterclockwise direction. In such manner, the machining of odd circles is performed
in the counterclockwise direction; the machining of even circles is performed in the
clockwise direction.

428
 6. 2.5D Milling

For each drill position of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
maximal radius located at the angle maximally close
to the specified Start angle value. This position is
accepted as the start position. From this position,
SolidCAM performs the machining of all the
drill positions with the same angle (according
to the Angle tolerance value) starting from the
start position towards the position located at the
smallest radius (towards the pattern center).

When the drill position located at the smallest radius is machined, SolidCAM moves
in the clockwise direction to the next drill position located at the same smallest radius
but at a different angle. From this drill position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of the drill positions located at the same angle (according to the Angle tolerance
value) towards the drill position located at the greatest radius (from the pattern center
outwards). From this position, the tool moves in the clockwise direction to the next
drill position located at the same greatest radius, but at a different angle, and so on.

In other words, SolidCAM groups all the drill positions into radial rays, each ray
containing a drill position located at the same angle. Each such ray is machined in the
opposite direction; the first ray is machined towards the pattern center. The rays are
ordered in the clockwise direction.

For each drill instance of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
minimal radius located at the angle maximally close
to the specified Start angle value. This position is
accepted as the start position. From this position,
SolidCAM performs the machining of all the
drill positions with the same angle (according to
the Angle tolerance value) starting from the start
position towards the drill position with greatest
radius (from the pattern center outwards).

429
When the drill position with the greatest radius is machined, SolidCAM moves in the
clockwise direction to the next drill position located at the same greatest radius but at a
different angle. From this drill position, SolidCAM performs the machining of the drill
position located at the same angle (according to the Angle tolerance value) towards
the drill position located at the smallest radius (towards the pattern center). From this
position, the tool moves in the clockwise direction to the next drill position located at
the same smallest radius, but at a different angle, and so on.

In other words, SolidCAM groups all the drill positions into radial rays, each ray
containing the drill position located at the same angle. Each such ray is machined in
the opposite direction; the first ray is machined from the pattern center outwards. The
rays are ordered in the clockwise direction.

For each drill instance of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
maximal radius located at the angle maximally close
to the specified Start angle value. This position is
accepted as the start position. From this position,
SolidCAM performs the machining of all the drill
positions located with the same angle (according
to the Angle tolerance value) starting from the
start position towards the smallest radius (towards
the pattern center).

When the drill position with the smallest radius is machined, SolidCAM moves in the
counterclockwise direction to the next drill position located at the same smallest radius
but at a different angle. From this drill position, SolidCAM performs the machining of
drill positions located at the same angle (according to the Angle tolerance value) towards
the drill position located at the greatest radius (from the pattern center outwards).
From this position, the tool moves in the counterclockwise direction to the next drill
position located at the same greatest radius, but at a different angle, and so on.

In other words, SolidCAM groups all the drill positions into radial rays, each ray
containing the drill position located at the same angle. Each such ray is machined in
the opposite direction; the first ray is machined towards the pattern center. The rays are
ordered in the counterclockwise direction.

430
 6. 2.5D Milling

For each drill instance of the chosen geometry,

SolidCAM determines the drill position with the
minimal radius located at the angle maximally
close to the specified Start angle value. This
position is accepted as the start position. From
this position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of all the drill positions located with the same
angle (according to the Angle tolerance value)
starting from the start position towards the drill
position with the greatest radius (from the pattern
center outwards).

When the drill position with the greatest radius is machined, SolidCAM moves in the
counterclockwise direction to the next drill position located at the same greatest radius
but at a different angle. From this drill position, SolidCAM performs the machining
of drill positions located at the same angle (according to the Angle tolerance value)
towards the drill position located at the smallest radius (towards the pattern center).
From this position, the tool moves in the counterclockwise direction to the next drill
position located at the same smallest radius, but at a different angle, and so on.

In other words, SolidCAM groups all the drill positions into radial rays, each ray
containing the drill position located at the same angle. Each such ray is machined in
the opposite direction; the first ray is machined from the pattern center outwards. The
rays are ordered in the counterclockwise direction.

431
Direction

Consider the defined line as the X-direction. SolidCAM groups together all the drill
positions with the same X-coordinate. The order of machining of such groups is
defined by the following options:
• One way

Each group of drill positions is machined in the ascending order of Y-coordinates,

i.e. after the last drill position of the group (maximal Y-coordinate), the tool moves
to the first drill position (minimal Y-coordinate) of the next group.

Line
Line

• Zigzag

Each odd group of drill positions is machined in the ascending order of

Y-coordinates, i.e. after the last drill position of the group (maximal Y-coordinate),
the tool moves to the last drill position (maximal Y-coordinate) of the next group.
The machining of the group is continued till the first drill position (minimal
Y-coordinate) is reached, and then the tool moves to the first drill position (minimal
Y-coordinate) of the next group.

Line
Line

432
 6. 2.5D Milling

Distance

This option minimizes the length of

the necessary tool movement. The
first drill is performed at the first
point defined in the drill geometry.
Any other drill is executed at the
nearest position, i.e. at the shortest
distance to the previous drill position.

Reverse drilling sequence

SolidCAM enables you to reverse the sequence 1 5

3
of drilling positions in Drilling operations.
This functionality enables you to optimize the 6
rapid movements during the machining and
4
increase the machining speed. 2
Original sequence
The Reverse check box enables you to reverse
the sequence of drilling positions as shown. 6 4 2

When the same sequence of drilling positions 1

3
is used in several drilling operations (e.g. 5
center drilling, drilling and threading) the
Reversed sequence
sequence reversing enables you to reduce rapid
movements between the operations.

This option is available only when the drill_proc parameter is set to N

in the MAC file.

Show sorted

This button displays the sorted sequence of drill positions on the solid model.

433
Drill cycle type

Click on the Drill cycle type button. The Drill canned cycles
supported by the post-processor of the current CNC-controller are
displayed. Click on one of the icons to select the canned cycle you
want to use in this operation.

SolidCAM Drilling
cycles
Drilling

F_Drill

Peck

Tapping

Boring

R_Boring

F_Boring

Drill canned cycles must be defined in the *.mac and *.gpp post-processor of the
currently active CNC-controller in your CAM-Part. Contact customer support to
learn more about customizing your post-processor.

Drilling

The drill travels in one single motion to the specified depth and retracts.

F_Drill

The drill travels in one single motion to the specified depth, pauses for
a specified amount of time and then retracts.
• Delay

In the Value column, enter the amount of time (in seconds)

you want the tool to pause at the depth point of the hole.

434
 6. 2.5D Milling

Peck

The drill travels in steps to the specified depth. At each depth step the tool rapidly retracts to the
safety distance. Then the tool rapidly returns to the point where it must continue drilling. These
movements are repeated until the final depth is reached.
When you click on the Data button, the Drill Options dialog box is
displayed.
• Delay

In the Value column, enter the amount of time (in seconds)

you want the tool to pause at the depth point of the hole.
• Step down

In the Value column, enter the depth that you want the tool
to reach at each step.
Tapping

The tap travels in one single motion to the specified depth and then retracts reversing its spin
direction.
Boring

The boring tool travels in one single motion to the specified depth, stop its spin motion and retracts
rapidly.
R_Boring

The boring tool travels in one single motion to the specified depth, stops its spin motion, pauses for
a specified amount of time and retracts rapidly.
• Delay

In the Value column, enter the amount of time (in seconds)

you want the tool to pause at the depth of the hole.

435
F_Boring

The boring tool travels in one single motion to the specified depth and
retracts at the same feed rate, at which it entered.
• Delay

In the Value column, enter the amount of time (in seconds)

you want the tool to pause at the depth of the hole.

The drill options are very closely related to the post-processor of the CNC-
controller you are using and may function differently in each case. Please
contact your local dealer or SolidCAM support for information on your
particular post-processor.

436
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.7 Drill Recognition Operation

The Drill Recognition operation performs powerful

drill feature recognition and automatic Drill geometry
creation using SolidCAM AFRM module functionality.
This operation enables you to handle separate sets of
Milling levels for each drill position. The initial values
of the Milling levels sets are automatically recognized
from the model; they can be edited by the user.

6.7.1 Geometry page

The geometry for the Drill Recognition operation is defined using the AFRM functionality and is
automatically recognized on the Target model, therefore the Target model must be defined in the
CAM-Part before you define the operation. The hole recognition is performed in the direction
parallel to the Z-axis of the Coordinate System chosen for the operation.

The definition of the geometry is performed in the HR Drill Geometry Selection dialog box.

The major steps of the HR Drill Geometry selection:

• Choose the model configuration used for the recognition;
• Set the selection filter options (Hole type, Hole diameter, Hole Upper level and Hole
Height);

• Perform the holes recognition and generate the recognized holes tree;
• Choose the holes you want to include in the operation geometry;
• Preview the machining sequence.

437
HR Drill Geometry Selection dialog box

This dialog box enables you to define the geometry and manage the
parameters of the drill recognition.

Name

This option enables you to define the name of the geometry.

SolidCAM offers you the Default Geometry name (see topic
12.9) that can be edited.

Hole type

This section sets the recognition filter of hole features

according to their type.
The Through check box enables you to recognize the through
hole features.
The Blind check box enables you to recognize the blind hole
features.

When none of these check boxes is selected, hole

recognition cannot be performed and the Find
Holes button is disabled.

Hole diameter (d)

When this section is activated, the hole features are filtered according to the diameter
of the hole. With this filter, only the hole features with the Hole diameter value within
the specified range are recognized.
The From and To values enable you to define the Diameter range by entering the values
or by picking on the solid model. When the cursor is placed in the From/To edit box, you
can specify the diameter value by picking a specific cylindrical surface or a circular edge
on the solid model. When a cylindrical surface or a circular edge is picked, its diameter
is calculated and inserted into the corresponding edit box replacing the previous value.
The edit box becomes pink. When you remove the automatically determined value, the
edit box becomes white.

438
 6. 2.5D Milling

The Thread only check box enables you to recognize only the hole features with threads.
The thread recognition is performed according to the SolidCAM Settings. When this
check box is selected, the From and To values define the range of the Thread diameter
values. The From and To values can be defined by picking a cylindrical surface, cosmetic
thread or circular edge on the solid model.

Hole Upper level (u)

When this section is activated, the hole features are filtered according to the Upper
level. With this filter, only the hole features with the Upper level value within the
specified range are recognized.
The From and To values enable you to define the Upper level range by entering the
values or by picking on the solid model. When the cursor is placed in the From/To
edit box, you can specify the Upper level value by picking on the solid model. When a
model point is picked, the Z-value of the picked position is calculated and inserted into
the corresponding edit box replacing the previous value. The edit box becomes pink.
When you remove the automatically determined value, the edit box becomes white.

Hole height (h)

When this section is activated, the hole features are filtered according to the Hole
height. With this filter, only the hole features with the Hole height value within the
specified range are recognized.
The From and To values enable you to define the Hole height range by entering the
values or by picking on the solid model. When the cursor is placed in the From/To
edit box, you can specify the Hole height value by picking on the solid model. When a
model point is picked, the Z-value of the picked position is calculated and inserted into
the corresponding edit box replacing the previous value. The edit box becomes pink.
When you remove the automatically determined value, the edit box becomes white.

Found holes Undo/Redo

This section provides you with the Undo/Redo buttons that enable you to go back/
forward to a specific choice of holes found with a specific set of filter parameters.

Options
• Find Holes

This button performs the holes recognition and filtering of the recognized holes
according to the criteria described above. The hole features matching the specified
filter criteria will be displayed in the Holes Tree list.

439
 Actually, the holes recognition is not performed each time when you
click on the Find Holes button. When the holes recognition is performed
the first time for a specific Z-axis direction, the recognized holes data is
stored in the database and can be used for further geometry definition.
When you click on the Find Holes button, SolidCAM retrieves the
data from the database according to the filter settings and checks the
synchronization between the data and the solid model. If the data in
the database is not synchronized, a new holes recognition process is
performed and filtering is reapplied.

• Preview

This button displays the current drill geometry based on selected items in the Holes
Tree list and the initial machining sequence.

Click on the Resume button to return to the geometry definition.

Holes Tree

In the Holes Tree list, the hole features are classified into Shapes and Groups. A Shape
contains all the hole features with the same topology; within a Shape, the Groups
include all the hole features with the same dimensions.

The check box near each item in the Holes Tree list enables you to select this item and
include it in the current drill geometry. When a Group or a Shape is selected, all the
hole features belonging to them are selected. The selected items are highlighted on the
model.

The right-click menu is available on the items in the list.

• The Select all command enables you to select all

the recognized hole features and include in the drill
geometry.

• The Unselect all command enables you to remove

the selection from all the hole features in the list.

• The Show hole command displays the Hole Picture

and Hole Parameters dialog boxes.

440
 6. 2.5D Milling

The Hole Picture dialog box provides you with a

schematic image of the selected hole feature.

The Hole Parameters dialog box displays parameters of

the selected hole feature. This dialog box displays the
common hole feature data and the specific parameters
of the hole feature segments.

Synchronization

Synchronization in case of model change

During the synchronization checking, SolidCAM checks the correspondence between

the holes included in the geometry and the updated solid model. If a mismatch between
the holes location is found, SolidCAM marks this geometry as not synchronized and
enables you to synchronize it. During the synchronization, the holes locations are
updated. If the location of a hole included in the geometry cannot be updated from
the model (the hole is missing), this hole is excluded from the geometry. If all holes are
excluded from the geometry, SolidCAM marks this geometry with an exclamation sign;
such geometry requires manual editing and redefinition.

Synchronization in case of Coordinate System change

When the Coordinate System used for the geometry definition is changed, SolidCAM
tries to recalculate all the hole features included in the geometry according to the
updated Coordinate System position and orientation.

When the axis of a hole included in the geometry is not parallel to the Z-axis of the
updated Coordinate System, this hole is excluded from the geometry. If all holes are
excluded from the geometry, SolidCAM marks this geometry with an exclamation sign;
such geometry requires manual editing and redefinition.

When the parallel relation between hole axis and Z-axis of the Coordinate System is
preserved after the CoordSys update, SolidCAM recalculates the hole center coordinates
according to the updated origin.

441
6.7.2 Levels page
This page enables you to specify the
Z-levels at which the tool movements
are executed. The Start level, Clearance
level and Safety distance parameters
are common for all drill features; the
depth-related parameters (Upper level,
Drill depth, and Delta depth) are defined
for each drill feature separately. This
functionality enables you to perform the
machining of several identical drills with
different depths and located at different
levels in a single operation.
The Depth edit button enables you to
define the depth-related parameters for
the chosen drill features using the Depth
Edit dialog box.

Depth Edit dialog box

This dialog box enables you to control over the parameters of the drill
recognition and choose the necessary hole features to be included in the
geometry for the Drill Recognition operation. The hole recognition is
performed on the Target model in the direction parallel to the Z-axis of
the Coordinate System chosen for the operation.

Holes Tree

This section displays the list of all drill instances chosen for
the geometry. All the drill instances in the list are structured
in Groups. Each group has the same Upper level, Drill
depth, Delta depth and Depth type. Each group in the list
is accompanied by the following information enclosed in
parentheses: Upper level, Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth
type. Each drill instance in the list is accompanied by the X-
and Y-coordinates of the drilling position.

The initial values of the Drill depth and Upper level parameters
are recognized on the Target model. The default value of
Delta depth is 0. The Cutter tip option is used by default for all
the Depth type definitions.

442
 6. 2.5D Milling

All drill instances in the list can be selected. When one

of them is selected, the relevant parameters are displayed
in the Upper level, Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth
type sections. The selected groups and drill instances are
highlighted on the solid model.

The right-click menu is available on each item in the list.

• Restore Data from Model

This command enables you to restore and assign to selected item (a group
or a single drill instance) the Upper level and Drill depth recognized on the
Target model. The Delta depth value is restored to 0. The Depth type option
is restored to Cutter tip. When the Restore Data from Model command is
applied, SolidCAM checks the Holes tree items and reorganizes them into
groups according to the changed parameters.

• Restore Data from Model to All

This command restores the Upper level, Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth
type data for all the drill instances in the list. When the Restore Data from
Model to All command is applied, SolidCAM checks the Holes tree items and
reorganizes them into groups according to the changed parameters.

Diameter (D)

This section enables you to set the diameter value and apply it to a single hole, a group
or all holes.

Upper level (u)

This section enables you to set the value of the Upper level and apply it to a single hole,
a group or all holes.

The edit box displays the Upper level value of the selected item (a group or a hole). The
edit box enables you to enter the value or pick the value directly from the model (when
the cursor is placed in the edit box). SolidCAM enables you to pick planar faces parallel
to the XY-plane of the Coordinate System, model vertices and sketch points. When a
model is picked, the Z-value of the picked position is displayed in the edit box. The
edit box has pink background, which means that the parameter is defined associatively
to the solid model. When the edit box value is typed in, it is not associative to the
model; in this case the edit box has white background.

443
 The Apply button enables you to apply the defined Upper level value to the selected list
item (a group or a hole). When a new Upper level value is applied, SolidCAM checks
the Holes tree items and reorganizes them into groups according to the changed
parameters. SolidCAM checks all the groups to find a group with identical Upper level,
Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth type parameters. If such group is found, SolidCAM
adds the updated drill to this group. In case of absence of a suitable group, a new
group is created; the updated drill instance is added to this group. The Apply button is
not available until you change the value in the edit box.
The All check box enables you to apply the updated Upper level value to all drill
instances.

Drill depth (d)

This section enables you to define the value of the drilling depth and apply it to a single
hole, a group or all holes.
The edit box displays the Drill depth value of the selected item (a group or a hole). The
edit box enables you enter the value or pick the value directly from the model (when
the cursor is placed in the edit box). SolidCAM enables you to pick drill faces or edges.
SolidCAM determines the depth of the picked drill according to the defined Upper
level and displays the value in the edit box. The edit box has pink background, which
means that the parameter is defined associatively to the solid model. When the edit box
value is typed in, it is not associative to the model; in this case the edit box has white
background.
The Apply button enables you to apply the defined Drill depth value to the selected list
item (a group or a hole). When a new Drill depth value is applied, SolidCAM checks
the Holes tree items and reorganizes them into groups according to the changed
parameters. SolidCAM checks all groups to find a group with identical Upper level,
Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth type parameters. If such group is found, SolidCAM
adds the updated drill to this group. In case of absence of a suitable group, a new
group is created; the updated drill instance is added to this group.
The Apply button is not available until you change the value in the edit box.
The All check box enables you to apply the updated Drill depth value to all drill instances.

Delta depth (dd)

This section enables you to set the Delta depth value and apply it to a single hole, a
group or all holes.
The edit box displays the Delta depth value of the selected item (a group or a hole).
The default value is 0.

444
 6. 2.5D Milling

The Apply button enables you to apply the defined Delta depth value to the selected list
item (a group or a hole). When a new Delta depth value is applied, SolidCAM checks
the Holes tree items and reorganizes them into groups according to the changed
parameters. SolidCAM checks all groups to find a group with identical Upper level,
Drill depth, Delta depth and Depth type parameters. If such group is found, SolidCAM
adds the updated drill to this group. In case of absence of a suitable group, a new
group is created; the updated drill instance is added to this group.
The Apply button is not available until you change the value in the edit box.
The All check box enables you to apply the updated Delta depth value to all the drill
instances.

Depth type

This section enables you to define the Depth type for a single hole, a group or all holes.
You can define the diameter on the conical part of the drilling tool that will reach the
specified drilling depth during the machining. You can also deepen a drilled hole in
order to obtain a given diameter at the specified drill depth.
The following options are available:
• Cutter tip

The drill tip reaches the defined drilling depth.

• Full diameter

The drill reaches the defined drilling depth with the full diameter.
• Diameter value

The drill reaches the defined drilling depth with the drill cone diameter specified
by the Diameter value parameter.
When this option is chosen for chamfer machining, SolidCAM determines the
diameter of the upper cylindrical segment of the drill instance and compares
it with the tool diameter. If the determined diameter is smaller than the tool
diameter, the determined diameter is accepted as the default for the Diameter
value. If the determined diameter is greater than or equal to the tool diameter, the
tool diameter value is accepted as the default for the Diameter value parameter.

The Apply button enables you to apply the defined Depth type to the selected list item
(a group or a hole). When a new Depth type is applied, SolidCAM checks the Holes
tree items and reorganizes them into groups according to the changed parameters.
SolidCAM checks all groups to find a group with identical Upper level, Drill depth,
Delta depth and Depth type parameters. If such group is found, SolidCAM adds the
updated drill to this group.

445
 In case of absence of a suitable group, a new group is created; the updated drill instance
is added to this group.

The Apply button is not available until you change the current Depth type option.

The All check box enables you to apply the updated Depth type option to all the drill
instances.

6.7.3 Technology page

Sequence of drill positions

This section enables you to define the sequence of the drill positions, manage its direction, etc.

For more information, see topic 6.6.3.

Drill cycle type

Click on the Drill cycle type button. The Drill canned cycles
supported by the post-processor of the current CNC-controller are
displayed. Click on one of the icons to select the canned cycle you
want to use in this operation.

For more information, see topic 6.6.3.

446
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.8 Thread Milling Operation

The Thread Milling operation enables you to generate a helical

tool path for the machining of internal and external threads with
thread mills.
Most current CNC-controllers have a standard feature called
helical interpolation. This feature is used to make a circular move
in two axes and a linear move in a third axis. In thread milling, this
feature is used to form a circular motion in X and Y and a linear
motion in the Z-axis.

The X and Y circular motion forms the diameter to be thread-milled. The Z-axis linear motion
forms the actual pitch (or lead) of the thread.
The Thread Milling Operation dialog box enables you to define the parameters of thread milling.

6.8.1 Tool page

This page enables you to choose the tool for the operation from the Part
Tool Table. This section also displays the major parameters of the chosen
tool: Tool type, Number, Diameter, Pitch, Number of threads, and the
chosen Standard table.

Only tools of the Thread Mill/Thread Taper type

can be chosen for the operation.

447
6.8.2 Levels page

Depth definition

This section enables you to define the depth of the thread by Value or by Number of threads.

The generated helical tool path is affected by the following tool parameters: Pitch and Number of
threads.

Additional depth

This option enables you to deepen the threading by a certain value.

In the Deeper field, enter the additional depth value required.

Start from beginning

When you have added a certain depth to be thread-milled, there is in some cases a need
to start the cutting of the thread from the beginning. This is possible with the Start
from beginning check box.

For example, you thread-milled one drill hole out of 10 identical holes to a certain
depth. Then you found that the threading is not deep enough, and added a certain
additional depth. Then you thread-milled the hole again (without starting from the
beginning, because there is no point in cutting the thread again where it is already
cut) and made sure that the depth is now satisfactory. To thread-mill the rest of the
holes, you need to start cutting from the very beginning, because these holes were not
previously machined, as the first hole.

448
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.8.3 Technology page

Sequence of thread positions

This section enables you to define the sequence of the thread positions, manage its direction, etc.

• Default
The threads are performed according to the order in which the center points were
picked during the geometry definition.

• Line
This option enables you to define the direction of the sequenced thread positions
machining.

• Distance
This option minimizes the length of the necessary tool movement. The first thread is
performed at the first point defined in the geometry. Subsequent threads are executed
according to the nearest position, i.e. at the shortest distance to the previous thread
position.

• Advanced sorting
This option enables you to sort the drill positions for machining of linear and circular
drill patterns.

Show sorted
This button displays the sorted sequence of drill positions on the solid model.
For more information, see topic 6.6.3.

449
Compensation

If the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the CNC-
controller are used in the GCode.

Thread data

This section enables you to define the geometry parameters of the

thread.

Type

This section enables you to choose the Internal or External

type of machining. The Major thread diameter parameter
enables you to define the largest diameter of the machined
thread.
Internal External

Major thread diameter Major thread diameter

Direction Left hand Right hand

This section enables you to

choose either Left hand or Right
hand direction of the machined
thread.

Cut from
Top to bottom Bottom to top

This section enables you to

define the direction of thread
machining. The thread can be
machined either from Top to
bottom or from Bottom to top.

450
 6. 2.5D Milling

Multi-Passes

• Rough

This section defines the parameters of the Step over

rough machining of the thread. It generates Clear offset
several concentric helical passes that start
at the Clear offset distance from the thread
and finish up to the thread, thus cutting
the thread profile in a number of constant
Step over steps.

The Step over value defines the offset

between two successive concentric helical
profiles.

The Thread offset value defines the distance

that remains after the last step over up to
the finish pass.
• Finish

This section enables you to perform the thread finishing.

The Number of passes parameter enables you to define the number of finish paths
generated to achieve the best surface quality.

Start Angle

This parameter defines the start angle of the thread

relative to the X-axis direction.
Start angle

451
6.8.4 Link page

Lead in/out arc

Arc radius

This box defines the radius of the arc with which the tool enters and exits the material.

This option is available only for the external threading.

Flat approach/Flat retreat

The tool enters and exits the material (depending on the direction set in the Cut from
section) at the height of the lower plane of the thread hole.

452
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.9 Slot Operation

This operation generates a tool path along the centerline to

the right or to the left of one or more profiles. Two types of
slots can be defined: the Slot with constant depth operation
machines the slot in several steps until the final depth is
reached. In Slot with variable depth, the depth profile is also
defined by a 2D section. The slot can be pre-machined using
rough and semi-finish cycles. The finish cut produces a tool
path according to the specified scallop height on the floor
of the slot. With available parameters for the right and left
extension and the side step, you can mill a slot wider than the
tool diameter.

When you click Add Operation, Slot, the Slot Operation dialog box is displayed.

453
6.9.1 Technology page

Depth type

There are two methods to define the depth of the slot.

Choose the depth type (Constant or Section) and click on the Data button to enter additional
parameters.
SolidCAM Slot
depth types

Constant Section

Constant depth type

This option produces a slot with a uniform depth. The

Constant Depth Data dialog box is displayed.

454
 6. 2.5D Milling

Tool side

Specify the side of the slot profile at which you want to mill.
The tool side is always relative to the direction of the slot chain
geometry.

• Right: the tool cuts on the right side of the profile geometry at the distance
defined as the value of Profile offset.
• Left: the tool cuts on the left side of the profile geometry at the distance defined
by the value of Profile offset.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry (the cutter radius
compensation G4x cannot be used with this option).

When the Zigzag option is

used, the Tool side combo-box
defines the tool location for the
first cut. For each successive
cutting pass, the tool position
is changed relative to the
geometry direction.

Profile offset remains at the left or right side of

the profile after machining.

If the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x
of the CNC-controller are used in the GCode.

Depth cutting type

• The One way option enables you to create the tool

path with only one-directional movements.

• The Zigzag option enables you to create the tool

path with bi-directional movements.
Zigzag One way

Slot extension

This option enables you to extend the end of the slot without additional geometric
construction and without editing the slot geometry. The Distance parameter controls
the slot extension.

455
Fillet size for last cut

This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without changing the
geometry.

For more information on this subject, see topic 6.1.2.

Slot levels

This section enables you to define the levels of slot machining.

• Depth

This value defines the depth of the slot relative to the Upper level. Click on the
Depth button to pick the Z-level from the 3D model.

• Delta depth

This value defines the offset for the cutting depth that can be changed with its
associativity preserved. This parameter is always relative to the Depth defined for
the operation.

If the Delta depth value is positive, a blue arrow is

displayed near its field indicating a positive offset value
(in the positive direction of the Z-axis).

If the Delta depth value is negative, a red arrow is

displayed near its field indicating a negative offset value
(in the negative direction of the Z-axis).

• Step down

Enter the cutting depth for two successive cuts.

456
 6. 2.5D Milling

Complete Z-level

This option enables you to define the order of Z-levels milling in the machining of
several slots in one operation.

When the Complete Z-Level check box is not selected, the machining is performed as
follows: the first chain of the slot geometry is machined at all Z-levels, then the next
chain is machined accordingly.

1
2
3
5 4

7 6
8
9
10
11
12

When the Complete Z-Level check box is selected, all chains of the slot geometry are
machined at a specific Z-level, then the next Z-level is machined accordingly.

1
7
2
3 8

4 9
10
5
11
6
12

This check box is not available when the Zigzag option is chosen for Depth
cutting type.

457
Section depth type

When you click on the Data button,

the Section Slot Data dialog box is
displayed.
Section geometry name

The section specifies the depth

profile for this slot operation.
As the geometry for this 2.5D
operation is designed using
2D profiles and sections, a
reference point is required to
indicate the position of the
Upper level.
Reference point (Upper Level)

Section
(Depth profile)

Slot Geometry

Section data

• Scallop

This value determines the quality of the resulting surface on the floor of the
slot. The smaller the value, the smoother is the surface.
• Descent Angle

The tool plunges into the material with the given ramp angle. The default
value of 90 degrees causes a normal approach into the material. The tool
enters the material at an angle to the first slot profile. If the tool path length
required to perform the ramp angle is longer than the slot profile, SolidCAM
generates a zigzag movement to plunge into the material.

Rough, Semi-finish and Finish cycles

• Rough cycle

If you check this option, the rough operation clears the slot before the semi-
finish operation is performed.

458
 6. 2.5D Milling

Enter the Step down between two successive cuts during roughing.
Define the offset that remains on the slot walls and floor after the roughing
cut in the Rough/Semi-finish offset field.
• Finish cycle

Check this option if you intend to semi-finish and/or finish the slot. Choose
the cycles you want to perform from the list.
• Semi-finish: the slot is machined at the offset specified in the Rough/
Semi-finish offset field.

• Finish: the slot is machined to its final dimensions and specified surface
scallop.
• Both: the slot is machined first with a semi-finish and then a finishing cut.

Offset for Rough/Semi-finish

This value specifies the offset that remains on the slot after the rough and semi-finish
operations. This offset is removed in the last finish cut.

Technology

• Tool side

Specify the side of the slot profile at which you want to mill. The tool side is always
relative to the direction of the slot‘s chain geometry.
• Right: the tool machines on the right side of the slot geometry. The cut leaves
material on the profile equal to the specified Offset on profile value.
• Left: the tool machines on the left side of the slot geometry. The cut leaves
material on the profile equal to the specified Offset on profile value.
• Center: the center of the tool moves on
the profile geometry.

When the Zigzag option is used,

the Tool side combo-box defines
the tool location for the first
cut. For each successive cutting
pass, the tool position is changed
relative to the geometry direction.

459
 With additional parameters for the right and left extension, the Center option enables
you to machine slots that are wider than the tool diameter. The given side step value is
used to cut from the right to the left side. Note that the side definition is always relative
to the direction of the slot profile. Check the direction of the profile by clicking on
the Show button in the Section Geometry name area of the Slot Operation dialog box.

• Right extension: enter the distance by which the slot is extended to the right side
(relative to profile direction).

• Left extension: enter the distance by which the slot is extended to the left side
(relative to profile direction).

• Side step: enter the tool’s side step in successive tool paths.

Cutting direction

• The One way option enables you to create the tool path with only one-directional
movements.

• The Zigzag option enables you to create the tool path with bi-directional movements.

Zigzag One way

460
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.9.2 Pre-drilling geometry generation

When the operation is defined and saved, SolidCAM automatically generates the pre-drilling
geometry. The pre-drilling geometry is generated only for Slot operations with Constant depth type
and when the One way option is used for Depth cutting type.

During the pre-drilling geometry generation, SolidCAM automatically collects the ramping points
of the tool path for all of the chains. For each chain, SolidCAM collects all the ramping points
where the vertical penetration into the material is performed. These points are located in the start
point of the Lead in movement. Similar to Profile operation, SolidCAM generates one ramping
position for each open chain. For closed chains, several ramping positions can be generated for each
chain depending on the chain geometry. The ramping positions are located in the beginning of the
cutting passes where the vertical penetration into the material is performed.

The name of the generated geometry is composed of the name of the

initial Slot operation with the Drill_For_ prefix: Drill_For_SlotName,
where the SlotName is the name of the initial Slot operation. For
example, for the Slot operation S_contour_T1, the pre-drilling
geometry Drill_For_S_contour_T1 will be generated.

The pre-drilling geometry appears under the Geometry header in

SolidCAM Manager. This geometry is available for Drilling operations
only. The pre-drilling geometry cannot be chosen in 3D Drilling
operations.

For more information on pre-drilling geometry generation, see topic 6.1.3.

461
462
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.10 T-Slot Operation

This operation enables you to machine slots in vertical walls with a slot mill tool.

When you click Add Operation, T-Slot, the T-Slot Operation dialog box is displayed.

463
6.10.1 Tool page

Tool data definition

The Data button displays the Operation Tool Data dialog box. This dialog box displays the tool
material, feed and speed parameters and the diameter and length offset numbers used in the current
operation.

The Second offset number parameter defines the register number of the upper cutting face offset,
in the offset table of the CNC-machine. This option enables SolidCAM to automatically take into
account the minor size differences between the defined tool and the one actually used for cutting
the workpiece, if there are any. You may choose not to use this option by clearing the check box.

464
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.10.2 Technology page

Tool side

This option enables you to define the tool position relative to the geometry.

Left Right Center

• Right: the tool cuts to the right of the profile geometry at the distance defined by the
values set in Modify offset.

• Left: the tool cuts to the left of the profile geometry at the distance defined by the values
set in Modify offset.

• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry (the compensation cannot
be used with this option).

When the Zigzag option is used, the Tool side combo-box defines the tool
location for the first cut. For each successive cutting pass, the tool position
is changed relative to the geometry direction.

465
Geometry

This button enables you to modify a geometry shared by several operations separately for each
operation.

Compensation

If the Compensation check box is selected, the tool radius compensation options G4x of the
CNC-controller are used in the GCode.

For more information, see topic 6.1.2.

Offsets

To perform the rough machining of the slot, you have to specify various offsets on the slot geometry.

• Wall offset

This option defines the offset that will remain on the slot wall after roughing.

Wall offset

• Ceiling offset
Ceiling
This option defines the offset that will remain on offset
the slot ceiling after roughing.

466
 6. 2.5D Milling

• Floor offset

This option defines the offset that will remain on

the slot floor after roughing.
Floor
offset

Depth cutting type

When the One way option is chosen, the cutting passes are oriented in the
same direction and connection between them is performed through the
Operation Clearance level. At the end of each pass the tool performs a
retreat movement to the Operation Clearance level, a horizontal movement
at rapid feed to the start point of the next pass and then descends to the
Z-level of the next pass. The same cutting direction (climb or conventional)
is kept along the whole tool path.

When the Zigzag option is chosen, the tool path is performed in a zigzag
manner, with the tool path direction changing from one pass to the next.
The passes located at two successive Z-levels are connected directly from
the end of one pass to the beginning of the next pass.

The Zigzag option cannot be used together with

the Clear offset technology.

Fillet size for last cut

This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corner without changing the geometry.

For more information on this option, see topic 6.1.2.

467
Rough

This section enables you to perform the rough machining of the slot.

Clear offset

This option generates several concentric profiles with

constant depth that start at the defined clear offset distance
from the profile and finish at the geometry of the profile,
thus clearing the area around the profile.
Step over

Clear offset
Wall
offset

Modify offset

The Offset option defines the distance from the geometry at which the milling starts.
The Offset value must be equal to or greater than the Wall offset value. The tool starts
milling the profile at the distance defined by Clear offset and finishes at the distance
defined by Wall offset.

The Step over option defines the overlap of adjacent tool paths. It determines the
offset between two successive concentric profiles. Clear offset
tool path
• The Zigzag option enables you to create the tool path
for the Clear offset removal containing both climb and
conventional movements.

Profile
geometry

Clear offset
tool path
• The One way option enables you to create the tool
path for the Clear offset removal containing only climb
movements.

Profile
geometry

468
 6. 2.5D Milling

Finish

This section enables you to perform the finishing of the slot. By

selecting the check boxes, you can choose the offsets (Ceiling, Wall and
Floor) you want to remove in the finish pass.

Number of passes

SolidCAM enables you to generate several finish passes

to achieve the best surface quality. You can define the
number of finish passes.

Extension/Overlap

This option enables you to extend the profile in the positive profile direction.

Cutting depth overlap

This parameter defines the overlap of each two adjacent tool paths, in both the rough
and finish machining of the slot.

Cutting depth
overlap Cutting depth
overlap

469
 Cut from
This option enables you to define
the direction of machining. The
rough and finish machining of
the slot can be performed in the
following directions:
• Top to bottom
• Bottom to top
• Middle to bottom
• Middle to top

6.10.3 Link page

Ramping

This section determines how the tool approaches the start point of the contour.

For more information on Ramping options, see topic 6.1.3.

Lead in/Lead out

These options enable you to control the way the tool approaches and retreats from the profile.

For more information on Lead in/Lead out options, see topic 6.1.3.

470
 6. 2.5D Milling

6.11 Translated Surface Operation

A translated surface is generated by moving a section

along a profile geometry. Limit geometries can be
projected on the translated surface. You can machine
the resulting translated surface inside, outside or
along the limit geometry.

When you click Add Operation, Translated Surface, the

Translated Surface Operation dialog box is displayed.

6.11.1 Technology page

471
Section geometry name

A translated surface requires two geometries: the profile along which Section Geometry
the section is translated and the section geometry.

The geometries in this example result in the following translated

surface:

Profile
Geometry

For detailed explanation of section geometry definition, see topic 4.4.4.

Process type

The Translated Surface operation can be used to mill surfaces and also to engrave profiles, such as
text, on a translated surface.
Translated Surface
Process Type

Surface Engraving

To engrave a profile on a translated surface, use the Translated Surface

operation that you used to mill the surface as a template. Click Add
Operation, Translated Surface and select the original Translated Surface
operation from the Operation name list in the operation dialog box. All the
geometries and parameters of the original operation are copied.

Choose the Process type and click on the Data button to define additional parameters.

472
 6. 2.5D Milling

Surface data for translated surfaces

When you click on the Data button, the

Translated Surface Data dialog box is
displayed.
• Offset on surface

This value causes the final milled

surface to be at an Offset from the
defined surface.
Offset

Section
• Scallop

This value determines how smooth

the resulting surface finish will be. The
smaller the value, the smoother is the
surface finish. The value is used for Scallop
both the finishing and the semi-finishing
operation.
• Overlap

This value defines the tool overlap for adjacent tool paths during roughing
operations. The value of 0.6 means that the tool will overlap 60% to the next
tool path. For the tool diameter of 10 mm, the resulting side step is 4 mm.
Additionally, this value defines the maximum side step used in finishing and semi-
finishing operations if the calculated scallop allows a wider side step.
• Z-Entry angle

The tool plunges into the material with the given ramp angle. The default value
of 90 degrees causes a normal approach into the material. The tool enters the
material at an angle to the first line or arc of the tool path. If the length required
to perform the ramp angle is longer than the first tool path movement, SolidCAM
generates a zigzag movement to plunge into the material.
• Connect type

Zigzag: the surface is milled with both conventional and climb tool movements.
One way: the surface is milled only in one direction. This option cannot be used
if you use Limits for the translated surface.

473
 • Rough cycle

When this check box is selected, a roughing operation clears the surface area
before the semi-finishing operation is performed. Enter the Step down between
two successive cuts during roughing. Define the offset that remains on the surface
walls and floor after the roughing cut in the Rough/Semi-finish offset field.
• Finish cycle

Select this check box if you intend to semi-finish and/or finish the translated
surface. Choose the cycles you want to perform from the list.
Semi-finish: the geometry is machined at the offset specified in the Rough/Semi-
finish offset field.

Finish: the geometry is machined to its final dimensions and specified surface
scallop.
Both: the geometry is machined first with a semi-finishing cut and then a finishing
cut.
• Rough/Semi-finish offset

This value specifies the offset that remains on the surface after roughing and
semi-finishing operations. This offset is removed in the last finishing cut.

Engraving data for Translated Surface operation

When you click on the Data button, the Engraving Data dialog
box is displayed.
• Surface offset

This value causes the final milled surface to be at an

Offset from the defined surface.
Offset

Section

• Scallop

This value determines how smooth

the resulting surface finish will be. Use
smaller values for a smoother surface Scallop
finish. The value is used for both
finishing and semi-finishing operations.

474
 6. 2.5D Milling

• Overlap

This value defines the tool overlap for adjacent tool paths during roughing
operations. The value of 0.6 means that the tool will overlap 60% to the next tool
path. For a tool diameter of 10 mm, the resulting a side step is 4 mm. Additionally,
this value defines the maximum side step used in semi-finishing and finishing
operations if the calculated scallop allows a wider side step.

• Descent angle

The tool plunges into the material with the given ramp angle. The default value
of 90 degrees causes a normal approach into the material. The tool enters the
material at an angle to the first line or arc of the tool path. If the length required
to perform the ramp angle is longer than the first tool path movement, SolidCAM
generates a zigzag movement to plunge into the material.

Tool side

This option determines on which side of the profile the section is machined. Use the Show surface
button to display the current tool position relative to the profile geometry.

The geometry direction set in the Reverse geometry field also affects the
tool side option.

• Right: the tool path is generated on the right side of the profile geometry.

• Left: the tool path is generated on the left side of the profile geometry.

The Geometry button displays the Modify Geometry dialog box that enables you to modify a
geometry shared by several operations separately for each operation (see topic 6.1.2).

Limits

A limit is a profile geometry that can be used to define additional 2D profiles on the surface and
to exclude areas on the surface from machining. If you would like to use a limit on your translated
surface, select the Limits check box and click on the Data button. To use the Engraving process
type, you must specify the Engraving geometry and additional parameters in the Engraving Profile
dialog box.
Translated Surface
Limit Type

Surface Engraving

475
Limit data for translated surface

When you click on the Data button, the Surface Limit dialog box is displayed.

The geometries in the example result in the following translated surface with limits:
• Limit geometry name

In this section, specify which contour, i.e. profile geometry you want to use as the
Limit. Note that the Limit geometry must be closed.

• Machining area

Outside Limit geometry: the area of the translated surface outside the limit is
machined.

Inside Limit geometry: only the area inside of

the limit geometries is machined.
Section Profile

Limit

Profile

476
 6. 2.5D Milling

• Offset on Limit geometry

After machining, the CAM-Part has remaining material on the limit geometry equal
to this value.
• Finish on Limit

Select this check box if you intend to semi-finish and/or

finish the limits on the translated surface. Use the lists to
choose the cycles you want to perform.

Type

• The Finish option machines the limit to its final

dimensions in one step down.

• The Semi-finish option prepares the limits to an offset specified in the Offset
field with a cutting depth defined in the Step down field.

• The Both option machines the limit first with a semi-finish cut and then with
a finishing cut.
Side

If the Limit geometry is composed of one 1

or more chains, but neither is placed inside 2 3
another chain, the default option Both
should be used. SolidCAM will then use the
relevant finish side depending on whether
the Limit type is Outside or Inside.

In this example, the Limit geometry contains a chain inside another chain (Chain
#2 inside Chain #1) and a separate limit Chain #3.

• The External option finishes all

outside contours of the Limit chains,
leaving the inside hole unfinished.

Finish cuts

477
 • The Internal option finishes only the
inside contour of the Limit chain, leaving
the outside Limit contours unfinished.

Finish cuts

• The Both option finishes all inside and

outside contours of the Limit chains.

Finish cuts
Cutting direction

This field defines the cutting direction on the last finish cut. It can be either
clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).
Semi-finish offset

Enter the offset that will remain on the surface after the semi-finish operation.
This offset will be removed in a last cut, if a finish cut has been specified.
Semi-finish Step down

The step down defines the cutting depth of the tool on the Limit geometries
used for the semi-finishing operation.

478
 6. 2.5D Milling

Engraving Limit for Translated Surface Operation

When you click on the Data button, the Engraving Profile

dialog box is displayed.
• Engraving depth

The depth of the engraved profile on the translated surface

must be entered in the Upper level field of the operation
dialog box. If you want to penetrate the translated surface
by 1.0, you have to enter the value of -1.0 into the Upper
level field.

In this example, a text was defined as the Engraving Limit

geometry and engraved on a translated surface.

• Engraving geometry

In this section you have to specify the contour, i.e. profile geometry, which you want
to engrave on the translated surface.
• Finish options

Type

This option enables you to semi-finish and/or finish the engraved profile on the
translated surface.

• The Semi-finish option machines the engraving profile to an offset specified

in the Offset field with cutting depths given in the Step down field.

• The Finish option machines the engraving profile to its final dimensions in
one step down.

• The Both option machines the limit first with a semi-finishing cut and then
with a finishing cut.

479
 Side

The tool can cut on the left/right to the profile or on the engraving geometry.

• Right: the tool cuts on the right side of the profile geometry up to the distance
defined by the Offset value.

• Left: the tool cuts on the left side of the profile geometry at the distance
defined by the Offset value.

• Center: the center of the tool moves on the profile geometry.

Offset

You can specify the offset from the engraving geometry for a semi-finishing
operation on the left or right side of the geometry. This offset is removed with
the finishing cut, if you have defined one.
Step down

This value defines the successive Z-cutting depth during the semi-finishing
operation of the engraving profile.

Geometry on Section

This option enables you to locate the Start

section on the profile. Section Profile
Start point
Geometry
• Start: the profile geometry
Start
is located at the start of the point
Section
section and the machining is
performed from the start of End point
the section towards the end of
the section. End point

• End: the profile geometry End

is located at the end of the Profile
Geometry Start point Profile
section and the machining is
performed from the end of
the section towards the start
of the section.
End point

Section

480
 6. 2.5D Milling

Constraint

This option enables you to control the tool movement at the start and end of the profile/section.
Leave this option unselected to use no constraints at all.

Both

P2 No
End
Profile P2
P3 P3
Section

Section
Section

P2 P2

P3
P3
Profile No

P2 P2
P3 Section Section
P3
Both End

481
6.11.2 Link page

Lead in/Lead out

You can control the way the tool leads in to/out from the geometry. Choose an option from the list
and enter the distance value for this option.

SolidCAM enables you to use the following Lead in/Lead out options:
• None

• Normal

• Arc

• Tangent

• Point

For more information on this subject, see topic 6.1.3.

482
3D Milling 7
SolidCAM 3D Milling can be used for both prismatic parts and complex
3D models. For prismatic parts, SolidCAM analyzes the model and
automatically recognizes pockets and profiles to be machined using
Z-constant machining strategies.
For molds, electrodes and prototypes, SolidCAM offers powerful
3D machining, including advanced High Speed Machining strategies
and integrated rest material options. No matter how complex is the
model, SolidCAM provides the optimal approach and roughing strategy
with superior 3D finish machining for mold and die applications.

 3D Milling Operation
 Roughing strategies
 Semi-finishing & Finishing strategies
 3D Engraving Operation
 3D Drilling Operation
7.1 3D Milling Operation

You can perform 3-axis gouge-free machining on solid and surface

models. This operation offers a wide range of roughing, semi-finishing
and finishing strategies for free-form models. It can be used to
manufacture molds, dies, electrodes, prototypes and other 3D Models.
When you click Add Operation, 3D Milling, the 3D Milling Operation
dialog box is displayed.

7.1.1 Geometry page

This page enables you to define the machining geometry for the operation.

Working area

SolidCAM enables you to limit the tool path with a specified working area. In case a Working area
is used, SolidCAM calculates the whole tool path and then removes the all tool path lines outside
the Working area.
In the Working area field, click on the Define button.
The Working Area dialog box is displayed.
Automatic
Working area

If you do not define a working area, a box

at an offset with the width of the tool
diameter is drawn around the current 3D
Model. SolidCAM applies the selected
milling strategy to the complete Automatic
Working area. Geometry
boundaries Tool

484
 7. 3D Milling

The Working Area dialog box enables you to choose the

type of working area and set the related parameters.
The working area can be defined using one or a
combination of the following methods:
Working area Working area geometry

Angle limits

Selected faces

Rest material

The resulting working area boundary is generated as a

boolean combination of the following:
• User-defined planar geometry with an offset;
• Selected drive surfaces;
• Selected check surfaces with an offset;
• Surface angle minimum and maximum limits.

The generated working area boundary is then used either for tool path generation (e.g. Circular
pocket, Constant Step over, etc.) or as a boundary to trim the tool path (Linear, Pencil milling, etc.).

Working area definition via Geometry

In this section, you have to specify the

working area geometry that defines the
machining boundaries for the operation.
If you have already defined working area
geometries for this CAM-Part, you can
choose the geometry from the Name list.

• The Show button displays the chosen

geometry in the SolidWorks window.

• The Define button enables you to

select a new working area geometry.

For more information on Geometry

selection, see topic 4.4.1.

485
 Working area definition via Rest material

With the Cut only in rest material option, you

can limit the machining to the rest material.

Rest material is what has to be machined

after the previous operations in order to
reach the Target model. When the Cut
only the Rest material option is chosen
for the Working area definition, SolidCAM
calculates the Updated Stock model (USM)
after all the previous operations. SolidCAM
automatically compares the USM with the
target model and generates the rest material
areas.

The rest material left after semi-finishing

Working only in the rest material area
operations with a big tool

This option is available only if the target model is defined.

• Mach. Stock Name

This option enables you to use the previously generated USM for the rest material
calculation.

This field is available only when the Manual method of Updated Stock
model calculation is used.

486
 7. 3D Milling

• Show 3D

This button displays the SolidVerify simulation with the USM and the Rest material
in comparison with the 3D Model geometry used in the operation.

Updated Stock Model calculation

SolidCAM offers two modes of Updated Stock model calculation: Automatic and
Manual. The mode can be specified for the CAM-Part with the Updated Stock
calculation page in the Part Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.3). The same modes are
used for the SolidVerify USM calculation.

• Automatic mode

During the operation calculation process, SolidCAM runs the SolidVerify

simulation of all the previous operations in the invisible mode. The resulting USM
is saved in *.STFRM file in the CAM-Part folder. SolidCAM calculates the USM
according to the Updated Stock Accuracy Settings.

During the USM calculation process for the current operation, SolidCAM generates
intermediate USM files for the previous operations and saves them according to
the Updated Stock model method settings. The saved USM files can be used for
the Rest material calculation of additional operations. These intermediate USM
files are removed when the CAM-Part is closed.

If the USM file for some operation already exists, SolidCAM checks the compliance
between accuracy settings of the USM and Updated Stock Accuracy Settings
of the CAM-Part. If these settings concur, SolidCAM uses the existing USM,
otherwise the USM is recalculated in accordance with the CAM-Part Settings.

• Manual mode

In the Manual mode, SolidCAM enables you to save the USM manually after the
SolidVerify simulation and use it for the Working area definition with the Cut only
the Rest material option.

When the simulation of a separate operation or a number of operations is

performed in the SolidVerify mode, the Save Machined stock to file button enables
you to save the USM in the *.STF file. The name of the file is the same as the name
of the last simulated operation.

In the Machined Stock name box, you can choose any previously saved USM.

487
 SolidCAM automatically deletes USM files for a specific operation when:
• the operation was deleted;
• the operation was changed and it caused the deletion of the operation
PCode;
• the operation sequence was changed;
• the accuracy parameters were changed;
• the working mode was switched from Manual to Automatic.

Updated Stock Model interchangeability

Updated Stock models generated for the SolidVerify simulation and for 3D Milling of
Rest material areas are interchangeable. This means that SolidCAM can use USM files
generated for the SolidVerify simulation instead of USM files for 3D Milling and vice
versa.

If the USM file for SolidVerify simulation is already generated for some operation,
it can be used also for Rest material if the Accuracy settings of the USM match the
Updated Stock Accuracy Settings of the CAM-Part.

Working area definition via Angle limits

This option enables you to define the

working area by surface inclination angle
range. Using this method, you can apply
various machining strategies to model
areas with different inclination. For
example, you can machine all shallow
areas with the Linear finishing strategy
and all steep areas with the Constant Z
strategy.

488
 7. 3D Milling

Angle limit calculation

In each point where the tool contacts

the machining surface, SolidCAM
determines the normal vector at the
contact point, directed to the tool sphere
center (for ball-nosed tools); for end Normal vector
mills with rounded corners, the vector
is directed from the contact point to the Angle
Contact point
radius center. The angle of this vector
relative to the Z-axis is used for the angle
limits calculation.

The Angle limits section of the Working

Area dialog box enables you to define the
angle range.

• The Minimum angle value defines the lower limit of the angle range.
• The Maximum angle value defines the upper limit of the angle range.

A particular feature of the Angle limits method is related to

machining of model edges: it is impossible to determine a single
contact point between the edge and the tool surface. The tool rolls
over the edge, continuously keeping in contact until the angle of
the normal vector at the contact point is in the defined range.

The resulting tool path is rounded. Such tool path rounding causes
the breaking of the sharp corners. The machining time is also
increased.

The Trim rounding option

enables you to avoid
unnecessary tool path
rounding. When this check
box is selected, the tool
path gets trimmed at the
point where the tool axis
is coincident to the surface
boundary.
Rounded tool path Rounding trimmed

489
Working area definition via Face selection

You can define the area of the 3D Model

machining with two sets of model faces:

• Drive faces – the set of faces to be

milled. The tool path is generated only
for machining of these faces.
• Check faces – the set of faces to be
avoided during the generation of the tool
path.
Check faces

Drive faces

Other faces of the model are not considered during the tool path calculation.

Example: for the model shown above, SolidCAM generates the tool path only for
the shallow area. During the calculation, gouging of the check faces is avoided. The
remaining faces do not participate in the tool path calculation.
The above capability is available through the Work on selected faces area in the
Working area dialog box.

Drive faces

Specify the Face geometry for Drive faces. If you have already defined such
geometries for this CAM-Part, you can choose the geometry from the Name list.
• The Define button enables you to define a new Face geometry with the Select
Faces dialog box.

• The Show button displays the Face geometry on the SolidWorks model.
Check faces

Specify the Face geometry for Check faces. If you have already defined such
geometries for this CAM-Part, you can choose the geometry from the Name list.
• The Define button enables you to define a new Face geometry with the Select
Faces dialog box.

• The Show button displays the Face geometry on the SolidWorks model.

490
 7. 3D Milling

SolidCAM enables you to specify the Offset for the check faces when machining is
performed on selected faces. Using this offset, SolidCAM enables you to perform the
machining at a safety distance from the check surfaces.
Offset
Check face
Check face

Drive face Drive face

Offset for check faces Offset for check faces

is not defined is defined

Select Faces dialog box for Drive faces

This dialog box enables you to select one or several faces of the SolidWorks model.
The selected face icons are displayed in the Faces section.

If you have selected a wrong face, click on it again to undo your selection. You
can also right-click on the face name in the list (the face is highlighted) and choose
Unselect from the menu.

491
• Select Check faces

The CAD selection option enables you to select faces with the SolidWorks tools.

• Faces

This section enables you to display and edit the normals of model surfaces
during the geometry selection.

The Show Direction for highlighted faces only check box enables you to display
the surface normals for the specific highlighted faces in the faces list.

The Show Direction for selected faces check box enables you to display the
normals direction for all the faces in the list.

The right-click menu available on the items in the Faces

list enables you to reverse the direction of the surface
normals of the chosen faces (the Reverse command)
or of all the selected faces (the Reverse all command).

492
 7. 3D Milling

Select faces dialog box for Check faces

This dialog box enables you to select one or several check faces of the SolidWorks
model. The selected face icons are displayed in the Faces section.

If you have selected a wrong face, click on it again to undo your selection. You
can also right-click on the face name in the list (the face is highlighted) and choose
Unselect from the menu.

• Select Check faces

The CAD Selection option enables you to select faces with the SolidWorks tools.

The All faces adjacent to drive faces button automatically adds all the model
faces adjacent to the defined Drive faces to the selection list.

• Faces

This section enables you to display and edit the normals of model surfaces
during the geometry selection.

Tool on working area

This option controls the tool position relative to the boundaries of the working area.
Since the working area geometry is always projected on a 2D plane, viewing the model
and working area in the top view shows exactly till where the tool machines the model.

493
• Internal

The tool machines up to the boundary of the working area. The center point moves at
an offset equal to the tool radius.
Working Area Geometry

Tool

• External

The tool machines over the boundary of the working area by a distance equal to the
tool diameter.
Working Area Geometry

Tool

• Center

The tool machines the working area until the tool center is positioned on the working
area.
Working Area Geometry

Tool

494
 7. 3D Milling

• Tangent

The Internal/External/Center methods Unmachined area

of the working area definition have
several limitations. In some cases, the
limitation of the tool path by planar
working area results in unmachined
areas or corners rounding. The
Tangent option enables you to avoid Tool on working area: Internal
these problems.

When this option is chosen,

SolidCAM generates the tool path
boundaries by projecting the planar Unmachined
working area on the 3D model. The area
tool path is limited in such a way that
the tool is tangent to the model faces Tool on working area: Center
at the boundary.
Tool path rounding
This option enables you to machine
the exact working area, taking into
account the 3D model geometry.
The tool is tangent
to the projection
of the working area
Tool on working area: External
onto the model faces

Tool on working area: Tangent

When the Tangent option is used, SolidCAM

automatically recognizes through holes and cuts inside
the working area and prevents the tool from entering
these areas.

495
 Offset value (+/-)

This value enables you to specify the offset of

the tool center. A positive offset value enlarges
the working area; a negative value reduces the
-
+
working area to be machined.
-
+

• To stay away from a pocket’s wall, for example, you can use the Internal
option with a small negative offset value.

• To prevent the tool from plunging down a straight wall of a block, you
can use the Middle option with an offset smaller than the tool radius.
Also, with the same result, you can use the External option with a small
negative offset value.

Tool path trimming

When the tool path is generated by a projection strategy (Linear, Circular pocket, etc.),
SolidCAM projects the planar pattern on the model. When there is no model geometry
in the specific point of the pattern (e.g. holes in the model), the pattern is projected
onto the virtual infinite XY-plane located at the Operation Lower level.

Planar pattern

Operation
Upper level
Tool path

Operation
Lower level
The Tool path trimming options enable you to trim unnecessary movements at the
Operation Lower level and movements above the Operation Upper level.

496
 7. 3D Milling

The resulting tool path is reconnected.

Not trimmed
tool path

Tool path trimmed

at Lower level

Tool path trimmed

at Lower level
and Upper Level

7.1.2 Technology page

This page enables you to define the technological parameters of the machining.

The 3D Milling Operation interface offers all three machining types – Rough,
Semi-Finish and Finish Milling – in one dialog box. This enables you to
perform all machining operations in one operation. You need to add another
operation only if the tool, the milling levels or the working area is going to
change from one operation to another.

497
7.1.3 Roughing

Rough milling removes the bulk of material surrounding the 3D Model.

The material is removed on Z-levels controlled by the Operation Upper
level, Surface offset and Step down values. To remove large amounts
of material, large tools, small feeds and low tolerances are usually used.

Three strategies are available for rough machining of 3D Models.

SolidCAM Roughing

Hatch Contour

Plunging Pattern

Contour and Hatch strategies perform rough cuts on constant Z-levels that are automatically
calculated using the specified values of Lower level, Surface offset and Step down.

Plunging is a totally different concept of removing material from a given pocket, carried out with
a special tool. Instead of milling the material, the tool moves up and down as in a drilling motion,
travelling along the specified path type.

The strategy and technological parameters are defined in the Rough section of Technology page
of the 3D Milling Operation dialog box. Choose one of the strategies and specify the additional
parameters.

Overlap

Enter the Overlap of adjacent tool passes. The default value is 0.5 (50%). With a tool diameter of
10, an overlap of 0.7 would mean a side step of 3.0 for the next tool movement. Avoid using values
smaller than 0.3.

0.5D 0.2D
Overlap 0.5D Overlap 0.2D

498
 7. 3D Milling

Equal step over

This option enables you to generate the hatch tool path spaced evenly with the automatically
calculated Overlap value, which is nearest to the specified Min. Overlap value but not smaller than
this value.

When this check box is not selected, the distance between the last pass and the one before it can be
smaller than that between all of the other passes.

Overlap Overlap
When this check box is selected, the evenly spaced hatch tool path is generated.

Overlap Overlap
The overlap between two successive passes is not smaller than the specified Min. Overlap value.

Step down

SolidCAM uses the constant Z pocketing for the roughing. The Step down parameter defines the
distance between each two successive Z-levels. Enter the tool’s cutting depth.

499
Clean flat

SolidCAM generates a set of Z-levels with equal step down. Sometimes

the model ledge with the specified offset falls between the Z-levels
defined by Step down and cannot be machined in the current operation.
Z-levels with the
equal Step down

Model with
the offset

Not machined
ledges between
Z-Levels
• None

When this option is chosen, the tool machines only at each step down distance.
Anything in between is not machined.
• Clean flat after roughing

When this option is chosen, the tool performs complete roughing at each step down
level and then returns to the flat areas between the step down levels.
• Clean flat during roughing

When this option is chosen, SolidCAM produces tool paths at the step down level. At
this point, the tool machines the flat area located between the step down levels. After
completing the flat area, it goes to the next step down.

Offsets

Surface offset is the minimum offset of material in the X-, Y- and Z-direction that remains on the
model contour. The value defines the closest distance the tool can get to the model. The rough
operation is performed at constant Z-levels.

In addition to the specified Surface offset, the roughed

model shows stairs of rest material with a height equal
to the Step down value. To obtain a uniform offset on
the model, a semi-finish operation should be executed.
Surface offset

Model surface

500
 7. 3D Milling

In 3D Milling of prismatic parts, you often need to use different offset values for vertical and
horizontal areas. With the Wall offset value, you can define the XY-offset of any surface that is not
absolutely flat. To define the Z-offset to the absolute horizontal (flat) surfaces, use the Floor offset
parameter.

Floor
Wall offset
offset

Use the Wall and Flat offsets for 3D machining of prismatic parts. In
3D Milling of non-prismatic parts, it is best to use surface offset and not
Floor and Wall offsets. Set the Wall and Flat offsets to 0 and enter the
desired value of the Surface offset.

Z-Entry

This option enables you to control how the tool plunges into the material. Click on the Z-Entry
button to display the Z-Entry dialog box.

• None

The tool plunges into the material with a normal downward movement at the specified
Z-feed rate.

501
• Angle

When you choose the Angle type and enter the

Angle value, the tool enters the material with a ramp
movement. The ramp starts from the given safety
distance down to the model contour. If, due to the
model contour, the ramp cannot be created in a straight
line, the Z-Entry movement follows the contour.

When you work with small Z-Entry angles

such as two degrees, you can reduce
the length of the Z-Entry movement by
decreasing the Safety distance value. Make
sure, though, that the initial offset on the
raw material allows for changing the Safety
distance value.

• Helical

The tool enters the material in a spiral movement

according to the defined step down, angle and radius.

If your tool has center cutting capabilities, select the

Center cutting check box. In the Angle field, enter the
Z-Entry angle that you would like the tool to follow. In
the Radius field, enter the radius of the tool path.

The working order is as follows:

• The tool descends from the safety distance

above the Upper level to the material in a circular
motion until the step down is reached, using the
user-defined radius.

• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material at the
step down depth.

• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance
level.

• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Safety distance above the previous
step down depth and repeats the helical Z-Entry to the next working depth.

• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.

502
 7. 3D Milling

If the tool does not have center cutting capabilities, do not select the Center cutting
check box. In the Tool step down field, enter the depth of the step down of the tool.

The result of this action is the same as that of the center cutting tool except for the
following differences:

• The tool descends from the Safety distance above the Upper level to the material
in a circular motion up to the Tool Step down.

• At this point, the tool clears the circular path. Then it descends to the next Tool
Step down.

• This is repeated until the tool reaches the CAM-Part’s step down depth.

• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material on that
step down depth.

• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance
level.

• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Safety distance above the previous
step down depth and repeats the Helical Z-Entry to the next working depth.

• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.

• Linear

The Linear Z-Entry follows the same rules as the Helical.

The difference is that the Z-Entry is performed in a
linear zigzag fashion rather than in a circular one.

If your tool has center cutting capabilities, select the

Center cutting check box. In the Linear dialog box,
enter the length of the linear tool path that you would
like the tool to travel.

The working order is as follows:

• The tool descends from the Safety distance

above the Upper level to the material in a zigzag
motion based on the user defined angle and
length until the step down is reached.

503
 • When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material on that
step down depth.

• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance
level.

• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Safety distance above the previous
step down depth and repeats the Linear Z-Entry to the next working depth.

• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.

If the tool does not have center cutting capabilities, do not select the Center cutting
check box. In the Tool step down field, enter the depth of the step down you want the
tool go to.

The result of this action is the same as with a center cutting tool except for the
following differences:

• The tool descends from the Safety distance above the Upper level to the material
in a zigzag motion up to the Tool Step down.

• At this point the tool clears a straight linear path. Then it descends to the next
Tool Step down.

• This is repeated until the tool reaches the CAM-Part’s step down depth.

• When the tool reaches the step down depth, it machines all the material on that
step down depth.

• When the machining is completed at this depth, the tool goes up to the Clearance
level.

• At this stage, the tool repositions itself at the Safety distance above the previous
step down depth and repeats the Linear Z-Entry to the next working depth.

• This process repeats itself until the final depth has been machined.

Return to Clearance level between Z-steps

This option enables you to control the height where the horizontal Clearance level
rapid movement is performed.

504
 7. 3D Milling

When this check box is selected (default), SolidCAM performs horizontal rapid movements at the
Clearance level of the operation.
Clearance level

Safety
distance

When this check box is not selected, SolidCAM performs horizontal rapid movements at the Safety
distance from the last cut and checks for possible collisions. In areas where the rapid movements
at the Safety distance causes gouges, SolidCAM performs the horizontal rapid movements at the
Clearance level.

Drill points

SolidCAM enables you to perform the approach to

the material from the hole previously machined in
3D Drilling operation (see topic 7.3). The 3D Drilling
operation has to precede the 3D Milling operation in Drill point
SolidCAM Manager. SolidCAM enables you to choose
the geometry used for the 3D Drilling operation in
order to define the approach point.
Material to be
removed

Mode (Open Pocket machining)

SolidCAM locates open pocket areas and enables you to machine them with a specific strategy.
This strategy enables you to combine pocket and profile tool paths in order to provide the best
productivity in open pocket machining.

The Open Pocket machining option is available to use in 3D Milling

operation for Roughing and Constant Z Floor machining strategy (see
topic 7.1.13).

The Mode button displays the Open pocket mode dialog box.

505
There are two modes of open pocket machining:

• Pocket
Pockets
Closed areas at each step down are milled as
Pockets. SolidCAM analyzes the open areas to
be machined and decides whether the Pocket or
Profile mode is optimal to be used. When the
open areas are machined in a pocket manner, the
tool path is extended over the open edges.

• Profile
Profiles
Closed areas at each step down are milled as
Pockets.

Open areas at each step down are milled by several

equidistant Profiles from outside the model. The
tool moves in offsets parallel to the contour of
the section on the specified Z-levels. When this
option is chosen, you can define the Lead in
strategy (see topic 6.1.3) for the profiles.

The Profile mode is useful when you are milling a boss-type model (e.g. Core
of Mold).

Force open pockets as closed

This option enables you to process all open pockets as closed pockets. In this case, the
tool path is not extended over the pocket edges. In the areas where the pocket tool path
cannot be performed the machining is not performed.

Profile Lead in

In the Profile Lead in list, you can choose one of the following options:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent

For more information, see topic 6.1.3.

506
 7. 3D Milling

Approach open pocket from outside

This option enables the tool to approach from

outside of the material in the open pocket
areas, if possible. Such approach enables you to
decrease the tool load when plunging into the
material.

This option enables you to perform the

approach movement from the automatically
calculated point outside of the material. The tool
approaches to the necessary depth outside of
the material and then plunges into the material.

In closed areas, where outside approach is impossible, the tool plunges into
the material with a strategy defined in the Z-Entry field of the operation
dialog box.

Rest Material

With the 3D Roughing strategy, SolidCAM generates a number of sections parallel to the XY-plane
of the CAM-Part Coordinate System. These sections are generated with a Z-step defined either by
constant step down or by scallop. In each of these sections, the section profile geometry is used
to produce a pocket tool path. The Rest material feature enables SolidCAM to machine in each of
these sections only in areas the previous tool has not been able to machine.

When a large tool is used around the profile, it leaves material in corners that it cannot enter.
Rest Material areas
Working area

507
The Rest material option enables you to remove the material from this area without defining a new
geometry.

The Rest Material dialog box is displayed.

In this dialog box, you have to define the following parameters:

• Previous tool diameter – the diameter of the

rough end mill used in the previous operation.

• Previous wall offset – the wall offset of the

previous operation.

• Extension – the overlap distance that you would

like to start and end from the previous larger end
mill.

Extension Rest Material

Milling type

If you choose Separate areas, SolidCAM generates a profile or pocket tool path to
clean areas that the previous tool could not mill. The Around profile strategy generates
a closed profile to mill the rest material.

Separate areas: SolidCAM machines only the

areas not machined with the previous tool.

Around Profile: SolidCAM machines the whole

profile.

508
 7. 3D Milling

In 3D Milling and Pocket operations with the Separate areas machining strategy,
SolidCAM generates two types of tool paths, depending on the volume of the rest
material and on the previous and present tool diameters:

Pocket-style tool paths Profile-style tool paths

SolidCAM generates a pocket or a profile tool path in each area of the rest material.

Pocket-style tool path areas can be either open or closed depending on the approach
possibilities.
Closed pocket-style Open pocket-style
tool path area tool path area

Profile-style
tool path area

Open pocket-style tool path area

The approach to the open pockets can be performed from the machined space in
contrast to the closed pockets where the approach from the outside is unavailable.

509
 The Z-Entry strategy defined in the 3D Milling Operation dialog box provides you with
the approach functionality for the closed pocket areas.

The following Z-Entry options can be chosen:

• None
• Angle
• Helical Approach point

• Linear

SolidCAM automatically determines the

optimal point for the approach to the open
pocket areas.
Open pocket-style
tool path area
Lead in/out

The Lead in and Lead out options define the approach/retreat strategy for the Profile-
style tool path areas. The following strategies are available:
• None
• Normal
• Arc

For more information on these options, see topic 6.1.3.

Pocket/Profile

The check boxes selected in the Pocket and Profile sections determine which of these
tool paths are cut:

• Island – only tool paths that touch the pocket islands

are cut.

• Island + Wall – tool paths that touch both the pocket

wall and islands are cut.

• Wall – only tool paths that touch the wall are cut.

510
 7. 3D Milling

Compensation

When the Compensation dialog box is selected, tool radius compensation commands
are used (G41, G42 for Fanuc) in GCode output.

Open contour strategy

This option enables you to define the direction of the open contours machining.
• One way

The tool moves along an open contour at a specific

Z-level. At the end of the contour, the tool moves
with rapid feed (G0) to the Safety distance and
then starts machining the open contour at the
next Z-level. The tool will always use climb or
conventional milling.

• Zigzag

The tool finishes an open contour at the specific

Z-level and then moves directly to the next Z-level
and so on. It mills forward and backward without
leaving the material, thus constantly switching
between climb and conventional milling.

Complete Z-level

This option enables you to define the order of the machining Z-levels.

Consider the CAM-Part with two cavities that must be machined with 3D Milling: either with
roughing strategies or with the Constant Z finishing strategy.

511
When the Complete Z-Level check
box is not selected, the machining is 1 5
performed in the following order: the 2 6
7
first cavity area is finished by a number 3
4 8
of cuts (1-4), then the second cavity is
machined (cuts 5-8).

When the Complete Z-Level check box is

selected, the machining is performed in
the following order: SolidCAM removes 1 2
3 4
material at a specific Z-level in both of 5 6
the cavities and then moves to the next 7 8
Z-level.

Vertical wall with fillets

This option enables special handling of vertical walls with

fillets between them in a prismatic part.

SolidCAM generates a smoother and more exact tool path. As

a result, the calculation time for the operation is reduced and
the GCode is shorter and uses G2/G3 arc movements for the
fillets.

This option is suitable for prismatic parts that conform to the

following conditions:

• The walls are vertical (perpendicular to the machining plane);

• There are no holes in the vertical walls.

Fillet size for last cut

This option enables you to add a radius to a sharp corners of the tool path without changing the
geometry.

For more information on this subject, see topic 6.1.2.

512
 7. 3D Milling

7.1.4 Hatch roughing

The model is roughed in a linear pattern. Hatch

roughing creates a linear raster tool path up to the
model contour.

Click on the Data button. The Hatch Data dialog box

is displayed.

For more information on the Hatch parameters, see

topic 6.4.3.

7.1.5 Contour roughing

This strategy enables you to produce Constant Z

pockets on different Z-levels. Within the pockets,
the tool moves on offsets parallel to the contour of
the section of the model on each step down.

Click on the Data button. The Contour parameters

dialog box is displayed.

For more information on the Contour parameters,

see topic 6.4.3.

7.1.6 Plunging pattern

Plunging is a totally different concept of removing material from a given

pocket with a special tool. Instead of milling the material, the tool moves
up and down as in a drilling motion, travelling along the path type you
choose.

Click on the Data button. The Plunging

dialog box is displayed.

For more information on the Plunging

parameters, see topic 6.4.3.

513
7.1.7 Semi-Finish/Finish
Finish machining generates the tool path directly on the surfaces and solids of your 3D Model
geometry. No offset can be specified and the model is machined to its final topology and dimensions.
You can apply a number of different machining strategies to finish your models. Each one of the
strategies offers parameters to adjust the strategy to your needs.

Semi-finish machining prepares the model for finishing. After semi-

finishing the model, a uniform offset remains on the material. This offset
is removed in the last finishing cut. In contrast to rough operations, in
conventional semi-finishing operations higher feed rates and narrower
tolerances are applied.

The same machining strategies in Finish machining can be applied for

Semi-finishing. They only differ in one additional parameter, Surface
offset, that controls the X,Y and Z offset that remains on the original
surface. Otherwise, all strategies are defined and used in the same way
as in finishing.

In the Semi-Finish area, choose a strategy from the list.

Plunging

SolidCAM enables you to use the special plunging strategies for semi-
finishing.

1. Click on the Plunging button.

2. Set the plunging parameters in the Plunging

dialog box.

For more information on the Plunging parameters, see topic 6.4.3.

Offsets

Surface offset – a minimum offset of material in the

X-, Y- and Z-direction remains on the model contour.
The value defines the closest distance the tool can get
to the model.
In addition to the specified Surface offset, the roughed Surface offset
model shows stairs of rest material with a height equal
to the down step value. In order to obtain a uniform Model surface
offset on the model, a semi-finish operation should
be executed.

514
 7. 3D Milling

In 3D Milling of prismatic parts, you often need to use different offset values for vertical and
horizontal areas. With the Wall offset value, you can define the XY offset of any surface that is not
absolutely flat. To define the Z offset to the absolute horizontal (flat) surfaces, use the Floor offset
parameter.

Floor
Wall offset
offset

Use the Wall and Flat offsets available to set different offset values to the
floor and walls only in Constant Z machining.

If you use negative offsets, for example, for plunge EDM electrode milling,
the corner radius of the tool must be equal to or larger than the specified
offset value.

Data

This button enables you to customize parameters for a chosen strategy.

Z-Entry

This option enables you to control how the tool plunges into the material. Click on the Z-Entry
button to display the Z-Entry dialog box.

515
• None

When Z-Entry is set to None or the default

Angle value is 90 degrees, the tool plunges Z-Entry: None
into the material with a normal downward
movement at the specified Z-feed rate.
Tool path

• Angle along path

The tool plunges with a ramp movement. The

ramp starts from the given safety distance
down to the model contour on the current
Z-level. If, due to the model contour, the
ramp cannot be created in a straight line, the
approach movement follows the contour.

• Angle between paths

The tool plunges with a ramp movement.

The ramp movement for the first Z-level
starts from the given safety distance. The next
ramp movements are performed between the
Z-levels. If, due to the model contour, the
ramp cannot be created in a straight line, the
Z-Entry movement follows the contour.

This option is available only with

the Constant Z finish strategy.

• Arc
Z-Entry: Arc
The tool plunges with an arc movement (with
a specified radius) in the vertical plane.
Tool path

This option is not available with

the Constant Z Finish strategy.

516
 7. 3D Milling

Tool path arrangement

SolidCAM provides you with improved arrangement of the tool path generated by the projection
strategies (Linear, Circular pocket, etc.) to minimize the number of jumps between the tool path
segments.

Consider the tool path generated by the Linear strategy. SolidCAM generates the planar pattern and
projects it on the model.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

The resulting tool path is trimmed by the working area; as a result some of the tool path lines are
divided into a number of segments.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

At the next stage, SolidCAM connects the tool path lines into several continuous chains (in this
example – three chains), in such a way as to minimize the jumps between them.
1 3

517
The Stay on surface within gap of options enable you to control the tool path connection.

With the Along path parameter, you can define the connection method for the segments of the tool
path line.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

In the illustration above, several tool path lines (#2 – #6) are divided into two segments, i.e. they
have a gap.
Gap
When connecting the tool path, SolidCAM compares
the gap length with the Along path value. When the gap
length is greater than the Along path value, SolidCAM
connects the current segment with the closest
segment of the next tool path line. The resulting tool
path is performed in a number of continuous chains
connected by the necessary jumps. This method is
preferable for large gaps.

518
 7. 3D Milling

When the gap length is smaller than the Along path value, Gap
the segments of the tool path line are connected with the
cutting movements directly on the surface. The resulting
tool path is continuous and free of jumps. This method is
preferable for small gaps.

The Between paths value determines the way the tool

path lines and separate tool path chains are linked. When
the distance between tool path chains is smaller than the
specified value, the tool paths are connected with the
cutting movements directly on the surface.

Link movement

When the distance between tool path is greater than

the specified Between paths value, the tool paths are
connected with rapid movements via the Operation
Clearance level.

Link movement

When the distance between tool path lines is greater

than the Between paths value, the tool path lines are also
connected with rapid movements.

519
7.1.8 Semi-Finish/Finish strategies
SolidCAM 3D Finishing
strategies
Linear

Offset cutting

Spiral

Circular pocket

Constant Step over

Constant Z

Pencil Milling

7.1.9 Linear Finish strategy

In linear cutting, the lines of a linear pattern are generated on a

2D plane above the model. The linear pattern is then projected on
the 3D Model. During this projection, the Z-position of the tool is
calculated to avoid gouging of the material.

The Linear Finish dialog box displays the parameters of the Linear
finishing.

520
 7. 3D Milling

Direction type

These options control the direction of the tool on each line of the linear pattern that has been
projected on the model. Different materials and cutters require specific cutting conditions, e.g. some
tools give better surface finish when cutting only downward; in other applications you need to use
other settings to achieve optimum results.
• Zigzag

The tool finishes one line of the linear pattern and then directly moves to the next line,
and so on. It mills forward and backward without leaving the material, thus constantly
switching between climb and conventional milling.

Connection radius: you can connect lines of the linear tool path with a radius. If the
Radius value is 0, SolidCAM connects the linear tool path with straight lines.

Connection with radius Connection without radius

• One way

The tool finishes one line of the

linear pattern. At the end of the
line, the tool rapidly moves (G0)
to the safety distance and then
to the start of the next cut line.
The tool always uses climb or
conventional milling.

521
 • One way - Upward

The tool always cuts from the lowest

point of the tool path line to the
highest point. From the highest point
of the cut, the tool moves rapidly to
the start point of the next cut.

• One way - Downward

The tool always cuts from the highest

point of the tool path line to the
lowest point. From the lowest point
of the cut, the tool moves rapidly to
the start point of the next cut.

Define direction angle by

• Value

Enter the angle value that defines the orientation of the tool path. The value of 0
generates the tool path lines in the direction of the positive X-axis.

• Line

The Define button is available and you can define a line that determines the orientation
of the tool path. The direction vector is defined by picking two points that define the
start point and the end point of the direction line. The angle of the selected line is the
output to the angle field.

Technology

• Step over

In linear finishing, SolidCAM generates a line pattern on a 2D plane above the model
and then projects it on the 3D model. The Step over value determines the constant
distance between all lines of the linear pattern created on the 2D plane before it is
projected.

522
 7. 3D Milling

• Scallop

This option enables you to control the distance between the tool path lines by the
cusp height you want to achieve on the finished model. SolidCAM adjusts the distance
between the single lines of the 2D pattern (before projection on the model) to the
topology of the model to match the specified scallop height.

Maximum step over

On flat areas, bull nose tool can achieve a small scallop with a rather large step over.
You can use this value if you want to limit the chip load on the tool or the cutting
forces that a large step over could cause.

• Arc approximation

You can create G2/G3 GCode output from Linear finish operations. SolidCAM checks
whether successive points of the calculated tool path can be connected using an arc or
circle. If an arc or circle connection within the specified arc approximation tolerance
can be made, you will receive arc and G2 and G3 circle interpolation commands in the
generated GCode. This feature can drastically reduce the number of lines in GCode
files. Most CNC-controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than
on single tool path points or splines. Arc approximation will increase actual feed rates
on older CNC-machines and the machine will work smoother.

The Tolerance value defines the tolerance SolidCAM uses to position tool path points
on arcs or circles

Cross finish

• None

Linear machining is performed only in the direction you have specified and no cross
finish is executed.
Linear finish tool path
• Normal

After finishing the model in the first

specified direction, another linear
finish is performed at an angle of
90° to the first cutting direction.
The complete area that has been
machined in the first cut linear Normal cross finish
operation is machined again. tool path

523
 • Smart
Linear finish
The areas that have not been finished within tool path
the given scallop during the first linear finish
operation at an angle of 90° to the first cut
are machined again. The values of Maximum
step over and Minimum step over affect the
calculation. If the scallop can be achieved
using step over larger than the minimum step
over, no cross finish is necessary – some other
constellation could result in all the working
area to be re-machined. Smart cross-finish tool path

Minimum step over

This value can be used to avoid tool paths that are too narrow. You can, for example, enter a scallop
of 0.02. For some areas SolidCAM would calculate a distance between two lines with 0.01 or less
(at very steep walls). To reduce machining time and to avoid long GCode files, you can limit the
minimum step over of the tool to 0.05.

7.1.10 Offset Cutting Finish strategy

Offset cutting is a form of 3D profile milling that can be used Offset Geometry
to mill specific areas of the model. This strategy offers two
Tool path
possible alternatives of profile selection:

If you select one Profile, you must specify the clear offset
distance. On the right side of the profile, relative to the chain
direction, the machining will be performed until the specified
clear offset distance has been reached. In this example,
the Offset Profile has been machined normal to the profile
geometry.
Offset Geometry
When you define two Offset profiles, both profile geometries
are connected and the tool path is projected on the 3D Model.
Tool path
When you click on the Data button, the Offset Finish dialog
box is displayed.

524
 7. 3D Milling

Offset geometry

In this section, specify which profile geometry you want

to use for the offset finish.

Cutting area

• Clear offset

This value determines the offset distance

from the profile that will be machined in
the right direction of the geometry. This
field is active if you use an offset geometry
that consists of only one profile. In case the
geometry has two profiles, this field will be
inactive, as the profiles will be automatically
connected.

• Step over

In offset finish, SolidCAM generates the offset pattern on a 2D plane above the model
and then projects it on the 3D Model. The step over value determines the constant
distance between all lines of the offset pattern created on the 2D plane before it will
be projected.

• Tool side

This option enables you to define the working side of the

geometry.

Geometry orientation

Left side machining Right side machining

525
Cutting direction

• Cross Finish

Select this check box if you want to

perform a Cross finish on the offset
area. After finishing the model in the
first specified direction, i.e. parallel
or normal to the profile geometry,
the other possible option will also be
applied.

• First cutting direction

If you have selected the Cross finish check box, both cutting directions will be applied
to the offset area. Select the direction you want to use first. When no cross finish is
used, only the selected option will be performed.

Parallel to geometry

SolidCAM will generate a pattern with offset lines parallel to the offset
profile geometry. This pattern will then be projected on the model.

Normal to geometry

SolidCAM will generate a pattern with offset lines normal (90 degrees) to
the offset profile geometry. This pattern will then be projected on the model.

Tool path connections

• Direction type: Zigzag

The tool finishes one line of the offset pattern and then moves directly to the next line
and so on. It mills forward and backward without leaving the material – thus constantly
switching between climb and conventional milling.

• Direction type: One way

The tool finishes one line of the linear pattern. At the end of the line, the tool rapidly
moves (G0) to the safety distance and then to the start of the next cut line. The tool
will always use climb or conventional milling.

526
 7. 3D Milling

• Connection type

This option enables you to control the way the tool moves between two adjacent tool
passes.
Stairs

When this option is chosen, the tool moves in two

steps between two adjacent tool passes. If the next
pass is lower than the present pass, the tool first moves
away from the surface in the XY-direction and then
downwards in Z. In case the next pass is higher than the
present pass, the tool first moves upwards in Z and then
approaches the surface in the XY-direction.
Smooth

Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves on

the surface of the model. The line connecting the two
adjacent tool passes is projected on the model. When
you use this option, the tool does not leave material
when moving to the start point of the next pass.

7.1.11 Spiral finish strategy

Five different types of spiral tool path movements

can be selected for this finishing strategy. The spiral
tool path pattern is first generated in 2D and then is
projected on the 3D Model. During this projection,
the Z-position of the tool is calculated so as to prevent
gouging of the model.

When you click on the Data button, the Spiral Finish

dialog box is displayed.

Path type

By combining the options in the Path type and Profile

type fields, you can generate five different types of
tool path spirals. For each of the combinations you
can set additional parameters in the Angle and Radius
sections that affect the spiral.

527
Path type: Linear

Additional parameters:

• Start Angle
• End Angle
• Delta Angle

Path type: Spiral

• Profile type: Arcs

Additional parameters:
• Start Angle
• End Angle
• Start Radius
• End Radius
• Delta Radius

• Profile type: Lines

Additional parameters:
• Start Radius
• End Radius
• Delta Radius

528
 7. 3D Milling

Path type: Square

• Profile type: Arcs

Additional parameters:
• Start Angle
• End Angle
• Start Radius
• End Radius
• Delta Radius

• Profile type: Lines

Additional parameters:
• Start Radius
• End Radius
• Delta Radius

529
Cutting direction

The spiral is machined in the clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW) direction. The direction
also affects the machined angle area. Machining always starts at the angle given in Start angle up to
the End angle in the cutting direction.

Angle

You can limit the angle area that will be machined by setting values for the Start and End angle. The
direction of the positive X-axis is entered with a value of 0 degrees. Machining will always start
from the given start angle and will move in the cutting direction towards the end angle.

The Delta angle is used to specify the angle steps of the tool path spiral in the Path type: Linear
option.

Radius

You can set values for the Start and End radius of the tool path spiral.

The Delta radius specifies the offset distance to the next circle or spiral circumference of the tool
path spiral.

Pick center of tool path spiral

This button enables you to define the center of the tool path spiral that will be projected on the
model. If you do not choose any center, the system uses the current Coordinate system origin as
the center of the spiral.

Enter the X,Y,Z coordinates of the center

point into the Pick center point of tool path
spiral dialog box or define a point by picking
and confirm by clicking on the button.

Tool path connections

• Direction type: Zigzag

The tool finishes one line of the spiral pattern and

then moves directly to the next tool path line and so
on. It mills forward and backward without leaving
the material, thus constantly switching between climb
milling and conventional milling.

530
 7. 3D Milling

• Direction type: One way

The tool moves finishes one line of the linear pattern. At

the end of the line, the tool rapidly moves (G0) to the safety
distance and then to the start of the next cut line. The tool will
always use climb or conventional milling.
• Connection type

This option enables you to control the way the tool moves between two adjacent tool
passes.

Stairs

The tool moves in two steps between two adjacent

tool passes. If the next pass is lower than the present
pass, the tool first moves away from the surface in
the XY-direction and then downwards in Z. In case
the next pass is higher than the present pass, the tool
first moves upwards in Z and then approaches the
surface in the XY-direction.

Smooth

Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves on

the surface of the model. The line connecting the
two adjacent tool passes is projected on the model.
When you use the Smooth option, the tool does not
leave material when moving to the start point of the
next pass.

7.1.12 Circular Pocket finish strategy

This strategy uses the selected Working area to create a

2D pocket line pattern on a plane above the model. The
line pattern is then projected on the 3D Model. During
this projection, the Z-position of the tool is calculated to
avoid gouging of the material.

The shape of the Working area and the values for the Tool
position in the Working area dialog box of this operation
directly affect the tool path.

531
The Circular Pocket Finish dialog box displays the
parameters of the Circular Pocket Finish strategy.

Cutting direction

The pocket can be machined in Conventional or Climb

direction.

Start from

The machining can be started from Outside or Inside the pocket.

The combination of both fields, Cutting direction and Start from,

will result in climb or conventional milling. Select CCW/Outside or
CW/Inside to perform climb milling; any other combination will result in
conventional milling of the model.

Connection type

This option enables you to control the way the tool moves between two adjacent tool passes.
• Stairs

The tool moves in two steps between two adjacent tool passes.
If the next pass is lower than the present pass, the tool first
moves away from the surface in the XY-direction and then
downwards in Z. In case the next pass is higher than the present
pass, the tool first moves upwards in Z and then approaches the
surface in the XY-direction.
• Smooth

Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves on the surface
of the model. The line connecting the two adjacent tool passes
is projected on the model. When you use the Smooth option,
the tool does not leave material when moving to the start point
of the next pass.

532
 7. 3D Milling

Step over

In pocket finishing, SolidCAM generates the pocket line pattern on a 2D plane above the model and
then projects it on the 3D Model. The step over value determines the constant distance between the
lines of the pocket created on the 2D plane before it will be projected on the model.

7.1.13 Constant Z Finish Strategy

This strategy produces very high quality finish especially

on steep surfaces and minimizes full 3-axis movements
that slow down older machines and controllers. The
Scallop option adjusts the necessary Z-down steps to
the surface flow and results in shorter machining times.

The Constant Z Finish dialog box displays the parameters

of this strategy.

533
Constant Z wall machining

Select the check box to machine all areas of the model

that are not parallel to the XY-plane, i.e. are not planar.

The step down can be controlled by two options:

Constant step down

Starting from the Upper level, SolidCAM

will use the specified step down to
calculate each successive Z-level. A value
of 20 for the Upper level and a constant
step down of 1.5 will produce a tool path
on the model contour at Z20, Z18.5, Z17,
Z15.5, etc. until the Lower level is reached.

Variable step down

SolidCAM will automatically calculate the necessary steps down to produce the
specified scallop (cusp height) on the model surface. On steep areas, the step down will
naturally be larger than on more level areas.
• Scallop

The Scallop value determines

the cusp height of the resulting
surface finish. The smaller the
value, the smoother the surface Scallop
finish will be.

• Maximum step down

On vertical walls of the model, SolidCAM could apply large steps down as
this would theoretically result in the scallop value of 0. To avoid large cutting
depth and tool load, you can limit the maximum step between two successive
Z-levels.

• Minimum step down

On nearly level areas, the necessary down step to achieve the specified scallop
could be very small. You can set a minimum down step value that will override
the smaller down step generated by the scallop calculation.

534
 7. 3D Milling

Start machining (Define start by angle)

• Value

Enter the angle that defines the start position of the tool path. The value of 0 will
generate the tool path start point on the intersection of the contour and the positive
X-axis.
• Line

When you choose this option, the Define button is activated and you can define a line
that determines the orientation of the tool path. The direction vector is defined by
picking two points that define the start point and end point of the direction line. The
angle of the selected line will be output to the angle field.

Arc approximation

This command enables you to create G2/G3 GCode output from Constant Z
operations. SolidCAM checks whether successive points of the calculated tool path can
be connected using an arc or circle. If an arc or circle connection within the specified
arc approximation tolerance can be made, you will receive arc and G2 and G3 circle
interpolation commands in the generated GCode.

This feature can drastically reduce the number of lines in GCode files. Most
CNC-controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than on single
tool path points or splines. Arc approximation will increase actual feed rates on older
CNC-machines and the machine will work smoother.

The Tolerance value defines the tolerance SolidCAM uses to position tool path points
on arcs or circles.

The arc approximation value should be smaller than the specified value
for the surface offset. A warning message will be displayed if a larger
value could cause gouging of the model.

Lead in/Lead out

You can control the way the tool leads in and leads out from the profile. Select an
option from the list and enter the distance value for this option.

535
 The following Lead in/Lead out strategies are available:
• None
• Normal
• Arc
• Tangent
• Point

For more information on the Lead in/Lead out options, see topic 6.1.3.

Compensation

This option enables SolidCAM to use the tool radius compensation options G4x of the
CNC-controller in the GCode output.

Clean contours of flat areas

In prismatic solid parts, if there is a ledge at a depth that falls between down steps
or a wall at the edge of a flat bottom of Constant Z machining, SolidCAM can still
recognize this ledge or wall and machine it as if in a Profile operation (between the
machining of the previous and next Z-steps).

Connection type

This option enables you to control the way the tool moves between two adjacent tool
passes.
• Stairs

The tool moves in two steps between two

adjacent tool passes. If the next pass is lower
than the present pass, the tool first moves away
from the surface in the XY-direction and then
downwards in Z. In case the next pass is higher
than the present pass, the tool first moves
upwards in Z and then approaches the surface
in the XY-direction.
• Tangential

Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves

away from the contour in a tangent movement.
It continues in a 3D arc/spiral movement to the
next Z-level and then approaches the contour
in another tangent movement.

536
 7. 3D Milling

The Tangential tool path connection smooths lead in/out moves and is
especially useful for High Speed Machining. You can avoid “witness marks”
on the model that can be caused from a Z approach movement on the
model surface.

The Approach radius parameter defines the radius of the 3D arc that is used to create
the tangential move between two successive Z-levels. The value is the maximum radius
used as SolidCAM will automatically reduce the radius if the model topology will not
leave enough space to approach with the specified radius. This could happen in narrow
cavities of the model when a large tool is being used.

Cutting direction (Cut from)

• Top to bottom

The machining starts on the Upper level and continue downward in the -Z direction
until the Lower level is reached. The tool finishes one line of the linear pattern, moves
directly to the next line and so on. It mills forward and backward without leaving the
material, thus constantly changing between climb milling and conventional milling.
• Bottom to top

The machining starts from the Lower level and continue towards the Upper level.

Milling type
• Climb

The tool cuts on the left side of the model contour. Unless the selected Open contour
strategy is set to Zigzag, contours are always machined in the climb milling direction.
• Conventional

The tool will cut on the right side of the model contour. On outside contours, this will
generate a tool path in clockwise direction.

Open contour strategy

This field controls the milling direction on contours that cannot be closed because the
model or a specified working area does not enable SolidCAM to continue the tool path
in a closed loop.

537
 • One way

The tool will retreat to the Clearance level and move to the start point of the next tool
path, always keeping the cutting direction specified in the Milling type.
• Zigzag

This option enables the tool to change the cutting direction when it encounters open
contours on the model. The milling direction on open contours will change between
climb and conventional milling until the open contour has been finished. With the
Zigzag option, rapid moves from Z-level to Z-level will be greatly reduced.

Constant Z flat floor machining

Select the check box to activate this option.

SolidCAM recognizes planar areas on 3D Models.
For flat planar areas of the model, working areas
will be automatically created that can be machined
using a hatch or contour style pocket.

Flat floor machining greatly reduces programming

time of 3D models with 2.5D features like pockets
and profiles on different Z-levels.

Scallop

Enter the scallop (cusp height) of the

finished surface you want to achieve.
SolidCAM will automatically calculate
the side step of the tool.

Maximum step over

If you use a flat tool or a bull nose cutter, the step over will be as large as the flat area of
the tool, e.g. for a tool diameter 6 with a corner radius of 1, the step over on flat areas
would be 4. To limit the cutting width of the tool, enter the maximum step over value.

538
 7. 3D Milling

Minimum cut area

This parameter defines the size of the minimum area that will be machined.

Machining style

SolidCAM enables you to choose two styles of the floor machining during
Constant Z finishing:
• Contour style

Select this option if you want to machine the flat floor areas on your model
as a contour style pocket. The pocket tool path will travel at parallel offsets
to the outside contour of the flat area.

1. Choose the Contour strategy.

2. Click on the Data button to define the Contour parameters.

For more information on the Contour machining, see topic 6.4.3.

• Hatch style

The tool mills the flat area in a linear pattern.

1. Choose the Hatch strategy.

2. Click on the Data button to define the Hatch parameters.

For more information on the Hatch machining, see topic 6.4.3.

With the Mode button, SolidCAM locates open pocket areas and enables you to
machine them with a specific strategy. This strategy enables you to combine pocket and
profile tool paths in order to provide the best productivity in open pocket machining.

For more information on the Open Pocket machining, see topic 6.4.3.

Arc approximation

This command enables you to create G2/G3 GCode output from Constant Z
operations. SolidCAM checks whether successive points of the calculated tool path can
be connected using an arc or circle. If an arc or circle connection within the specified
arc approximation tolerance can be made, you will receive arc and G2 and G3 circle
interpolation commands in the generated GCode.

539
 This feature can drastically reduce the number of lines in GCode files. Most CNC-
controllers and machines work much faster on arcs and circles than on single tool path
points or splines. Arc approximation will increase actual feed rates on older CNC-
machines and the machine will work smoother.

Complete Z-Level

This option enables you to define the order of the machining Z-levels.

For more information on this subject, see topic 7.1.3.

Vertical wall with fillets

This option enables special handling of vertical walls with fillets between them in a prismatic part.

For more information on this subject, see topic 7.1.3.

7.1.14 Constant Step over strategy

The 3D Projection Machining strategies generate a 2D tool path mesh, with a constant Step over
in the plane parallel to the XY-plane of the current Coordinate System. This 2D tool path mesh
is then projected on the 3D Model to get the 3D tool path. This method provides good results
for prismatic parts machining but has a significant disadvantage for machining of curved surfaces
because it does not take into account the surface curvature.

Tool path with the constant Tool path with the constant
Step over in the XY-plane Step over along the surface
generated by the Constant
Step over strategy

540
 7. 3D Milling

Constant Step over gives an excellent surface finish

because the step over is constant along all surfaces
irrespective of whether they are steep walls or
shallow areas.

SolidCAM provides four types of the Constant

Step over strategy:

• Profile with offset

• Pocket
• Profile with limit
• Ruled surface
• Pocket-auto boundaries

The appropriate geometry has to be defined for all

of these options.

Profile with offset

The tool mills from the geometry you have chosen to the
Clear offset distance. Specify the Step over distance.

Note that both Step over and

are measured along the
Clear offset
surface.

The Tool side option defines the position of Step over

the tool relative to the geometry or, in other Geometry
words, the side of the geometry where the tool
Clear offset
path will be applied.

Tool path

541
Pocket

The tool mills within the geometry until it has

machined the entire pocket. The geometry used
with this option must consist of several closed
chains, similar to the geometry for a regular Pocket
operation.

SolidCAM defines a number of offsets to the

geometry with the specified Step over (measured
along the surface). If there is an island, the tool will
mill evenly from the outside chain toward the island
and from the island toward the outside chain. The
two paths will join in the middle between the two
chains. The shape of the tool path is determined
by both the outside geometry and the island
geometry.
Pocket geometry

Tool path

SolidCAM enables you to define the cutting direction:

• The Start from option enables you to start machining either from Outside or Inside the
pocket.

• The Direction option enables you to choose Conventional or Climb milling.

542
 7. 3D Milling

Profile with limit

This option enables you to create the tool path

between two chains that can be open. The tool
mills from the first chain toward the second chain
copying the shape of the first chain along the
surface being machined with specified Step over.

Note that Step over is

measured along the surface.
Chain #1

Step over

Tool path

Chain #2

Ruled surface

This option enables you to create the tool path

between two chains that can be open. The tool
mills from the first geometry towards the second
geometry while morphing from the shape of the
first geometry to the shape of the second geometry,
with specified Step over.
Tool path Second chain

First chain

543
Pocket-auto boundaries

When this option is chosen, SolidCAM

automatically determines the pockets within the
limits of the defined working area.

Tool path connections

• Direction type: Zigzag

The tool mills one line of the offset

pattern and then moves directly
to the next line and so on. It mills
forward and backward without
leaving the material, thus constantly
switching between climb and
conventional milling.

• Direction type: One way

The tool mills one line of the linear pattern. At the end of the line, the tool rapidly
moves (G0) to the safety distance and then to the start of the next cut line. The tool
will always use climb or conventional milling.

• Connection type

This option enables you to control the way the tool moves between two adjacent tool
passes.

Stairs

The tool moves in two steps between two adjacent tool passes. If the next pass
is lower than the present pass, the tool first moves away from the surface in the
XY-direction and then downwards in Z. In case the next pass is higher than the
present pass, the tool first moves upwards in Z and then approaches the surface
in the XY-direction.

Smooth

Between two adjacent tool passes, the tool moves on the surface of the model.
The line connecting the two adjacent tool passes is projected on the model.
When you use the Smooth option, the tool does not leave material when moving
to the start point of the next pass.

544
 7. 3D Milling

Extend to edge

When this check box is not selected, the tool path is generated
from the position where the tool center is aligned with the end
point of the face; this could leave an unmachined area. When
this check box is selected, the tool path is extended till the tool
is tangent to the face, at the start point of the face.

The Extend to Edge option

is turned off
Unmachined
area

The Extend to Edge option

is turned on

7.1.15 Pencil milling

To clean out corners for semi-finishing operations, the

typical method in the past was to pick two surfaces that
form a corner and drive a tool along their intersection.
This method worked well enough for small or simple
parts or for complicated parts if there was plenty
of time for programming. But because of the time
required to manually pick and cut all of the corners
for different sized tools, this step has been foregone
in many cases, creating a dangerous condition for high
speed machining.

Pencil milling uses an algorithm that finds all of the

corners of a part and automatically drives a tool along
those corners.

545
This kind of functionality is particularly important for high speed
machining because of the desire to maintain a relatively constant
chip removal rate. Without Pencil milling, when finishing these parts
with walls and floors, the tool would be removing a considerably
larger volume of material when it reaches the corners. With Pencil
milling, the corners are already relieved, causing less tool deflection
and noise when cutting the corner. This is true whether machining
in a downhill or uphill fashion.

Since Pencil milling can clean out stock in corners, where the stock
will typically be the heaviest, Pencil milling is often performed
before various 3D finishing methods are run. The machine operator
or NC programmer will typically reduce the feed rate of a pencil
cut operation due to the increased material removal rate. It is
recommended to use Pencil milling as a strategy for semi-finish.

The Pencil milling dialog box enables you to define the parameters of the Pencil milling strategy.

Bitangential angle

The Bitangential angle is the complement to 180° of the corner angle. SolidCAM will machine all
corners that have a Corner angle smaller than 180° – Bitangential angle.

Corner angle Bitangential angle

Direction mode
• Standard

The tool mills the center line of

Pencil milling from its start to its
end in one movement.

546
 7. 3D Milling

• Upward

The tool will always mill from the lowest point of the center line of Pencil milling to
the highest point. As the result the center line of pencil milling is divided into several
segments with the tool moving rapidly from the end of one segment to the start of the
next segment.

Segment #1 Segment #2

• Downward

The tool will always mill from the highest point of the center line of Pencil milling
to the lowest point. As a result the center line of pencil milling is divided into several
segments with the tool moving rapidly from the end of one segment to the start of the
next segment.

Segment #1 Segment #2

547
Offset

SolidCAM machines at an offset from the center

line of Pencil milling. The following data has to be
defined: Tool path

• Step over defines the step over to the Center line

both sides from the center line of Pencil
milling.

• Number of passes defines the number of

offset passes.

Start from
• Inside

SolidCAM machines the center line of Pencil milling and then the offset passes at each
side.

Center line 3
2
1
4
5

• Outside

SolidCAM machines the offset passes from each side at the center line and then the
center line of Pencil milling.

Center line 1
2
5
4
3

548
 7. 3D Milling

7.1.16 Tolerance page

The precision tolerances defined on this page will directly affect the surface quality of your model.
3D Milling Tolerance

Facet tolerance Tool path tolerance

Tool curvature

Surface curvature

Side step

Facet tolerance

This tolerance controls the maximum deviation of the

mathematical representation from the original solids
and surfaces of your model.
The 3D Model geometry is triangulated and the
resulting facets are saved in the <model_name>.fct file
in the CAM-Part folder. The triangulation is performed
on the 3D Model geometry when you use it for the
first time in a 3D Milling operation. If you use a 3D
geometry in another operation, SolidCAM checks the
tolerance of the existing *.fct file of this geometry. It
does not perform another triangulation as long as the
*.fct file is created with the same surface tolerance.

549
Tool path tolerance

SolidCAM generates the tool path in two steps:

1. SolidCAM generates a mathematical representation of the surfaces and solids of the

3D Model geometry within the given surface tolerance. The information about this
triangulation process is stored in an internal *.fct file that is similar to an *.stl file.
2. SolidCAM calculates the tool path using the parameters specified for the
tool and the milling strategy to calculate the single steps of the tool on the
mathematical model created in the first step. The result of this calculation, the *.pj
PCode file, later serves as input to the generation of the actual GCode file. During this
calculation, SolidCAM uses the Tool path tolerance that affects the number of single
steps in the tool path (accuracy of the tool path).

The tool path tolerance can be defined by the following criteria:

Tool curvature

The accuracy of the tool path depends on the Tool diameter and the specified tolerance
value.

Surface curvature

The accuracy of the tool path depends on the surface curvature and the specified
tolerance value.

Side step

This tolerance enables you to control the size of a single step that will be constant
during the whole tool path.

Small tolerance values result in more GCode steps in the GCode file, but
the resulting surface is closer to the mathematical model.

550
 7. 3D Milling

7.2 3D Engraving Operation

You can mill text or any other profile on a 3D geometry. The

profile will be projected on the surface, engraving the contour at
a specified depth.

When you click Add Operation, 3D Engraving, the 3D Engraving

dialog box is displayed.
Operation

7.2.1 Technology page

Engraving geometry name

In this section, you have to specify the contour, i.e. profile geometry that you want to engrave on
the 3D model surface.

For more information on Profile geometry, see topic 4.4.1.

551
Fill area

The area within the closed engraving geometry can be machined

using the following strategies:
Hatch
angle
Hatch

SolidCAM fills the engraving geometry with a linear

raster tool path, according to the specified Step over Step over
and Hatch angle.
Engraving
geometry
Contour
Step over
The tool moves on offsets parallel to the pocket
contour with the specified Step over.

The contours are machined in the clockwise (CW) or

counterclockwise (CCW) direction.

The Wall offset parameter enables you to specify the offset from the
engraving geometry. SolidCAM generates the contour equidistant Engraving
to the engraving geometry at the specified offset. The engraving is geometry
performed inside this contour.

Engraving technology

Type

This option enables you to semi-finish and/or finish the engraved profile on the
translated surface.

• The Semi-finish option enables you to prepare the engraving profile to an offset
specified in the Offset field with cutting depths defined in the Step down section.
• The Finish option enables you to machine the engraving profile to its final
dimensions in one step down.
• The Both option is used to machine the limit first with a semi-finishing cut and
then with a finishing cut.

552
 7. 3D Milling

Side

The tool can cut to the left of the profile, to the right of the profile, or directly on the
engraving geometry.

• Right: the tool cuts to the right of the profile geometry up to a distance defined
with the Offset value.

• Left: the tool cuts to the left of the profile geometry up to a distance defined with
the Offset value.

• Center: the center of the tool moves directly on the profile geometry.

Offset

You can specify the offset from the engraving geometry for a Semi-finishing operation
to the left or to the right of the geometry. This offset will be removed with the finishing
cut, if you have defined one.

Step down

This value defines the successive Z-cutting depth during the Semi-finishing operation
of the engraving profile.
• From Upper level

Roughing passes are performed at each down step, from the Upper Level to the
virtual surface located at an offset from the actual surface. This offset is defined
with the Engraving depth value.
Upper level

Actual surface

Surface with offset defined

as Engraving depth

553
 • From surface

Roughing passes are performed at each down step, only from an actual surface to
a virtual surface defined with the Engraving depth value.
Geometry
Actual surface

Surface with offset

defined as
Engraving depth

7.2.2 Tolerance page

The tolerance settings affect the surface quality of the Engraving operation.

3D Milling Tolerance

For a detailed explanation of tolerance

settings, see topic 7.1.16.
Facet tolerance Tool path tolerance

Tool curvature

Surface curvature

Side step

554
 7. 3D Milling

7.3 3D Drilling Operation

This operation enables you to perform drills and other canned drill
cycles. In contrast to Drilling operation (see topic 6.6), 3D Drilling
operation enables you to take into account the solid model geometry.
SolidCAM enables you to use holes, machined by this operation, for
the Z-Entry during 3D Milling (Roughing) (for more information on
the Z-Entry strategies, see topic 7.1.3). Similar to Drilling operation,
3D Drilling operation supports the canned drill cycles provided by your
particular CNC-machine such as threading, peck, ream, boring etc.

When you click Add Operation, 3D Drilling, the 3D Drilling Operation

dialog box is displayed.

7.3.1 Geometry page

Geometry

In this section, specify the drill positions, i.e. the drilling geometry you want to use.

For more information on the drilling geometry definition, see topic 4.2.1.

3D Model Geometry name

SolidCAM enables you to define the 3D model geometry. The 3D model geometry is used for the
drilling depth definition.

For more information on the 3D model geometry definition, see topic 4.3.1.

555
7.3.2 Tool page

Center drill

In addition to the standard tool options

described on the Tool page, SolidCAM
enables you to label a tool as a center drill.
This option is used for automatic sorting. In
automatic sorting, tools that are labeled as
center drills can be automatically moved to
the top of the operation list.
When a Tap tool is chosen for the operation,
the Tapping Drill cycle type is automatically
chosen.

The Drill cycle type button is unavailable. You cannot change the cycle type until the Tap tool is
changed to a tool of a different type.

If the Tapping cycle is not supported by the current MAC file, the Tap tool cannot be chosen for
the operation. The following exclamation message is displayed when you click on the Select button
in the Part Tool Table dialog box.

When you change a MAC file for the CAM-Part which contains tapping operations for a MAC file
which does not support tapping, SolidCAM marks all the tapping operations with the asterisk sign
(the PCode is removed). When you try to calculate such operations, the following messages are
displayed.

556
 7. 3D Milling

7.3.3 Levels page

Offset from model

SolidCAM enables you to define the depth

of the 3D drilling by the Offset from model
value. This value can be either positive or
negative. With the negative value SolidCAM
enables the tool to go deeper into the solid
model.

Rest material

Offset from
model

Solid model

7.3.4 Technology page

Sequence of drill positions

This section enables you to define the sequence of the drill positions, manage its direction, etc.

For more information, see topic 6.6.3.

557
 Reverse drilling sequence

SolidCAM enables you to reverse the sequence of drilling positions in 3D Drilling

operations. This functionality enables you to optimize the rapid movements during the
machining and increase the machining speed.

The Reverse button reverses the sequence of 1 3 5

drilling positions as shown.
6

When the same sequence of drilling positions 4

2
is used by several drilling operations (e.g.
Original sequence
center drilling, drilling and threading) the
sequence reversing enables you to reduce rapid
movements between the operations. 6 4 2

1
5 3
The Reverse option is enabled only
when the drill_proc parameter Reversed sequence
is set to N in the MAC file.

Show sorted

This button displays the sorted sequence of drill positions on the solid model.

Drill cycle type

Click on the Drill cycle type button. The Drill canned cycles
supported by the post-processor of the current CNC-controller are
displayed. Click on one of the icons to select the canned cycle you
want to use in this operation.

For more information on Drill cycles, see topic 6.6.3.

558
Machining
Processes 8
A Machining Process is comprised of a series of operations that are
tied together through user-defined parameters. You can automate
repetitive tasks in CNC-Programming with the Machining Process
feature.
In subsequent identical or similar situations, Machining Processes can
be used directly or adapted to a new situation by giving values to their
parameters.

 Machining Processes Table

 Defining a new Machining Process
 Operation Templates
 Default Sets
 Parameters & Expressions
 Using Machining Processes
8.1 Introduction & Basic concepts

SolidCAM enables you to automate repetitive tasks in CNC-Programming using the Machining
Process feature. Machining Process (MP) is the structure of fully parameterized Operation
Templates. In subsequent identical or similar situations, machining process templates can be either
used directly or adapted to a new situation by giving values to their parameters.
Machining
Process

Operation Templates Parameters

8.1.1 Operation templates

An Operation template is a parametric template of a single operation that is used within the
Machining Process. There can be one or several operation templates in a Machining Process.
For example, to create a threaded countersink hole, we need three operations using the common
geometry:

• Centering

At this stage, preliminary

centering is made for the
hole and the chamfer.

• Drilling

At this stage, the hole is

drilled.

560
 8. Machining Processes

• Threading

At this stage, the threading

is performed.

8.1.2 Parameters & Expressions

Parameters can be given a constant value or an D_chamfer

expression. D_thread

In the above example, the following parameters are

required:
H_thread
• The tap size (D_thread); H_drill

• The tap depth (H_thread);

• The drill depth (H_drill);

• The chamfer diameter (D_chamfer).

D_chamfer H_center

α D_chamfer/2
H_center =
tan(α/2)

In the above example, you can define the following expression for centering depth:

With a group of such operation templates, parameters and expressions, you can define the universal
Machining Process.

561
8.1.3 Default sets

A Default set is a combination of parameters and expressions used for operation template
customization. You can define a number of the default sets by attaching different specific values or
expressions to parameters. You can use default sets to adapt machining processes to specific tasks.

In the above example, you can create default sets for each tap size (e.g. M6, M8, etc.).

Default Set Parameters

Operation Templates

Machining
Process

8.1.4 Machining Process Table

SolidCAM enables you to include your Machining Machining

Processes into the Machining Process Table. Process
1

Machining
Process
2 Machining
Processes
Machining Table
Process
3

Machining
Process
N

562
 8. Machining Processes

8.2 Creating Machining Processes

Three basic stages are required to create a Machining Process.

Creating Machining Creating Machining Defining Machining

Process Table Process Process components

New Machining Machining Machining

Process Table Process Table Process Define
Manager Manager

SolidCAM enables you to use three major interface tools for these tasks:

• New Machining Process Table – in this dialog box, you can define a new MP Table.
SolidCAM also enables you to manage existing MP Tables.

For more information on this subject, see topic 8.3.

• Machining Process Table Manager enables you to create and manage a single Machining
Process in the Table.

For more information on this subject, see topic 8.4.

• Machining Process Define Manager enables you to define components of a single

Machining Process: Operation Templates, Default sets, Parameters and Expressions.

For more information on this subject, see topic 8.6.

563
8.3 Defining Machining Process Table

The first stage of the Machining Process creation is the definition of the Machining Process Table.

1. In SolidCAM Manager, right-click on the

Machining Process header and choose
the Milling type of the MP table from
the New submenu.

The New Machining Process Table

dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter a name for the Machining Process Table in the Table name field.

3. Click on the Add MAC file button to define the MAC file for your Machining
Process Table. Since not all machines support all of the options in SolidCAM,
you must also give the MAC file that you will be using. This will assure that
only the options that are supported by your machine will be used.

4. Confirm the Machining Process Table creation with the OK button.

8.3.1 Adding MAC file(s)

The Add MAC file(s) dialog box enables you to choose a MAC file or
a set of similar MAC files for your Machining Process. The MAC file
contains options oriented to the specific CNC-machine. This file enables
you to adapt your Machining Processes for your CNC-machines.
• Adding MAC file

1. Click on the Add button to choose the suitable

MAC file from the list.

564
 8. Machining Processes

2. In the dialog box displayed, pick the MAC file

you wish to work with and click OK.

The Add MAC file(s) dialog box is displayed

again with the chosen MAC file.

• Adding similar MAC files

This option adds to the list any MAC file similar to the
one you have originally picked. The criterion of the
similarity is the coincidence of the MAC file options
required for Machining Processes.

Please contact SolidCAM customer support for further details.

565
8.4 Machining Process Table Manager

With the Machining Process Table Manager,

SolidCAM enables you to control single Machining
Processes in the Machining Process Table.
The Machining Process Table Manager dialog box
contains the following fields:
• Machining Process list

This field contains the list of all

Machining Processes from the current
table.
Double-click on the Machining
Process name in the list to edit the
MP in the Machining Process Define
Manager (see topic 8.6).

Right-click on the Machining Process name in the list to open the menu of Managing
Machining Processes (see topic 8.5).

During the Machining Process definition SolidCAM enables you to divide the
Machining Processes in the MP Table into groups. Each group name has to be started
with the “==” symbols. All the Machining Processes following the group name (till the
next group name) are included into the group.

In the Add Machining Processes menu (see topic 8.8), each such group is displayed as
a separate submenu.
• MP Picture

This option enables you to attach a picture to your MP.

Click on the Browse MP Pictures button and choose

a bitmap file (*.bmp) in the browser window.

• Type

For easier identification and classification of Machining Processes, you can define and
use your own MP types.
• Description

In this field, you can enter a text describing the Machining Processes.

566
 8. Machining Processes

8.4.1 Managing Machining Process Tables

The Machining Process Tables menu contains the following options:

• Current

This option enables you to load the current MP Table

in the Machining Process Table Manager (see topic 8.4).
• New

With this option, you can create a new MP Table.

SolidCAM enables you to create four types of MP Tables:
Milling, Turning, Turn-Mill, and Wire Cut.

• Open

This option enables you to load an MP Table via the

standard Windows browser.

1. Right-click on the Machining Process

header and choose Open from the submenu
to load the Machining Process Table. The
browser window is displayed.

2. Choose a Machining Process Table file (*.mpt).

567
 The Machining Process Table is loaded and the Machining Process Table
Manager is displayed.

• Copy

This option enables you to copy the

MP Table.
The Copy Machining Process Table
dialog box is displayed.

1. In the left field of the

dialog box, choose an
MP Table.

2. Click on the button

to move the MP Table in
the copy-container field.
You can use the button to remove MP Tables.
3. Choose the copy location in the right field.
4. Click on the Copy button to confirm the operation.
5. Click on the Exit button to close the dialog box.
• Delete

Choose this option to delete the MP Table via the standard Windows browser.

• Recent MP Tables

This option displays a list of the last MP Tables you loaded in SolidCAM. You can open
the file by clicking on the file you want to open.

568
 8. Machining Processes

• Group Types

This option enables you to create your own MP Group Type.

• Expressions

This option enables you to create and manage your own list of expressions that will be
available in each MP you design.

8.4.2 Machining Process Group Types

For easier identification and classification of Machining Processes, you can define and use your own
Machining Process Group Types.

Defining Group Types

1. Right-click on the Machining Process header

in the SolidCAM Manager and choose Group
Types from the menu.

The MP Group Types Manager is loaded.

• To add a new Group Type, click on the Add button and type the name.

• To remove an existing Group Type from the list, select the item and click on the Delete
button.

569
 • To edit the Group Type name, click on the icon in the name field and choose
Edit - View.

The Edit dialog box is displayed. Change the MP Group Type name and confirm it with
the OK button.

• You can use the F2 hotkey to open the Edit dialog box.

• By double-clicking on the Group Type name in the list, you can edit the
name in the list directly without opening the Edit dialog box.

Using Group Types

The Machining Process Table Manager enables you to assign the Group Type to the Machining
Process by choosing it from the list.

570
 8. Machining Processes

8.5 Managing Machining Processes

Right-click on the Machining Process name in the list to

open the menu of Machining Process managing options.
• Add
This option enables you to add a new
Machining Process to Machining Process
Table.

• Edit
This option enables you to edit the
components of the Machining Process in
the Machining Process Define Manager (see
topic 8.6).
• Copy
This option creates a copy of the current Machining Process.
• Rename
This option enables you to rename the current Machining Process.
• Delete
This option enables you to remove the current Machining Process from the Machining
Process Table.

• Import
This option enables you to insert Machining Processes from another MP Table into
the current MP Table.

You can insert Machining Processes from MP Tables defined with

similar MAC files.

1. Right-click on the Machining Process

name and choose Import from the menu.
2. Choose the MP Table you want from the
Browser. The MP Export Table Manager
is displayed.
3. Choose the Machining Process from the
Manager and confirm with the Export
button.

571
8.6 Machining Process Define Manager

8.6.1 Operation Templates page

On this page, you can work with the set of Operation Templates in the same way
as you work with conventional SolidCAM operations via SolidCAM Manager.

8.6.2 Define Operation Template

The Operation template dialog box contains the same fields you can find in the SolidCAM Operation
dialog box.
You can now fill the fields of the Operation template in the same way as if you define a conventional
operation. Note that some fields in the Operation templates are marked with the button. These
fields are parametric. In these fields, you can enter the following data:
• Variable

• Expression

• Value

If a variable you entered does not

exist, SolidCAM adds it to the
Used Parameters Table (see topic
8.6.6).

To edit this parametric field, you can use

the parametric field menu by clicking on
the button.

572
 8. Machining Processes

If you entered incorrect data in the parametric field (unacceptable type of variable, error in
expression, etc.), SolidCAM marks this parametric field with the button.

In the Operation template, the definition of the Geometry and the Tool is
mandatory.

8.6.3 Managing Operation Templates

An Operation Template is a parametrically defined single SolidCAM Operation. In addition to

numerical values for the definition of technological parameters, you can use variables and expressions
in the Operation Templates.

The following options enable you to manage your Operation templates:

• Add

The process of the Operation Template creation is the same as creating operations via
SolidCAM Manager.

1. Right-click on the Operations field situated in the Operation Templates

tab.

2. Choose an Operation Template type from the menu.

The corresponding Operation Template dialog box is displayed.

573
• Edit

This option enables you to edit the Operation Template.

The corresponding Operation Template dialog box is

displayed.
• Delete

• Change Tool

This option enables you to change the tool used in the

specific Operation Template. The Part Tool Table dialog box
(see topic 3.6) is displayed.

• Suppress/Unsuppress

SolidCAM enables you to suppress and unsuppress operation

templates in the Machining Process.

The rules for suppressing and unsuppressing of the

operation templates are the same as for operations. The
suppressed/unsuppressed status of an operation template
is the property of the operation template per default set,
i.e. the same operation template can have a different status
in different default sets. SolidCAM inserts suppressed
operation templates from the Machining Process into the
CAM-Part as suppressed operations.

574
 8. Machining Processes

8.6.4 Parametric field menu

The parametric field menu enables you to choose parameters and

expressions easily and effectively.

When you click on the button, the menu is displayed.

• User-defined parameters

This option displays a list of existing user-defined

parameters.

Choose the variable name from the list.

You can open this list with the F5 hotkey

when you are in the parametric field.

• Part parameters

This option displays a list of existing part parameters.

Choose the variable name from this list.

You can open this list with the F6 hotkey

when you are in the parametric field.

• Expressions

This option displays the list of defined expressions.

You can open this list with the F7 hotkey

when you are in the parametric field.

575
 • Functions

This option displays the list of standard SolidCAM functions (for

more information on this subject, see topic 8.6.8).

You can open this list with the F8 hotkey when you are
in the parametric field.

• Edit-View

This option displays the Edit dialog box.

In this dialog box, you can see and edit the full parameter name or expression string.

1. You can open this list with the F2 hotkey when you are in the parametric
field.
2. In this dialog box, you can also use the operational menu by clicking on
the button.

8.6.5 Default Sets page

On this page you can work with the set of Default Sets created in the actual Machining Process.

There are four options to manage Default Sets:

• Set as Current

This command enables you to activate the selected Default Set.

• Rename

This command enables you to rename the selected Default Set.

• Copy

This command enables you to copy the selected Default Set.

• Delete

This command enables you to remove the selected Default Set.

576
 8. Machining Processes

You can create a number of Default Sets and assign the

Parameters
specific combination of values and expressions to the
parameters in each of them. The Default Sets enable you
to adapt the Machining Process to specific tasks.

1. Create a new Default Set with the Copy Default Set

option. Default Set
2. Activate the created Default Set with the Default Set
Current option.

3. Change parameters definition via Parameter Tables.

8.6.6 Parameters & Expressions Tables

There are two areas in the Machining Process Define Manager that enable you to manage your
parameters and expressions:

Used Parameters Table

This area shows the table of parameters that were used in the Operation Templates with the actual
Default Set.

577
This table contains the following columns:
• Parameter - this column shows the parameter name. You can change the name of the
parameter. In this case the name will be updated in all Operation Templates that use this
parameter.

• Expression - this column shows the parameter definition as an expression or a value. To

edit this parametric field, use the parametric field menu available by clicking on the
button.

• Result value - this column shows the result value returned by the parameter.

• G - this column shows the status of the parameter. If the status

is Global - the G letter is shown. In this case the expression of
this value will be the same in all Default Sets.
By right-clicking on this field, you can change the status of the
parameter.

• R/O - this column shows the access status of the parameter. If

the status is Read-only, the R/O letters are shown. In this case
the parameter definition cannot be changed during Machining
process insertion.
By right-clicking on this field, you can change the read-only status of the parameter.

• Description - this column shows your own text description of the parameter. To edit the
field, use the context menu available by clicking on the button.

Unused Parameters Table

This area shows the table of parameters that were not used in the Operation Templates with the
actual Default Set.
This table contains the following columns:
• Parameter - this column shows the parameter name. In this field you can change the
name of the parameter. In this case the name will be updated in all Operation Templates
that use this parameter.
• Expression - this column shows the parameter definition as either expressions or values.
To edit this parametric field, you can use the operational menu available by clicking on
the button.

• Result value - this column shows the result value returned by the parameter.

578
 8. Machining Processes

8.6.7 Add new parameter

This field enables you to add a new parameter.

1. Choose the new parameter type from the list.

2. Type the parameter name.

3. Click the Add button to enter the parameter to the table.

The Delete button enables you to delete the selected parameter item
from the Unused Parameters table.

8.6.8 Variables and expressions

SolidCAM enables you to use variables and expressions in your Operation templates.

Part Parameters

SolidCAM enables you to use a set of the standard built-in variables. All these variables get their
values from the SolidCAM CAM-Part when you insert the Machining Process.
• clearance_plane – the Z-value of the Clearance Level.

• safety – the Z-value of the Safety Distance.

• tool_start_plane – the Z-value of the Tool Start Level.

• work_upper_plane – the Z-value of the CAM-Part Upper Level.

• work_lower_plane – the Z-value of the CAM-Part Lower Level.

• zero_plane – the Z-value of the Zero Level.

User-defined parameters

You can define your own variables and use it in Operation Templates definition.
SolidCAM supports the following types of variables:

Profile Geometry variables are available for Profile Operation Templates.

Slot Geometry variables are available for Slot Operation Templates.

579
 Limit Geometry variables are available for the Working Area definition in 3D Milling
Operation Templates.

3D Model Geometry variables are available for 3D Milling Operation Templates.

Section Geometry variables are available for Section geometry in Slot Operation
Templates.

Drill Geometry variables are available for Drilling Operation Templates.

Pocket Geometry variables are available for Pocket Operation Templates.

Z
Z-Value variables enable you to store the Z-coordinates. The value of a variable of this
type can be defined by picking on the solid model; the Z-coordinate of the picked
position is used as the variable value.

variables enable you to store the distance. The distance can be defined
Distance Value
by picking two positions on the solid model.

String variables are used to store strings of symbols.

Float variables are used to store positive and negative floating point numbers.

Integer variables are used to store positive and negative whole numbers.

variables are used to store the positive whole numbers used for the tool
Tool Number
number definition.

Diameter variables enable you to store the diameters. The diameter value can be defined
by picking a circular edge on the model.

Enter the names for variables according to the following rules:

• Use a letter as the first character;

• Only capital and lowercase English letters, numbers and the underscore
symbol (_) are acceptable;

• Names cannot exceed 255 characters in length.

580
 8. Machining Processes

Expressions

SolidCAM enables you to use expressions for parameters definition.

You can use the following symbols in expressions:

• Addition (+)

• Subtraction (-)

• Multiplication (*)

• Division (/)

Parentheses are acceptable.

When multiplication and division occur together in an expression, each operation is evaluated as
it occurs from left to right. When addition and subtraction occur together in an expression, each
operation is evaluated in the order of appearance from left to right. Parentheses can be used to
override the order of precedence and force some parts of an expression to be evaluated before
others. Operations within parentheses are always performed before those outside. Within the
parentheses, however, operator precedence is maintained.
SolidCAM enables you to use the set of the standard mathematical functions such as sine, cosine,
etc. in your formulas.

Example:

For the H_center variable in the following formula

D_chamfer/2
H_center =
tan(α/2)

you can write the following expression:

H_center=(D_chamfer/2)/(tan(Alpha/2))

581
SolidCAM standard functions
sqrt()

Returns a value specifying the square root of a number.

sin()

Returns a value specifying the sine of an angle.

cos()

Returns a value specifying the cosine of an angle.

tan()

Returns a value specifying the tangent of an angle.

abs()

Returns a value of the same type that is passed to it specifying the absolute value of a
number.

The absolute value of a number is its unsigned magnitude. For example,

and abs(1) both return 1.
abs(-1)

acos()

Returns a value specifying the arccosine of a number.

asin()

Returns a value specifying the arcsine of a number.

atan()

Returns a value specifying the arctangent of a number.

atan2(,)
dist(X,Y)
Returns a value specifying the arctangent of quotient first and
second arguments. (X,Y)

dist(,) and ang(,)

ang(X,Y)
Returns polar coordinates: distance and angle (in radians) of
the point defined in Cartesian coordinates.
0

582
 8. Machining Processes

pow(,)

Returns a value of the first argument raised to the power of the second argument.
For example: pow(2,3) returns 8.
log10()

Returns a value specifying the base-10 logarithms of a number.

ln()

Returns a value specifying the natural logarithm of a number.

sum3( , , )

Returns the sum value of three arguments.

int()

Returns the integer portion of a number.

rad()

Converts degrees to radians.

deg()

Converts radians to degrees.

583
8.6.9 Parametric tool definition

SolidCAM enables you to define the tool number as a variable, similar to the other tool data that can
be defined parametrically in the Operation templates. The expression for the tool number variable
can vary in the different Default sets. The tool number variable is assigned its value during the
insertion of a MP into the CAM-Part.

By default, this option is disabled when you define the tool for an operation template in a MP. To
enable it and define the tool number parametrically, right-click on the tool name in the Tool list area
of the Part Tool table and choose Used in Current or Part Table.

The Tool number field becomes available for parametric definition. All other tool parameters are
disabled.

584
 8. Machining Processes

You can switch back to the method where the Tool number is assigned automatically by right-
clicking on the tool name in the list and choosing Used in MP.

When you insert the MP into the CAM-Part, you have to assign values for the tool parameters that
were defined as variables in the MP. If the tool was defined with the Used in Current or Part Table
option, SolidCAM automatically checks the existence of the tool with the specified number in the
Part Tool table and Current Tool table; if a tool with this number is not found, the number is not
acceptable.
The parametric menu available for the tool number
variables contains three options:
• Choose tool from current table

This option displays the Current Tool

Library from which you can choose a
tool for the MP insertion. When you
have selected a tool, its tool number from
the Current Tool table appears in the
Expression field of the relevant variable.
This option is available only when the
Current Tool Library is defined.
• Tool select from part

This option displays the Part Tool table from which you can choose a tool for the MP
insertion. When you have selected a tool, its number from the Part Tool table appears
in the Expression field of the relevant variable.
• Edit – View

This option displays the Edit dialog box in which you can enter the expression manually.

585
8.7 Using the Machining Processes

You can use the defined Machining Process by inserting it into a CAM-Part. During the insertion,
SolidCAM transforms each operation template into a single operation.

The main interface tool that enables you to insert a Machining Process into a CAM-Part is the
Machining Process Insert Manager.

Machining
Process Insert
Manager

Insertion

Machining CAM-Part
Process

Operation
Operations
Templates

586
 8. Machining Processes

8.8 Inserting the Machining Process

Before inserting the Machining Process into your CAM-Part, do the following:

1. Load the CAM-Part in which you want to use the technology defined in the
Machining Process.

2. Load the Machining Process Table.

All Machining Processes from the current Machining

Process Table can be inserted into the CAM-Part
directly using the Add Machining Process menu.

The Machining Processes in the menu

are classified according to pre-defined
groups (see topic 8.4).
If the MP contains Operation
Templates with operation options
incompatible with the operation
options of the current MAC file,
the operation is marked with the
exclamation mark. Such MP can be
inserted into the current CAM-Part,
but operation options will not be
inserted.

When the MP contains a Drilling

Operation Template with drill options
incompatible with the drill options of
current MAC file, this MP is marked
with the ! icon.
The Add Machining Process command
is not available in the following cases:

• When there is no current Machining Process Table;

• When the current Machining Process Table is incompatible with the MAC
file used in the current CAM-Part.

587
When the Machining process is chosen, the Machining
is displayed.
Process Insert Manager

The From MP Table command enables you to choose

the Machining Process to insert from the Machining
Process Table Manager dialog box.

The Machining Process Table Manager is displayed.

Choose a Machining Process from the list. Click on the
Pick button. The Machining Process Insert Manager is
displayed.
While the Insert Manager is loading, SolidCAM receives
necessary information from the CAM-Part. Then
SolidCAM receives expressions for other parameters
from the current Default Set and calculates them.
To prepare the Machining Process for insertion, do the
following:

1. On the Default Sets page, choose the required Default Set.

2. With the Parameters Table, fill all the blank expression fields. You can also
change all expressions that do not have Read-Only status.
3. When the Machining Process is defined, click on the Insert button to insert
the Machining Process into the current CAM-Part.
4. SolidCAM chooses tools for the Machining Process.

588
 8. Machining Processes

5. The operations are inserted into the CAM-Part.

• To undo the last insertion, use the Undo button.

• The Simulate button enables you to simulate operations of the

current CAM-Part.

8.8.1 Choosing the tool

SolidCAM automatically performs the tool search during the machining process insertion. The tool
search is performed according to the Used in Current or Part Table/Used in MP property of the tool
used in the Operation template.

When the Used in Current or Part Table option is used for the tool definition, the tool search is
performed according to the tool number only. The tool search is first performed in the Part Tool
Table. If the tool is found, it is used. If the tool with the defined number is not found in the Part
Tool Table, SolidCAM performs an additional search in the Current Tool Table. If the tool with the
defined tool number is found in the Current Tool Table, it is copied into the Part Tool Table (with the
same number) and used.

When the Used in MP option is used for the tool definition, the tool search is performed according
to the tool parameters. The tool parameters used for the tool search are defined in the SolidCAM
Settings dialog box (see topic 12.22). The tool search is first performed in the Part Tool Table. If
the tool is found, it is used. If the tool is not found in the Part Tool Table, SolidCAM performs an
additional search in the Current Tool Table. If the tool is found in the Current Tool Table, it is copied
into the Part Tool Table and used. If the tool is not found in the Current Tool Table, a new tool with
the defined parameters is created in the Part Tool Table. SolidCAM automatically chooses the first
available tool number for the newly created tool.

589
8.9 Machining Process Insert Manager

8.9.1 Operation Templates Page

This page displays the list of Operation Templates that were inserted
into the CAM-Part.

• By clicking on the (+) sign near each Operation Template, you can see the list of
parameters used in the selected Operation template.

590
 8. Machining Processes

• To see the Operation Template parameters and settings, right-click on the Operation
Template name in the list and choose the Show command from the list. The Operation
Template dialog box will be displayed.

In this dialog box you cannot edit the Operation Template definition. To
edit the Operation Template, go to the Machining Process Define Manager
(see topic 8.6).

In the Operation Template screen, all parametric fields are marked with
the button. Click on this button to see the parametric field menu. The
Edit-View option is available in this menu. This option opens the parameter
edit dialog box.

This dialog box enables you to see and edit the full parameter name or
expression string.

8.9.2 Default Sets Page

Double-click on the Default Set name to make it current. The Parameters

and values from the selected Default set will be shown in the Parameters
Table.

591
8.9.3 Parameters Table
There are three columns in this table:

• Parameter – shows the parameter

name.
• Expression – shows the parameter
definition. In this field you have
to define missed expressions for
parameters. You can also edit all
expressions that do not have the Read-
Only status.

• Result value – shows the result value

returned by the parameter.

With the Show read only check box, you can allow or forbid showing
parameters marked Read-Only.
The Show descriptions check box enables you to show the parameter
description instead of the parameter name in the Parameter column.

8.9.4 Operation Points

This field contains buttons to define specific points of the operation.

8.9.5 Parameters definition

Click on the button to display menus for each parametric field.

Parametric field menu for Geometries

• Geom Select

This option displays a list of geometries of a suitable type that is

defined in the CAM-Part.

Choose the variable name from the list.

You can also open this list with the F5 hotkey

when you are in the parametric field.

592
 8. Machining Processes

• Geom Define

This option enables you to define a geometry from the current model.

You can also open this list with the F6 hotkey when you are in the parametric
field.

• Geom Show

The current 3D model, drill or chain geometry will be

displayed in the SolidWorks window.

To exit from this mode, use the button in the Show

Geometry dialog box.

You can also open this list with the F7 hotkey when you are in the parametric
field.

• Edit-View

This option displays the parameter edit dialog box.

This dialog box enables you to see and edit the full parameter name or expression
string.

1. You can also open this list with the F2 hotkey when you are in the
parametric field.

2. In this dialog box, you can also use the operational menu by clicking on
the button.

Parameters of Z-value and Distance types

For parameters of these types, SolidCAM enables you to define values by picking them from the
active CAD model.

593
 • To define the Z-value, choose the Pick Z-value (F5) item from the parametric menu.

The Pick Z-Value dialog box will be displayed. Pick the point on
the model and click on the OK button to confirm the selection.

• To define the Distance, choose the Pick Distance (F5) item from the Parametric menu.

1. In the SolidWorks window, pick the first point.

2. Confirm the selection with the OK button in the

Distance: Pick first point dialog box.

3. Pick the second point and confirm it in the same

way.

The Distance value will be calculated.

Other Parameters

For parameters of other types, the parametric field menu contains only one item: Edit-View (F2).

Choose it to edit the parameter definition in the Edit window.

594
Automatic Feature Recognition
and Machining (AFRM) 9
The SolidCAM Automatic Holes Feature Recognition and Machining
(AFRM) module enables you to automatically recognize holes in the
Solid model and generate the tool path for machining.

 Hole Feature recognition

 Preparing to machining
 Feature Sets definition
 Technology
 Technology Database
9.1 Introduction and Basic Concepts

The SolidCAM Automatic Holes Feature Recognition and Machining (AFRM) module enables you to
automatically recognize holes in the Solid model and generate the tool path for machining.
At the first stage of the AFRM process, Solid model
SolidCAM recognizes all Hole Features (see
topic 9.5) from the solid model and classifies
them. SolidCAM analyzes the manufacturability
of the recognized features and converts the
Hole Features into Machinable Hole Features
SolidCAM Automatic
(see topic 9.6.4) by making the necessary Feature Recognition
changes of the Hole Feature components. and Machining
SolidCAM distributes Machinable Hole
Features to Feature Sets (see topic 9.7) related Tool path
to the previously defined Coordinate Systems
(see topic 9.7.3). For each Feature Set,
SolidCAM searches for a suitable technology
in the Technology Database (TDB) (see topic
9.10) and for tools in the Part Tool Table (see
topic 3.6). The appropriate technology will be
converted to SolidCAM Operations.

Solid model

Holes Recognition

Hole Features

Conversion to
Machinable Features

Machinable Hole
Features
Coordinate Systems Distribution to
Feature Sets

Technology
Database Feature Sets

Feature-based
machining

Part Tool
Table

Operations
CAM-Part

596
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

All the holes recognized by SolidCAM can be classified as Simple Hole Features or Compound Hole
Features.

A Simple Hole Feature is a cut in the solid body generated by the figure of revolution. The diameter
of a Simple Hole can be constant or changing. A Simple Hole can be Blind or Through.

Blind Simple Hole Feature Through Simple Hole Feature

A Compound Hole Feature is also generated by the cut of the figure of

revolution. The diameter of the Compound Hole Feature is constant
or decreasing at the start of the hole and increasing at the end of the
hole. The Compound Hole Feature can be only through.

SolidCAM recognizes Disconnected Hole Features containing

a number of ”broken” holes consisting of coaxial and coradial
segments divided by the model elements.

SolidCAM recognizes the holes with the undercuts.

Blind Hole Feature with undercut

Compound Hole Feature with undercut Through Hole Feature with undercut

597
9.2 Preparation to Holes Recognition

You have to prepare the CAM-Part before you start the Holes recognition. The preparation includes
the definition of Coordinate Systems and Target model.

9.2.1 Definition of Coordinate Systems

You have to define a number of Coordinate Systems (see topic 2.2) corresponding to the setup
positions of the part on the CNC-machine. The number of Coordinate Systems has to be enough
to machine the part from all directions that you need.

9.2.2 Target model

The Target model (see topic 2.4.2) has to be defined. SolidCAM uses the Target model for the
AFRM.

When the CAM-Part is defined and prepared, you can start the Holes recognition process.

598
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.3 Start Holes Recognition

To start the holes recognition process, right-click on the Operations header in SolidCAM Manager
and choose Holes Recognition + Technology from the menu.

The Holes Recognition is started. SolidCAM parses the solid model in order to gather the
information about all holes. When the recognition process is finished, SolidCAM displays the Holes
Recognition Manager.

599
9.4 Holes Recognition User Interface

9.4.1 Holes Recognition Manager

When the AFRM module is activated, the Holes Recognition Manager is displayed. The SolidCAM
Holes Recognition Manager is shown in the SolidWorks FeatureManager area.

The SolidCAM HR Manager consists of the following pages that can be controlled with the
HR Manager Toolbar.

Hole Features page

Machinable Features page Operations page

Feature Sets page Technology page

This toolbar enables you to switch between the pages of the HR Manager.

600
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

• Hole Features page (see topic 9.5.11) displays all the

Hole Features page Hole Features recognized in the solid model.

• Machinable Hole Features page (see topic 9.6.6)

Machinable Hole
displays all Machinable Hole Features converted from
Features page
the Hole Features.

• Feature Sets page (see topic 9.7.4) displays all the

Feature Sets page Feature Sets.

• Technology page (see topic 9.8.3) displays all the

Technology page Technological solutions offered by SolidCAM for the
machining of the current Feature Set.

Operations page • Operations page (see topic 9.9) displays operations

generated by SolidCAM.

9.4.2 Holes Recognition Toolbar

When the AFRM is started, the Holes Recognition toolbar is displayed.

Technology Database Show Tool Table

Settings Show Errors
Show Picture Show Data

• Technology Database

This button enables you to display the Technology Database Manager (see topic 9.10).

• Settings

This button enables you to display the Holes Recognition Settings dialog box (see
topic 9.11).

601
• Show Picture

This button enables you to display the schematic picture of the selected item.

• Show Data

This button enables you to display the Parameters dialog box that displays the
parameters of the selected item.

• Show Errors

This button enables you to display the Errors dialog box that shows the errors that
occurred during the AFRM process.

• Show Tool Table

This button enables you to display the Part Tool Table.

602
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.5 Hole Feature Model

SolidCAM analyzes the Solid model in order to recognize all the Hole features. A Hole Feature
recognized by SolidCAM consists of a number of Hole Feature segments. Each Hole Feature
Segment is composed of one or more faces. The Type of Hole Segment depends on the Face
Surface Type.

Hole Feature segment composed from several Hole Feature segment composed from one
faces face

Types of Hole Segments:

• Cylindrical

• Cone

• Chamfer

• Planar

• Torus

• Sphere

SolidCAM recognizes holes with thread created by SolidWorks Hole Wizard. The thread is an
optional property of the Cylindrical Hole Feature segment.

SolidCAM determines the total Depth, Hole Z Direction

Upper Plane and Direction of each Hole Hole Upper Plane
Feature.
Solid Model
Origin
SolidCAM determines the geometry
parameters of each Hole Feature segment.

The Upper plane of the Hole Feature is the

Depth
upper Z-level of the hole determined in
compliance with the SolidWorks Part origin.

603
9.5.1 Cylindrical Hole Feature segment

This segment is formed by a cylindrical face.

• Diameter (D1)
Height (H1)
• Height (H1)

SolidCAM recognizes holes with thread created by

Diameter (D1)
SolidWorks Hole Wizard.

The thread is an optional property of the Cylindrical Hole Feature segment. The Cylindrical segment
that has a thread is marked with a specific Thread flag.

SolidCAM determines a number of parameters of the thread hole:

• Segment diameter Hole Feature Upper level

• Segment height Thread Upper Level

=
• Thread diameter Thread Segment Upper Level
Thread Diameter
depth
• Thread depth

• Thread pitch Thread

Height Segment
• Thread Upper level Height

• Thread depth

Segment Diameter

9.5.2 Cone Hole Feature segment

This segment is formed by a cone face. Angle (A1)

Diameter (D1)
• Diameter (D1),

• Height (H1),

• Angle (A1)
Height (H1)

604
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.5.3 Chamfer Hole Feature segment

This segment is formed by a truncated conical face. Angle (A1)

• Upper diameter (D1), Upper

Diameter (D1)
Height
• Lower diameter (D2),
(H1)

• Height (H1),

• Angle (A1)

Lower
Diameter (D2)
9.5.4 Planar Hole Feature segment

This segment is formed by a planar face. A segment of this type has no parameters.

9.5.5 Torus Hole Feature segment

Upper
• Upper Diameter (D1) Diameter (D1)
Height
(H1)
• Lower Diameter (D2)

• Height (H1) Radius

(R1)
• Radius (R1)

Lower
There are two parameters describing the location of Diameter (D2)
the center of the generatrix circle:

Radius (R1)
Height of the center (HC)

Diameter of the center (DC)

• HC - Height of the center relative to the

bottom of the torus.
Torus
• DC - Diameter of the center. segments

605
9.5.6 Sphere Hole Feature segment

This segment is formed by a spherical face. The Upper Diameter (D1) Height
center of the sphere is situated on the hole axis. (H1)

• Upper Diameter (D1)

Radius
• Lower Diameter (D2) (R1)

• Height (H1)

• Radius (R1) Lower

Diameter (D2)
The Sphere segment can be either Open or
Closed. A Closed Sphere segment has zero
Lower Diameter (D2).
Open Sphere
When the Lower Diameter (D2) is greater than zero – (D2>0)
the Sphere will be Open.

Closed Sphere
(D2<0)

9.5.7 Compound Holes processing

SolidCAM splits the Compound Hole into two Simple Hole Features: one above the splitter line and
one below the splitter line. This enables you to machine the Compound Hole Feature from both
sides using two Coordinate Systems.

Splitter Splitter

606
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.5.8 Disconnected Holes processing

Sometimes solid models contain a number

of ”broken” holes consisting of coaxial and
coradial segments divided by the model elements.
Previously these segments were recognized and
machined as separate Hole Features. The AFRM
module enables you to automatically connect these
segments into one single Connected Hole Feature
(see topic 9.11.1).

9.5.9 Reaming recognition

The AFRM module enables you to automatically recognize Planar segment Upper Cylinder
holes in solid models and perform their precise machining by
reaming technology.
If during the Hole Feature recognition SolidCAM finds
a combination of Cylinder-Planar-Cylinder Hole Feature
segments, and the difference between the diameters of the
Upper Cylinder and Lower Cylinder is smaller than 0.2 mm, Lower Cylinder
SolidCAM recognizes Upper Cylinder and Planar segments as
precise hole suitable for applying the reaming technology.
The Reaming Diameter and Reaming Height parameters are determined as shown below.

Reaming Upper Level

Reaming Depth
Reaming diameter

Reaming Height

9.5.10 Hole Feature Shapes and Groups

The SolidCAM AFRM module classifies the Hole Features into Hole Feature Shapes and Hole
Feature Groups.

The Hole Features with the same type and sequence of segments will be included into one Hole
Feature Shape.

607
For each Hole Feature Shape, the Hole Features are grouped in Shape
Hole Feature Groups; each Group includes the Hole Features with
Group #1
the same values for the segment parameters.
Hole #1
Hole #2
9.5.11 Hole Features page ...
Hole #N
Group #2
Hole #1
Hole #2
...
Hole #N
...
Group #N

The Hole Features page displays the list of all Hole Features
recognized in the solid model. The Hole Features are classified into
Shapes and Groups. You can highlight the Hole Features, Groups
and Shapes in the graphic view by selecting the items in the list.

You can repeat the Holes recognition process with the Recognize
command.

SolidCAM enables you to display the Hole Picture dialog box with the
Show Picture button located on the Holes Recognition toolbar. This
dialog box shows the schematic picture of the selected Shape, Group
or Hole Feature.

SolidCAM enables you to display the Hole Feature Parameters dialog

box with the Show Data button located on the Holes Recognition
toolbar.

608
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

This dialog box contains a number of pages.

The Holes parameters page displays the global Hole
parameters:
• Depth
• Upper Plane
• Direction

Other pages display the geometry and color parameters of

each Hole Feature segment. When the specific segment
page is selected in the Hole Feature Parameters dialog
box, the corresponding segment is highlighted in the Hole
Picture.

The parameters values displayed

in the Hole Feature Parameters
dialog box cannot be changed. In
order to change them, you have to
edit the solid model and perform
the Holes Recognition again.

Managing Hole Features

SolidCAM enables you to manage the Hole Features, Shapes and Groups with the right-click menu.

Shape or Group menu

The right-click menu for Shape and Group includes

the following items:
• Split/Unsplit

This option enables you to split/unsplit all

Compound Holes in the selected Shape or Group.

This option is available only if the Shape

or Group contains only Compound Holes.
• Change direction to opposite

This option changes the direction of all Hole features in the specified Shape or
Group.

609
 • Connect

This option enables you to connect appropriate broken segments into one single
Connected Hole Feature (see topic 9.11.1).
• Disconnect

This option enables you to divide a Connected Hole Feature into separate segments
(see topic 9.11.1).
• Divide/Join hole segment

This option enables you to machine cylindrical through holes with depth significantly
greater than a normal cutting length of a tool. Such holes are divided into two
halves so that they can be approached by the tool from both sides and machined
with an overlap of 10% from the entire hole depth.

Overlap

Divided holes can be joined.

Hole Feature menu

The right-click menu for Hole Features includes the following items:
• Split/Unsplit

This option enables you to split/unsplit the

selected Compound Hole.

This option is available only for

Compound Holes.

610
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

• Change direction to opposite

This option changes the direction of the selected Hole Feature.

• Connect

This option enables you to connect appropriate “broken” segments into one single
Connected Hole Feature (see topic 9.11.1).
• Disconnect

This option enables you to disconnect a Connected Hole Feature into separate
segments (see topic 9.11.1).
• Divide/Join hole segment

This option enables you to machine cylindrical through holes with depth significantly
greater than a normal cutting length of a tool. Such holes are divided into two
halves so that they can be approached by the tool from both sides and machined
with an overlap of 10% from the entire hole depth.
Divided holes can be joined.
• Go to Opposite

This option enables you to jump in the list to the opposite part of the Split
Compound Hole.

This option is available only for Split Compound Holes.

Hole Features filter

The filter capabilities enable you to display in the list

only those Hole Features that correspond to a certain
criterion.
• Direction filter

This filter enables you to display Hole Features

with a specified direction only.

• Upper level filter

This filter enables you to display Hole Features with a specified Upper Level only.

The Upper Level filter is active only for the specified direction.

611
• Hole type filter

This filter enables you to display Hole Features of a specified type: either Blind or
Through.
• Compound hole only

This option enables you to display only the compound holes.

• Split hole only

This option enables you to display only the split holes.

• Hole with undercut only

This option enables you to display only the Hole Features with undercut.
• Connected holes only

This option enables you to show/hide the Connected Hole Features (see topic 9.11.1).
• Divided holes only

This option enables you to display only the divided holes.

612
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.6 Preparing Hole Features for machining

There are following stages of preparing Hole Features for machining:

• Undercut processing
• Segments Union
• Creating Machinable Hole Features

9.6.1 Undercut processing

SolidCAM recognizes undercuts in the Hole Feature model.

The SolidCAM AFRM Module analyzes Hole
Feature segments in order to find an undercut. An
Undercut Diameter (DU)
undercut is detected when the diameter increases
Undercut
during one topology segment. The Undercut Height (HU)
consists of a number of segments and finishes Undercut
when the current diameter is equal to the undercut
initial diameter.
SolidCAM determines the Undercut Height (HU) as the sum of the height of all topology segments
of the undercut.
SolidCAM classifies undercuts depending on the last Hole Feature segment included in undercut.
The classification is as follows:

• Undercut – None

In this case the finish diameter of the last segment of

the undercut is equal to the Undercut diameter.

• Undercut – Planar

In this case Undercut finishes with the Planar Hole

Feature segment (see topic 9.5.4).

• Undercut – Cone

In this case Undercut finishes with the Cone Hole

Feature segment (see topic 9.5.2).

613
 • Undercut – Chamfer

In this case Undercut finishes with the Chamfer Hole

Feature segment (see topic 9.5.3).

• Undercut – Torus

In this case Undercut finishes with the Torus Hole

Feature segment (seetopic 9.5.5).

• Undercut – Sphere

In this case Undercut finishes with the Sphere Hole

Feature segment (see topic 9.5.6).

9.6.2 Undercut substitution

SolidCAM handles undercuts by substituting the undercut with a cylindrical segment depending on
the undercut type. The cylinder diameter is equal to the Undercut diameter (DU). When a part of the
lower undercut segment is smaller than the Undercut diameter, SolidCAM substitutes this part with
a cone, chamfer, torus or sphere segment.

Undercut substitution schemes:

DU Diameter (D1)
• Undercut – None segment substitution

HU Height (H1)

D1=DU
H1=HU

DU Diameter (D1)
• Undercut – Planar segment substitution

HU Height (H1)

D1=DU
H1=HU

614
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

• Undercut – Cone segment substitution

DU Diameter (D1)

Height (H1)
HU

Height (H2)

Angle (A1) Angle (A1)

D1=DU
H1=HU-H2
H2=DU/(2*tg(A1/2))

• Undercut – Chamfer segment substitution

DU Diameter (D1)

HU Height (H1)

Height (H2)
Lower
Diameter (D2) Lower Diameter (D2)

Angle (A1) Angle (A1)

D1=DU
H1=HU-H2
H2=(DU-D2)/(2*tg(A1/2))

615
• Undercut – Torus segment substitution
DU Diameter (D1)

Height (H1)
HU
HT

Lower
Lower Diameter (D2) Diameter (D2) Height (H2)

R R

D1=DU
DT UPPER H1=HU-H2

DU H= R2-((DU-DCENTER)/2)2
DCENTER H2=HC-H
H
R

R
HC

H2
R
• Undercut – Sphere segment substitution.
DU Diameter (D1)

Height (H1)
HU
HS

Height (H2)

R D1=DU R
H1=HU-H2

H2= R- R2-D2/4

616
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.6.3 Segments Union

SolidCAM enables you to unite identical adjacent Hole Feature segments.

There are the following cases for union:

• Planar + Planar
Planar 1 United Planar

Planar 2

• Cylinder + Cylinder

The diameter of the resulting cylinder will be the same as the diameter of the original
cylinders. The Height will be the sum of the original cylinder heights.
Cylinder 1 United Cylinder

Cylinder 2
• Chamfer + Cone

The Diameter of the resulting cone will be the same as the Diameter of the original
upper chamfer. The Angle of the resulting segment is equal to the Angle of the original
cones. The Height will be the sum of the original cone heights.
Chamfer United Cone

Cone

617
• Chamfer + Chamfer
Chamfer 1 United Chamfer

Chamfer 2

The Upper Diameter of the resulting chamfer segment will be the same as the Upper
Diameter of the original upper chamfer. The Angle of the resulting segment is equal
to the Angle of the original chamfers. The Lower Diameter of the resulting chamfer
segment will be the same as the Lower Diameter of the original lower chamfer. The
Height will be the sum of the original chamfer heights.

• Torus + Torus

Torus 1 United Torus

Torus 2

The Upper Diameter of the resulting torus segment will be the same as the Upper
Diameter of the original upper torus. The Radius of the resulting segment is equal to
the Radius of the original torus. The Lower Diameter of the resulting torus segment
will be the same as the Lower Diameter of the original lower torus. The Height will be
the sum of the original torus heights.

• Sphere + Sphere
Sphere 1 United Sphere

Sphere 2

The Upper Diameter of the resulting sphere segment will be the same as the Upper
Diameter of the original upper sphere. The Radius of the resulting segment is equal
to the Radius of the original spheres. The Lower Diameter of the resulting sphere
segment will be the same as the Lower Diameter of the original lower sphere. The
Height will be the sum of the original sphere heights.

618
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.6.4 Machinable Hole Features

SolidCAM converts Hole Features into the Machinable Hole Features in order to prepare them
for machining. The Machinable Hole Feature consists of one or more Machinable Hole Feature
segments that can be machined in one operation with the same tool.

Types of Machinable Hole Feature segments

The following types of the Machinable Hole Feature segments exist:

• Drill

• Chamfer

• Flat Cylinder

• Flat Chamfer

• Thread

• Reaming

Parameters of Machinable Hole Feature segments

SolidCAM calculates the values of various parameters for the Machinable Hole Feature segments.
These parameters are called HR variables. They will be used later for the technology definition.

619
Each Machinable Hole Feature segment has the following geometric and visual parameters:

• hr_segm_upper_plane

This parameter is the distance from the Solid Model Origin to the upper level of the
Machinable Hole Feature segment (Segment Upper plane).

• hr_segm_depth

This parameter is the distance from the Hole Upper Plane to the lower point of the
Machinable Hole Feature segment.

• hr_segm_height

This parameter is the Height of the segment; the distance from the Segment Upper
plane to the lower point of the Machinable Hole Feature segment.

Origin
hr_segm_upper_plane
Hole Upper Plane

Segment Upper Plane

hr_segm_depth

hr_segm_height

• hr_segm_color

This parameter defines the variable that can participate in the conditions defined in the
Technology Database in order to choose the necessary technological solution. During
the conversion of Hole Feature segments into Machinable Hole Feature segments, the
RGB color of holes is converted into a number of the Float type and assigned to this
variable.

In addition to the general parameters, SolidCAM determines the following parameters for each type
of Machinable Hole Feature segment:

620
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Drill

hr_segm_diameter • hr_segm_diameter

• hr_segm_height

• hr_segm_angle

hr_segm_height

hr_segm_angle

Chamfer

hr_segm_angle • hr_segm_diameter

• hr_segm_angle
hr_segm_diameter
• hr_segm_lower_diameter

hr_segm_height

hr_segm_lower_diameter

621
Flat Cylinder

hr_segm_diameter • hr_segm_diameter

• hr_segm_blind

• hr_prev_segm_diameter

hr_segm_height

hr_segm_blind = true

hr_segm_diameter

hr_segm_height

hr_prev_segm_diameter

hr_segm_blind = false

622
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Flat Chamfer

hr_segm_angle • hr_segm_diameter

• hr_segm_angle
hr_segm_diameter
• hr_segm_height

• hr_segm_lower_diameter
hr_segm_height
• hr_segm_blind

• hr_prev_segm_diameter
hr_segm_lower_diameter
hr_segm_blind = true

hr_segm_diameter

hr_prev_segm_diameter

hr_segm_blind = false

Thread

• Thread Upper level

hr_segm_upper_plane (hr_segm_ upper_plane)

• Thread Diameter (hr_segm

hr_segm_diameter
diameter)

hr_segm_depth • Thread Height (hr_segm_

height)
hr_segm_height
• Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth)

• Pitch (hr_thread_pitch)

623
Reaming

hr_segm_upper_plane • Reaming Upper level

(hr_segm_ upper_plane)
hr_segm_diameter • Reaming Diameter
(hr_segm diameter)
hr_segm_depth
• Reaming Height
hr_segm_height (hr_segm_height)

• Reaming Depth
(hr_segm_depth)

For the Machinable Hole Feature segments containing cylinder (Drill and Flat Cylinder), the Hole
Upper Plane is coincident with the Segment Upper Plane. Therefore, the hr_segm_height is
equal to the hr_segm_depth.

Origin

hr_segm_upper_plane

Segment Upper Plane = Hole Upper Plane

hr_segm_height = hr_segm_depth

624
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.6.5 Machinable Hole Feature conversion

SolidCAM converts Hole Feature segments into Machinable Hole Features according to the
following rules:

General Conversion Rules

1. All possible combinations with Upper segment – Cylinder are converted into
the one Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment.

Exception: When a pair consists of Cylinder and Planar segments

are converted into Flat Cylinder segment.

Upper + Lower Hole Feature Machinable Hole Feature segment

Segments

Cylinder + None Drill

Cylinder + Chamfer Drill

Cylinder + Cone Drill

625
 Cylinder + Torus (open Sphere) Drill

Cylinder + Sphere Drill

2. Cone and Closed Sphere segments are converted into a Drill Machinable
Hole Feature segment.

Hole Feature segment Machinable Hole Feature segment

Cone Drill

Closed Sphere Drill

626
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

3. All possible combinations with Lower segment – Planar are converted into
one Machinable Hole Feature segment.
Upper + Lower Hole Feature Machinable Hole Feature
Segments segment

Cylinder + Planar Flat Cylinder

Chamfer + Planar Flat Chamfer

Torus/Open Sphere + Planar Flat Chamfer

4. Single segments like Torus, Chamfer and Open Sphere are converted into
Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segments.
Hole Feature segment Machinable Hole Feature
segment

Chamfer Chamfer

Torus Chamfer

Open Sphere Chamfer

627
Conversion to Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment

SolidCAM determines the following dimensions of the upper and lower Hole Feature segments
of the pair. In the scheme below, the segments are represented as two cylinders surrounding the
segments.
Hole Upper Plane

Upper Plane
D

Depth Upper
Segment HU

Lower
Segment HL

The scheme of the Drill segment generation is the following:

• The vertex of the cone is located on the same depth (hr_segm_height) as the lower
point of the lower segment of the initial Hole Feature.

• The diameter of the Cylinder (hr_segm_diameter) is the same as the diameter of the
Hole Feature Segment.

• The resulting Machinable Hole Feature segment is extended upward till the Hole Upper
Plane.

• The Cone angle (hr_segm_angle) is Hole Upper Plane

118°.

In some cases, according to hr_segm_height

the General conversion rules
described earlier, the upper
segment is absent. In this
case the upper segment will
be None and the segment
Height will be 0. hr_segm_diameter
hr_segm_angle

628
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Exception: In case of translation of a through Cylindrical Hole

Feature segment into a Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment, the
hr_segm_height parameter of the Drill will be the following:
Hole Upper Plane

H hr_segm_height

hr_segm_angle
D hr_segm_diameter

Conversion to Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment

SolidCAM determines the following dimensions of the Hole Upper Plane

upper and lower Hole Feature segments of the pair. In
the scheme below, the segments are represented as two
cylinders surrounding the segments. Upper Plane
D

If the lower Hole feature segment

is Planar, the HL is 0. Depth Upper
Segment H
U

The scheme of Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature H

generation is the following: Lower

Segment HL
• The planar face is located on the same depth
(hr_segm_diameter) as the lower point of
the lower segment of the initial Hole Feature.
Hole Upper Plane
• The diameter of the Cylinder (hr_segm_height) is the
same as the diameter of the Hole Feature Segment.

• The resulting segment is extended upward till the Hole hr_segm_height

Upper Plane.

hr_segm_diameter

629
Conversion to Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment

According to the General conversion rules explained earlier, the Hole Upper Plane

scheme of input data for the conversion will be the following.

Upper Plane
The major parameters of the converted Chamfer Machinable Hole Depth DU
Feature segment will be the same as in the original Hole Feature
segment: Lower
Segment H

• The Upper diameter (hr_segm_diameter) of the

D
Chamfer segment will be equal to the Upper diameter L

of the initial Hole Feature segment.

• The Lower diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) of the Chamfer segment will be

equal to the Lower diameter of the initial Hole Feature segment.

• The Height (hr_segm_height) of the Chamfer segment will be equal to the Height of
the initial Hole Feature segment.

• The converted Chamfer segment is situated at the same depth as the original Hole
Feature segment.

• The Chamfer Angle (hr_segm_angle) will be calculated automatically.

Hole Upper Plane

hr_segm_upper_plane

hr_segm_depth hr_segm_diameter

Lower
Segment hr_segm_height

hr_segm_lower_diameter

Conversion to Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment

According to the General conversion rules explained earlier, the Hole Upper Plane

scheme of the input data for the conversion will be the following.
Upper Plane
Depth DU

Lower
Segment H

DL

630
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

The major parameters of the converted Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment will be the
same as in the original Hole Feature segment:
Hole Upper Plane

hr_segm_upper_plane

hr_segm_depth hr_segm_diameter

Lower
Segment hr_segm_height

hr_segm_lower_diameter

• The Upper diameter (hr_segm_diameter) of the Chamfer segment will be equal to

the Upper diameter of the initial Hole Feature segment.

• The Lower diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) of the Chamfer segment will be

equal to the Lower diameter of the initial Hole Feature segment.

• The Height (hr_segm_height) of the Chamfer segment will be equal to the Height of
the initial Hole Feature segment.

• The converted Chamfer segment is situated at the same depth as the original Hole
Feature segment.

• The Chamfer Angle (hr_segm_angle) will be calculated automatically.

Conversion to Thread Machinable Hole Feature segment

At the first stage, SolidCAM converts the Cylindrical Hole Feature segment into Drill/Flat Cylinder
segment according to SolidCAM conversion rules. After that, the separate Thread MHF segment is
created with the following parameters:

• hr_segm_diameter = Thread Diameter

• hr_segm_height = Thread Height

• hr_thread_pitch = Thread Pitch

• hr_segm_upper_plane = Thread Upper level

• hr_segm_depth = Thread Depth

631
 Thread Upper level hr_segm_upper_plane

hr_segm_diameter

Thread Depth hr_segm_depth

Thread Height hr_segm_height

Thread Diameter

Conversion to Reaming Machinable Hole Feature segment

During conversion process, SolidCAM creates Reaming segments from suitable combinations of
Cylinder and Planar Hole Feature segments (see topic 9.5.9). A Reaming segment is created with the
following parameters:
• hr_segm_diameter = Reaming Diameter
• hr_segm_height = Reaming Height
• hr_segm_upper_plane = Reaming Upper level
• hr_segm_depth = Reaming Depth
• hr_prev_segm_diameter = Drill diameter
Reaming Upper level hr_segm_upper_plane

hr_segm_diameter

Reaming Depth hr_segm_depth

Reaming Height hr_segm_height

Drill Diameter

Reaming Diameter

632
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.6.6 Machinable Hole Features page

The Machinable Hole Features page is divided to two parts. The upper part
displays the list of Machinable Hole Features, classified into Shapes and
Groups. When an item is selected in the Machinable Hole Features list, the
lower part of the page displays the segments of the selected item.

When the Hole Features were changed, SolidCAM enables you to rebuild
the Machinable Features. The Rebuild operation is available either for all
Machinable Hole Features or for the selected Machinable Hole Feature
(Shape, Group).

SolidCAM enables you to display the Hole Picture dialog box with the Show
Picture button located on the Holes Recognition toolbar. This dialog box
schematically shows the segments of the selected Machinable Hole feature.

Managing Machinable Hole Feature Segments

The lower part of the Machinable Hole Features page displays the list of
the segments for the selected Machinable Hole Feature. The Machinable
Hole Feature segments are situated in the list with specific order from the
lower segment to upper. The Thread MHF Segment is the last segment.
SolidCAM enables you to manage the Machinable Features segments with
the right-click menu.

The following operations are available:

• Change type

The Change type option enables you to change the type of

the Machinable Feature Segment. The M-Feature segment
type dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box enables
you to change the type of the Machinable Hole Feature
segment.

633
 • Reset

SolidCAM enables you to change the dimensions of the Machinable Hole Feature
segment. The Reset option enables you to reset the selected changed Machinable Hole
Feature segment to its initial dimensions calculated by SolidCAM.

• Insert Before/Insert After

This option enables you to insert a new Machinable Hole Feature segment before or
after the selected segment. The M-Feature segment type dialog box will be displayed in
order to choose the type of the segment.
• Insert Thread

This command adds a user-defined Thread segment. This command is available only
for Drill and Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segments.
• Insert Reaming

This command adds a user-defined Reaming segment. This command is available only
for Drill and Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segments.
• Delete

This option enables you to delete a selected Machinable Hole Feature segment.

Only the segments added by the user can be deleted. The segments
automatically built by SolidCAM cannot be deleted, except for the Thread
segment.

Modifying Machinable Hole Feature segments

SolidCAM enables you to display the Machinable Hole

Feature Parameters dialog box with the Show Data button
located on the Holes Recognition toolbar.

This dialog box displays the parameters of the selected

Machinable Hole feature or selected Machinable Hole
Feature segment.

The Holes parameters page is displayed when the

Machinable Hole Feature is selected. This page displays
the following parameters of the Machinable Hole feature:

634
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

• Depth Origin X

• Upper Plane
CoordSys
• Origin X /Origin Y
Upper Plane
• Direction
Origin Y

CoordSys
Depth

The Depth, Upper Plane, Origin X/Y and Direction parameters cannot be
changed.

When a segment is selected, the Machinable Hole Feature

Parameters dialog box displays the specific parameters of
the selected segment.

SolidCAM enables you to assign a new value (User value)

to parameters of the Machinable Hole Feature segments.

When the new value is assigned to the parameter, SolidCAM

modifies the segment according to the specific rules.

Modifying Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment

hr_segm_diameter

hr_segm_height

hr_segm_angle

635
Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

When the Diameter changes, the Height (hr_segm_height)

and Angle (hr_segm_angle) remain unchanged. The height
of the conical and cylindrical faces will be changed. The Cone
corner will be fixed.

Changing Angle (hr_segm_angle)

When the Angle changes, the Height (hr_segm_height) and

Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) remains unchanged. The height
of the conical and cylindrical faces will be changed. The Cone
corner will be fixed.

Changing Height (hr_segm_height)

When the Height changes, the Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

remains unchanged. The Height of the Conical face will be the
same; the height of the cylindrical face will be changed. So, the
Height will be changed. The Upper plane will be fixed.

Changing Upper Plane

When the Upper Plane changes, the Diameter (hr_segm_

diameter) will remain unchanged. The Height of the Conical
face will be the same; the height of the cylindrical face will be
changed. So, the Height (hr_segm_height) will be changed. The
Cone corner will be fixed.

636
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Modifying Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment

hr_segm_diameter

hr_segm_height

Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

When the Diameter changes, the Height (hr_segm_height)

will remain unchanged. The Upper plane will be fixed.

Changing Height (hr_segm_height)

When the Height changes, the Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

will remain unchanged. The Upper plane will be fixed.

Changing Upper Plane

When the Upper plane changes, the Diameter (hr_segm_

diameter) will remain unchanged. The lower edge of the
cylinder will be fixed. The Height (hr_segm_height) will be
changed.

637
Modifying Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment
hr_segm_angle

hr_segm_diameter

hr_segm_height

hr_segm_lower_diameter

Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) or

Lower Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter)

When the Diameter or Lower Diameter changes; the

Angle (hr_segm_angle) parameter will remain
unchanged. It means that the second diameter will
also be changed. The Height (hr_segm_height) and
Upper plane will be the same.

Changing Angle (hr_segm_angle)

Changing the Angle causes the Diameter

hr_segm_diameter) to change. The Lower Diameter
(hr_segm_lower_diameter) will be fixed. The
Height and Upper Plane will stay the same.

Changing Height (hr_segm_height)

Changing the Height (hr_segm_height) causes

the Lower Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter)
to change. The Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)
will be fixed. The Upper Plane and Angle
(hr_segm_angle) will be unchanged.

Changing Upper Plane

Changing the Upper Plane causes the Diameter

(hr_segm_diameter) to change. The Angle
(hr_segm_angle) will be unchanged. The Lower
Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) will be
fixed. So, Height (hr_segm_height) will be changed.

638
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Modifying Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment

hr_segm_angle

hr_segm_diameter

hr_segm_height

hr_segm_lower_diameter

Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) or

Lower Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter)

When the Diameter or Lower Diameter changes; the

Angle (hr_segm_angle) parameter will remain
unchanged. It means that the second diameter will
also be changed. The Height (hr_segm_height)
and Upper plane will be the same.

Changing Angle (hr_segm_angle)

Changing the Angle causes the Diameter (hr_segm_

diameter) to change. The Lower Diameter (hr_
segm_lower_diameter) will be fixed. The Height
and Upper Plane will stay the same.

Changing Height (hr_segm_height)

Changing the Height (hr_segm_

height) causes the Lower Diameter
(hr_segm_lower_diameter) to change. The
Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) will be fixed. The
Upper Plane and Angle (hr_segm_angle) will be
unchanged.

Changing Upper Plane

Changing the Upper Plane causes the Diameter
(hr_segm_diameter) to change. The Angle
(hr_segm_angle) will be unchanged. The Lower
Diameter (hr_segm_lower_diameter) will
be fixed. So, Height (hr_segm_height) will be
changed.

639
Modifying Thread Machinable Hole Feature segment
hr_segm_upper_plane

hr_segm_diameter

hr_segm_depth

hr_segm_height

Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

When the Diameter changes, the Height (hr_segm_height)

remains unchanged.

Changing Thread Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level)

Changing the Thread Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level)

causes the Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth) to change. The Thread
Height (hr_segm_height) is unchanged.

Changing Thread Height (hr_segm_height)

Changing the Thread Height (hr_segm_height) causes the

Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth) to change. The Thread Upper
level (hr_segm_upper_level) is unchanged.

Changing Thread Depth (hr_segm_depth)

Changing the Thread Depth (hr_segm_

depth) causes the Thread Upper level
(hr_segm_upper_level) to change. The Thread height (hr_
segm_height) is unchanged.

640
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Modifying Reaming Machinable Hole Feature segment

hr_segm_upper_plane

hr_segm_diameter

hr_segm_depth

hr_segm_height

Changing Reaming Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level)

Changing the Reaming Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level) causes

the Reaming Depth (hr_segm_depth) to change. The Reaming
Height (hr_segm_height) is unchanged.

Changing Reaming Height (hr_segm_height)

Changing the Reaming Height (hr_segm_height) causes the

Reaming Depth (hr_segm_depth) to change. The Reaming Upper
level (hr_segm_upper_level) is unchanged.

Changing Reaming Height (hr_segm_height)

Changing the Reaming Depth (hr_segm_depth) causes the Reaming

Upper level (hr_segm_upper_level) to change. The Reaming
height (hr_segm_height) is unchanged.

Changing Diameter (hr_segm_diameter)

The Diameter (hr_segm_diameter) parameter can be changed

without any limitations.
The Drill diameter (hr_prev_segm_diameter) parameter cannot
be changed for the Reaming segment; to change the value you have to
edit the Drill/Flat Cylinder segment on which the Reaming is performed.

641
9.7 Feature Sets

Feature Set is a number of Machinable Hole Features that will be machined Feature Set
within the same setup using one Coordinate System. Once used in a Feature
Set, the CoordSys cannot be used in another Feature Set.
CoordSys

9.7.1 Creating Feature Sets

SolidCAM automatically creates a number of Feature Sets CAM-Part

according to the Coordinate Systems defined in the current
CAM-Part. Feature Set

CoordSys #1

Feature Set

CoordSys #2

Feature Set

CoordSys #3
...
Feature Set

CoordSys #N
9.7.2 Assigning Hole Features to Feature Sets

SolidCAM automatically distributes Hole Features to the Feature Sets.

Recognized
Holes Bank
Holes
Recognized Holes Recognized Holes Recognized Holes
Incompatible Incompatible Incompatible
Holes Holes Holes
Compatibility Compatibility Compatibility
Checker Checker Checker
Axis Axis Axis
type Compatible Holes type Compatible Holes type Compatible Holes

Feature Set #1 Feature Set #2 Feature Set #N

Machine CoordSys #1 Machine CoordSys #2 Machine CoordSys #N

CAM-Part

642
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

SolidCAM checks the compatibility of the Machinable Hole Features with the Feature Sets and
assigns Holes to the Feature Sets. The compatibility checker examines each Machinable Hole Feature
according to the CoordSys (owned by the specific Feature Set) and the Axis type of the Feature Set.
Axis type enables you to limit the number of the axes used for the machining of the Machinable
Hole Features in Feature Set; the Axis number can be the same or smaller than Axis number of the
CAM-Part. The Machinable Hole Features included in the Feature Set will be machined according
to this Axis number, not considering the Axis number of the CAM-Part.
Each Machinable Hole Feature can be assigned to a specific Feature Set if one of the following
conditions is kept:
• The direction of the Machinable Hole Feature is parallel to the Z-axis of the Coordinate
System;
• It is possible to define a CoordSys position (according to the Axis Type) under the
Machine Coordinate System with the Z-axis parallel to the direction of the Machinable
Hole Feature.
The order of the assignment depends on the Machine CoordSys Number; the Feature Set with the
smaller Machine CoordSys number will be filled with Machinable Hole Features first. Thus, if the
Machinable Hole Feature is compatible to a number of Feature Sets, the Machinable Hole Feature
will be assigned to the Feature Set using the Machine CoordSys with the lowest number.
The Machinable Hole Features that were not assigned are stored in the bank of the Recognized
Hole Features.

9.7.3 Automatic CoordSys Positions definition

SolidCAM automatically defines CoordSys Positions related to the Machine CoordSys suitable to
machine Machinable Hole Features of a specific Feature Set. The CoordSys Position is created
according to the following data:

• The Machine CoordSys used in the Feature Set;

• The Axis type of the Feature Set;
• The Direction of the Machinable Hole Feature.

Feature Set Hole Feature

Axis type Machine CoordSys Direction

CoordSys Position

643
The Z-axis of the defined CoordSys Position is coincident with the Machinable Hole Feature
direction. The direction of the X- and Y-axis is defined according to the Machine CoordSys and
Axis Type.

When the Machinable Hole Feature is accepted by the Compatibility Checker, SolidCAM compares
the direction of the Machinable Hole Feature with the Z-axis of the existing CoordSys Positions
related to the Machine CoordSys of the Feature Set. If the direction and Z-axis of the CoordSys
Position are parallel, the Hole Feature will be assigned to the CoordSys Position. If a suitable
position is not found, SolidCAM defines a new one.

SolidCAM enables you to automatically locate the origin of the created CoordSys position in
dependence of the Hole Recognition Settings. The origin of the CoordSys position can be placed
in the following locations:

• The CoordSys position is placed in the position of Machine CoordSys #1.

• The CoordSys position can be placed in the corner of the model box.

SolidCAM calculates the box surrounding the model Z Y

(model box) in the coordinate system of the first
Machine CoordSys.
X
The CoordSys Position will be located in the corner
of the model box with the following coordinates
(XMIN, YMIN, ZMAX).

644
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.7.4 Feature Sets page

The Feature Sets page enables you to define and edit Feature Sets of the
current CAM-Part and also to assign Hole Features to the Feature Sets.

The Feature Sets page is divided into three areas.

Feature Sets area

Compatible Holes area

Incompatible Holes area

The upper area displays the tree of the Feature Sets with their Hole Features.

The middle area displays Compatible Hole Features – the Holes that can be assigned to the current
Feature Set.

The lower area displays Incompatible Hole Features – the Holes that cannot be assigned to the
current Feature Set.

9.7.5 Compatible/Incompatible Hole features

All the holes that are not distributed to the Feature Sets
Holes Bank
are located in the Holes Bank. In the Holes Bank holes
are divided into two groups, depending on the current
Feature Set.
Compatible Incompatible
Holes Holes

645
The Feature Sets Page displays both the Compatible and Incompatible Hole Features for the
Current Feature Set.

The check box situated near each item in the

Compatible Hole Features tree, enables you to
select the item to move to the current Feature Compatible Holes area
Set. The selected Compatible Features can
be moved to the Current Feature Set by the
Move to Current Set command available in Incompatible Holes area
the right-click menu in the Compatible Holes
area.

9.7.6 Operating Feature Sets

SolidCAM enables you to manage your Feature sets using the right-click menu.
The following commands are available:

Set as Current

This option enables you to set a specific Feature Set as

current. All other operations will be performed with the
current Feature Set. The content of the Compatible/
Incompatible Features areas will be changed according to
the current Feature Set.

Add

This option enables you to add a new Feature Set.

The Add Feature Set dialog box will be displayed.

This dialog box enables you to set the Axis type of

the Feature Set and assign the Machine CoordSys
to the Feature Set. SolidCAM enables you to
define the Axis type of the Feature Set.

646
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Edit

This option displays the Edit Feature Set dialog box.

This dialog box enables you to edit the name and

Axis type of the Feature Set and change the Machine
CoordSys assigned to the Feature Set.

Remove All

This option enables you to remove all Machinable Hole Features from the Feature Set.
All the Machinable Features will be moved to the Holes bank.

Delete

This option enables you to delete the Feature Set. All the Machinable Features will be
moved to the Holes bank.

9.7.7 Defining the CoordSys Position origin location for the Feature Set

SolidCAM enables you to define the default location of the

CoordSys Position origin with the right-click menu on the Machine
CoordSys of the specified Feature Set.

The Place CoordSys origin at dialog box is displayed.

647
Corner of Model Box

The CoordSys position can be placed in the corner of the model box.

CoordSys #1

The CoordSys position is placed in the position of Machine CoordSys #1.

648
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.8 Technology

For the each segment of the Machinable Hole Feature, SolidCAM chooses:

• A suitable technological solution from the Machinable

Hole Feature
Technology Database (TDB) (see topic
Segment
9.10).
Part Tool Table
• A tool from the Part Tool Table (see topic
Technological
3.6) or defines a new tool.
Solution

Technology Database

Operations

9.8.1 Choosing a Technological Solution

SolidCAM stores all Technological Solutions in the Technology Database. All the Technological
solutions are classified according to the type of Machinable Hole Feature segments.
Technology Database

Drill Machinable Technological Solutions

Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Flat Cylinder Machinable
Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Chamfer Machinable
Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Flat Chamfer Machinable
Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Thread Machinable
Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Reaming Machinable
Feature Segment

649
For each type of Machinable Hole Feature segment, there is a number of technological solutions
(each technological solution can belong to only one type of Machinable Hole Feature segment).

A Technological solution can be either a user-defined Machining Process or a built-in Algorithm.

Technological Solution

Technological Solutions Algorithm

• The user-defined Machining process contains Operation templates with parametric

technology data and parametric data of the tools. It can be defined and edited by the user.

• A built-in Algorithm is hard-coded in SolidCAM; it generates a number of Machining

Processes. Parameters of the algorithm can be edited.

Technological solutions use the dimensions of the Machinable Hole Feature Segments.

SolidCAM automatically chooses the suitable Technological solutions for the machining of the
specified Machinable Hole Feature segment from the TDB. The choice of the Technological solution
is defined by the set of conditions. A Condition is a logical expression; its result can be either true
or false. When the condition is true, the current technological solution can be used to machine the
Machinable Hole Feature segment. SolidCAM checks the conditions of the technological solutions
in sequence; the first solution with a true condition will be chosen.

9.8.2 Choosing the tool

When a Technological Solution is chosen from the TDB, SolidCAM chooses the suitable Tool from
the Part Tool Table. The method of choosing the tools depends on the type of the operation where
the tool is used. SolidCAM differentiates between the following types of operations:
• Drilling Operation
• Milling Operation
• Center Drilling Operation
• Chamfer Drilling Operation
• Center-Chamfer Drilling Operation
• Thread Milling Operation
• Reaming Operation

650
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Choosing the tool for the Drilling Operation

SolidCAM searches for the tool according to the pre-defined tool type, diameter and angle. These
parameters are specified in the operation template of the specific Technological Solution. SolidCAM
searches for the suitable tool in the Part Tool Table. If the search fails, SolidCAM performs an
additional search with the same criteria in the Current Tool Library. If the tool is not found,
SolidCAM defines a new tool according to the data of the operation template.
Technological Solution
Tool Type
Tool Diameter
Tool Angle

Yes Does the Part Tool Table No

contain a suitable tool?

Yes No
Does the Current Tool Library
contain a suitable tool?

Define a new tool

Tool

Technological Solution

Choosing the tool for the Milling Operation

SolidCAM searches for the tool according to the

pre-defined tool type and corner radius. The search
is performed in the Part Tool Table in the diameter
range from 0 till the product of Hole diameter and
Constant. Constant is equal to 0.9. The tool with
the maximum diameter will be chosen. If the tool
Hole Diameter
was not found in the Part Tool Table, the search will
be performed again in the Current Tool Library. Tool Diameter Range
0 < Tool Diameter < Hole Diameter + Constant

651
In case of absence of a suitable tool, an error message is displayed and the tool has to be defined
manually for the milling operation.
Technological Solution
Tool Type
Corner Radius
Tool Diameter Range

Yes Does the Part Tool Table No

contain a suitable tool?

Yes No
Does the Current Tool Library
contain a suitable tool?

Error

Tool

Technological Solution

Choosing the tool for the Center Drilling Operation

SolidCAM searches for the tool in compliance

Hole Diameter
with the pre-defined tool type and angle. The
search is performed in the Part Tool Table in the
diameter range from the value of the sum of the
Hole diameter and Constant endlessly. Constant is
equal to 1. The tool with the maximum diameter
will be chosen. If the tool with such diameter was
not found, SolidCAM chooses the tool of any
diameter with a pre-defined tool type and angle. Tool Diameter Range
If the suitable tool does not exist in the Part Tool
Hole Diameter + Constant < Tool Diameter
Table, the search will be continued in the Current
Tool Library.

652
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

In case of absence of a suitable tool, an error message is displayed and a tool for the center drilling
operation will have to be defined manually.
Technological Solution
Tool Type
Tool Angle
Tool Diameter Range

Yes Does the Part Tool Table No

contain a suitable tool?

Yes Does the Current Tool Library No

contain a suitable tool?

Error

Tool

Technological Solution

Choosing the tool for the Chamfer Drilling Operation

SolidCAM searches for the tool in Hole Diameter

compliance with the pre-defined tool
type and angle. The search is performed
in the Part Tool Table in the diameter
range from the value of sum of the Hole
diameter and Constant till the difference
between the next segment diameter and
Constant. The Constant is equal to 1. If Next Segment Diameter
the suitable tool does not exist in the Part
Tool Diameter Range
Tool Table, the search will be continued
Hole Diameter + Next Segment Diameter -
in the Current Tool Library. + Constant
< Tool Diameter <
- Constant

653
In case of absence of a suitable tool, SolidCAM defines a new tool with the pre-defined tool type,
angle and minimum possible diameter (Hole diameter + Constant).
Technological Solution
Tool Type
Tool Angle
Tool Diameter Range

Yes Does the Part Tool Table No

contain a suitable tool?

Yes Does the Current Tool Library No

contain a suitable tool?

Define a new tool:

tool diameter = hole diameter + constant

Tool

Technological Solution

Choosing the tool for the Center Chamfer Drilling Operation

SolidCAM searches for the tool in compliance with the pre- Hole Diameter
defined tool type and angle. The search is performed in the
Part Tool Table in the diameter range from the value of sum of
hole diameter and Constant endlessly. The Constant is equal to
1. The tool with the maximum diameter will be chosen. If the
tool with such diameter is not found, SolidCAM chooses the
tool of any diameter with a pre-defined tool type and angle. If
the suitable tool does not exist in the Part Tool Table, the search
will be continued in the Current Tool Library.
Tool Diameter Range

Hole Diameter +
< Tool Diameter
+ Constant

654
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

In case of absence of a suitable tool, an error message is displayed and the tool has to be defined
manually for the operation.
Technological Solution

Tool Type
Tool Angle
Tool Diameter Range

Yes Does the Part Tool Table No

contain a suitable tool?

Yes Does the Current Tool Library No

contain a suitable tool?

Error

Tool

Technological Solution

Choosing the tool for the Thread Milling Operation

SolidCAM uses operation tools of Tap type for the Thread Milling Operation.

SolidCAM searches the suitable tool for the operation according to the following criteria:

• The tool must be of Tap type.

• The Thread diameter of the tool must be equal to the Thread diameter defined in the
Technological solution (hr_segm_diameter).

• The Pitch of the tool must be equal to the Pitch defined in the Technological solution
(hr_segm_pitch).

655
These parameters are specified in the Operation template of the specific Technological Solution.
SolidCAM searches for the suitable tool in the Part Tool Table. If the search fails, SolidCAM
performs an additional search with the same criteria in the Current Tool Library. If the tool is not
found, SolidCAM defines a new tool according to the data of the Operation Template.

Technological Solution
Tool Type
Thread Diameter
Pitch

Yes Does the Part Tool Table No

contain a suitable tool?

Yes No
Does the Current Tool Library
contain a suitable tool?

Define a new tool

Tool

Technological Solution

Choosing the tool for the Reaming Operation

SolidCAM uses tools of Reamer tool type for the Reaming Operation.

SolidCAM searches the suitable tool for the operation according to the following criteria:

• The tool must be of Reamer tool type.

• The Reamer Diameter of the tool must be equal to the Reaming diameter defined in the
Technological solution (hr_segm_diameter).

656
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

The search is performed in the Part Tool Table and Current tool library. If a suitable tool is not
found, SolidCAM automatically defines in the Part Tool Table a new tool according to the tool
definition in the Technological Solution.
Technological Solution

Tool Type
Reaming Diameter

Yes Does the Part Tool Table No

contain a suitable tool?

Yes No
Does the Current Tool Library
contain a suitable tool?

Define a new tool

Tool

Technological Solution

9.8.3 Technology Page

The Technology page is divided into two parts.

The upper part displays the tree of all Machinable Hole Features of the Current Feature Set. The
Machinable Hole Features are structured by Technologies and Groups.

• Technology – the set of Machinable Hole Features machined by the same Technological
solutions.

• Group – the set of Machinable Hole Features within the Technology with the same
dimensions.

657
The lower part of the Technology page displays technological solution and
tools chosen for the machining of the specified Machinable Hole Feature.

Activate the Hole Picture dialog box with the Show Picture button located
in the Holes Recognition toolbar to display the schematic picture illustrating
the result of applying the Technological Solution.

SolidCAM enables you to display the Technology Hole Parameters dialog

box with the Show Data button located in the Holes Recognition toolbar.

This dialog box enables you to edit the parameters of the specified technological solution. SolidCAM
enables you to edit only parameters that were not marked as Read only in the Technology Database.

9.8.4 Managing Technology

The following operations are available in the upper part of the Technology page with the right-click
menu.
• Rebuild

This command rebuilds the technology for the selected

item. The technological solutions will be chosen again
from the Technology database.
• Find Tool

The Find Tool command enables you to perform the tool

search again for the selected item.

658
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

This command is useful in the following cases:

• When the suitable tool was not found in the Part Tool Table and was
not defined by SolidCAM.

• The Part Tool Table was updated.

Managing Technological solutions

The lower part of the Technology Page displays the set of Technological
solutions necessary to the machining of the selected Machinable Hole
Feature.
• Change

This option enables you to change the Technological

Solution. The Machining process list dialog will be displayed;
this dialog enables you to choose the necessary solution from
the list of available Solutions for this type of Machinable
Hole Feature segment.

• Find tool

This command enables you to automatically find the suitable tool from the Part Tool
Table for the selected Technological Solution.

This command is useful in the following cases:

• When the suitable tool was not found in the Part Tool Table and was
not defined by SolidCAM.

• The Part Tool Table was updated.

SolidCAM enables you to change the tool for the Technological

solution with the Change Tool option. The option is available with the
right-click menu on the Tool item.

659
The Part Tool Table dialog box will be displayed in order to select a new tool.

The Show command is available with the right-click menu on the

operations of the Technological Solution. This command displays the
operation dialog box with the parameters of the specified operation.

660
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.9 Generating Operations

When the Technology is defined, SolidCAM displays the generated

operations in the Operations page. These operations are also available
in SolidCAM Manager.

The Edit command is available for the Operations in the right-click

menu.

This command enables you to display the operation dialog box.

661
9.10 Technology Database

The SolidCAM Technology Database (TDB) stores all the Technological solutions available for
the machining of the Machinable Hole Feature segments. The Technological solutions in TDB
are classified according to types of Machinable Features Hole Feature segments. For each type of
Machinable Hole Feature segment, there is a number of connected technological solutions (each
technological solution can belong to only one type of Machinable Hole Feature segment).

Technology Database

Drill Machinable Technological Solutions

Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Flat Cylinder Machinable
Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Chamfer Machinable
Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Flat Chamfer Machinable
Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Thread Machinable
Feature Segment

Technological Solutions
Reaming Machinable
Feature Segment

662
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.10.1 Global and Local Technology databases

When SolidCAM is installed, the Global Technology Database is also installed in the system
folder of SolidCAM. SolidCAM enables you to customize the Global TDB by adding and editing
Technological solutions.

When SolidCAM starts the AFRM process, the Global TDB will be copied into the CAM-Part
folder. This copy is called the Local TDB. During the AFRM process, SolidCAM receives data only
from the Local TDB. The Local TDB can be modified by the user for specific tasks in the context
of the specific CAM-Part.

The Global TDB can be replaced with the Local TDB.

SolidCAM enables you to load the Global TDB with the Technology Database command from the
SolidCAM menu.

The Technology Database Manager dialog box is displayed containing the Global TDB.

The Global Technology Database is unavailable when the Holes Recognition

process is working. In this case only the Local TDB can be edited.

The Local Technology Database can be loaded only when the Holes
Recognition process is working. The Local TDB can be loaded by
clicking on the related icon from the Holes Recognition toolbar.

The Technology Database Manager dialog box is displayed containing

the Local TDB.

663
9.10.2 Technology Database interface

The Technology Database dialog box enables you to manage the Technology Database. The
structure of this dialog box is displayed on the picture below.
Current Configuration
Conditions area

Solutions/Configurations Variables area

page

9.10.3 Configurations page

SolidCAM enables you to use configurations in order to create multiple variations of a technology
database suitable for different tasks. By default, two basics configurations are implemented in
SolidCAM: System Configuration and User Configuration.

The System Configuration cannot be changed. It contains the set of technological solutions
supplied by SolidCAM.

The User configuration supplied by SolidCAM is a copy of the System configuration. All the
content of the technology database can be edited within this configuration. SolidCAM enables
you to create a number of user configurations. Technological solutions will be the same in all User
Configurations. The sequence of the Technological solutions, conditions and expressions of user-
defined variables can be different within different User Configurations.

664
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

The Configurations page of the TDB Manager enables you to manage

configurations of TDB, either Global or Local.
SolidCAM enables you to perform the following operations with the
right-click menu.

Set as Current

This option enables you to make the specified configuration current. All
the further operation will be performed for the Current Configuration.

Rename

This option enables you to change the name of the specified User Configuration.

The System Configuration cannot be renamed.

Copy

This option enables you to create a copy of the specified User Configuration.

The System Configuration cannot be copied.

Delete

This option enables you to remove the specified User Configuration.

The System Configuration, Current Configuration and last User

Configuration cannot be deleted.

9.10.4 Current Configuration

The Current Configuration combo box displays the name of the current
configuration and enables you to switch quickly between configurations
in TDB.

When the Configurations page is displayed, the Current Configuration

combo box is disabled; it only shows the name of the current configuration.

665
9.10.5 Solutions page
The page displays all the Technological solutions classified by the Machinable
Hole Feature segment type.
SolidCAM enables you to perform the following operations with the
Technological solutions of the User Configuration.

Edit

This option enables you to edit the definition of the specified Technological Solution. The Machining
Process Define Manager dialog box is displayed.

Add

This option enables you to define a new Technological Solution within the specified Machinable
Hole Feature segment. The Machining Process Define Manager dialog box is displayed (see topic
8.6).

Delete

This option enables you to remove the specified Technological solution from the TDB.

Copy

This option enables you to create a copy of the specified Technological Solution.

Rename

This option enables you to rename the specified Technological Solution.

All the operations above are available only for Technological solutions of
the User Configuration.

666
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

For the Technological solutions of the System Configuration, the

following options are available:

View

This option enables you to display the specified

Technological Solution in Machining Process
View Manager. The displayed Solution cannot
be edited.

Copy To User Configurations

This option enables you to copy the

specified Technological Solution to the
User Configurations. Since all the User
Configurations use the same Technological
solutions, the copied Technological solution
can be used in all User Configurations.

9.10.6 Conditions

SolidCAM enables you to define the following set of conditions. If these conditions are true, the
technological solution is chosen.

A Condition is a complex logical expression; its result can be either true or false. When the condition
is true, the current Technological solution can be used. SolidCAM checks the conditions of the
Technological solutions in a defined sequence; the first solution with a true condition will be chosen.

A Condition consists of condition lines combined by the logical operators AND and OR. A Condition
line is a comparison of two expressions. The following comparison operators are acceptable in
condition lines:
• > (greater than);

• < (smaller than);

• = (equal);  

• <= (smaller than or equal);  

• >= (greater than or equal).

667
The expressions used in condition lines can include constants, user-defined variables and functions,
HR-variables and functions.

Parametric menu

For each Expression column, the parametric menu is available.

• User-defined parameters

This option displays a list of existing user-defined

parameters. These parameters can be used only for
a Condition definition but cannot be used for the
Technological solution definition.

You can open this list with the F5 hotkey

when the cursor is in the parametric field.

• Holes Recognition parameters

This option displays a list of existing Holes Recognition

parameters.

You can open this list with the F9 hotkey

when the cursor is in the parametric field.

668
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

• Holes Recognition functions

This option displays a list of existing Holes Recognition

functions.

You can open this list with the F11 hotkey

when the cursor is in the parametric field.

• Expressions

This option displays the list of defined expressions.

SolidCAM enables you to use expressions for

parameters definition.

You can use the following symbols in expressions:

• Addition (+)
• Subtraction (-)
• Multiplication (*)
• Division (/)

Parentheses are acceptable.

When multiplication and division occur together in an expression, each operation is

evaluated as it occurs from left to right. When addition and subtraction occur together
in an expression, each operation is evaluated in order of appearance from left to right.
Parentheses can be used to override the order of precedence and force some parts of
an expression to be evaluated before others. Operations within parentheses are always
performed before those outside. Within parentheses, however, operator precedence is
maintained.

You can open this list with the F7 hotkey when the cursor is in the parametric
field.

669
 • Functions

This option displays a list of existing Standard

Functions.

You can open this list with the F8 hotkey

when the cursor is in the parametric field.

• Edit-View

This option displays the parameter edit dialog box.

Here you can see and edit the full parameter name or expression string.

You can open this list with the F2 hotkey when the cursor is in the parametric
field.

9.10.7 Variables

The Variables area displays the list of variables and their expressions used in the Conditions area.

670
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Variables menu

The parametric menu available in the

Expression column enables you to
assign a value to each variable in the
list.

• User-defined parameters

This option displays a list of existing user-defined

parameters. These parameters can be used only
for variables definition but cannot be used for the
Technological solution definition.

You can open this list with the F5 hotkey

when the cursor is in the parametric field.

• Holes Recognition parameters

This option displays a list of existing Holes Recognition

parameters.

You can open this list with the F9 hotkey

when the cursor is in the parametric field.

• Holes Recognition functions

This option displays a list of existing Holes Recognition

functions.

You can open this list with the F11 hotkey

when the cursor is in the parametric field.

671
• Color definition

This option enables you to assign the color value to the

variable using the Select Color dialog box.
The colored button enables you to choose the color from the
Color dialog box.

The Pick face button enables you to define the color by picking the model face. The
color of the picked face will be captured and displayed in the dialog box. The Float
value of the color and its RGB values are displayed in the corresponding edit boxes.
When the dialog box is confirmed with the OK button, the Float color value is assigned
to the variable.

You can open this list with the F3 hotkey when the cursor is in the parametric
field.

• Functions

This option displays a list of existing Standard

Functions.

You can open this list with the F8 hotkey

when the cursor is in the parametric field.

• Edit-View

This option displays the parameter edit dialog box in which you can see and edit the
full parameter name or expression string.

You can open this list with the

F2 hotkey when the cursor is
in the parametric field.

672
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Variables filter (Show variables used in)

The following buttons enable you to filter the variables used for the Condition definition.

• Database

This option enables you to display all the variables used in the TDB.
• Technological segment

This option enables you to display all the variables used in the Technological solutions
of the Current Technological segment.
• Technological solution

This option enables you to display all the variables used in for the current Technological
solution.

9.10.8 Defining a new Technological Solution

SolidCAM enables you to add a new Technological solution to the User
Configurations. Choose the Add option from the right-click menu of
the Solutions page in the TDB Manager.
A new Technological Solution is added. Choose the Edit command in
the right-click menu. The Machining Process Define Manager dialog
box is displayed.

Machining Process Define Manager enables you to define a Machining Process as a Technological
Solution. SolidCAM enables you to define parametric Operation Templates and use CAM-Part
parameters, HR variables, expressions, standard functions for the parameters definition.

673
Tool definition

SolidCAM enables you to define tools for operation templates. The tools have to be defined
according to the tool search algorithms (see topic 9.8.2).
For drilling operations, SolidCAM enables the parametric definition of the tool. The expression for
the tool parameters have to be defined. When the Technological solution will be applied, expressions
will be calculated and parameters used for the tool definition will get their values. The tool with
defined parameters will be chosen according to the specific algorithm.
For milling and chamfering operations SolidCAM enables the parametric definition of the tool but
expressions for the tool parameters are unnecessary. SolidCAM will choose the tool according to
the built-in algorithm. When the tool is chosen, the parameters will receive values offered by the
tool search algorithm.

9.10.9 Holes Recognition Functions

hr_clear_offset(,,,)

This function enables you to calculate the clear offset that have to be removed in
Milling operation.
This function receives the following parameters:
• Diameter
• Next_diameter
• Tool_diameter
• Overlap (%)
diameter
tool_diameter
delta/2

next_diameter

674
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

The logic of this function is the following:

diameter
next_diameter
tool_diameter
overlap

delta=diameter/next_diameter

No Yes
delta>tool_diameter

side_step=overlap*tool_diameter/100 clear_offset=(delta-tool_diameter)/2

No Yes
delta>side_step

clear_offset=0 clear_offset=delta-side_step

clear_offset

hr_equal_down_step(,)

This function enables you to calculate equal down steps in order to machine the
specified depth. The function receives the following values:

• wish_down_step

• hole_depth

The function returns the value of the equal down_step

down step closest to the wish_down_step

parameter.
hole_depth

675
9.11 Holes Recognition Settings

SolidCAM enables you to define the System

and Part settings of the Holes Recognition
with the Holes Recognition settings dialog
box.

The Holes Recognition settings dialog box

structure has two tabs:

• System settings are stored in the

registry and affect all CAM-Parts.
• Part settings apply only to the
current CAM-Part.

9.11.1 System settings

The system settings are stored in the registry and affect all the CAM-Parts.

Topology

General

This page enables you to define the location of the Coordinate System.
Place CoordSys at:

This option enables you to set

the default location for the
CoordSys position created by
the AFRM at the stage of the
Feature Sets definition.

• Corner of Model Box

The CoordSys position

is automatically placed
at the corner of the box
surrounding the model.

• CoordSys #1

The CoordSys position is automatically placed at the position of Machine

CoordSys #1.

676
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

Connection
This page enables you to define parameters of the Hole Features connection.
Connection Holes

This option enables you to turn on/off

the connection of the Hole Features.
• Axis Tolerance

This parameter enables you to define

the tolerance of the concentricity
for the Hole Features that can be
connected.

• Use Max Distance between Holes

When this option is turned on, SolidCAM enables

you to specify the maximal distance between hole
features that can be connected.
If the distance between the holes exceeds the
Distance
specified value, holes will not be connected.

Thread
This page enables you to define the way how the threads
are recognized.
• By using HoleWizard information

The information from HoleWizard

to determine threads and their
parameters. When the By Cosmetic
thread check box is selected,
SolidCAM recognizes holes where
thread is created by HoleWizard as
a Cosmetic thread feature. When
the By Hole specification and
Hole shape check box is selected,
SolidCAM recognizes holes using the
information from the HoleWizard
and analyzing the hole shape.
• By Hole shape

SolidCAM analyzes the hole shape in order to recognize threads in holes.

677
Technology

General

• Add Center Drill

This option enables SolidCAM to automatically perform the center drilling. The center
drilling will be inserted before the machining of the first Machinable Hole Feature
segment that will be machined with the drilling technology.
• Calculate operations inside Holes Recognition

This option enables you to postpone the calculation of the operations during insert
them from the AFRM. Not calculated operations can be calculated later together with
other CAM-Part operations.
When this check box is selected (default), SolidCAM calculates the operations inserted
by AFRM.

Colors

This page enables you to define the colors that will be used in the HR Manager for the
items changed or inserted by the user.

678
 9. Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining

9.11.2 Part settings

Topology settings: Cutting angle

The Cutting angle parameter defines the minimal value of the arc angle. If the angle of the section
of the Hole Feature is smaller than the defined value, SolidCAM does not recognize it as a hole.
Cutting angle

679
680
Simulation 10
You can use the simulation to check and view the generated tool path
after you have defined and calculated your machining operations.
If you have made mistakes defining the operations or used unsuitable
milling strategies, the simulation can help you avoid problems you
would otherwise experience during the actual production running.

 HostCAD Simulation mode

 2D Simulation mode
 3D Simulation mode
 VerifyPlus Simulation mode
 SolidVerify Simulation mode
 RapidVerify Simulation mode
 Rest Material Simulation mode
10.1 Introduction

The SolidCAM simulation option enables you to check and view the generated tool path after
you have defined and calculated your machining operations. The simulation can help you avoid
problems such as mistakes in the definition of the operations or selection of an unsuitable milling
strategy you would otherwise experience during the actual production running.

To simulate an operation, right-click on its name in SolidCAM

Manager. The operation menu will be displayed. Click on the
Simulate option.

You can simulate a group of selected

operations. Select the operations with
the Ctrl key, right-click on them and
choose the Simulation option from the
menu.
To simulate all operations, right-click
on the Operations header in SolidCAM
Manager and choose the Simulation
option from the menu.
The Simulation control panel is
displayed.

10.1.1 Simulation control panel

Show data

Select this check box to display tool path information such as coordinates of the current point, time,
feed in the Simulation Data dialog box.

682
 10. Simulation

• The X, Y, and Z fields display the position of the tool relative to the
CoordSys at every step of the simulation.

• Feed displays the current feed rate.

• Time shows the elapsed machining time of the simulated operations

(theoretical value based on feed and distance covered).

Show tool

Select the Show tool check box to toggle on/off the graphic simulation of the tool.

The Show tool frequency field describes with what frequency SolidCAM must show the tool
position.

Stop on Next

This option displays the Stop on Next dialog box where you can define the
specific point to stop the simulation process.
• Tool change – this option stops the simulation every time when
the tool changes.
• Feed change – this option stops the simulation every time when
the feed changes.
• Rapid motion – this option stops the simulation every time when
the rapid motion is performed.
• Z change – this option stops the simulation at every change of the Z coordinate of the
tool.
• Tool Steps – this option stops the simulation every defined number of tool steps.
• End of procedure – this option stops the simulation at the end of the procedure.

Clear

This button clears the simulated tool path and the tool images from the screen.

Colors

Click on the Colors button to change the display color of the simulated
tool path. The Simulation Colors dialog box is displayed.

683
 1. To change the tool color, click on the colored box left to the tool number.
2. The standard color dialog box of Windows will be displayed.
3. Select the new tool path color for this tool number.
4. Confirm with the OK button.

You can use the Reset to Default button to apply the default tool
colors defined in the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.

Simulation speed

The slider controls the Simulation speed.

10.1.2 Simulation modes

SolidCAM offers the following simulation modes:
• 2D Simulation
• Host CAD
• Rest Material
• VerifyPlus
• 3D Simulation
• RapidVerify
• SolidVerify

10.1.3 Simulation controls

The Simulation controls are used to manage the simulation.

Turbo mode. The simulation is performed in the computer memory without showing on
the screen. The image is shown when the simulation is completed or when you click on
the Pause button.
Plays the simulation in continuous mode.

Pauses the simulation when it is performed in continuous play mode.

Single Step mode (simulate the next tool movement by clicking on the symbol or by
using the space bar of your keyboard).
Operation step mode. Simulation is shown separately operation by operation.

Exit. This button enables you to exit from the simulation module.

684
 10. Simulation

10.2 2D simulation mode

This simulation mode enables you to display the tool path in

the projection view. This feature is useful in prismatic parts
machining.

10.2.1 Simulation toolbar

The icons in the toolbar enable you to zoom and pan the
simulation picture.

10.2.2 Simulation control panel

Erase on Z change

This option automatically clears the image after every Z change of the tool.

Projection

This option enables you to display the simulation on a Top view projection of the CAD model.
When you choose this option, the following dialog box is displayed:

685
Define

This option enables you to define entities of the CAD model that are taken
into account in the Top view projection. When you choose this option, the
following dialog box is displayed:

• Select edges

The Select option enables you to select the edges of the CAD
model by the Box, Pick or All edges options.
The Unselect option enables you to unselect the previously
selected edges.
• Selection Filter

This option enables you to select edges on a specific Z-level. When you choose this
option you can either pick the Z-level with the cursor on the model or you can enter
the Z-level in the dialog box. Once you specify the Z-level, only those edges on that
level will be picked.
• Select edges by

Box – this option enables you to select/unselect edges by enclosing them with a box.
Pick – this option enables you to select/unselect the edges one by one.
All edges – this option automatically selects/unselects all the edges.
• Finish

This option enables you to build the chain after you pick the edges.
• Cancel

This option enables you to exit this dialog box.

Delete

This option enables you to delete what you had previously defined.

Show on model

This option enables you to see the geometry that was selected in the CAD model.

Show

This option enables you to see the model on the simulation screen.

686
 10. Simulation

10.3 VerifyPlus simulation mode

This simulation mode provides you with additional verification

capabilities:

• 4/5 axes multi-sided solid simulation.

• Simultaneous 4-axis solid simulation.

• 2-D turning solid simulation.

• Turning with mill driven tools solid simulation.

10.3.1 Simulation toolbar

The toolbar enables you to control the simulation in this mode.

Setup and Simulation modes

VerifyPlus has two working modes: for Setup and for Simulation.

• Setup mode

In this mode VerifyPlus enables you to specify the scale

and orientation of the model.

• Simulation mode

After setup, switch to the simulation mode. VerifyPlus

shades the prepared block and prepares it for simulation.

In this mode, machining can be simulated with standard

SolidCAM simulation controls. In this mode all controls
for setup of the simulation (scale and orientation) are
disabled. You can turn on/off the visualization of
tool and also specify the tool visualization as either
wireframe or shaded. You can also rotate the display
and define the light controls.

687
10.3.2 Buttons available in the Setup mode

Fit to window

Fits the CAM-Part to the entire screen.

Fit by box

The area you want to view in the simulation screen is defined by box.
Move

Moves the CAM-Part to any point on the screen.

Rotate

Rotates the model.

Zoom

Zooms in/out the image on the screen.

Machine orientation

This button enables you to flip the CAM-Part back and forth by 90
degrees. This option is needed to do realistic simulation on vertical/
horizontal machines.

Vertical machine simulation Horizontal machine simulation

Isometric views buttons

These buttons enable you to view the CAM-Part in the left, right, back or
front isometric views.
View buttons

These buttons enable you to view the CAM-Part in the top, left, back,
bottom, right or front views.
Show/Hide Tool button

Pressing this button enables you to show or hide the tool during simulation.
This option is also available in the simulation mode.

688
 10. Simulation

Wire Tool/Shaded Tool

These buttons enable you to see the tool as a wire frame tool or as a solid
tool.

Shaded tool simulation Wireframe tool simulation

The wireframe tool will always be seen in it entirety, whereas the solid tool
is partially hidden by the CAM-Part.

Show/Hide Tool Holder

This button is active in turning only. When pressed, it allows you to

see the holder of the turning tool.
Section View

This button is active in Turning only. When pressed, it allows you to

see the whole CAM-Part or with a quarter cut away.

Section view mode Normal mode

689
10.3.3 Buttons available in the Simulation mode

Flip
This button flips the CAM-Part back and forth. We need it in the simulation
mode to see other sides of the CAM-Part during the simulation. This option
is useful for multi-sided simulation.

Solid Rotate
This button enables you to rotate the CAM-Part to any position after
simulation without exiting to Setup mode.
To rotate the solid, click on any location inside the Graphics view using the
left button of the mouse, hold the button down and drag the cursor across
the screen. A small inset window at the center of the view will display a
continuous snapshot of the current orientation of the model. When you
release the button, the entire view is updated to show the new orientation
of the model.
The effect of the change in rotation is not permanent, and this change has
to be reset to proceed with the Simulation.

Light control
This command enables you to use the left button of the mouse to change
the light source on the solid model in the Simulation mode.
To change the light source, click on any location inside the Graphics view
using the left button of the mouse, hold the button down and drag the
cursor around within the bounds of the view. A small inset window at the
center of the view will display a snapshot of the current lighting effect on
the model. When you release the button, the entire view is updated to show
the light change effect on the complete model.

The Move light source command is used for visual purposes only. The
effect of the change in light source direction is not permanent. The light
source change has to be reset before proceeding with the Simulation.

690
 10. Simulation

10.4 Host CAD simulation mode

This simulation mode enables you to display the tool path directly on the model in the SolidWorks
window. Since all the View options of SolidWorks are active during the simulation, you can see the
tool path from different perspectives and zoom in on a certain area of the model.

691
10.5 3D simulation mode

This simulation mode enables you to display the tool path on

the 3D model using all the graphic acceleration functionality of
OpenGL. The target model must be defined to use this simulation
mode. For more information on the Target model, see topic 2.4.2.

10.5.1 Simulation toolbar

SolidCAM enables you to use the toolbar to control the simulation in this mode.

The following buttons are available in this toolbar:

• These buttons are used for model scaling, panning and rotating.

• This button enables you to remove the simulated tool path from the screen.

• With this button you can toggle on/off the tool visualization during the simulation.

• This button enables you to switch the graphic screen between three modes:

• Tool path only simulation

• Tool path and model simulation

• Model only simulation

• These buttons enable you to show the model in the

projection views (Left, Right, Top, etc.)

• This button returns the original position and orientation of the model.

• These buttons switch the simulation to 4/1 view mode.

692
 10. Simulation

• This button enables you to show the

Zoom Window with the enlarged image
of the model and tool path fragment
centered on the mouse position. You
can control the zoom factor in the
Zoom Window.

• These buttons enable

you to show the dynamic section of
the model. The section slider will be
displayed in the graphic area. By moving
this slider you can control the section.

10.5.2 Simulation menu

Options

Clear tool path

This command enables you to remove the simulated tool path from the screen.

Show/Hide Tool Path

With this command you can toggle on/off the tool path visualization during the
simulation.

Copy to clipboard

This command enables you to copy the simulation image into the Windows clipboard
for future reference.

693
Settings

Visual properties

The Visual Properties dialog box enables you to edit the visual properties of 3D
Simulation mode.

• Target Model. SolidCAM enables you to choose the color of the Target model
and set its transparency.

• Tool. SolidCAM enables you to choose the color of the tool and set its
transparency.

• Background. SolidCAM enables you to choose the background color.

• Tool path. The Smooth (Wide) lines option enables you to perform smoothing
of the tool path lines (anti-aliasing).

694
 10. Simulation

10.6 SolidVerify simulation mode

This mode enables machining simulation on the solid Solid tool

model. The solid stock model (defined by material
boundaries) is used in this mode. During the machining Solid stock model
simulation process, SolidCAM subtracts the tool
movements (using solid Boolean operations) from the
solid model of the stock. The remaining machined stock is
a solid model that can be dynamically zoomed or rotated.

10.6.1 Simulation control panel

Single color/Color by tool

• Single color

This option enables you to use a single color for all tools
during the simulation process.
• Color by tool

Use this option to define a specific color for each tool.

Click on the Color by tool button to set the colors. The
Simulation Colors dialog box will be displayed.

1. To change the tool color, click on the colored box left to the tool
number.

2. The standard color dialog box of Windows will be displayed.

3. Select the new tool path color for this tool number.

4. Confirm with the OK button.

You can use the Reset to Default button to apply the default
tool colors, as defined in the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.

695
10.6.2 Simulation toolbar

The toolbar below enables you to control the simulation in this mode.

Available buttons:

Fit to window

Fits the CAM-Part to the entire screen.

Fit by box

The area you want to view in the simulation screen is defined by a box.
Move

Moves the CAM-Part to any point on the screen.

Rotate

Rotates the model.

Zoom

Zooms in/out the image on the screen.

Selection mode

The Selection mode enables you to select the solid bodies in the graphic area.
The selected body will be highlighted. The right-click menu is available for each
selected solid body.
For more information on the Selection mode, see topic 10.6.3.
Measurement

The Measurement function enables you to measure distances directly on

the solid bodies in the SolidVerify window. This enables checking the linear
dimensions of the part during simulation.
For more information on the Measurement, see topic 10.6.4.
Light control

This command enables you to use the left button of the mouse to change the
light source on the solid model in the Simulation mode.
To change the light source, click in the graphic area and drag the cursor around
within the bounds of the view.

696
 10. Simulation

View buttons
These icons enable you to show the model in the projection views
(Left, Right, Top etc.).
Render mode
Displays a shaded view of the model.

Hybrid mode
Displays a transparent view of the model.

Wire mode
Displays the CAM-Part and tool movements in wireframe mode.

Hidden line mode

Displays the CAM-Part and the tool movements in hidden-line
wireframe mode.

697
Redraw

Redraws the view.

Show/Hide Machined Stock

Shows/hides the machined stock model.

Show/Hide Target

Shows/hides the target model.

Show/Hide Rest Material

Shows/hides the rest material on the machined stock model.

Show/Hide Split Solids

This option displays the Show/Hide Split solids dialog box.

This dialog box enables you to switch between split solids during the
simulation and enables you to remove the pieces of material that have
been cut away during the machining.
Show/Hide Gouges

Shows gouges of the target model.

Split Gouges

This option displays the Show/Hide Split solids dialog box. This dialog
box enables you to switch between split solids of gouge areas during
the simulation and enables you to check separately the areas of the
gouge.

698
 10. Simulation

Compare target and machined stock

This option enables you to compare the machined stock model and
target model and assign different colors to different rest material areas,
depending on the value of the difference between the machined stock
model and the target model.

1. Set the difference values and colors in the Target

and Machined Stock Compare Options dialog box.
2. Click Execute to show the comparison.
3. Click OK to exit.
Activate/Deactivate initialization of machined stock

The Activate/Deactivate initialization of machined stock button

enables you to calculate and use the Updated Stock model for the
simulation of the chosen operations.

When this option is not chosen, SolidCAM performs the simulation

of chosen operations on the Stock model.

When this option is chosen, SolidCAM performs the simulation of

chosen operations on the Updated Stock model.

For more information on the Updated Stock model, see topic 10.6.5.
Show/Hide Tool

Shows or hides the tool during simulation.

Show/Hide Holder

Shows or hides the tool holder during simulation.

Show/Hide Fixture

Shows or hides the fixture during simulation.

For more information on the Fixtures definition, see topic 5.6.

699
 Save the simulation model

This field enables you to save the current model of the material
removal in STL format.
This field is active only when the Manual method of the Rest
material update are chosen.

For more information on this subject, see topic 2.4.

Load the simulation model

This field enables you to load the previously saved model of the
material removal. The simulation will be performed on the loaded
model.
This field is active only when the Manual method of the
Rest material update are chosen.

For more information on this subject, see topic 2.4.

10.6.3 Selection mode

The Selection mode enables you to select solid bodies in the

SolidVerify simulation window. The selected body will be highlighted.
The right-clicking on the selected solid body provides the following
commands:

View

This submenu enables you to choose the view operation

commands (Fit, Move, Rotate etc.). These commands are
also available in the SolidVerify toolbar.

700
 10. Simulation

Properties

This option displays the Properties dialog box.

This dialog box enables you to edit the visual
properties of the selected solid body.
Color

This button enables you to choose the color of

the selected solid body.
Transparency

This slider enables you to adjust the transparency

level of the selected solid body.
Show Edges (Hybrid mode)

This option enables you to display in the Hybrid mode all the edges of the selected
solid body. The Edge Color option defines the color of the edges.
Volume

This option displays the volume of the selected solid body.

10.6.4 Measurement

The Measurement function enables you to measure distances directly

on the solid bodies in the SolidVerify window. This enables checking the
linear dimensions of the part during simulation.

The Measure dialog box enables you to pick the pair of points directly
on the simulation model. The coordinates of the selected points and the
distance between them will be displayed in the Measure dialog box.

10.6.5 Updated Stock model

SolidCAM calculates the USM according to the SolidVerify Accuracy Settings.

Two modes are available for the USM calculation: Automatic and Manual. The mode can be specified
for the CAM-Part in the SolidVerify tab of the Updated Stock calculation page in the Part Settings
dialog box (see topic 2.10.3).

701
• Automatic mode

In the Automatic mode, SolidCAM automatically calculates the USM for the operations
chosen for the simulation.
To generate USM for the chosen operation, SolidCAM runs the SolidVerify simulation
of all the previous operations in an invisible mode. The resulting USM is saved in *.stf
file in the CAM-Part folder.
During the USM calculation process for the current operation, SolidCAM generates
intermediate USM files for the previous operations and saves them according to the
Updated Stock calculation settings. Saved USM files can be used in further SolidVerify
simulations.
If the USM file for some operation already exists, SolidCAM checks the compliance
between accuracy settings of the USM and SolidVerify Accuracy Settings of the CAM-
Part. If these settings concur, SolidCAM uses the existing USM, otherwise the USM
will be recalculated in accordance with the CAM-Part settings.
The Delete Updated Stock files command in the Settings menu of the SolidVerify
simulation enables you to erase all the USM files of the current CAM-Part.
This command is unavailable in the Manual mode.
• Manual mode

In the Manual mode, SolidCAM enables you to manually save the USM after the
SolidVerify simulation and use it for additional simulations.
When the Manual mode is chosen, the Save Machined stock to file and Load
Machined stock from file buttons are available in the SolidVerify simulation toolbar
(see topic 10.6.2).
When the simulation for a separate operation or for a number of operations is
performed, the Save Machined stock to file button enables you to save the USM in the
*.stf file. The name of the file is the same as the name of the last simulated operation.

SolidCAM enables you to load the USM of previous operation (if it was saved) with
the Load Machined stock from file button and perform the simulation on it.
SolidCAM automatically deletes USM files for the specific operation when:
• the operation was deleted;
• the operation was changed and caused the deletion of the operation
PCode;
• the operation sequence was changed;
• the accuracy parameters were changed;
• the working mode was changed from Manual to Automatic.

702
 10. Simulation

Updated Stock Model interchangeability

Updated Stock models generated for the SolidVerify simulation and for 3D Milling of Rest material
areas are interchangeable. This means that SolidCAM can use USM files generated for the SolidVerify
simulation instead of USM files for 3D Milling and vice versa.
If the USM file for 3D Milling is already generated for some operation it can be used also for
SolidVerify simulation if the Accuracy settings of the USM match the SolidVerify Accuracy Settings
of the CAM-Part.

10.6.6 Simulation menu

This menu is common for SolidVerify, SolidVerify for 3D and
RapidVerify simulation modes.

File
• Open

Open machined stock from FCT

This option enables you to load the machined stock model from the SolidCAM
FCT file (*.fct).
Open machined stock from STL

This option enables you to load the machined stock model from the
Stereolithography file (*.stl).
• Save

Save machined stock to FCT

This option enables you to save the machined stock model to the SolidCAM FCT
file (*.fct).
Save machined stock to STL

This option enables you to save the machined stock model to the Stereolithography
file (*.stl).

Options
• Compare target and machined stock

This option enables you to compare the stock model and target model and assign
different colors to different rest material areas, depending on their tolerance (see topic
2.4).

703
 • Machined Stock Measurements

This option displays the Machined Stock Measurements

dialog box where you can see the dimensions and the
volume of the Machined stock model.

This option is available in the SolidVerify

simulation mode only.

Settings

Visual properties

This option enables you to define colors and transparency for the simulation. The
dialog box will be displayed.
Visual Properties

The Use CAD background color check box enables you to apply the simulation
background color provided by the CAD system.
The Use Gradient background check box enables you to apply the gradient background
to the graphics area. Specify colors for Top Background Color and Bottom Background
Color.

704
 10. Simulation

General
Move tool redraw interval

• Optimize redraw – this option enables you

to expedite the simulation by defining the
number of tool movements until the next
redraw of the display. The default value is
7.

Clash detection

SolidCAM enables you to check the possible

collisions between different components
participating in the machining (tool, tool
holder, machined stock model and fixture)
during the simulation.

• Holders and Stock – this option

enables you to check the possible
collisions between the tool holder and
the machined stock model.

• Tool and Fixture – this option enables

you to check the possible collisions
between the tool and the fixture model.
• Holders and Fixture – this option enables you to check the possible collisions
between the tool holder and the fixture.
Rest Material and Gouge filter

• Remove Rest Material of volume less than: SolidCAM enables you to define the
tolerance of the Rest material visualization.
• Remove Gouges of volume less than: SolidCAM enables you to define the tolerance
of the Gouge areas visualization.

These options are available only in the SolidVerify simulation mode.

Target Model

• Load automatically
When this check box is selected, the target model will be loaded automatically when
the simulation starts. The Target model loading is necessary for the gouge and rest
material calculation in these simulations.

705
 When this check box is not selected, SolidCAM will not load the target model
automatically. This feature enables you to increase the loading speed and the
simulation performance. The Load Target model button will be displayed in
the simulation toolbar. This button enables you to load the Target model.

OpenGL rendering

The functionality is implemented to improve the simulation performance with different

graphic adapters. The OpenGL rendering options enables you to switch between the
software/hardware OpenGL acceleration.
• Software – disables the OpenGL hardware capabilities and enables graphics
rendering using software only. For many graphic cards, this results in slower
performance. Select this option only if instructed to do so by technical
support. This option enables you to solve the visualisation troubles if your
graphic card does not support hardware acceleration, or does not support it
for the current combination of resolution, number of colors, refresh rate,
and so forth.
• Hardware – this option is selected by default. The hardware OpenGL
provided by your graphics adapter will be used. The Use advanced hardware
acceleration option enables you to use hardware acceleration provided by
your graphic adapter.

Stock Splitting

During the machining, the tool cuts off the material pieces. These pieces fall down
from the machining area. This option enables you to automatically determine and
remove such material pieces.

This option is available only in the SolidVerify simulation mode.

706
 10. Simulation

The Stock splitting options enable you to control the process of automatic removal
of cut off pieces.
Do not check for Stock splitting

With this option, SolidCAM does not check the simulation

solid model for splits.
The cut off material pieces can be hidden or removed
manually using the Show/Hide Split solids dialog box.
Automatically remove split solids

With this option, SolidCAM automatically determines stock splitting. When the
split is determined, SolidCAM compares two resulting solids and automatically
removes the smaller one.

Manually select solids to remove

With this option, SolidCAM automatically determines stock splitting and the
following message is displayed:

• Show & Remove. The simulation will be paused and the Show/Hide Split
solids dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box enables you to hide or
remove the cut off material pieces.
• Ignore. The simulation will be continued till the next split is determined.
When the simulation is finished, the Show/Hide Split solids dialog box will be
displayed. This dialog box enables you to hide or remove the cut off material
pieces.
• Stop monitoring. The simulation will be continued till the end without
monitoring of splits.

707
Accuracy

This option is available only in the SolidVerify simulation mode.

Tool facet tolerance

This option controls the precision of the

tool for the simulation.
This parameter defines the precision of the
facets of a tool in mm (or inches). Since this
is an absolute value, the facets tolerance for
the small and large tools will be the same.
This tolerance will influence the quality of
the simulation. The quality of the simulation
will be the same for large tools and small
tools. The speed of the simulation will be
relative to the tool. The simulation of the
larger tool will be slower.
Tool facet type

As well as changing the tolerance used for faceting, the application controls the
manner in which the faceted tool representation approximates the tool by forcing
the representation to be bigger or smaller than the actual tool. For example, if you
want to know whether the tool gouged the target part, then it would be preferable for
SolidVerify to have a tool representation that was guaranteed to lie outside the bounds
of the actual tool.

• Internal – The tool representation lies within the actual tool. The vertices of the
tool representation will lie on the surface of the actual tool and the facets will lie
within the actual tool.
• External – The actual tool lies within the tool representation. The vertices will lie
at distances up to the faceting tolerance from the surface of the actual tool.
• Mixed – This is a combination of Internal and External. The vertices lie outside
the actual tool but parts of the facets may lie inside it. This mode is the default
and should be used unless there is a specific reason for using one of the other
modes as it generates fewer facets and will therefore be faster.
5 Axis

• Linear interpolation. This option enables you to perform the linear interpolation
of 5 axis tool movement. The Max. Interpolation Angle value defines the angular
tolerance for the interpolation.

708
 10. Simulation

Delete Updated Stock files

The Delete Updated Stock files command enables you to erase all the Updated Stock
model files of the current CAM-Part (see topic 10.6.5).

This command is unavailable in the Manual mode.

Tools
• Self-intersections

Many problems occur in simulations if the used solids (Machined Stock model, Target
model or Fixture) are not topologically valid. In particular, in these simulation modes
you are likely to encounter problems with solids that contain self-intersections – that
is, solids which contain pairs of overlapping polygons, or individual polygons with
crossing edges.

Self-intersections can be encountered in the following cases:

• The model (Stock, Target or Fixture) is based on a SolidWorks assembly or

sub-assembly containing a number of components.

• The model (Stock, Target or Fixture) is based on a SolidWorks part

containing a number of disjointed solid bodies.

• The model (Stock, Target or Fixture) is based on a SolidWorks part with

corrupted geometry (gaps, self-intersections etc.).

Such self-intersection problems can be solved by SolidWorks tools.

709
10.7 SolidVerify for 3D simulation mode

This simulation mode is used for visualization of 3D

Milling operations.

SolidVerify for 3D creates a very accurate model of the

machined stock by storing the analytical definitions of all
surfaces that are created during machining. SolidVerify for
3D has been built to enable fast processing of parts with
complex 3D geometry (e.g die/mold) and long tool paths.

The difference between SolidVerify for 3D and the regular SolidVerify is as follows: SolidVerify
works with facet representation of the model and tool; the facet model of the stock model is
created, and the facet model of the tool is subtracted from it for each tool movement. On the other
hand, SolidVerify for 3D works with analytical geometry in order to represent the updated stock.
All the calculations are performed for analytical geometry, the resulting surface mesh is generated
and rendered in order to visualize the cutting process. Since SolidVerify for 3D uses more precise
analytical data, the visualization result is more accurate, especially in close zoom.

Increasing simulation speed and rendering performance

The simulation speed and rendering performance depend on the size of the model in the simulation
view. To increase the performance, it is recommended to zoom out the model before the simulation
and hide the tool and holder. When the simulation reaches a specific area that you want to check in
depth, you can zoom in to this area and perform a high quality rendering of the simulation model.

710
 10. Simulation

10.7.1 Simulation control panel

The Simulation control panel is similar to that of the SolidVerify

simulation mode (see topic 10.6.1).

10.7.2 Rendering of the simulation model

Rendering of the simulation model is performed in two modes:

Facet rendering

In this mode, a draft quality rendering of the model is performed.

This mode is used in the process of view manipulations (zooming,
panning and rotating).

The settings of this mode can be controlled in the Facet

rendering section of the View Settings dialog box. This
dialog box is available by clicking on the View Settings
item in the Settings menu.

The Facet rendering section contains the slider that enables you to control the quality and speed of
the rendering, moving from faster draft quality to slower but higher quality.

711
Pixel rendering

In this mode, a high quality pixel-based rendering of the model is performed.

When you start the simulation by clicking on the Play button, the system calculates the model
rendering and the simulation starts to run. Each time you perform view manipulations on the
model (e.g. zoom or rotate), the simulation stops and the model display changes to draft quality.
When you release the mouse button, the system recalculates the pixel-based model rendering, and
the simulation resumes.

712
 10. Simulation

When the simulation is paused by user request, clicking on the High quality button in the Rendering
progress toolbar located in the graphic area of the simulation window generates a high quality pixel-
based model rendering; the rendering process can be interrupted either by pressing ESC button, or
by manipulating the model (zoom, pan and rotate).

The settings of the Pixel rendering mode can be controlled in the View Settings dialog box.

In this section, you can define the direction of rendering: it can be performed from top to bottom
of the screen or from the screen center outwards. The Multi-stage rendering check box enables you
to display model rendering in stages, from draft quality to high quality.

10.7.3 Simulation toolbar

For information on the Simulation toolbar, see topic 10.6.2.

10.7.4 Simulation menu

For information on the Simulation menu, see topic 10.6.6.

713
10.8 Rest Material simulation mode

This simulation mode enables you to display the model with the rest material before and after each
operation. It also displays existing gouge areas so that it can be prevented in the real machining.
To use this simulation mode, the Stock and Target models must be defined. For more information
about the Stock and Target Models, see topic 2.4.

The Rest Material simulation is performed by SolidVerify (see topic 10.6).

714
 10. Simulation

10.9 RapidVerify simulation mode

The RapidVerify simulation mode enables you to quickly simulate 3-axis tool path containing a great
amount of tool movements. The major application of this mode is verification of the tool path
generated by 3D Milling (see сhapter 7) or SolidCAM HSM operations (see SolidCAM HSM Module
User Guide).

RapidVerify provides high performance because it uses a simplified

representation, as opposed to the solid representation used by
SolidVerify (see topic 10.6). The limitation of this simulation
mode is that the machined part cannot have any concavities in the
Z-direction – in other words, for any X, Y point on the machined
part there is only one Z-value. Therefore, multi-sided 4- and 5-axis
machining cannot be simulated using RapidVerify. The shaped
tools are also not supported; only end mills, bull-nosed, ball-nosed
and taper tools can be used in the operations that are simulated
with RapidVerify.

10.9.1 RapidVerify control panel

The RapidVerify data structure is based on a grid of material height values. The resolution of this
grid can be modified by the Grid Resolution slider. Greater resolution will improve verification
accuracy but at the expense of slower graphical update and increased memory usage.
Using the Speed-up Animation option, SolidCAM enables you to increase the simulation speed by
simplifying the intermediate simulation images. When this option is turned on, SolidCAM merges a
specified number of facets into a single one; the Facet Merging parameter enables you to define the
number of neighbouring facets that are merged together. The simplified model is displayed during
the simulation, resulting in accelerated rendering and refreshing. When the simulation is paused
or finished, the non-simplified machined stock is displayed. The simplified image is also displayed
during pan, zoom or rotate operations.
There are two possible scenarios for using the RapidVerify simulation mode:

1. For the fastest verification, use Turbo mode and click on the right mouse button (or
rotate/pan) to get intermediate updated stock; you do not need to use the Speed-Up
Animation option in this scenario.

2. For regular verification, set the Speed-up Animation option to a higher number for Facet
Merging; you will see a continuous verification on a not so clear model. Whenever you
stop the verification you will see an accurate model representation.

715
10.9.2 Updated Stock Model

If you want to perform the RapidVerify simulation on a specific operation, starting from the
Updated Stock model (see topic 10.6.5) of the previous operations, you must make sure to perform
the SolidVerify simulation of the previous operations. Otherwise, RapidVerify will perform the
simulation on the original stock of the CAM-Part.

10.9.3 Simulation control panel

Single color/Color by tool

• Single color

This option enables you to use a single color for all

tools during the simulation process.
• Color by tool

Use this option to define a specific color for each tool.

Click on the Color by tool button to set the colors. The
Simulation Colors dialog box will be displayed.

1. To change the tool color, click on the colored box left to the tool
number.

2. The standard color dialog box of Windows will be displayed.

3. Select the new tool path color for this tool number.

4. Confirm with the OK button.

You can use the Reset to Default button to apply the default
tool colors, as defined in the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.

716
 10. Simulation

10.9.4 Simulation toolbar

The toolbar below enables you to control the simulation in this mode.

Available buttons:

Fit to window

Fits the CAM-Part to the entire screen.

Fit by box

The area you want to view in the simulation screen is defined by a

box.
Move

Moves the CAM-Part to any point on the screen.

Rotate

Rotates the model.

Zoom

Zooms in/out the image on the screen.

Light control

This command enables you to use the left button of the mouse to
change the light source on the solid model in the Simulation mode.
To change the light source, click on any location inside the Graphics
view using the left button of the mouse, hold the button down and
drag the cursor around within the bounds of the view.
View buttons

These icons enable you to show the model in the projection views
(Left, Right, Top etc.).
Redraw

Redraws the view.

Show/Hide Machined Stock

Shows/hides the machined stock model

Show/Hide Target

Shows/hides the target model.

717
 Compare target and machined stock

This option enables you to compare the machined stock model and
target model and assign different colors to different rest material
areas, depending on the value of the difference between the
machined stock model and the target model.

1. Set the difference values and colors in the Target

and Machined Stock Compare Options dialog box.

2. Click Execute to show the comparison.

3. Click OK to exit.
Activate/Deactivate initialization of machined stock

The Activate/Deactivate initialization of machined stock button

enables you to calculate and use the Updated Stock model for the
simulation of the chosen operations.
When this option is not chosen, SolidCAM performs the simulation
of chosen operations on the Stock model.
When this option is chosen, SolidCAM performs the simulation of
chosen operations on the Updated Stock model.
For more information on the Updated Stock model, see topic 10.6.5.

Show/Hide Tool

Shows or hides the tool during simulation.

Show/Hide Holder

Shows or hides the tool holder during simulation.

Show/Hide Fixture

Shows or hides the fixture during simulation.

For more information on the Fixtures definition, see topic 5.6.

10.9.5 Simulation menu

For information on the Simulation menu, see topic 10.6.6.

718
 10. Simulation

10.10 Machine Simulation

This simulation mode enables you to perform the machining simulation and tool path verification
using the kinematics of the CNC-machine.

The user interface of the Machine simulation window is divided into the following areas:
Simulation menu Simulation toolbars

Machine view

Control windows and tabs

• Machine view

This area is the graphic area where you can see your CNC-machine and the machined
part. All the tool movements along the tool path and motions of the CNC-machine
components are displayed in this area.

• Simulation control

This area is divided into the following elements:

• Simulation menu;
• Simulation windows and tabs;

• Simulation toolbars.

719
10.10.1 Simulation menu

The Windows-style menu located above the graphic area contains the following sets of simulation
control options:

File

This menu item contains the file managing commands:

• Load NC File

When you perform simulation in the Machine simulation mode, SolidCAM saves all
the simulation data in the Output.sim file located in the CAM-Part folder. The Load
NC file option enables you to load an existing NC file containing the simulation data.

• Create Presentation

This option enables you to create a self-extracting executable file containing the current
CNC-machine and NC file. When you run the generated executable file, it unpacks
in the system temporary folder and displays the standalone MachSimPresentation
window.

720
 10. Simulation

This window provides you with the CNC-

machine data, tool path and all the tools
to run and control the simulation and
verification of the tool path. Using this
file, the simulation can be displayed on
any computer even without SolidCAM
being installed.

When you choose this command, the

Save As dialog box is displayed. In this
dialog box, you have to enter the name
for the presentation file and specify its
location.

To add a title to your presentation, select the Set caption check box and enter the title
in the relevant text box.

To enable the possibility to run the presentation file on all Windows platforms, select
the Ensure support for all Windows platforms check box.

The Create Presentation option is also available by clicking on the button

in the Setting toolbar.

• Create Simulation Report

This option enables you to save a

simulation report file in the XML format.
When you choose this command, the
Save As dialog box is displayed. In this
dialog box, you have to enter the name
for the report file and specify its location.

The generated report file contains the

information about the simulation running
time and the memory it requires, the
measurement units, collision checking,
the tools used, etc.

721
View

This menu item contains the commands responsible for the

display of the simulation model in the Machine view area.

Fullscreen
This command enables you to extend the
simulation window to the entire screen size.

Fit to screen
This command enables you to adjust the
simulation model size to the graphic area.

This option is also available as the button in the View toolbar.

Standard Views

This submenu contains commands that enable you to rotate the simulation model to
the appropriate standard view.

• Isometric: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the
isometric view.

• Top: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the top side
view.
• Front: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the front
side view.
• Right: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the right
side view.

• Bottom: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the
bottom side view.

• Left: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the left side
view.

• Back: this button enables you to rotate the simulation model into the back
side view.

These commands are also available as

buttons in the View toolbar.

722
 10. Simulation

Show/Hide

This submenu contains commands that enable you to control the display of various
machine and model components in the Machine view area.

• Tool path: this button enables you to toggle the display of the tool path in the
graphic area of the simulation.

• Tool: this button enables you to toggle the display of the tool path in the graphic
area of the simulation.

• Workpiece: this button enables you to toggle the display of the workpiece in the
graphic area of the simulation.

• Stock: this button enables you to toggle the display of the stock model in the
process of machining.

When the stock is displayed, you can

perform solid verification of the material
cutting process in the SolidVerify mode
integrated into the Machine simulation.
The simulation is performed by dynamic
subtraction of the tool solid model (using
solid Boolean operations) from the stock
solid model.

To perform solid verification on

the stock model, select the Enable
verification check box in the
Machine simulation page of the
SolidCAM Settings dialog box.

• Initial Stock: this button enables you to toggle the display of the stock initial
state before the machining.

• Machine Housing: this button enables you to toggle the display of the machine
housing in the graphic area of the simulation.

These commands are also available as buttons in the Visibility toolbar.

723
Focus

This submenu contains commands that enable you to directly zoom and observe
simulation model elements in stationary position.

• Tool Focus: this button enables you to display the tool in a close view.

• Workpiece Focus: this button enables you to display the machined workpiece
in a close view.

• Machine Focus: this button enables you to display the entire machine model
in a close view.

These commands are also available as buttons in the Focus toolbar.

Simulation mode

This submenu contains the following modes:

• Toolpath mode: the tool path is displayed during the simulation.

• Material mode: the material removal is displayed during the simulation.

• Kinematic mode: the machine kinematics is displayed without the tool path
and material removal.

These modes are also available as buttons in the Simulation modes

toolbar.

724
 10. Simulation

Toolpath rendering

This submenu contains commands that enable you to choose the mode of tool path
display.

• Tool center/Tool tip: these commands enable you to display the tool path
relative to the center or to the tip of the tool.

• Display All Operations/Display Current Operation: these commands

enable you to display the tool path for all of the part operations all at once or
only for the current one.

• Follow/Trace/Segment: these commands enable you to display the

already machined tool path (Follow), the one to be machined (Trace) or the
segments of the tool path which are currently being machined (Segment).

• Tool Vector/Toolpath points: these commands enable you to display the

vectors of the tool tilting relative to the machined surface (Tool Vector) and the
tool path by sequence of points (Toolpath points).

• Leads/Links: these commands enable you to toggle the display of the

tool approach and linking movements.

These modes are also available as buttons in the Toolpath rendering

toolbar.

Machine

This menu item contains the following commands:

• New Machine: this command enables you to

create a new machine definition.

• Open Machine File: this command enables you

to load a different existing machine.

• Edit Machine: this command enables you to edit

the current machine definition by right-clicking on
an element to add/erase tree elements or display the
machine properties.

725
 • Save Machine: this command enables you to save the edited machine definition.

• Save Machine As: this command enables you to save the edited machine definition
under a different name and/or in a different folder.

These commands are also available as buttons in the Machine tab.

Control

This menu item contains commands that enable you to

control the progress of the simulation.

• Run: this command enables you to start

the simulation.

• Pause: this command enables you to pause

the simulation.

• Stop: this command enables you to stop

the simulation.

• Step Back/Step Forward: these

commands enable you to perform the
simulation in the step-by-step mode.

726
 10. Simulation

• Previous Operation/Next Operation: these commands enable you to switch to the

previous/next operations.

• Fast Forward: this command enables you to perform the simulation in the system
memory and display the final result.

• Restart: this command enables you to start the simulation from the very beginning.

• Loop: this command enables you simulate the operations in a closed cycle.

• Speed Slider: this command enables you

to display the Simulation Speed dialog box.
This dialog box contains the slider to control
the simulation speed.

These commands are also available as buttons in the Control toolbar.

Settings

This menu item contains the commands that enable you to manage the simulation settings and to
adjust the simulation interface in accordance with your requirements.

Simulation Properties

This command displays the Simulation Properties dialog box that enables you to edit
the simulation settings.

727
This dialog box contains the following sets of parameters for managing the Machine
simulation settings:

Simulation Process

This tab contains options that affect the simulation when it is running.

The Stop conditions section enables you to stop the machining in the
following cases:
• On tool change: whenever the tool changes;
• After ... moves: after a certain number of moves;
• Height relative to workpiece greater than ...: when the tool exceeds a
certain threshold above the workpiece;
• At operation ... block ID ...: in a certain operation, in a certain move
number. When the required operation name is chosen from the
list, the total number of moves of this operation is automatically
displayed in the Block ID edit box; this number can be edited. The
move numbers are displayed in the Pos column of the Move List
window.

The Notification section enables you to turn on the display of notifications

in case of the following events reported:
• Geometrical Collision: collision between tool and machine geometry;

• Material Collision: collision between tool and workpiece;

• Axis Limits Overrun: when one of the moving parts of the CNC-
machine exceeds a limit defined in the CNC-machine definition;
• Axis Value Mismatch: when wrong data is detected, e.g. wrong tool
dimensions.

728
 10. Simulation

The Miscellaneous section contains the Enable geometry collision

checking when CutSim is used check box that activates the collision
checking on the geometry in the material removal mode.

The Simulation section contains the summary of the simulation data.

Graphics and Background

This tab contains options for setting the background color of the
simulation window, for display of Coordinate System and ruler, and the
slider to control the visualization speed.

Tool Path Backplot

This tab contains parameters of tool path visualization.

729
 The Segment length option enables you to set the length of tool path
segments displayed when running the simulation in the Follow/Trace modes.

The Axis vector length option enables you to set the length of the tool
tilting vector when running the simulation in the Tool Vector mode.
This length can be set as a value or as the radius of the tool used for the
operation. The colored rectangle on the right enables you to set the color
of the vectors visualization.

The Tool path points option enables you to set the size (in pixels) of the
tool path points when running the simulation in the Tool path points mode.
The colored rectangle on the right enables you to set the color of the
points visualization.

Hot Keys

This command displays the HotKey Settings

dialog box that enables you to define hot keys and
mouse settings for the simulation control.

Choose an appropriate operation in the Keys

settings or Mouse settings section and assign the
required combination of the keyboard keys and
mouse buttons.

Toolbars

This submenu lists the simulation control toolbars

that can be displayed or hidden by clicking on each
item in this list. The Customize option enables you
to customize the toolbars and separate commands
that can be used during the simulation.

730
 10. Simulation

Windows

This submenu lists the simulation windows and

tabs that enable you to define and control the CNC-
machine and other data used for the simulation.
These windows are displayed in tab view to the
right from the graphic area (the Report, Machine
and Analysis tabs and the Move List window) or
at the bottom of the main SolidWorks window
(the Progress bar and the Axis Control window).

Layouts

This submenu lists the simulation window layout

options.

The Reset to default option resets the window

layout to default.

The All Windows option displays all windows and

tabs listed in the Windows submenu.

The No Windows option hides all windows and

tabs listed in the Windows submenu. Only the
graphic area is displayed.

The Save to file option enables you to save the current layout scheme as
a *.layout file in the machine definition folder.

The Load from file option enables you to load a previously saved layout file.

Application Look

This submenu enables you to adapt the machine

simulation interface to the color schemes of
commonly used applications such as MS Office,
Windows XP, etc.

731
Help

This menu item displays the information and help issues

regarding the Machine simulation feature.

10.10.2 Simulation windows

The simulation windows and tabs enable you to define and control the CNC-machine data and other
parameters used for the simulation. Each window or tab can be undocked from its default location
by clicking on its caption and dragging, and docked at your convenience around the Machine view
area.
Machine tab

Machine view

Progress bar

Axis Control
window Move list tab

Machine

This tab displays the CNC-machine definition tree and enables

you to define the CNC-machine and manage the CNC-machine
components displayed in the graphic area.

732
 10. Simulation

The buttons in the tab toolbar enable you to manage existing machine definitions and add new ones.

• New Machine: this button enables you to create a new machine definition.

• Open Machine File: this button enables you to load a different existing machine.

• Save Machine: this button enables you to save the edited machine definition.

• Save Machine As: this button enables you to save the edited machine definition under
a different name and/or in a different folder.

• Edit Machine: this button enables you to edit the current machine definition by right-
clicking on an element to add/erase tree elements or display the machine properties.

• Info: this button toggles the display of the information about the listed machine
components.

The CNC-machine definition tree displays all components of the CNC-machine used for the
machining of the current CAM-part. The tree displays all the structure of the CNC-machine and
the relation between all the CNC-machine components.

In the simulation mode, SolidCAM enables you to control the

visual properties of the CNC-machine components using the
right-click menu available on each component.

• Properties

The Appearance dialog box is displayed. The

Visible check box enables you to control the
visibility of the chosen component of the CNC-
machine.

• Show/Hide

This option enables you to show/hide the chosen

component of the CNC-machine.

• Transparent/Opaque

This option enables you to control the transparency of the chosen component of the
CNC-machine.

733
 • Choose color

This option enables you to choose the color of the chosen component using the
standard color selection dialog box.

Report

This tab lists the operations with tools used and all events that
happen during simulation. The items in the report are listed in a
tree format structure as operations followed by the tool number
and the tool definition. The following event types can be reported:

• Value underflows and overflows;

• Collision events.

Move list

This window displays the lines of the GCode as the operation is

running on; the active GCode line is highlighted.

SolidCAM enables you to display coordinates relative to the CAM-

Part coordinate system or to the CNC-machine origin, depending
on the Machine simulation settings (see topic 12.14).

The slider to the right enables you to navigate through the GCode.

The Collision and Out of limits icons

appear to the left of the GCode string in
case of an appropriate event.

734
 10. Simulation

Axis Control

This window enables you to control the tool location manually

using the axis sliders. It displays the current coordinates of the
CNC-machine. Each axis has a control slider that enables you to
perform manual movements within the specified limits.

The manual axis control cannot be used

when the simulation is in progress. Stop the
simulation to enable it.

Right-clicking on the coordinate sliders displays the Change slider

position dialog box that enables you to enter the exact value for the
current coordinate.

Progress

The Progress bar shows the advance of the simulation process. It consists of a slider that moves as
the simulation is running on and a colored stripe that represents different tools by different colors.
The colors of the tools are also displayed in the Report tab.

Analysis

This tab contains color representation of various elements of

the simulation to facilitate the visualization. Choose an element
from the list to display its analysis in colors.

You can change the color for each item by double-clicking on

the corresponding rectangle and choose the desired color from
the displayed Windows-style Color dialog box. Click on the
Refresh button in order for the change to take effect.

735
• Tool number

When you choose this element from the list, the table below
displays the tool path color scheme according to the tools
used in part operations. The tools are numbered in the
corresponding column and represented by rectangles of
different colors in the leftmost column.

• Operation number

When you choose this element from the list, the table
below displays the tool path color scheme according to
the part operations. The operations are numbered in the
corresponding column and represented by rectangles of
different colors in the leftmost column.

736
 10. Simulation

• Tool path sequence

When you choose this element from the list, the tool path is
represented in a gradient color scale according to the progress
of machining. This scale enables you to easily identify the
start point and the end point of the machining, the cutting
method (e.g. Zigzag or One way), the cut order (e.g. from
outside to inside), and other machining parameters.

• B axis value scale/C axis value scale

When you choose this element from the list, the tool path
is represented in a gradient color scale according to tilting
angles of the machine rotation axis. This scale enables you to
identify the rotation axis angle range used in the operation,
the rotation angle used for machining of specific areas, and
limit overruns that occur during the simulation. The angle
range values are displayed in the corresponding columns of
the table.

737
 You can define a specific angle range to view the
tool path in the corresponding colors. Click on the
Adjust button in the toolbar to the right from
the options list. The Adjust angle scale dialog box
is displayed. This dialog box enables you to enter the
minimal and maximal values for the angle range and
return to default values, if necessary.

Click on the Refresh button in order for the

change to take effect.

• B axis reversal/C axis reversal

When you choose this element from the list, the tool path
is represented in colors according to change of direction
of the machine rotation axes. These colors enable you to
identify the areas where possible contouring errors have
negative influence on the machining result (surface quality).
Every time when a rotation axis changes its direction, the
tool path segment changes its color.

738
 10. Simulation

• B axis value change/C axis value change

When you choose this element from the list, the tool path
is represented in a gradient color scale according to change
of tilting angles of the machine rotation axis. This scale
enables you to identify the rotation speed range used in the
operation, the rotation speed used for machining of specific
areas and determine the areas where machine speed limits
are reached.

You can define a specific angle range to view the tool path in the corresponding colors
by click on the Adjust button and entering the values into the Adjust angle scale
dialog box. Click on the Refresh button in order for the change to take effect.

• Linear axis reversal

When you choose this element from the list, the tool path
is represented in colors according to change of direction
of the machine linear axes. Every time when a linear axis
changes its direction, the tool path segment changes its color.

739
 You can define a threshold angle value for
the axis reversal to view the tool path in the
corresponding colors by clicking on the Adjust
button and entering the values into the
Linear axis threshold angle dialog box.

Click on the Refresh button in order for the change to take effect.

• Orientation change

When you choose this element from the list, the tool path
is represented in a gradient color scale according to change
of orientation of the machine rotation axes. This scale
enables you to identify the rotation speed range used in the
operation, the rotation speed used for machining of specific
areas and determine the areas where machine speed limits
are reached.

Toolbar buttons

• Refresh:
this button enables you to update the simulation when changes
have been made in the analysis settings.

• Add: this button enables you to add values into the table.

• Remove: this button enables you to remove selected values from the
table.

• Adjust: this button enables you to set limitations for specific parameters
to display the tool path in different colors according to the defined settings.

• Auto adjust: when you click on this button, the system automatically sets
the parameter ranges for the defined settings.

740
 10. Simulation

10.10.3 Simulation toolbars

The simulation control provides you with a number of toolbars enabling you to control the
simulation process and the model visualization in the graphic area. The arrow near each toolbar
enables you to customize this toolbar by displaying or hiding certain buttons.

View

The buttons of this toolbar enable you to rotate the simulation model to the appropriate view
(Isometric, Right, Front, etc.).

These buttons are also available as commands in the Standard Views

submenu of the View menu (see topic 10.10.1).

Visibility

The buttons of this toolbar enable you to control the display of various machine and model
components in the graphic area.

These buttons are also available as commands in the Show/Hide submenu of

the View menu (see topic 10.10.1).

Simulation modes

This submenu contains the modes of simulation model display.

These buttons are also available as commands in the Simulation mode

submenu of the View menu (see topic 10.10.1).

741
Focus

The buttons of this toolbar enable you to directly zoom and observe elements such as tool,
workpiece and machine in stationary position.

These buttons are also available as commands in the Focus submenu of the
View menu (see topic 10.10.1).

Tool path rendering

The buttons of this toolbar enable you to choose the mode of tool path display.

These buttons are also available as commands in the Focus submenu of the
Viewmenu (see topic 10.10.1).

Control

The buttons of this toolbar enable you to control the progress of the simulation.

These buttons are also available as commands in the Control menu (see
topic 10.10.1).

Settings

The buttons of this toolbar enable you to manage the simulation settings and to adjust the simulation
interface in accordance with your requirements.

742
 10. Simulation

• The Create Presentation button enables you to create a self-extracting executable file
containing the current CNC-machine and NC file (see topic 10.10.1).
• The Hot Keys button displays the HotKey Settings dialog box that enables you to define
hot keys and mouse settings for the simulation control (see topic 10.10.1).
• The Simulation Properties button displays the Simulation Properties dialog box that
enables you to edit the simulation settings (see topic 10.10.1).

10.10.4 CNC-machine definition parameters

SolidCAM enables you to define a number of CNC-machine parameters in the MAC file. These
parameters enable you to take into account peculiar properties of the CNC-machine. These
parameters are used on the different stages of the tool path calculations.
The following parameters must be defined in the MAC file:

CNC-machine kinematic type

The kinematic_type parameter enables you to define the type of kinematics of the CNC-
machine. The following types are supported by SolidCAM according to the rotational axes location
on the CNC-machine:
• Head-Head

In this type of CNC-machines, both rotational axes are mounted on the head of the
CNC-machine.
Rotation axes

Example:

kinematic_type = HEAD_HEAD

743
• Table-Table

In this type of CNC-machines, both rotational axes are mounted on the CNC-machine
table.

Rotation axes

Example:

kinematic_type = TABLE_TABLE_NEW

744
 10. Simulation

• Head-Table

In this type of CNC-machines, one rotational axis is mounted on the head and the
other is located on the table of the CNC-machine.

Rotation axes

Example:

kinematic_type = HEAD_TABLE

When the kinematic_type parameter is not specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM
uses the following default value:

kinematic_type = HEAD_HEAD

745
Spindle direction

The spindle_direction parameter enables you to define the Spindle direction

direction of the spindle axis of the CNC-machine. The direction is is the Z-axis
defined by a vector, e.g. when the spindle is parallel to the Z-axis,
the vector is (0,0,1).

Example:

spindle_direction = 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000

When the spindle_direction parameter is not specified in the

MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default value:

spindle_direction = 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000

Rotational axes direction

The rotate_axis_dir1 and rotate_axis_dir2 parameters enable you to define the direction
of the first and the second rotational axes, respectively.

Example:

rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000

rotate_axis_dir2 = 0.0000 -1.0000 0.0000

The direction of the rotational axes is defined according

to the tool movements around the axis. The right hand
Rotation axis
rule is used for the direction definition (the fingers of
the right hand are curled in the positive tool rotation Rotation
direction, and the thumb indicates the positive direction direction
of the rotational axis). Correspondingly, when the
rotational axis is pointing away from the observer, the
positive tool rotation direction is clockwise; when the
rotational axis is pointing towards the observer, the
positive tool rotation direction is counterclockwise.

746
 10. Simulation

If the rotation around the axis is performed by the spindle, the direction
of the rotational axis is defined as shown.

In some cases, the rotation around the axis is not performed by the
spindle. For example, in CNC-machines of the Table-Table type, the
rotation is performed by the rotary table and tilting is performed by the +
tilting table. In this case, the direction of the rotational axes is defined
according to the virtual spindle rotation around the axis as shown +
below. The negative rotation of the tilting table causes the positive tool -
tilting relative to the rotational axis.
+ Rotation axis

- +
-

+ +

Generally, the first rotational axis is the axis of rotation around the spindle direction.
E.g. when the spindle direction of the Table-Table machine is parallel to the Z-axis, the first rotational
axis has to be axis of the rotation around the Z-axis. The following parameters have to be defined:

spindle_direction = 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000

rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000

The rotate_axis_dir1 parameter defines the positive direction of the rotational axis. The
direction is determined with the right hand rule according to the positive direction of the rotation
of the CNC-machine part performing the rotation. In this case, the positive direction of the rotary
table rotation is clockwise. Therefore, using the right hand rule, the axis direction is the negative
Z-direction (0, 0, -1).

747
The first and the second rotational axis depend on the CNC-machine kinematic type:
• Table-Table

In this case, the first rotational axis performing the rotation around the spindle axis is
mounted on the second rotational axis. The second rotational axis is mounted on the
CNC-machine table.

Spindle direction

Second rotation axis

First rotation axis

• Head-Table Spindle direction

In this case, the first rotational axis Second rotation axis

performing the rotation around
the spindle axis is mounted on the
table. The second rotational axis is
mounted on the head of the CNC- First rotation axis
machine.

748
 10. Simulation

• Head-Head

In this case, the first rotational axis performing the rotation around the spindle axis
is mounted on the CNC-machine head. The second rotational axis is mounted on the
first rotational axis.

Spindle direction

First rotation axis Second rotation axis

When the rotate_axis_dir1 and rotate_axis_dir2 parameters are not

specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default values:

rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000

rotate_axis_dir2 = 0.0000 -1.0000 0.0000

Rotational axes names

The first_rot_axis_name and second_rot_axis_name parameters enable you to define

the names of the rotational axes that will be used in the Machine simulation.

Example:

first_rot_axis_name = C

second_rot_axis_name = B

When the first_rot_axis_name and second_rot_axis_name parameters are not specified

in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default values:

first_rot_axis_name = C

second_rot_axis_name = B

749
GCode output in machine/part coordinates

The gcode_part_coordinate parameter enables you to choose either CAM-Part or CNC-

machine Coordinate System to be used for the GCode output. This parameter influences the
orientation of the Coordinate System axes when the part rotation is performed.

When the gcode_part_coordinate option is activated (the value is Y), the GCode is generated
using the CAM-Part Coordinate System. When the part is rotated, the CAM-Part Coordinate System
is rotated together with the part, therefore the coordinates of any point on the part are always the
same, regardless of the part rotation.

X1,Y1,Z1 X1,Y1,Z1
Z
Y Y
Z
X
X

When the gcode_part_coordinate option is not activated (the value is N), the GCode is
generated using the CNC-machine Coordinate System. This coordinate system is fixed and not
rotated with the part, therefore the coordinates of the part points are changed when the part is
rotated.

X1,Y1,Z1 X2,Y2,Z2

Z Y Z Y

X X

750
 10. Simulation

Example:

gcode_part_coordinate = Y

When the gcode_part_coordinate parameter is not specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses
the following default value:

gcode_part_coordinate = N

Base points of rotational axes

Using the rot_axis_base_pnt1 and rot_axis_base_pnt2 variables, SolidCAM enables you

to define the base points of the first and the second rotational axes. The base points define the
location of the rotational axes relative to the CNC-machine origin.

Example:

rot_axis_base_pnt1 = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

rot_axis_base_pnt2 = 0.0000 0.0000 -254.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 -10.0000

The first three numbers define the XYZ location of the base point for
Metric settings; the last three numbers define the XYZ location of the base
point for Inch settings. The Metric and Inch settings are divided by comma

Generally, for Table-Table and Head-Table CNC-machines, the origin point is located in the
intersection of the first rotational axis and the top face of the table. In this case, the location of the
base point of the first rotational axis is (0,0,0).
Second rotation First rotation
axis axis

Second rotation
axis First rotation
Origin axis
Z
Y Origin
Z
X Y

Z-value of the
rot_axis_base_pnt2
parameter

751
The rot_axis_base_pnt2 defines the location of the base point of the second rotational axis.

For CNC-machines of the Head-Head type, the definition of the base points is different. For this
type of CNC-machines, the origin point is generally located on the bottom spindle face in the
intersection with the spindle axis. The distances for the base point of the second rotational axis
are measured from this origin point. The distance for the base point of the first rotational axis is
measured from the base point of the second rotational axis.
First rotation
axis

rot_axis_base_pnt2
defined relative
to the origin
rot_axis_base_pnt1
Second rotation First base defined relative to
axis point rot_axis_base_pnt2

Second base
point Y

Origin
X Origin
When the rot_axis_base_pnt1 and rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameters are not specified in
the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default values:

rot_axis_base_pnt1 = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

rot_axis_base_pnt2 = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

Translation axis limits

The trans_axis_min_limit and trans_axis_max_limit parameters enable you to define

the limits of linear (translational) movements along the XYZ axes.

Example:

trans_axis_min_limit = -100000.0000 -200000.0000 -50000.0000

trans_axis_max_limit = 100000.0000 150000.0000 60000.0000

752
 10. Simulation

The limits are defined relative to the origin point. Using these limits you can define a virtual 3D box
of the working area of the CNC-machine.

trans_axis_max_limit

Working area
Origin
trans_axis_min_limit

Z
Y

When the trans_axis_min_limit and trans_axis_max_limit parameters are not

specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default values:

trans_axis_min_limit = -100000.0000 -100000.0000 -100000.0000

trans_axis_max_limit = 100000.0000 100000.0000 100000.0000

753
Rotational axis limits

The rot_axis_min_limit0 and rot_axis_max_limit0 parameters enable you to limit

the rotation around the first rotational axis. The rot_axis_min_limit1 and rot_axis_
max_limit1 parameters enable you to limit the rotation around the second rotational axis. The
parameter value defines the limit rotation angle in degrees.
rot_axis_min_limit0

Second rotation
axis
rot_axis_max_limit0

rot_axis_min_limit1

rot_axis_max_limit1

First rotation
axis
Example:

rot_axis_min_limit0 = -210.0000

rot_axis_min_limit1 = -30.0000

rot_axis_max_limit0 = 210.0000

rot_axis_max_limit1 = 130.0000

When these parameters are not specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default
values:

rot_axis_min_limit0 = -100000.0000

rot_axis_min_limit1 = -100000.0000

rot_axis_max_limit0 = 100000.0000

rot_axis_max_limit1 = -100000.0000

754
 10. Simulation

Coordinate output parameters

These parameters have effect on the coordinate output in GCode, when the GCode is generated
using the CNC-Machine coordinate system (gcode_part_coordinate = Y).

Use H Length (use_tool_h_length)

This parameter enables you to consider the tool H Length value in the coordinate
output.

Example: use_tool_h_length = Y

When this option is not activated (the value is set to N), the
H Length is not considered for the coordinate output in the
GCode; in this case the tool path output is performed for
the tool tip.

When this option is activated (the value is set to Y), the

specified H Length value is considered for the coordinate
output in the GCode; in this case the coordinate output
is performed for the origin point, located on the bottom
spindle face, at the intersection with the spindle axis.

Tool tip

H Length
Origin

When the use_tool_h_length parameter is not specified in the MAC file,

SolidCAM uses the following default value:

use_tool_h_length = Y

755
Use shifting (use_part_shifting)

This parameter enables you to consider the shifting of the CAM-Part Coordinate
system, relative to the CNC-Machine Coordinate system, when generating the
coordinate output.

Example: use_part_shifting = Y

When this option is not activated (the value is set to N), the specified shifting is not
considered for the coordinate output in the GCode; the tool path output is performed
relative to the CAM-Part Coordinate System.

CAM-Part
Coordinate System

756
 10. Simulation

When this option is activated (the value is set to Y), the shifting defined by the Center
of Rot. Origin based on Machine Home parameter in the CoordSys Data dialog box (see
topic 2.2.7) is considered for the coordinate output in the GCode. The tool path output
is performed relative to the CNC-machine Coordinate System.

CNC-machine
Coordinate System

Z
Y

When the use_part_shifting parameter is not specified in the MAC file,

SolidCAM uses the following default value:

use_part_shifting = Y

757
Use base points of rotational axes

(use_rot_axis_base_point1, use_rot_axis_base_point2)

These parameters enable you to consider the base points of the rotational axes, when
generating the coordinate output.

Example: use_rot_axis_base_point1 = Y

use_rot_axis_base_point2 = Y

First base
point

Second base
point

Origin

Tool tip
When this option is not activated (the value is set to N), the base point coordinates are
not considered in the calculation. In this case the tool path output is performed either
for the tool tip (if the use_tool_h_length option is not activated) or for the origin
point located on the bottom spindle face, at the intersection with the spindle axis (if the
use_tool_h_length option is activated).

When the option is activated (the value is set to Y), the base point coordinates, defined
by the rot_axis_base_pnt1/rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameters, are considered
during the tool path calculation. In this case the tool path output is performed for
the CNC-machine base points defined by the rot_axis_base_pnt1/rot_axis_
base_pnt2 parameters.

When the use_rot_axis_base_pnt1/use_rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameters

are not specified in the MAC file, SolidCAM uses the following default value:

use_rot_axis_base_point1 = Y

use_rot_axis_base_point2 = Y

758
 10. Simulation

Machine simulation

The machine_simulation parameter enables you to define the name of the CNC-machine
model used for the Machine simulation.

Example:

machine_simulation = 5AxDMU50ev
The parameter value defines the folder where the appropriate model of the CNC-machine is stored.
This folder is located in the Directory for Machine simulation definitions defined in the Machine
simulation settings.

Consider that the Directory for Machine simulation definitions is the following:
C:\Program Files\SolidCAM2009\Tables\Metric\MachSim

In this case, the data of the CNC-machine 5AxDMU50ev mentioned in the example above is located
in the following folder:
C:\Program Files\SolidCAM2009\Tables\Metric\MachSim\5AxDMU50ev

Example of CNC-machine definition

The following example is the section of a CNC-machine definition file. This section defines the
parameters of the Okuma CNC-machine used for the Sim. 5 Axis machining and Machine simulation.
;Sim Five axis
kinematic_type = TABLE_TABLE
spindle_direction = 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000
rotate_axis_dir2 = 0.0000 -1.0000 0.0000
rot_axis_base_pnt1 = 0.000 0.000 -15.398, 0.000 0.000 -6.000
rot_axis_base_pnt2 = 0.000 0.000 -100.353, 0.000 0.000 0.000
abs_machine_coord = N
first_rot_axis_name = C
second_rot_axis_name = B
rot_axis_min_limit0 = -100000.0000
rot_axis_min_limit1 = -20.0000
rot_axis_max_limit0 = 1000.0000
rot_axis_max_limit1 = 130.0000
machine_simulation = okuma12

759
10.10.5 CNC-machine model definition

The Machine Simulation is performed on the model of a CNC-machine. This topic covers all the
stages of the CNC-machine model definition:

Preparing a CNC-machine model

Machine simulation requires a model of the CNC-machine in the STL format. Such model can be
either supplied by a CNC-machine vendor or prepared by yourself with a CAD system. When the
CAD model of the CNC-machine is prepared, it can be exported into a number of STL files, each
one representing a different component of the CNC-machine.

The image below shows a schematic model of a Table-Table CNC-machine built in SolidWorks.

Each STL file has to be created using an output coordinate system located at the CNC-machine
origin. If the coordinate system of your CNC-machine assembly is different, you have to define an
additional coordinate system with the proper location and axes orientation.

760
 10. Simulation

In the case of the Table-Table machine shown above, you have to define a new coordinate system
located in the intersection of the top face of the table and the rotational axis (CNC-machine origin).

When the coordinate system is defined, move all the components into their initial state (the
components performing rotational axes movements have to be placed into their initial state at C=0,
B=0; the components performing translational axes movements have to be placed at X=0, Y=0,
Z=0).

761
After the coordinate system is defined and all the CNC-machine components are placed into their
initial state, the CNC-machine model has to be exported into the STL format.

Click File, Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

Choose the STL type for export of the model. Click on the Options button to define the additional
parameters of export.

The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box enables you to define a number of parameters affecting the STL export. See
SolidWorks Help for detailed explanation on these parameters.

Adjust the STL Resolution parameters according to your needs.

In the Output coordinate system list, choose the defined Coordinate system for the STL export.

762
 10. Simulation

Select the Do not translate STL output data to positive space check box. This option ensures that
exported parts maintain their original position in global space, relative to the origin.

Confirm the Export Options dialog box with the OK button.

In the Save As dialog box, choose the location for the STL files and enter the name of the STL file
for the CNC-machine assembly. Confirm the export with the Save button. Several separate STL
files for all the CNC-machine assembly components are generated. All of these files will be used at
the further stages of the CNC-machine definition.

A CNC-machine model consists of a number of components. It is

recommended to try to define the CNC-machine with the minimum
number of STL files. To reduce the number of STL files, you can put several
components together in one sub-assembly that is exported into a single STL
file; the criterion for putting several components into one STL file is the
common movement of these components. When assembly components
always move together, they can be combined into a sub-assembly. For
example, the model of the spindle unit of a Table-Table CNC-machine
consists of a number of components that have a common movement;
according to the criterion above, all these spindle unit components can be
combined into a sub-assembly.

Such sub-assemblies can be exported separately into STL files using the
Save all components of an assembly in a single file option in the Export
Options dialog box. This option creates a single STL file with all the
components of a sub-assembly. Before the export of a sub-assembly, the
new coordinate system has to be defined in the sub-assembly in the location
of the CNC-machine origin.

763
Starting the CNC-machine definition

Load a CAM-Part that contains Sim. 5 Axis operations. Start the Machine simulation of a Sim. 5
Axis operation.

In the simulation menu, click Settings and choose Machine from the Windows submenu.

The Machine tab is displayed. This tab enables you to define a

new CNC-machine.

Click on the New Machine button. A new CNC-machine

definition is created.

In the XML folder located in the directory that is defined in the

Directory for Machine simulation definition section of Machine
simulation settings, create a new folder with the name of your
CNC-machine; this Machine definition folder is the location of
all files related to the CNC-machine definition.

The name of this folder has to be assigned

to the machine_simulation parameter in
the MAC file of the CNC-machine.

Click on the Save Machine As button to save the empty

machine definition. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

The machine definition is saved as an XML file. Choose the

Machine definition folder and save the machine definition
file with the CNC-machine name (the name assigned to
the machine_simulation parameter in the MAC file).
Confirm the dialog box with the Save button.

764
 10. Simulation

Copy all the STL files generated from the CNC-machine model into the Machine definition folder.

At this stage, the initial CNC-machine definition is finished. Click on the Edit Machine button
to start the definition of the CNC-machine components.

Defining the name of the CNC-machine

Right-click on the root item of the CNC-machine

definition tree and choose the Properties command.
The Element properties dialog box is displayed.
In the ID field, enter the name of the CNC-machine
and confirm the dialog box with the OK button.

Understanding the structure of the CNC-machine

Before defining your CNC-machine components, Moving

you have to analyze the machine kinematics. components
Generally, all the components of the CNC-machine
can be classified into two groups: non-moving
components and moving components. The first
group includes the CNC-machine base, controller,
doors, etc. The moving parts are the components of
the transitional and rotational axes and the spindle
unit.

In case of Table-Table machines, the base is a non-

moving component.

Non-moving
component (base)

765
All the moving components can be classified according to the dependency of the movements.
For example, in the Table-Table CNC-machine the rotary table that provides the rotation around
the vertical axis (C-axis) is mounted on the tilting table. The tilting table that provides the rotation
around the X-axis (B-axis), is mounted on the saddle. The saddle performs the X-axis movements.
Movement of the saddle affects the location of the B-axis and C-axis (the tilting and rotary tables
are moved). Movement of the tilting table (rotation around B-axis) affects the orientation of the
C-axis (the rotary table is moved together with the tilting table), but does not affect the X-axis. The
rotary table movement (rotation around C-axis) does not affect the B-axis and X-axis orientation.
Saddle Tilting table

Rotary table

Hierarchically, we can describe the structure of the rotary table, tilting table and saddle using
“parents-children” relations. The saddle is the “parent” of the tilting table because the tilting table
(“child”) is mounted on the saddle. Similarly, the tilting table is the “parent” of the rotary table
because the rotary table is mounted on the tilting table.

Another separate set of the CNC-machine components provides the movements in the YZ-plane.
The sliding carriage provides movements along the Y-axis, and the spindle unit performs the Z-axis
movements. In this hierarchy the sliding carriage is a “parent” and the spindle unit is a “child”.
Sliding carriage

Spindle unit

766
 10. Simulation

The structure of a Head-Table CNC-machine can be described by two separate sets of components.
The components of these sets are combined together according to the “parents-children” criterion.

The first set consists of the tilting head with the spindle unit (B-axis) mounted on the vertical saddle
(Z-axis). The vertical saddle is mounted on the horizontal saddle (X-axis).
Horizontal saddle

Vertical saddle

Tilting head

The second set consists of the rotary table (C-axis) mounted on the sliding carriage (Y-axis).
Rotary table

Sliding carriage

767
The table of a Head-Head CNC-machine is a non-moving component mounted on the base.
The moving parts are described by the following “parents-children” hierarchy. The tilting spindle
unit (B-axis) is mounted on the rotary head (C-axis). The rotary head is mounted on the saddle
performing movements in the YZ-plane. The saddle is mounted on the column (X-axis).
Column
Saddle

Table
Rotary head
Base
Tilting spindle unit

The CNC-machine has to be defined according to the “parents-children” relations between the
CNC-machine components; these relations determine the order of the components definition and
dependencies between them.

Defining the CNC-machine housing

At the first stage of the CNC-machine definition, you have to

define the non-moving components of the machine such as
housing.

In the Machine tab, right-click on the root item of the CNC-

machine definition tree and choose the Add Geometry command
from the list. The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

In the ID field of the dialog box, specify the name of the housing
component.

768
 10. Simulation

When the mh_ prefix appears in the ID of a CNC-machine component,

this component is considered as a housing part. The components defined
with this prefix can be hidden during the simulation using the Show/Hide
machine housing button. In this case, the ID value is set to mh_Housing.

Click on the Browse button and choose the STL model of the housing located in the Machine
definition folder.

Switch to the Display tab. This tab enables you to control the CNC-machine component name
display in the CNC-machine definition tree.

The component ID is always displayed in the tree.

SolidCAM enables you to optionally display the STL file
name chosen for the specific component by selecting
the File name check box.

Switch to the Appearance tab. This tab enables you

to control over the visibility and the visual properties
(color, transparency, reflectivity) of the component of
the CNC-machine.

769
Choose the appropriate settings for the housing component and confirm the Element properties
dialog box with the OK button.

The housing part is displayed in the graphic area and the housing component name is displayed in
the CNC-machine definition tree.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML file.

All the additional non-moving components are defined in the same manner. When this stage is
finished, you have to start the definition of the moving components of the CNC-machine.

Defining the translational axis

When all the non-moving components of the CNC-machine are defined, you have to define the
moving components. Moving components have to be defined according to their “parents-children”
dependencies. The order of the definition is the following: “parents” have to be defined before
the “children”. In case of Table-Table machines, the first component to be defined is the saddle
performing the Y-axis translational movements.

770
 10. Simulation

Right-click on the CNC-machine name in the definition tree

and choose the Add Transl. axis command from the menu.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed. Set the

translational axis name in the ID field.

Use the following built-in ID names:

• For the X-axis (linear axis), the ID is X;

• For the Y-axis (linear axis), the ID is Y;
• For the Z-axis (linear axis), the ID is Z;
• For the A-axis (rotational axis), the ID is A;
• For the B-axis (rotational axis), the ID is B;
• For the C-axis (rotational axis), the ID is C.

Set Y for the axis ID.

Switch to the Display tab. This tab enables you to choose the information that will be displayed in
the CNC-machine definition tree.

771
The component ID is always displayed in the tree. SolidCAM enables you to optionally display the
translational axis direction (the Direction check box) and limits of movements (the Limits check
box).

Switch to the Transformation tab. This tab enables you to define the orientation of the axis by
defining a vector with three coordinates.

In this case, the defined translational axis is the Y-axis. Note that the direction is defined according
to the tool movements along the axis. The tool movement in the positive Y-axis direction causes the
saddle movement in the negative Y-direction.

Saddle movement
direction

Tool movement
direction

Z Y
X
Therefore, the direction is defined with the following values: 0.00000 -1.00000 0.00000. This vector
defines the direction of the CNC component movement when the tool moves in the positive axis
direction.

772
 10. Simulation

Switch to the Limits tab. This tab enables you to define the limit of the translational movements
along the axis.

In this tab, you have to specify the Min Limit and Max Limit values. The movement of the saddle
that performs the Y-axis movements is limited between this values. In this case, the Min Limit is -350
and Max Limit is 350.

The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values must be the same as those
defined in the Y-coordinate of the trans_axis_min_limit and
trans_axis_max_limit parameters specified in the MAC file of the
CNC-machine.

When the limits are defined, click on the OK button to confirm

the axis definition.

When the translational axis parameters are defined, specify the

geometry of the part performing the translational movement
along the axis. In this case, this part is the saddle.

In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the just

defined axis item and choose Add Geometry from the menu.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

773
In the same manner as described in the Defining the CNC-machine housing section, specify the
geometry name and choose the STL model of the necessary component (saddle).

Confirm the Element properties dialog box with the OK button. The saddle model is displayed in
the graphic area.

Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab to check the translational movements
of the defined geometry along the axis.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML file.

774
 10. Simulation

Defining the rotational axis

Defining the tilting table

At this stage, you have to define the tilting table

providing the B-axis rotation.

In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click

on the Y-axis item and choose the Add Rot. Axis
command from the menu.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

Define the ID of the rotational axis. Type B in
the ID field.

Switch to the Transformation tab. This tab enables you to define the Direction of the
rotational axis and the Center point. These parameters determine the location and
orientation of the rotational axis.

775
The tilting axis performs the rotation around the
X-axis. Note that the positive tool movement -
around the rotational axis (positive direction of +
+
the B-axis) is performed by the negative rotation
of the tilting table.

The positive direction of the rotational axis of

the tilting table is defined by the right hand rule.
Therefore the axis Direction parameters values are
the following: -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000. Z Y
X
The axis direction has to be defined according to the axis
direction defined in the rotate_axis_dir2 parameter in
the MAC file.

The Center point parameters define the location of the axis

relative to the CNC-machine origin. This parameter has to be
defined according to the rot_axis_base_pnt2 parameter
in the MAC file. In this case, the tilting axis is located 30 mm
below the table. Therefore, the Center point values must be
defined as follows: 0.00000 0.00000 -30.00000.

Switch to the Limits tab. This tab enables you to define the minimum and maximum
rotation angle limits. For the tilting axis, the Min Limit value is -100°, the Max Limit value
is 100°.

The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values have to be the same as the rot_axis_
min_limit1 and rot_axis_max_limit1 values specified in the MAC file of the
CNC-machine.

At this stage, the rotational axis is defined. Confirm the Element properties dialog box
with the OK button.

776
 10. Simulation

Define the geometry of the tilting table. In the

CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the
just defined rotational axis item and choose the
Add Geometry command from the menu.

The Elements properties dialog box is displayed.

In the same manner as described in the Defining
the CNC-machine housing section, set the ID
for the tilting table geometry and choose the
geometry from the STL file.

The tilting table geometry is displayed in the

graphic area.

Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab to check the translational movements
of the defined geometry along the axis.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML
file.

777
Defining the rotary table

At this stage, you have to define the rotary table that provides the C-axis rotation.

In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click

on the B-axis item and choose the Add Rot.
Axis command from the menu.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

Define the ID of the rotational axis.

Type C in the ID field.

Switch to the Transformation tab.

The rotary axis performs the rotation around the Z-axis. Note that the positive tool
rotation around the rotational axis (positive direction of the C-axis) is performed by the
negative rotation of the rotary table; the positive direction of the rotational axis of the
rotary table is defined by the right hand rule. Therefore the axis Direction parameters
values are the following: 0.00000 0.00000 -1.00000.

The axis direction has to be defined according to the axis direction defined in the
rotate_axis_dir1 parameter in the MAC file.

778
 10. Simulation

The Center point parameters define the location of the axis relative to the CNC-
machine origin. This parameter has to be defined according to the rot_axis_base_pnt1
parameter in the MAC file. The rotation B-axis passes through the CNC-machine
origin. Therefore, the Center point has to be defined with the following values: 0.00000
0.00000 0.00000.

Switch to the Limits tab. This tab enables you to define the minimum and maximum
rotation angle limits. For the C-axis, the Min Limit value is -1000°, the Max Limit value
is 1000°.

The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values have to be the same as the
rot_axis_min_limit0 and rot_axis_max_limit0 values specified in the
MAC file of the CNC-machine.

At this stage, the rotational axis is defined.

Confirm the Element properties dialog box
with the OK button.

Define the geometry of the rotary table. In the

CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the
just defined C-axis item and choose the Add
Geometry command from the menu.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

779
In the same manner as explained in the Defining the CNC-machine housing section,
set the ID for the rotary table geometry and choose the geometry from the STL file.

The rotary table geometry is displayed in the graphic area.

Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab to check the translational movements
of the defined geometry along the axis.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML
file.

780
 10. Simulation

Defining the translational axis

At this stage, you have to define the sliding carriage that performs the X-axis movements and the
spindle unit that moves along the Z-axis. These two components are joined into a separate set; the
movements of this set are independent from the movements of Y-, B- and C-axes.

Right-click on the root item in the CNC-machine definition tree and choose the
Add Transl. Axis command from the menu. Define the X-axis, the proper axis ID and
Direction. Set the following limits for the axis: the Min Limit value to -380 and the
Max Limit value to 380.

The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values have to be the same as those defined in the
X-coordinate of the trans_axis_min_limit and trans_axis_max_limit parameters
specified in the MAC file of the CNC-machine.

Define the geometry for the X-axis. Choose the STL model of the sliding carriage.

Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab to check the translational movements
of the defined geometry along the axis.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML file.

781
Define the Z-axis. Note that the Z-axis is a “child” of the X-axis. Define the proper axis ID and
Direction. Set the following limits for the Z-axis: set the Min Limit value to 0 and the Max Limit value
to 300.

The defined Min Limit and Max Limit values have to be the same as those defined in the Z-coordinate
of the trans_axis_min_limit and trans_axis_max_limit parameters specified in the
MAC file of the CNC-machine.

Define the geometry for the Z-axis. Choose the STL model of the spindle unit.

Use the sliders of the Axis Control tab to check the translational movements
of the defined geometry along the axis.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML file.

782
 10. Simulation

At this stage, the definition of the CNC-machine components is finished. The related parameters
of the MAC file for this machine are listed below:

;Sim Five axis

kinematic_type = TABLE_TABLE_new
spindle_direction = 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
rotate_axis_dir1 = 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0000
rotate_axis_dir2 = -1.0000 0.0000 0.0000
rot_axis_base_pnt1 = 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000, 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000
rot_axis_base_pnt2 = 0.0000 0.0000 -30.0000, 0.0000 0.0000
-1.1811
abs_machine_coord = N
first_rot_axis_name = C
second_rot_axis_name = B
machine_simulation = table_table
use_machine_limits = Y
trans_axis_min_limit = -380.0000 -350.0000 0.0000
trans_axis_max_limit = 380.0000 350.0000 300.0000
rot_axis_min_limit0 = -1000.0000
rot_axis_min_limit1 = -100.0000
rot_axis_max_limit0 = 1000.0000
rot_axis_max_limit1 = 100.0000

At the next stages, you have to define the default workpiece, stock and tool that will be used for
this machine. These defaults enable you to define the kinematic relationship between the CNC-
machine components and workpiece, stock and tool. During the simulation, these defaults will be
overwritten with the actual CAM-Part data.

783
Defining the workpiece

At this stage, you have to define the default workpiece and its
kinematic relationship with the CNC-machine components.

The workpiece is located on the CNC-machine rotary table

(C-axis). In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the
C-axis item and choose the Add Coord. Transform command
from the menu. This command enables you to define the
kinematic relationship between the workpiece and the CNC-
machine components.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed. Define the ID

of the workpiece. Use the built-in workpiece_transform name
for the ID. This name is hard-coded in SolidCAM and cannot
be changed.

Confirm the dialog box with the OK button. The appropriate

item is displayed in the CNC-machine definition tree.

Now you have to define the default model of the workpiece.

Right-click on the just added Transform item in the CNC-
machine definition tree and choose the Add Workpiece
command from the menu.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

784
 10. Simulation

Set the ID of the workpiece geometry. Use the built-in werkstueck name for the ID. This name is
hard-coded in SolidCAM and cannot be changed.

Confirm the dialog box with the OK button.

The workpiece geometry with the built-

in name werkstueck is related to the
werkstueck.stl file. In the process of the CNC-
machine definition this file does not exist. It will be
automatically created during the simulation. Every
time during the simulation this file will be overwritten
with the actual target model data.

Click on the button and save the machine

definition in the previously created XML file.

Defining the stock

At this stage, you have to define the default stock and its kinematic relationship with the CNC-
machine components.

Similar to the workpiece, the stock is located on the

CNC-machine rotary table (C-axis). All the coordinate
transformations are the same for the workpiece and the
stock. Therefore, you do not need to define a separate
coordinate transformation for the stock. Use the existing
transformation of the workpiece.

In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the

workpiece_transform coordinate transformation item and
choose the Add Stock command from the menu. This
command enables you to define the geometry of the stock.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

785
Define the ID of the stock geometry. Use the built-in name Stock for the ID definition. This name
is hard-coded in SolidCAM and cannot be changed.

Confirm the dialog box with the OK button.

The stock geometry with the built-in name Stock is related to the stock.stl
file. In the process of the CNC-machine definition this file does not exist.
It will be automatically created during the simulation. Every time during the
simulation this file will be overwritten with the actual stock model data.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML file.

Defining the fixture

At this stage, you have to define the fixture and its kinematic
relationship with the CNC-machine components.

Since the fixture is clamping the workpiece on the CNC-

Machine table and these components are always moving
together, all the coordinate transformations are the same for
workpiece and fixture. Therefore, you do not need to define
a separate coordinate transformation for the fixture. Use
the existing transformation of the workpiece. The fixture
definition should be added to the CNC-Machine definition
tree under the workpiece_transform item.

In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the

workpiece_transform coordinate transformation item and
choose the Add Geometry command from the menu.

This command enables you to define the geometry of the

fixture.

786
 10. Simulation

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

Define the ID of the fixture geometry. Use the built-in

name Fixture for the ID definition. This name is hard-
coded in SolidCAM and cannot be changed.

Click on the Browse button and choose the fixture.

stl file containing the fixture model from the CNC-
machine folder. During the specific part simulation,
this file will be overwritten with the STL file of the
actual fixture used in the CAM-Part.

If you have no fixture.stl file, you can create it by copying and renaming
any other *.stl file. In this case, the content of the STL file is not important,
because it will be overwritten with the relevant data during the simulation
for every CAM-Part.

Defining the tool path

The tool path is located around the workpiece. When the

workpiece is rotated to a new orientation, the tool path
has to be rotated together with the workpiece. All the
coordinate transformations are the same for workpiece
and tool path. Therefore, you do not need to define a
separate coordinate transformation for the tool path. Use
the existing transformation of the workpiece.

In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the

workpiece_transform coordinate transformation item
and choose the Add Toolpath command from the menu.
This command enables you to define the geometry of the
stock.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

787
Define the ID of the stock geometry. Use the built-in name Toolpath for the ID definition. This name
is hard-coded in SolidCAM and cannot be changed.

Confirm the dialog box with the OK button.

The tool path geometry with the built-in name Toolpath is related to the
toolpath.asc file. In the process of the CNC-machine definition this file
does not exist. It will be automatically created during the simulation. Every
time during the simulation this file will be overwritten with the actual tool
path.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML file.

Defining the tool

At this stage, you have to define the default tool and its
kinematic relationship with the CNC-machine components.

The tool with holder is mounted on the CNC-machine spindle

unit (Z-axis). In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click
on the Z-axis item and choose the Add Coord. Transform
command from the menu. This command enables you to
define the kinematic relationship between the tool and the
CNC-machine components.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed.

788
 10. Simulation

Define the ID of the tool. Use the built-in holder_transform name for the ID. This name is hard-
coded in SolidCAM and cannot be changed.

Confirm the dialog box with the OK button. The appropriate item is displayed in the CNC-machine
definition tree.
Now you have to define the default model of the tool. Right-
click on the just added item in the CNC-machine definition
tree and choose the Add Tool command from the menu.
The Element properties dialog box is displayed.
Set the ID of the tool geometry. Use the built-in Tool name for
the ID. This name is hard-coded in SolidCAM and cannot be
changed.

Confirm the dialog box with the OK button.

The tool geometry with the built-in name Tool is related to the tool.stl file.
In the process of the CNC-machine definition this file does not exist. It
will be automatically created during the simulation. Every time during the
simulation this file will be overwritten with the actual tool data.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML file.

789
Collision control

This functionality enables you to detect and avoid

possible collisions between all components of the
CNC-machine in the process of machining.

The understanding of the CNC-machine

construction and kinematics is necessary for the
collision definition. In case of Table-Table CNC-
machines definition, the machine construction
precludes the collisions between the saddle part and
the tilting and rotary tables. The collisions between
the sliding carriage and saddle are also precluded
by the CNC-machine construction and kinematics.
There is no necessity to check the CNC-machine
components during their movements for such
collisions.

The collisions between spindle unit (with tool

holder and tool) and saddle (with mounted tilting
table and rotary table) are possible. Such collisions
have to be detected and avoided.

In the CNC-machine definition tree, right-click on the root

item and choose the Add CollCheck command from the menu.

The Element properties dialog box is displayed. Switch to the

Collcheck Group tab.

This tab enables you to define two groups of CNC-machine

components for which the collision checking will be performed.

790
 10. Simulation

Select the necessary component in the Geometry Pool area and click on the button to add the
selected component into a group. To remove a component from the group, click on the button.

When a group contains components that are different for different CAM-Parts (workpiece, tool)
you have to mark such group as Dynamic. The group containing only components that are
independent from CAM-Parts, has to be marked as Static.

The tool and spindle unit components should be included

in the first group. The saddle, tilting table, rotary table
and workpiece components should be included into the
second group. The collision checking will be performed
between the components of two groups.

Confirm the dialog box with the OK button.

Use the sliders of the Axis

Control tab to check the collision
checking definition. When a
collision is detected, the contacting
components are highlighted.

Click on the button and save the machine definition in the previously created XML file.

791
Defining the coordinate transformation

In some cases, the CNC-machine spindle is not aligned

in the positive Z-axis direction. For example, an angular
attachment enables you to transform the vertical spindle
rotation (around the Z-axis) into the horizontal rotation
(around the Y-axis). In this case, the Z-axis of the
spindle unit is not parallel to the default main spindle
direction.

In the illustration below, the default XYZ coordinates

describe the main spindle direction (coordinate system
of the CNC-machine). The X’Y’Z’ coordinate system
describes the angular attachment. These coordinate
systems have different axes orientations.

Y'-
Z'- X'+

X'- Z'+
Y'+
Z+
Y- X+

X- Y+
Z-

The coordinate transformation between the default coordinate system and the spindle coordinate
system has to be performed in order to enable correct execution of the tool path by the tool
mounted in the spindle unit.

To perform the necessary coordinate transformation,

you have to add a new Coordinate transformation
(Coord. Transform) item into the CNC-machine
definition tree. Hierarchically, this item has to be
“parent” to the holder_transform item.

The ID of this Coordinate Transformation item is not

important. Use the spindle_transform name for the
ID definition.

The Transformation tab of the Element properties

dialog box contains a transformation matrix for the
spindle_transform item.

792
 10. Simulation

Using this matrix, you can define the transformation of the coordinate system. In other words, you
can define the orientation and location of a transformed coordinate system relative (X’Y’Z’) to the
coordinate system of the CNC-machine (XYZ).

The columns of this matrix describe the axis orientation of the CNC-machine coordinate system
relative to the transformed coordinate system. The first column enables you to define the direction
of the X-axis; the second column defines the Y-axis and the third column defines the Z-axis. The
fourth column defines the offset of the transformed coordinate system origin relative to the CNC-
machine coordinate system origin.

The rows of the matrix define the orientation of the transformed coordinate system relative to the
CNC-machine coordinate system. The first row enables you to define the direction of the X-axis;
the second row defines the Y-axis and the third row defines the Z-axis. The fourth row is not used.

By default, the diagonal of the transformation matrix is filled with 1. This

means that the initial coordinate system of the CNC-machine and the
transformed coordinate system are the same and coordinate transformation
is not performed. Such transformation matrixes were used for the
workpiece_transform and holder_transform definition.

In case a transformation is required, you have to fill the transformation matrix.

The transformed coordinate system for the angular attachment discussed before is obtained by the
90° rotation of the CNC-machine coordinate system around the X-axis.
Z+ Y'-
Y- X+ Z'- X'+

X- Y+ X'- Z'+
Z- Y'+

CNC machine Transformed

coordinate system coordinate system

793
The resulting transformation is the following:
Z(Y'=-1)
X(X'=+1) X'(X=+1)

Z'(Y=+1)
Y(Z'=+1)
Y'(Z=-1)

CNC-machine Transformed
coordinate system coordinate system
Therefore the matrix has to be filled as shown below.

XML file structure

This topic describes the XML file structure using the Table-Table CNC-machine definition example.

The XML-based definition of a CNC-machine consists of several commands (tags), each of them
describes the specific item of the CNC-machine definition tree.

Each tag is enclosed between the “<” and “>” signs.

Example:

<machine_definition>

Some XML constructions consist of opening and closing tags; the closing tag starts from the “/”
symbol.

794
 10. Simulation

Example:

<machine_definition>
CNC-machine definition tags
</machine_definition>

For some tags, opening and closing can be performed in the single tag.

Example:

<machine_data name=”Table_table” units=”metric” />

XML tags can contain a number of variables.

Example:

name=”Table_table”;

here name is the variable name and ”Table_table” is the value. The value must be enclosed in
quotation marks.

The automatically generated XML file is the following:

The order of the commands (tags) of the XML file is the same as the order of the CNC-machine
components in the CNC-machine definition tree.
<?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”iso-8859-1” ?>

This string is similar for each XML file; it describes the used version of XML format and encoding.
<machine_definition>

This tag starts the CNC-machine definition.

<machine_data name=”Table_table” units=”metric” />

This tag defines the name of the CNC-machine and the used units.
<axis id=”X” type=”translation” x=”1.00000000” y=”0.00000000”
z=”0.00000000” minvalue=”-380.000000” maxvalue=”380.000000”>

This tag starts the X-axis definition. The <axis> tag enables you to define the type of the axis
(translational/rotational), axis orientation and limits.
<geometry name=”Sliding carriage” geo=”table_table-x_axis-1.stl”
clrr=”0.00000000” clrg=”0.00000000” clrb=”1.00000000” alpha=”0.0”
reflectivity=”0.0” objtype=”geometry” />

795
This tag defines the geometry of the part performing X-axis movements. The name variable
defines the geometry ID. The geo variable defines the STL file used for the geometry definition.
The clrr, clrg and clrb variables define the RGB components of the geometry color. The
values of these parameters have to be in the range from 0 to 1. The alpha variable defines the
transparency of the geometry. The reflectivity variable defines the reflectivity of the geometry.

<axis id=”Z” type=”translation” x=”0.00000000” y=”0.00000000”

z=”1.00000000” minvalue=”0.000000” maxvalue=”300.000000” >
<geometry name=”Spindle unit” geo=”table_table-z_axis-1.stl”
clrr=”0.50196081” clrg=”1.00000000” clrb=”1.00000000” alpha=”0.0”
reflectivity=”0.0” objtype=”geometry” />

The Z-axis definition.

<transform id=”holder_transform” initialvalue=”1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000”>

This tag starts the tool transformation definition. The initialvalue variable defines the used
transformation matrix.
<geometry name=”tool” geo=”tool.stl” clrr=”0.00000000”
clrg=”1.00000000” clrb=”0.00000000” alpha=”0.0” reflectivity=”0.0”
objtype=”tool” holderr=”0.00000000” holderg=”1.00000000”
holderb=”1.00000000” />

This tag defines the geometry of the tool (with the tool holder). The clrr, clrg and clrb
variables define the RGB components of the tool color. The holderr, holderg and holderb
variables define the RGB components of the tool holder color.
</transform>

Closing tag for the tool transformation definition.

</axis>

Closing tag for the Z-axis definition.

</axis>

Closing tag for the X-axis definition.

<axis id=”Y” type=”translation” x=”0.00000000” y=”-1.00000000”
z=”0.00000000” minvalue=”-350.000000” maxvalue=”350.000000”>

Start Y-axis definition.

796
 10. Simulation

<geometry name=”saddle” geo=”table_table-y_axis-1.stl”

clrr=”0.00000000” clrg=”0.50196081” clrb=”1.00000000” alpha=”0.0”
reflectivity=”0.0” objtype=”geometry” />
Definition of the CNC-machine part performing Y-axis movements.
<axis id=”B” type=”rotation” x=”-1.00000000” y=”0.00000000”
z=”0.00000000” minvalue=”-100.000000” maxvalue=”100.000000”
rzx=”0.00000000” rzy=”0.00000000” rzz=”-30.00000000”>

Start B-axis definition. For rotational axes the rzx, rzy and rzz variables define the location of
the rotation base point.
<geometry name=”tilting table” geo=”table_table-b_axis-1.stl”
clrr=”1.00000000” clrg=”0.50196081” clrb=”0.00000000” alpha=”0.0”
reflectivity=”0.0” objtype=”geometry” />

Definition of the CNC-machine part performing B-axis movements.

<axis id=”C” type=”rotation” x=”0.00000000” y=”0.00000000”
z=”-1.00000000” minvalue=”-1000.000000” maxvalue=”1000.000000”
rzx=”0.00000000” rzy=”0.00000000” rzz=”0.00000000”>

Start C-axis definition.

<geometry name=”Rotary table” geo=”table_table - table-1.stl”
clrr=”0.50196081” clrg=”0.50196081” clrb=”1.00000000” alpha=”0.0”
reflectivity=”0.0” objtype=”geometry” />

Definition of the CNC-machine part performing C-axis movements.

<transform id=”workpiece_transform” initialvalue=”1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000,
0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 0.00000000, 1.00000000”>

This tag starts the workpiece transformation definition. The initialvalue variable defines the
used transformation matrix.
<geometry name=”werkstueck” geo=”werkstueck.stl” clrr=”0.00000000”
clrg=”1.00000000” clrb=”0.00000000” alpha=”0.0” reflectivity=”0.0”
objtype=”workpiece” />

Workpiece geometry definition.

<geometry name=”stock” geo=”stock.stl” clrr=”0.00000000”
clrg=”1.00000000” clrb=”0.00000000” alpha=”0.0” reflectivity=”0.0”
objtype=”stock” />

Stock geometry definition.

797
 <geometry name=”toolpath” geo=”toolpath.asc” clrr=”0.80000001”
clrg=”0.80000001” clrb=”0.80000001” alpha=”0.0” reflectivity=”0.0”
objtype=”toolpath” />

Tool path definition.

</transform>

Closing tag for the workpiece transformation definition.

</axis>

Closing tag for the C-axis definition.

</axis>

Closing tag for the B-axis definition.

</axis>

Closing tag for the Y-axis definition.

<geometry name=”mh_Housing” geo=”table_table - base-1.stl”
clrr=”0.75294125” clrg=”0.75294125” clrb=”0.75294125” alpha=”0.0”
reflectivity=”0.0” objtype=”geometry” />

Housing model definition.

<collcheck id=”cc1” group1=”Spindle unit,tool” dynamic1=”true”
dynamic2=”true” active=”true” group2=”Rotary table,saddle,tilting
table,werkstueck” />

Collision checking definition. The group1 and group2 variables enable you to define groups of
CNC-machine components.
</machine_definition>

Closing tag for the CNC-machine definition.

798
SolidCAM
Settings 12
The SolidCAM Settings feature enables you to define a set of SolidCAM
defaults such as folders, units, tolerances, CNC-controllers, etc.
In the settings dialog box, you can change the path to related
applications, units, tolerances, default machines, editors, and color
settings for SolidCAM. The Settings register enables you to easily view
and edit the current program preferences and options.

 User Directories settings

 Units settings
 Simulation settings
 Synchronization settings
 Rest Material & SolidVerify settings
 Tool settings
12.1 Introduction

The SolidCAM Settings dialog box enables you

to change the path to related applications, units,
tolerances, default machines, editors, and color
settings for SolidCAM. This dialog box enables
you to easily view and edit the current program
preferences and options.
The following pages are available in the SolidCAM
Settings dialog box:
• User directories
• Default CNC-Controller
• Units
• Synchronization
• Compressed CAM-Part
• Updated Stock & SolidVerify
• Tool settings
• Color settings
• Default Geometry Names
• Interoperational tool movements
• Auto-save
• Automatic CAM-Part definition
• Tool path simulation
• Machine simulation
• DNC settings
• Editors
• External Program
• Machining Process
• User interface
• CoordSys definition
• GCode generation
• Tool search settings
• Internal post-processor
• SolidCAM Manager
• Template defaults
• Miscellaneous settings

800
 12. Settings

12.2 User Directories settings

This page enables you to set the path to your post-processor files and to your user directory.

12.2.1 User Directory for SolidCAM Parts

The user directory defines the default folder in

which CAM-Parts and GCode files created with
SolidCAM are stored. Whenever you load a CAM-
Part, SolidCAM browses the user directory for
SolidCAM Part files (*.prt). All newly created CAM-
Part files are placed in the user directory by default.

1. Click on the Browse button.

2. The browser window is loaded.
3. Choose the required folder from
the browser.

12.2.2 User Directory for SolidCAM Tables

SolidCAM uses this folder to store Tool Tables and Machining processes.

The *.tab file in the SolidCAM Tool Table file contains detailed information about tools.

The *.mpt file is the Machining Process Table file. In addition to this file, SolidCAM creates the
Machining Process folder with a set of SolidCAM auxiliary files.

1. Click on the Browse button.

2. The browser window is loaded.
3. Choose the required folder from the browser.

12.2.3 Excel file for Threading tables

This field displays the path to the location of the Threading table of standard pitch values.

801
12.3 Default CNC-controller settings

12.3.1 Post-processor files directory

GPP files with the extensions *.mac and *.gpp are post-
processor files used by SolidCAM.
The *.mac file contains information about the CNC-
machine, e.g. number of simultaneous axes, available
cycles, default tool positioning, etc.
The *.gpp file translates the calculated tool path into
GCode. The GCode format, cycle definitions, etc. of
your GCode file is controlled in this file.
You have to specify the path to the folder where you
keep the *.mac and *.gpp files you have received from
SolidCAM. The post-processors that come with the
evaluation or demo version are installed in the SolidCAM
program directory.
1. Click on the Browse button.
2. The browser window will be loaded.
3. Choose the folder you want from the browser.

12.3.2 CNC-controllers
SolidCAM enables you to define the following default machine controllers:
• Milling CNC-Controller
• Turning CNC-Controller
• Milling&Turning CNC-Controller
• WireCut CNC-Controller
• Mill-Turn CNC-Controller

The chosen post-processor will be used as a default machine, which means it

will appear in the Milling Part Data dialog box as the controller for a new CAM-
Part. Naturally, you can change the controller for the CAM-Part with the list
field if you want to use another machine controller.
1. Click on the Browse button. A list of post-processors
available in your Post-processor files directory will be
displayed in the Machines list.
2. Double-click on the machine you want to use as default.

802
 12. Settings

12.4 Units settings

This page enables you to define the unit system,

spline approximation, chain selection, rest material
calculation and fillet size for the last cut settings.

12.4.1 Metric/Inch
This option enables you to select the unit system.
SolidCAM saves the information about the units in
which the CAM-Part was defined in the CAM-Part
database.

The following rules apply to this new feature:

1. When defining a new CAM-Part, SolidCAM checks both the default Units settings and
the units of the SolidWorks model. If these units are different, SolidCAM converts the
units of the SolidWorks model according to the CAM Settings.
2. When opening an existing CAM-Part created with SolidCAM, SolidCAM sets the Units
settings according to those of the CAM-Part.

3. When opening an existing CAM-Part created with previous SolidCAM releases, SolidCAM
works according to the default Units settings and does not save the unit information in
the CAM-Part.
These rules enable SolidCAM to prevent inconsistency between SolidCAM Units settings,
CAM-Part Units and Units of the CAD model.

12.4.2 Approximation
Whenever you use a spline edge (NURBS) to select a chain geometry for profiles, working areas,
sections etc., the spline will be transformed to lines. The Spline approximation value defines the
tolerance that is used when the spline is transformed into lines.

Example:

When you import an IGES surface, the surface boundaries will usually be defined with spline
curves. If you mill the outside contour of the surface with a Profile operation, you have to select
the boundary as the profile geometry. You will receive straight edges and facets on the contour if
you do not adjust the spline approximation to your requirements. If you select a tighter tolerance,
the GCode file will show more points on the contour and produce a smoother edge.
This tolerance does not affect operations that work on 2D contours such as arcs, lines or circles.

803
12.4.3 Chain selection
The Automatic selection function for chain geometries uses certain tolerances to decide whether
two consequent elements are connected or independent. The behavior of this function depends on
the Gap between the entities.

Gap minimum and Gap maximum tolerance

Gap
The Auto select feature (see topic 4.5.7) can function in three different
ways:

• If the gap between the edges is smaller than the minimum

chain gap, the system automatically continues the chain
and closes the gap.
• If the gap is between the minimum and maximum values,
you are asked whether the gap should be closed. If you
answer Yes, the gap is automatically closed.
• If the gap is larger than the maximum value for a chain gap, the following message is
displayed:

These tolerances can be defined separately for each geometry in the Geometry
Editdialog box (see topic 4.5).

Constant-Z Tolerance

When you work in the Auto Constant Z mode, all connected entities on the same Z-level of the
current coordinate system will be selected. This tolerance defines the maximum deviation from the
Z plane where an element will still be recognized as being on the same Z-level.

The Gap and Constant Z tolerances you should use depend mainly on the size
of your geometries and the accuracy of your models or imported 2D/3D
files. The default setting can be used for most of the common models, but
when you work with very intricate CAM-Parts, for example, a large max. gap
tolerance can cause problems as you might close contours in places that should
normally be not connected. To avoid this, answer No to the message “Do you
want to close the gap?” and switch to single curve mode to make sure you
selected the correct elements.

804
 12. Settings

12.4.4 Fillet size for last cut

This parameter defines the maximum allowed value of the radius for the external fillet.
For more information on the Fillet size for last cut option, see topic 6.1.2.

12.4.5 Tool Start and Clearance Levels

During each Coordinate System definition, SolidCAM automatically sets the Tool Start Level and
Clearance Level values.

The Tool start level defines the Z-level at which the tool will start.
The Clearance level is the Z-level to which the tool rapids when moving from
one operation to another (in case the tool did not change).

These parameters are defined relative to the Part Upper Level parameter according to the following
formulas:

Tool Start Level = Part Upper Level + Tool Start Level Delta;
Clearance Level = Part Upper Level + Clearance Level Delta;
where the Clearance Level Delta and Tool Start Level Delta are constant values defined in the
SolidCAM Settings.

The defined values of the Clearance Level Delta and Tool Star Level Delta will be used for the each
CoordSys defined by SolidCAM including CoordSys positions automatically defined by SolidCAM
AFRM module.

Default values:

Metric:

Tool Start Level Delta = 50; Clearance Level Delta = 10

Inch:

Tool Start Level Delta = 2; Clearance Level Delta = 0.4

SolidCAM have to use round numbers for Tool Start Level and Clearance Level values.

SolidCAM enables you to define the number of decimal units for rounding via the Rounding box
of the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.
• The default value of Decimal places for Metric is 0.
• The default value of Decimal places for Inch is 3.

805
12.5 Synchronization settings

12.5.1 Synchronization of CAM geometry

with design model

Check synchronization always

The synchronization check is performed automatically
each time you click on the SolidCAM Manager tree.

• Ask before synchronization check

When this check box is selected, after
every change in the part or in the assembly
and rebuild, SolidCAM will prompt you
before checking the synchronization
of the geometries with the model or
sketches.
When this check box is not selected, the synchronization checking will be performed
without any message or question.

• Synchronize automatically
This option enables you to perform the synchronization of geometries automatically.
When this check box is selected, the synchronization check is performed and then all
the unsynchronized operations and geometries are automatically synchronized. When
the synchronization fails for certain operations or geometries, SolidCAM marks the
operations/geometries with an exclamation mark and deletes the operation tool path;
such operations are marked with asterisk.

This option is available only when the Check synchronization always check
box is selected.

• Calculate operations after the synchronization

This option enables you to perform the calculation of the synchronized operations
automatically. When this check box is selected, SolidCAM automatically calculates all
the synchronized operations. The operations marked with the exclamation mark are
not calculated.

This option is available only when the Automatically synchronize geometries

check box is selected.

806
 12. Settings

Check synchronization on user demand

In this case, SolidCAM will not check the synchronization automatically. The Check Synchronization
item in the Operation and Geometry menus is enabled and you can choose it to start the
synchronization.

12.5.2 Synchronization tolerance

These parameters define the value of the synchronization tolerance. During the synchronization
check, SolidCAM compares the SolidCAM geometry and the SolidWorks model. If the difference
between them is out of the specified tolerance (the SolidWorks model was updated); you have to
synchronize the geometry with the updated model.

• Wireframe Geometry

The value of the tolerance for the Wireframe geometry.

• 3D Model Geometry

The value of the tolerance for the 3D Model geometry.

12.5.3 Synchronization of design model with original model

Ask user to find original model if not located

Every time the CAM-Part is opened, SolidCAM automatically checks the correspondence of the
dates of the CAM-Part and the original SolidWorks design model. When the date of the original
SolidWorks model is later than the date of the CAM-Part creation, this means that the SolidWorks
original model has been updated. You can then replace the SolidWorks design model on which the
CAM-Part is based with the updated SolidWorks design model.

The Ask user to find original model if not located option defines the sequence of SolidCAM
operations in the case of the absence the original model. This option enables you to display the
browser window to find the original model if the model was not found in the location specified in
the CAM-Part.

12.5.4 Synchronization when design model configuration changes

This section enables you to define the synchronization settings if the configuration is changed. In
this case, the default Part Settings (see topic 2.10.4) of each newly defined CAM-Part are used for
synchronization.

807
12.6 Compressed CAM-Part settings

This page contains a number of options related to

working with the compressed CAM-Parts (see topic
2.11).

New CAM-Part
Create new CAM-Parts in compressed mode. When
this option is active, SolidCAM creates new CAM-
Parts in the compressed mode.

Open CAM-Part
Compressed is a default Filter Type. This option
enables you to define the default file type for the filter
in the Open and Delete browser dialog boxes.

Close CAM-Part
Convert non-compressed CAM-Parts to compressed mode. When this option is active, each non-
compressed CAM-Part loaded into SolidCAM will be converted to compressed mode.

SolidCAM Temporary folder

This field displays the current path for the SolidCAM Temporary folder and enables the user to
choose a new one. Enter a new path name or choose it with the Browse button. The SolidCAM
Temporary folder location cannot be changed when a CAM-Part is opened.
Only an existing folder can be defined. Otherwise, the following message will be displayed.

You have to define a new location for the SolidCAM Temporary folder.

When opening, SolidCAM checks the existence of the temporary

folder and possibility to save files in it (via attributes). If the folder
does not exist SolidCAM displays the following message.

You have to define a new location for the SolidCAM Temporary

folder.

If the SolidCAM Temporary folder has attributes that enable file saving (read-only flag), SolidCAM
will remove these attributes.

808
 12. Settings

If the default folder (C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local Setting\SolidCAM Temporary

files)does not exist, but is chosen in SolidCAM Settings, SolidCAM will create it automatically.

Compression factor

This option enables you to control the performance and ratio of the compression for compressed
CAM-Parts. A higher setting results in slower compression but more compact compressed CAM-
Parts.

809
12.7 Tool Settings

12.7.1 Update Part Tool Table according to Machine Tool Table

By setting this option the user instructs SolidCAM

to automatically update the Part Tool Table with
tools from the Machine tool table defined in the
MAC-file, when the CNC-controller for the CAM-
Part is changed.

Only used tools numbers

This option enables you to update only those tools

that were used in operations. Tools that were not
used will be removed from the Part Tool Table.
Used tools that were not found in the Machine Tool
Table will be numbered with the next sequential
numbers.

Renumber tools from 1 when there is no

machine tool table

The option removes all unused tools from the Part Tool Table. The used tools will be renumbered
starting from number 1. If the Renumber tools from 1 when there is no Machine tool table option
is not active, SolidCAM removes all unused tools from the Part Tool Table. The used tools will not
be renumbered.

This option is available only if the Only used tools numbers option is
activated and only if the Machine Tool Table is not defined for the MAC of
the new CNC-controller.

12.7.2 Print in documentation – Only used tools

This option enables SolidCAM to include in the CAM-Part documentation only the tools from the
Part Tool Table used in operations.

12.7.3 Show in SolidCAM Manager

This option enables you to display the tool headers in SolidCAM Manager, whenever a new tool is
used. The Tool header is displayed before the operation where the new tool is used.

810
 12. Settings

Diameter

This option displays the tool diameter.

Type

This option displays the tool type.

12.7.4 Import tools

The With tool number option enables you to import tools to the Part Tool Table with their tool
numbers. If this check box is not selected, SolidCAM will assign a first free number to the imported
tool.

12.7.5 Set Tool as Permanent when user changes the tool number

The Set Tool to be Permanent when user changes the tool number option enables SolidCAM to
automatically make tools Permanent when the Tool Number is changed.

811
12.8 Color settings

This page enables you to customize the colors

used in SolidCAM.

To change a color, click on the corresponding color

button. The standard Windows Color selection
dialog box will be displayed, enabling you to pick
the color you want.

Customizable display elements:

• CoordSys: displays the color of the current Coordinate System.

• Direction arrow: displays the color of arrows that indicate the direction of a chain
geometry.

• Point: displays the color of points during chain selection, e.g. the start point of an
element.

• Numbers: displays the color of numbers used to identify chain geometries.

• Section: displays the color of the section geometries.

• Clamp: displays the color of the clamp in SolidCAM Turning.

• Show tool: displays the color of the tool shown from the operation dialog box.

• Open edges: displays the color of the open edge geometry.

812
 12. Settings

• Pick highlight: highlights selected elements, e.g. surfaces, solids, lines, etc.

• Show chain/3D model/Drill: displays the color of geometries when you use the Show
Geometry command.

• Chain Accept highlight: displays the color of chains that have been added to the currently
active geometry.

• General chain selection: highlights entities suggested as consequent elements of the

chain in auto select mode.

• Limit/Working area: displays the color of the Limit geometry and Working area geometry.

• Material boundaries: displays the color of the Material boundaries.

• Vertical Type Def. Depth: displays the color of numbers used to identify the depth of the
vertical type variable profile depth.

• Sloped Type Def. Depth: displays the color of numbers used to identify the depth of the
sloped type variable profile depth.

Load default color set

This option enables you to load the default colors of SolidCAM.

Host CAD background color

You can load a pre-defined set of colors for the customizable display elements. These colors have
been selected by SolidCAM for the standard background colors of the Host CAD systems used by
SolidCAM.

Choose the background color of the Host CAD from the list.

The Auto adjust option enables you to load the optimal colors for the
background of your Host CAD.

813
12.9 Default Geometry Names

SolidCAM enables you to define and use default

names for all geometry types.

When a new geometry is defined, the default name

is displayed in the geometry definition dialog. You
can either confirm it or change it. If the default
name is already used for a previously defined
geometry, SolidCAM offers you the default name
with the next sequential number.

814
 12. Settings

12.10 Interoperational tool movements

This page contains options that enable you to control

the interoperational movements (see topic 5.2.8).

These settings are used as defaults for each new CAM-Part. During the
process of a CAM-Part definition, the settings can be customized for the
current CAM-Part with the Interoperational tool movements page of the
Part Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.2).

Part Clearance level

All the interoperational movements are performed through the Part Clearance level. This is the
default option.

Operation Start level

When two neighboring operations use the same Coordinate System, Tool and Tool offset, the
interoperational movement between them is performed through the Operation Start level of the
second operation.

SolidCAM enables you to change the settings even when a CAM-Part is opened.

When you switch to the Operation Start level mode, SolidCAM enables the Start level fields in all
the operations and defines the Start levels equal to the Part Clearance level of the related Coordinate
Systems. All the interoperational movements will be implemented through the appropriate Start
levels.
When you switch to the Part Clearance level mode, SolidCAM disables the Start level field in all the
operations. All the SolidCAM operations (except for Sim. 5-Axis operations) have to be recalculated.
After the recalculation, all the interoperational movements will be implemented through the Part
Clearance levels of the appropriate Coordinate Systems.

815
12.11 AutoSave settings

SolidCAM enables you to save your CAM-Part

automatically after a geometry is defined or edited.

816
 12. Settings

12.12 Automatic CAM-Part definition

SolidCAM provides you with a number of features

aimed to automate the process of the CAM-Part
definition. Using these features enables you to
avoid a number of routine steps during the CAM-
Part definition and perform them automatically.

This page enables you to control the automatic

CAM-Part definition features.

These settings are used as default for each new CAM-Part. During the
process of a CAM-Part definition, the settings can be customized for the
current CAM-Part with the Automatic CAM-Part definition settings page of
the Part Settings dialog box (see topic 2.10.5).

12.12.1 Automatic Stock model definition

The Definition of Stock (as 3D box) option enables you to automatically define the 3D box stock
model during the CAM-Part definition. The stock model is based on all solid bodies and/or surfaces
of the DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.

Define Stock by

This option enables you to choose the type of elements (solid bodies and/or surfaces) from the
DesignModel to use.

Expand box at

This option gives you complete control over how much access stock material you have in each
direction of the stock material.

Add box to CAD model

This option enables you to add the stock model box to the CAD model.

817
12.12.2 Automatic Target model definition
The Definition of Target option enables you to automatically define the target model during the
CAM-Part definition. The target model is based on all the solid bodies and/or surfaces of the
DesignModel component of the CAM-Part assembly.

Define Target by

This option enables you to choose the type of elements (solid bodies and/or surfaces) from the
DesignModel.

12.12.3 Definition of Coordinate System

Single CoordSys

When this check box is selected, SolidCAM enables you to shorten the CoordSys definition by
avoiding the CoordSys Manager dialog box after the first CoordSys definition. This option is useful
when defining CAM-Parts that use only one Coordinate System.

When this check box is not selected, SolidCAM displays the CoordSys Manager dialog box after the
first CoordSys definition. The CoordSys Manager enables you to define an additional Coordinate
System. This option is useful when defining CAM-Parts that use several Coordinate Systems.

818
 12. Settings

12.13 Tool path simulation settings

The Tool path simulation settings enable you to

customize the color of the tools used during the
Turning simulation mode.

For each tool number you can define a separate color.

The colors selected in this dialog box will be used for
tools of current and future parts.

To change a color, click on the color symbol next to

the tool number in the list. The standard Windows
Color selection dialog box will be displayed, enabling
you to pick the required color.

Load Default colors

Click on this button to load the default SolidCAM color settings for
simulation.

Default simulation option

SolidCAM enables you to define the default simulation mode.

• Use Host CAD Simulation as default

When this option is chosen, the Host CAD simulation

mode is used as default for each new simulation session.
• Remember last simulation option

When this option is chosen, the simulation starts in the last used mode.

Gouge check

The Turn on Gouge check by default check box enables you to perform automatic gouge checking
during the tool path simulation.

819
12.14 Machine simulation settings

This page enables you to define the settings of the

Machine simulation mode (see topic 10.10).

12.14.1 Directory for Machine simulation

definition
This parameter defines the location of the CNC-
machines definition files used for the Machine
simulation. A number of CNC-machine subfolders
are located under this folder. According to the settings
of the MAC file, the appropriate machine is chosen
for the Machine simulation.

12.14.2 Tool path coordinates

This section enables you to define the type of coordinates that will be displayed in the Move list tab
(see topic 10.10.2). The Part based coordinates option enables you to display the coordinates related
to the CAM-Part coordinate system (part coordinates). The Absolute machine axis values option
enables you to display coordinates related to the CNC-Machine origin (machine coordinates).

12.14.3 Background

Background color

This option enables you to choose the color for the

Machine simulation background. The Color dialog
box enables you to choose the appropriate color.

Background gradient

This option enables you to choose the colors for the

Machine simulation gradient background. The Color
dialog box enables you to choose the appropriate
colors.

820
 12. Settings

The following options are available for gradient background:

• Horizontal

• Vertical

• Diagonal descending

821
 • Diagonal ascending

12.14.4 Enable collision control

This option enables you to detect and avoid possible collisions between all components of the
CNC-machine in the process of machining. When the Enable collision control check box is selected,
SolidCAM performs the collision checking according to the collision control parameters in the
CNC-machine definition. When the Enable collision control check box is not selected, SolidCAM
ignores the collision control parameters in the CNC-machine definition and does not perform the
collision control.

Collision check tolerance

This parameter enables you to specify the tolerance of the collision check. SolidCAM ignores all the
collisions with tolerance smaller than the specified value and alerts when the collision tolerance is
greater than the tolerance specified value.

Collision control between moves

Generally, SolidCAM performs the collision control in the generated tool path positions listed in the
GCode output. The Collision control between moves option enables you to perform the collision
control also between these positions.

12.14.5 Solid verification

SolidCAM enables you to perform the solid verification of the material cutting process in the
SolidVerify mode integrated into the Machine simulation. Using this functionality, you can display
the stock model and perform the simulation by dynamic subtraction of the tool solid model (using
solid Boolean operations) from the stock solid model.

When the Enable verification check box is selected, the solid verification is performed in the
Machine simulation mode.

822
 12. Settings

12.14.6 Environment

This check box enables you to edit the CNC-machine definition in the Machine simulation
environment.

12.15 DNC settings

This option enables you to define the path for the data transmitting software – the DNC program.

823
12.16 Editors settings

This page enables you to specify standard editors

for text files created by SolidCAM.

Editor for GCode files (*.tap)

Specify the Editor to view, open and print generated

GCode files.

Enter the path to a text editor or click

on the Browse button to select an
application on your system.

Select the Multi-document editor option if your

editor supports multi-document mode.

Editor for CAM-Part Documentation (*.doc) files

The documentation for CAM Parts will be generated in text files with the *.doc extension. As the
default editor, the SolidCAM viewer.exe can view and print documentation files. You can, however,
specify any text editor or word processor that can read *.doc files as the standard editor for your
documentation.

Enter the path to a text editor or use Browse to select an application on your system.

Cover page

This option enables you to define the path to the cover page used for the CAM-Part Documentation
(see topic 2.13).

824
 12. Settings

12.17 External program settings

SolidCAM enables you to define a path to an

external program (Windows application or batch
file) that can be loaded from the SolidCAM menu.

During the launch, the external program will receive from SolidCAM the following parameters:

• Full path to the loaded CAM-Part.

• Name of the loaded CAM-Part.

For example, the batch file that was defined as External program contains
the following string: C:\EditNC\EditNC.exe %1\%2.TAP

The CAM-Part C:\SolidCAM2009\User\cavity.prt is loaded.

When you launch the external program, SolidCAM will transfer the name
and path of the CAM-Part to the batch file. Parameters of the batch file will
receive their values and the following command will be executed: C:\EditNC\
EditNC.exe C:\SolidCAM2009\User\cavity.TAP.

825
12.18 Machining Process settings

12.18.1 On MP insertion (for milling only)

Perform auto calculation

Select this check box in case you want the
operations to be calculated automatically after the
Machining Process is inserted into the CAM-Part.
If you select the Ask before calculation check
box, the message is displayed which enables you
to confirm the calculation; if this check box is
cleared, the calculation starts without prior notice.

12.18.2 Operation name in SolidCAM

Manager
The setting of this field defines how the operation
names appear in SolidCAM Manager when a
Machining Process Table is loaded and a Machining
Process is added to the CAM-Part.
When the Show group name check box is selected, the operation
names are preceded with the names of the operation groups and
default sets defined in Machining Process Table Manager.
When this check box is not selected, only the operation names appear
in the SolidCAM Manager tree.
Prismatic part_20-6_finish_wall
Operation Default set Operation
group name name name

12.18.3 Update extra parameters on CNC-controller change

This option enables you to update the extra parameters defined for the operation when the CNC-
controller is changed. Select the Ask before update check box if you want the warning message to
be displayed before the update is started.

826
 12. Settings

12.19 User interface settings

This page enables you to switch between two schemes of the SolidCAM operation interface.

While the first operation interface scheme is

represented by a single-page dialog box, the
other one is a dialog box divided into several
pages, each of them handling a specific set
of parameters (e.g. Geometry, Tool, Levels,
Technology, and so forth). The list on the left
enables you to switch between the parameters
pages.

You may switch between the two interface

schemes by using the corresponding options
on this page. To choose the single-page
interface, click Single-dialog. In this mode,
you can also set a keyboard shortcut for
switching between pages in the multi-page
dialog box; click on the Switch Items Hotkey
box and press a required key or a combination
of keys you want to use as hotkeys for
switching.

Single-page operation interface Multi-page operation interface

827
12.20 CoordSys settings

Create planar surface at Part Lower Level (Zero level)

This option defines the default state of the Create planar surface at Part Lower level option in the
CoordSys Data dialog box (see topic 2.2.7).

828
 12. Settings

12.21 GCode Generation

This page enables you to define the defaults of

the GCode files location and other parameters.
These defaults are applied to every newly created
CAM-Part. If you want to modify these settings
for each Part separately, SolidCAM offers you a
similar page in the Part Settings dialog box (see
topic 2.10.8).

The Save GCode files box offers three options

to define the parameters related to saving of
GCode files:

In the CAM-Part directory

SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files in

the CAM-Part directory. This option is used by
default.

According to the MAC file

SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files according to the parameters defined in the MAC file.

In the GCode directory

SolidCAM saves the generated GCode files in the specified GCode folder location. When the
GCode generation is started, SolidCAM creates a new folder with the CAM-Part name in the
specified GCode directory and saves the GCode files there. If this folder already exists, SolidCAM
uses it for the GCode output.

This group box enables you to define the path for the GCode directory. You can enter the path or
click on the Browse button and choose the destination folder using the Browse For Folder dialog
box.

If you have entered the path to a non-existing folder, the following message
is displayed after the confirmation of the SolidCAM Settings dialog box:

829
 The Create button enables you to create the folder that will be used for
GCode directory in the specified location. The Browse button displays the
browser dialog box that enables you to choose another location that will be
used for the GCode directory.

If the new folder cannot be created, the following message is displayed:

If the chosen folder has the read-only attribute, the following message is
displayed after the confirmation of the Browse dialog box or the SolidCAM
Settings dialog box:

By default, the GCode directory location is not defined. You have to specify it when you choose the
In the GCode directory option for the first time.

Create subfolders for split GCode files

When split marks are detected in SolidCAM Manager during the GCode generation for
the entire CAM-Part, SolidCAM creates a number of GCode segment files. Each such
GCode segment file is created for one or several operations enclosed by split marks.
These files are named with the CAM-Part name followed by the “-” sign and the order
number of split segment.

Split marks are ignored in case of GCode generation for several operations.

With the In the GCode directory option, SolidCAM creates separate CAM-Part GCode
folders in the specified folder location.

When the Create subfolders for split GCode files check box is
selected, SolidCAM creates a separate folder for each GCode
segment file and saves the GCode segments files there. The
folder is created in the GCode folder of the CAM-Part in the
specified GCode folder location. The name of the folder is the
same as the GCode segment file name.

830
 12. Settings

When the Create subfolders for split GCode files check box is
not selected, SolidCAM generates all the GCode segment files
directly into the GCode folder of the CAM-Part in the specified
GCode folder location.

By default, the Create subfolders for split GCode files option

is not selected.

Create separate folders for each CAM-Part

When this check box is selected, SolidCAM creates a folder for each CAM-Part and
saves the GCode file there. Otherwise, the GCode files for all CAM-Parts are generated
into the GCode directory.

Additional control of GCode

When this check box is selected, you can alter the GCode file name and location. When you click
one of the GCode generation commands, the Windows-style Save GCode browser is displayed with
the default CAM-Part name and location that might be edited.

All the GCode files previously generated for the current CAM-Part remain
in the specified folder.

When this check box is not selected, the GCode is generated and automatically saved in the defined
location.

831
GCode generation for the entire CAM-Part

The Erase all previous GCode files check box enables you to choose whether the old GCode files
generated for this CAM-Part remain or are removed when a new one is generated.

This check box is not available if the Create a separate folder for Each CAM-Part
check box is not selected and when the Customize GCode file name check box is
selected.

GCode generation for the entire for separate operations

The Erase all previous GCode files check box enables you to choose whether the old GCode files
generated for separate operations remain or are removed when a new one is generated.

This check box is not available if the Create a separate folder for Each CAM-Part
check box is not selected and when the Customize GCode file name check box is
selected.

832
 12. Settings

12.22 Tool search

The Tool search page enables you to define

the parameters that will be used as search
criteria when the tool search is performed by
tool parameters.

This page contains two sets of tool data for

Milling and Turning tool search. To define
the parameters you want to include in the
search, select the relevant check boxes. The
Select all and Clear all buttons enable you
to select or clear all the check boxes in each
section separately.

12.23 Internal Post-processor

This page enables you to define whether the

GCode will contain the @tool_path_info
output, which is a post-processor command
that includes information about the tool path.
You may choose for which types of machines
this output will appear in the GCode by
selecting the corresponding check boxes.

833
12.24 SolidCAM Manager settings

This page enables you to assign sequential

numbers for items (operations, splits and
fixtures) in the SolidCAM Manager tree.

When the Use automatic numbering of

SolidCAM Manager items check box is
selected, all the items in SolidCAM Manager
are numbered.

When a new item is defined between two existing items, SolidCAM performs renumbering in order
to assign to each item an updated sequential number.

834
 12. Settings

12.25 Template defaults

This page enables you define the default location

of the operation templates and to specify the
default templates used for each new operation.
The content of this page is similar to that of the
Template Defaults page of the Part Settings dialog
box (see topic 2.10.9).

12.26 Miscellaneous settings

This page contains the Enable 3D mouse support

check box that provides the possibility to use
the SpaceNavigator 3D mouse by 3DConnexion
(www.3dconnexion.com).
This device enables you to rotate, pan and zoom
the CAD model at every stage of the CAM-Part
definition. Working with the SpaceNavigator
mouse, you can significantly speed up the geometry
definition process and facilitate viewing the model
and tool path when performing the simulation
of machining in the HostCAD, Rest Material,
SolidVerify, RapidVerify and Machine Simulation
modes.

835
12.27 Tool coolant

This page enables you define the tool coolant

options that will be applicable to the tools
used in the each newly created CAM-Part.

When a check box is selected, the related

coolant option is used.

The coolant options can be edited for each

CAM-Part separately in the Tool coolant page
of the Part Settings dialog box (see topic
2.10.10).

12.28 Gouge check

This page enables you to control the gouge

checking parameters at the system level.

The Check gouges on calculation check box

enables you to define the default state of the
corresponding edit box in the Part Settings
(see topic 2.10.11).

836
GCode 11
This command enables you to generate and display the GCode file for
the CAM-Part or for machining operations. The GCode file can then be
transferred to your CNC-machine using a floppy disk, via the DNC (RS
232) or Ethernet connection.
The format of the NC-program depends on the Controller you selected
in the Milling Part Data dialog box. The GCode output format can be
customized using the GPP interface or by changing the controller’s
*.mac and *.gpp files.

 Generating the GCode

This command enables you to generate and display the GCode file for the CAM-Part or for
machining operations. The GCode file can then be transferred to your CNC-machine using a floppy
disk, via the DNC (RS 232) or Ethernet connection.

The format of the GCode depends on the Controller you selected in the Milling Part Data dialog
box. The GCode output format can be customized either by using the GPP interface or by changing
the controller’s *.mac and *.gpp files. Contact technical support for more information on post-
processor customization.

The GCode files location is determined on the GCode Generation page of the Part Settings dialog
box (see topic 2.10.8).

838
 11. GCode

11.1 Generate

This option generates all the GCode files for the CAM-Part. Then the file is displayed using the text
editor defined in the Editors page of the SolidCAM Settings dialog box.

If any changes were made in the operation or in the *.mac or the *.gpp post-
processor files, you have to generate the GCode again.

• GCode All

This command is available when you right-click on the Operations header. You will
receive one GCode file including the necessary tool changes, unless you have separated
operations or operation groups using split marks. The GCode file will be saved to the
CAM-Part’s directory and will carry the name: <part_name>.tap.
• Generating GCode for a single operation or for a group of operations

1. Click on the operation you want to

generate the GCode for or select a
group of operations using the mouse
in combination with the Shift or Ctrl
key. Then right-click and choose
Generate from the GCode menu.

2. The GCode File Name dialog box prompts you to

enter a name for the *.tap file.

839
11.2 List

This option enables you to display a list of the already generated GCode files for the current CAM-
Part or operation. The GCode (*.tap) file will be opened with the text editor defined in Editors
Settings. Use the editor to change, save or print the GCode file.

11.3 Copy

This option enables you to copy GCode files. When you choose this option, the list of the generated
GCode files for the current CAM-Part is displayed in the Copy GCode dialog box.

1. Choose the *.tap file you want to copy to another directory (for multiple
selections, use the Ctrl or the Shift key).

2. Transfer the list of files you want to copy to the middle field by clicking the
arrow.

3. Choose the drive and the directory you want to copy to.

4. Click on the Copy button in order to execute the command.

11.4 Print

This option enables you to print the GCode file.

840
 Appendix

Appendix

SolidCAM Security Hardware Key

To prevent the unauthorized access to the software, SolidCAM is

using the hardware protection key, the plug-in device that enables
the software authentication. SolidCAM hardware keys are available
both for USB and LPT ports to support both standalone and network
usage.
To view the information about the hardware key you are using, click
SolidCAM and choose Hardware Key Info from the menu.

The Hardware Key Info dialog box is displayed.

Key type

This section displays the type of the key you are using: either standalone or network.

• Standalone hardware key enables you to run SolidCAM only on one computer
where the key is installed.
• Network hardware key enables you to run SolidCAM simultaneously on several
computers connected to a local area network. There are two types of network
hardware keys: non-configurable and configurable. A Non-configurable
hardware key enables you to use the same set of available SolidCAM modules
for all SolidCAM network users. A Configurable hardware key enables you to
choose a specific set of modules for each SolidCAM network user.
Expiration date

This section displays the expiration date of the key.

Additional features

This section lists the additional modules, with which the current key enables you to
work, such as the DNC software.
Modules

The list of CAM modules you can work with using this key.

841
 Host support

The list of CAD hosts supported by this key.

Seats

This section displays the number of computers in the network that share the same
hardware key. In case of Standalone type, the Seats number is always 1.
Version

This section displays the version of SolidCAM supported by this key.

Evaluation

When this check box is selected, most machining modules of SolidCAM supported by
this key are available for working.
Save info

This button enables you to save the information about the key as an *.htm file.

Configurable Network hardware keys

A Configurable hardware key enables you to choose a specific set of modules for each SolidCAM
network user.
When you start SolidCAM, choose
the seat configuration to which
you want to connect. Click on the
corresponding row in the table under
Seat configuration selection. The row
will become green if you connected to
the network successfully or red if the
connection failed; in the latter case the
error message will be displayed.

Seat configuration selection

Available

This column shows the maximal number of users that are licensed to work with the
modules indicated in the same row simultaneously.
Free

This column shows the number of vacant seats.

Hosts supported

The list of CAD hosts supported by this key.

842
 Appendix

Modules

The list of CAM modules you can work with using this key.
Configuration # (optional)

In case you want to know which seat configuration is used on which host, this number
enables you to identify the users that are currently using SolidCAM in the network
with the help of the Aladdin Monitor utility. You can turn on this option in SolidCAM
Settings if needed.
Automatically load this seat configuration

Select this check box if you wish to start SolidCAM always with the chosen
configuration without displaying the Hardware Key Info dialog box. In case of
connection failure the error message will be displayed.

CAM Modules list

M25 2.5D Milling

RM25 Profile/Pocket 2.5D Rest Material and chamfering
SP25 Special Additional 2.5D Mill Options
AFRM Automatic Feature Recognition and Machining module
DrillPocketRecog Pocket and Drill Recognition
M3 3D Milling
HSM High Speed Machining
MI4 4-Axis Indexial Milling
MI5 5-Axis Indexial Milling
MS4 Simultaneous 4-Axis Milling (C-axis)
MS5X-3 HSS
MS5X-4 Sim. 5-Axis module - 4-Axis
MS5X-5 Sim. 5-Axis module - 5-Axis
MSim Machine Simulation
T Turning
T/MT-YC Turn-Mill - XYZC-axes
T/MT-YBC Turn-Mill - XYZCB-axes
BS Back Spindle
W2 WireEDM 2-axes
W4 WireEDM 2/4 axes
DNC WinDNC application for NC data transfer

843
SolidCAM Security Hardware Key Update

In some cases SolidCAM requires the update of security hardware keys. To update the security
hardware key, do the following:

1. Make sure that the SolidCAM security hardware key is connected to the
computer.

2. Extract the ZIP-archive <security hardware key number>.zip supplied by

SolidCAM into the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Util folder

3. Extract the ZIP-archive customer.zip to the same folder.

4. Run the Mak_plag.bat file located in the ..\SolidCAMXXXX\Util folder. It is

recommended to run it with the Command Prompt (Start > Programs >
Accessories) window. When the Command prompt dialog box is displayed
enter the following commands:
Cd <full path for SolidCAM folder>\Util

Mak_plag

By default, the full path for SolidCAM folder is the following:

C:\Program Files\SolidCAMXXXX

5. The message: Hasp Memory updated OK will be displayed.

844
 Index

Index

Symbols
2.5D Milling 301
2D Boundary 58
2D simulation 685
3D Box dialog box 59
3D Drilling Operation 555
3D Engraving Operation 551
3D Milling 483
3D Milling Operation 484
3D Model 58
3D Model Geometry 197
3D simulation 692
4th Axis 296
5 Axis 73, 74
@tool_path_info command 833

A
Add Center Drill 678
Adding a new Parameter 579
Adding an Operation 230
Add Multi-Chain 213
Adjacent passes connection 329, 367
Adjacent tool paths connection 345
Advanced sort 265
Advanced sorting 414
Advanced Technology 264
AFRM 596
Algorithm 650
Angle 159, 530
Angle along path 516
Angle between paths 516
Angle ramping parameters 384
Angular dimensions 151
Approach from outside 370, 405
Approach open pocket from outside 507
Approximation 803
Approximation of arcs 274
Arbor diameter 159
Arc approximation 345, 366, 523, 535
Arc by points 208
Around 4th Axis Drill Geometry 194
Around Profile 377, 508

845
Ask user to find original model if not located 807
Assigning Hole Features to Feature Sets 642
Associativity of Stock and Target models 61
Automatically remove noise from input data 73
Automatic CAM-Part definition 76, 817
Automatic CoordSys Positions definition 643
Automatic optional angle 362
Automatic Sort 288
Automatic Stock model definition 76, 817
Automatic Target model definition 77, 818
Auto next 308
Auto-Save settings 816
Auto Select 209
Auto-to 209
Axis Tolerance 677
Axis type 66, 643

B
Background color 820
Background gradient 820
Ball nose mill 118
Base Geometry 336
Base points of rotation axes 751, 760
Bitangential angle 546
Blind 438
Blind Simple Hol Feature 597
Boolean Operations 226
Bore 137
Boring 435
Box (Auto) 58
Bull nose mill 119

C
CAD selection 193
Calculate operations inside Holes Recognition 678
Calculator 247
CAM-Part Definition 94
CAM-Part Documentation 97
CAM-Part Lower level 52
CAM-Part name 39
CAM-Part Properties 94
CAM-Part structure 40
CAM-Part Upper level 52
Capture Image 99
Ceiling offset 466

846
 Index

Center drill 132, 410

Center of circle 331
Chain Geometries 203
Chains direction 205
Chains direction dialog box 217
Chains selection 215
Chains sorting 218
Chamfer 312, 314, 355, 376, 379, 406
Chamfer drill 135
Chamfer Hole Feature segment 605
Chamfer Length 160
Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 619
Change tool 280, 287
Change tool data 280, 287
Changing Angle 636, 638, 639
Changing Diameter 636, 637, 638, 639
Changing Height 636, 637, 638, 639
Changing Upper Plane 636, 637, 638, 639
Check faces 490
Check gouges during calculation 273
Check synchronization always 806
Check synchronization on user demand 807
Choose STL dialog box 59
Choosing a Technological Solution 649
Choosing the tool 589, 650
Choosing the tool for the Center - Chamfer Drill Operation 654
Choosing the tool for the Center Drill Operation 652
Choosing the tool for the Chamfer Drill Operation 653
Choosing the tool for the Drill Operation 651
Choosing the tool for the Mill Operation 651
Choosing the tool for the Reaming Operation 656
Choosing the tool for the Thread Operation 655
Circular Pocket 531
Circular sorting methods 425
Clean condition 368
Clean contours of flat areas 536
Clean flat 500
Clearance level 52, 258
Clear offset 317, 468
Climb milling 537
Closed chains direction 217
CNC-controller 66, 802
CNC-machine kinematic type 743
Collapse tree 286
Color settings 812
Compare target and machined stock 699, 718
Compatible Hole Features 646

847
Compatible/Incompatible Hole features 645
Compensation 309, 375, 407, 450, 466, 511, 536
Complete Z-level 372, 406, 457, 511
Compound Hole Features 597
Compound Holes processing 606
Compressed CAM-Part 87
Compressed CAM-Part file format 87
Compressed CAM-Part settings 808
Compression factor 809
Condition 650, 667
Cone Hole Feature segment 604
Configurations page 664
Conical fillet 268
Connection type 527, 531, 532, 536
Connect islands 364
Constant depth type 310, 454
Constant step down 534
Constant Step over strategy 540
Constant Z Finish Strategy 533
Constant-Z flat floor machining 538
Constant-Z Tolerance 804
Constant-Z wall machining 534
Constraint 481
Contour 3D Operation 351
Contour style 539
Contour technology 343
Contour type 364
Conventional 537
Conversion to Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 630
Conversion to Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment 628
Conversion to Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 630
Conversion to Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment 629
Conversion to Thread Machinable Hole Feature segment 631
Converting CAM-Parts 88
Coordinate System 41
CoordSys data 52
CoordSys dialog box 42
CoordSys Manager 55
CoordSys settings 828
Copy 279
Copy as Working area 221
Corner 342, 363, 365
Corner Radius 158
Create planar surface at Part Lower level 54, 828
Create separate folders for each CAM-Part 831
Create subfolders for split GCode files 830
Creating Feature Sets 642

848
 Index

Current Configuration 665

Current Stock model method 74
Current Tool Library 142
Curve 205
Curve + Close corners 206
Cut 279
Cut from 470
Cutter tip 445
Cutting angle 679
Cutting area 525
Cutting depth overlap 469
Cutting direction 342, 363, 460, 526, 530, 532, 537
Cutting length 160
Cylindrical/Conical face 43
Cylindrical fillet 269
Cylindrical Hole Feature segment 604

D
Default CNC-controller settings 802
Default GCode numbers 68
Default Geometry Names 814
Default sets 562
Default Sets page 576, 591
Default Tool Data page 161
Define Direction 522
Define Operation Template 572
Define start by angle 535
Defining a new Technological Solution 673
Defining Process Templates 240
Definition of Coordinate Systems 77, 598, 818
Delta 47
Delta depth 258, 444, 456
Depth 375
Depth associativity 259
Depth cutting type 321, 346, 455, 467
Depth Edit dialog box 442
Depth type 310, 445
Descend to cutting level with Rapid 371, 406
Descent Angle 458, 475
Description 578
Diameter 158, 443
Diameter Offset Number 163, 256
Diameter value 445
Direction mode 546
Direction type 530, 531
Directory 39

849
Directory for Machine simulation definition 820
Disconnected Holes processing 607
Distance 594
DNC settings 823
Documentation Editor 97
Dove tail mill 120
Drill 131
Drill cycle type 368, 434, 446, 558
Drill depth 411, 444
Drill Geometry 189
Drill Geometry Selection dialog box 190
Drilling 434
Drilling Operation 409
Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment 619
Drill points 505
Drill Recognition Operation 437
Drive faces 490

E
Each step down 375
Editors Settings 824
Edit page 149
Enable collision control 822
End mill 117
Engagement angle 270
Engraving data for Translated Surface operation 474
Engraving Limit for Translated Surface Operation 479
Engraving technology 552
Engraving tool 125
Environment 823
Equal step down 320, 359
Equal step over 339, 372, 499
Exit material 363, 364
Expand tree 286
Export all tools 155
Export selected tools 155
Expression 577, 578, 581, 668, 669
Extend to edge 545
Extension 306, 342, 345, 369, 405
Extension/Overlap 319, 469
External corner type 268
External program settings 825
External wall angle 267

850
 Index

Face 399
Face mill 121
Face Milling Operation 335
Facet rendering 711
Facet tolerance 57
F_Boring 436
F_Drill 434
Feature Sets 596, 642
Feature Sets page 601, 645
Feed 162, 255
Feed and Speed defaults 184
Fillet 365
Fillet corner 344, 363
Fillet size for last cut 315, 373, 406, 407, 456, 467, 501
Final cuts 265, 406
Find Holes 439
Finish 319, 374, 407, 469, 514
Finish strategies 520
Fixture 298
Flat approach/Flat retreat 452
Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 619
Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment 619
Flip 47
Floor offset 317, 373, 407, 467
Force open pockets as closed 506
Found holes Undo/Redo 439
Full diameter 445
Functions 576

G
Gap control 212
Gap maximum tolerance 804
Gap minimum tolerance 804
GCode 277, 837
GCode button 247
GCode generation 80, 829
GCode output in machine/part coordinates 750
Generating Operations 661
Geometry 187
Geometry Modify dialog box 401
Geometry page 250, 358, 397
Getting Help 36
G (Global) 578
Global TDB 663
Gouge check 273
Gouge check settings 86

851
Group Types 569

H
Hatch 339
Hatch angle 340, 362
Hatch+Finish type 367
Hatch Roughing 513
Hatch style 539
Hatch type 361
Head-Head machine type 743
Head-Table machine type 745
H Length 161
Holder page 165
Hole diameter 438
Hole Feature Groups 607
Hole Feature Model 603
Hole Feature Parameters dialog box 608
Hole Features 596
Hole Feature segments 603
Hole Feature shapes 607
Hole Features page 601, 608
Hole height 439
Holes Recognition Functions 669, 674
Holes Recognition Manager 599, 600
Holes Recognition parameters 668, 671
Holes Recognition Settings 676
Holes Recognition Toolbar 601
Holes Tree 439, 440, 442
Holes type 438
Hole Upper level 439
Host CAD simulation 691
HR Drill Geometry Selection dialog box 438
HR Manager Toolbar 600

I
ID Number 158
Import Tool 154
Include tool data 235, 240
Incompatible Hole Features 646
Indent according to Tools/CoordSys 288
Info 245, 281
Init 293
Inserting The Machining Process 587
Installing SolidCAM 24
Internal Post-processor 833

852
 Index

Interoperational tool movements 71

Interoperational Tool movements 261
Invert Check Status 337
Island offset 373, 407
Island wall angle 267
Item search in SolidCAM Manager 33

K
Keep cutting direction 341, 362
Keep tool down 333, 349, 395

L
Lead in 330, 391, 408, 482
Lead in/out arc 452
Lead out 330, 393, 408, 482
Length 160
Length Offset number 163, 256
Levels page 257, 303, 359, 403, 411
License Manager 29
Light control 690
Limit data for translated surface 476
Limit Geometry 202
Limits 475
Linear finish strategy 520
Linear pattern 414
Linear sorting methods 415
Link page 381, 408, 482
Loading Templates 237
Local TDB 663
Lollipop mill 127
Lollipop mill with conical shoulder 128
Lollipop mill without conical shoulder 127
Loop 344, 365
Loops filter 216
Lower level (Depth) 258
LPT port 29

M
Mac CoordSys number 42
Machinable Hole Feature conversion 625
Machinable Hole Features 596, 619
Machinable Hole Features page 601, 633
Machine CoordSys number 52
Machine simulation 759

853
Machine simulation settings 820
Machining Process 650
Machining Process Define Manager 572
Machining Process Group Types 569
Machining Process Insert Manager 590
Machining Process List 566
Machining Process settings 826
Machining Process Table 562
Machining Process Table Manager 566
Mac Options 65
Major thread diameter 450
Managing CAM-Parts 90
Managing Geometries 220
Managing Hole Features 609
Managing Machinable Hole Feature Segments 633
Managing Machining Processes 571
Managing Machining Process Tables 567
Managing Operation Templates 573
Managing Technology 658
Managing Technology Solutions 659
Managing tools 152
Mark open edges 204
Mark Open Edges dialog box 213
Max Distance between Holes 677
Maximum angle 489
Maximum step down 534
Maximum step over 523, 538
Measurement 701
Milling CAM-Part 38
Milling Part Data dialog box 40
Milling STL CAM-Part 108
Milling type 537
Min. corner radius 365
Minimal clean condition 368
Minimum angle 489
Minimum cut area 539
Minimum step down 534
Minimum step over 524
Min. Overlap 339
Mirror 296
Miscellaneous parameters 272
Model name 39
Model Reference 93
Modify 466
Modify Geometry 305
Modifying Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 638
Modifying Drill Machinable Hole Feature segment 635

854
 Index

Modifying Flat Chamfer Machinable Hole Feature segment 639

Modifying Flat Cylinder Machinable Hole Feature segment 637
Modifying Machinable Hole Feature segments 634
Modify offset 306
MP Picture 566
Multi-Passes 451

N
Nethasp.ini 30
NethaspTCPIP.ini 30
New Milling Part dialog box 39
Normal 523
Normal to current view 46
Number of finishes 319, 469
Number of flutes 161

O
Offset 468
Offset cutting 524
Offset for check faces 491
Offset from model 557
Offset on surface 473
Offsets 316, 346, 354, 373, 407, 466, 514
One pass technology 346
One way 521, 526, 531
Open chains direction 218
Open contour strategy 511, 537
OpenGL rendering 706
Open pockets machining 369, 405, 505
Operating Feature Sets 646
Operation buttons 245
Operation default templates 84
Operation dialog box interface 231
Operation name 233
Operation Points 592
Operations 229
Operation Sequence 284
Operations page 601
Operation Start level 71, 262
Operation templates 560
Operation Templates page 572
Operation Tool Data 254
Operation Transformations 290
Outside Holder Length 160
Overlap 339, 372, 406, 473, 475, 498

855
 P
Parameter 578
Parameters 561, 577
Parameters definition 592
Parameters of Machinable Hole Feature segments 619
Parameters Table 592
Parametric field menu 575
Parametric tool definition 584
Part Clearance level 71, 261
Part Parameters 579
Part settings 70, 679
Paste 279
Peck 435
Pencil milling 545
Permanent Tool 152
Pick center of tool path spiral 530
Pick origin 46
Pick X-direction 46
Pick XY origin 46
Pick Y-direction 47
Pitch 160
Pixel rendering 712
Planar face 43
Planar Hole Feature segment 605
Plunging 514
Plunging pattern 271, 368, 513
Pocket 542
Pocket-auto boundaries 544
Pocket Operation 357
Pocket Recognition Operation 397
Point to point 207
Polar Sort 219
Position 42, 52
Preparation to Holes Recognition 598
Process Template 240
Process type 472
Profile offset 455
Profile Operation 302
Profile/Pocket Geometry 199
Profile with limit 543
Profile with offset 541
Program Number 68

R
Radius 530

856
 Index

Ramping 326, 381, 408

Ramping position 385
RapidVerify control panel 715
RapidVerify simulation mode 715
R_Boring 435
Reamer 136
Reaming 619
Reaming Diameter 607
Reaming Height 607
Reaming recognition 607
Rename operations 279
Renumber Tools 153
Rest material 312, 376, 406, 507
Rest Material calculation tab 74
Rest Material simulation 714
Restore Data from Model 443
Restore Data from Model to All 443
Result value 578
Reverse drilling sequence 558
Reverse tool path 348
R/O 578
Rotate 294
Rotation 53
Rotational axes direction 746
Rotational axes names 749
Rotation around axis 47
Rotation axis limits 754
Rough 318, 458, 468
Roughing 498
Rough tools 150
Ruled Surface 543

S
Safety distance 258
Same as Lead in 332
Save button 245
Save & Calculate button 245
Save & Copy button 247
Saving Templates 235
Saving the updated stock in the STL format 96
Scallop 458, 473, 474, 523, 534, 538
Second offset number 256, 464
Section depth type 458
Section Geometry 201
Section geometry name 472
Segments Union 617

857
Select Faces dialog box 398, 491
Selecting single entities 205
Selection filter 193
Selection Filter 215
Selection mode 700
Self intersections 709
Semi-finish and Finish cycles 458
Separate areas 377, 508
Sequence of drill positions 413, 446, 557
Sequence of thread positions 449
Set CCW 204
Set CW 204
Setting SolidCAM licenses on client computers 30
Shaped tool geometry definition 180
Shaped Tools 138, 177
Shaped Tools dialog box 177
Shaped Tool segments 180
Shape page 167
Sharp Corner 344, 366
Shift 53
Show Data 682
Show/Hide CoordSys in tree 287
Show/Hide Tools in tree 286
Show sorted 558
Show tool 148, 683
Side Step 550
Simple Hole Features 597
Simulate button 246
Simulation 681
Simulation control panel 682
Simulation Controls 684
Simulation Data 682
Simulation menu 703
Simulation toolbar 696
Slot extension 455
Slot Geometry 200
Slot levels 456
Slot Mill 122
Slot Operation 453
Smart 524
Smooth 527, 531, 532
Solid Body 398
SolidCAM Coordinate System 54
SolidCAM Interface 32
SolidCAM License Server 29
SolidCAM Manager settings 834
SolidCAM Network hardware key 29

858
 Index

SolidCAM Network License 29

SolidCAM Security Hardware Key 841
SolidCAM Settings 799
SolidCAM Single License 25
SolidCAM standard functions 248, 582
SolidCAM Template Directory 84
SolidCAM Temporary folder 808
Solid verification 822
SolidVerify for 3D simulation mode 710
SolidVerify for 3D tab 74
SolidVerify simulation 695
SolidVerify tab 72
Solutions page 666
Sort by Distance 218
Sort by Value 218
Sort cut order 348
SpaceNavigator 835
Speed/Feed Default 184
Sphere Hole Feature segment 606
Spin 162, 255
Spindle direction 746
Spiral finish strategy 527
Spline Approximation 202, 212
Split 284
Split Solids 698
Spot drill 134
Stairs 527, 531, 532
Start Angle 451
Start from 365
Start Holes Recognition 599
Starting SolidCAM 31
Start position 308
Stay on surface within gap of 518
Step down 318, 319, 359, 499
Step over 317, 468, 522, 533
Stereolithography file (*.stl) 703
STL file 59
Stock model 57, 58
Stock Splitting 706
Stop on Next 683
Subroutine Number 69
Supported CAD systems 24
Suppress 281, 574
Suppressing linked operations 283
Surface Curvature 550
Surface data for translated surfaces 473
Surface offset 474, 500, 514

859
Synchronization 75, 441
Synchronization check 222, 225
Synchronization of CAM geometry with design model 806
Synchronization of design model with original model 807
Synchronization of the Wireframe 221
Synchronization settings 806
Synchronization tolerance 807
Synchronization when design model configuration changed 807
Synchronizaton of the 3D Model 224
Synchronize 296
System Configuration 664
System requirements 24
System settings 676

T
Table-Table machine type 744
Taper mill 123
Tapping 435
Tap tool 126
Target model 57, 60
Technological Solutions 649
Technology 649
Technology Database 596, 649, 662
Technology Database Manager dialog box 664
Technology page 360, 404, 471, 601, 657
Technology Settings 678
Template 235
Template defaults 84
Thread 604, 619
Thread data 450
Thread diameter 159
Threading depth definition 448
Thread mill 129
Thread Milling operation 447
Thread taper 131
Through 438
Through Pocket Chain 399
Through Simple Hole Feature 597
Tip Diameter 159
Tolerance 549
Tolerance page 554
Tool Change XY 64
Tool Change Z 64
Tool Coolant page 166
Tool coolant settings 86
Tool Curvature 550

860
 Index

Tool data 156

Tool facet tolerance 72
Tool facet type 72
Tool Holder 169
Tool Holder Geometry definition 173
Tool Holders dialog box 169
Tool Holding system 169
Tool Libraries 140
Tool Material 161, 254
Tool Message page 164
Tool Number 157
Tool on working area 493
Tool options 63
Tool page 252, 409
Tool path arrangement 517
Tool path connections 526, 530, 544
Tool path coordinates 820
Tool path simulation 79
Tool path simulation settings 819
Tool path tolerance 550
Tool path trimming 496
Tool Range 147
Tool reference 352
Tools 115
Tool search 833
Tool search in Operation Templates 238
Tool Settings 810
Tools Filter 146
Tool sheet documentation 99
Tool side 304, 305, 351, 455, 465, 475
Tool start level 52
Tool Table dialog box 146
Tool Topology 157
Tool Type 116
Tool Type options 139
Tool units 150
Tool Z Level 53
Topology settings 676
Torus Hole Feature segment 605
Total depth 375
Total Length 160
Translate 295
Translated Surface Operation 471
Translation axis limits 752
Trim rounding 489
Trochoidal milling 269
T-Slot Operation 463

861
 U
Undercut – Chamfer 614
Undercut – Cone 613
Undercut – None 613
Undercut – Planar 613
Undercut processing 613
Undercut – Sphere 614
Undercut substitution 614
Undercut – Torus 614
Units Settings 803
Unsuppress 281, 574
Unused Parameters Table 578
Updated Stock model 699, 701, 718
Updated Stock Model calculation 487
Updated Stock Model interchangeability 488
Update stock accuracy 72, 74
Update Stock calculation 72
Update stock model method 73
Update to Machine tool table 155
Upper level 258, 443
USB port 29
Use base points of rotation axes 758
Use Chamfer 412
Used in Current or Part Table 584
Used in MP 585
Used Parameters Table 577
Use H Length 755
use_part_shifting 756
Use profile strategy 370, 405
User Configuration 664
User-defined angle 362
User-defined parameters 579, 668, 671
User Directories Settings 801
User interface settings 827
use_rot_axis_base_point1 758
use_rot_axis_base_point2 758
Use shifting 756
use_tool_h_length 755
Using Shaped tools 182
Using the Machining processes 586

V
Variable (Define) 311
Variables 670
Variables & expressions 579

862
 Index

Variable step down 534

VerifyPlus simulation 687
Vertical Wall with fillets 512
View 149

W
Wall draft angle 266, 406
Wall finish 374, 407
Wall offset 316, 373, 407, 466, 468
Wireframe Geometry 199
Working area 484
Working Area 200
Working area definition via angle limits 488
Working area definition via Face selection 490
Working area definition via Geometry 485
Working area definition via Rest material 486
Working with Operations 275
Work Material 65

Z
Z-Entry 501, 515
Z-Entry angle 473
Zigzag 521, 526, 530
Z-value 594

863
Document Number: SCMUGENG09001
864